Tutorial of CF Design

users guide
cfdesign v10
Upfront CFD
Copyright (C) Blue Ridge Numerics, Inc. 1992-2009
Copyright
The CFdesign product is copyrighted and all rights are reserved by
Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated.
Copyright (c) 1992-2009 Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated. All
Rights Reserved.
The distribution and sale of CFdesign is intended for the use of the
original purchaser only and for use only on the computer system
specified at the time of the sale. CFdesign may be used only under
the provisions of the accompanying license agreement.
The CFdesign Users Guide may not be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine
readable form in whole or part without prior written consent from
Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated. Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated makes no warranty that CFdesign is free from errors or
defects and assumes no liability for the program. Blue Ridge
Numerics, Incorporated disclaims any express warranty or fitness
for any intended use or purpose. You are legally accountable for
any violation of the License Agreement or of copyright or trademark. You have no rights to alter the software or printed materials.
The development of CFdesign is ongoing. The program is constantly
being modified and checked and any known errors should be
reported to Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated.
Information in this document is for information purposes only and
is subject to change without notice. The contents of this manual do
not construe a commitment by BRNI.
Portions of this software and related documentation are derived
from and are copyrighted by Symmetrix and Ceetron.
All brand and product names are trademarks of their respective
owners.
Rev 20090527
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.2
Overview of Upfront CFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1.3
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1.4
Product Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
1.5
Starting CFdesign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
1.6
The Basic Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1.7
CFdesign File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
1.8
Migrating from v9 to v10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
1.9
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16
CHAPTER 2
The User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.2
The Basic Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.3
Tool Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2.4
Output Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
2.5
Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
2.6
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
2.7
Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
2.8
Project Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
2.9
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
2.10 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
2.11 Mouse Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
2.12 Entity Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
2.13 Entity Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
2.14 Feature Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-36
2.15 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
2.16 Task Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-45
2.17 Property Table Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
2.18 Additional Parameters (Flags File) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-56
CFdesign Users Guide
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 3
CAD Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2
CAD Environment Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3
CAD Model Data Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
Flow Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.5
Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6
Wildfire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.7
Parasolid and Acis Based CAD Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.8
CATIA V5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.9
Lost List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3-4
3.10 Third Party Mesh Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
CHAPTER 4
Geometry Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2
Geometry Tools Within the Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3
CAD and Model Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4
Edge Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.5
Small Object Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.6
Void Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.7
External Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.8
The Undo Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.9
Portability of Geometry Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-3
4.10 Geometry Tools in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
CHAPTER 5
ii
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2
Boundary Conditions Task Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.3
Surface Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.4
Volumetric Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5
Transient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.6
Physical Boundary Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.7
Graphical Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Table of Contents
5.8
Feature Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
5.9
Initial Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
CHAPTER 6
Mesh Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.2
Geometry Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6.3
Fully Automatic Mesh Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
6.4
Automatic/Interactive Mesh Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
6.5
Size Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
6.6
Refinement Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
6.7
Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
6.8
Geometric Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38
6.9
Advanced Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
6.10 Manual Application of Mesh Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
6.11 Graphical Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
6.12 Mesh Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47
6.13 Generating the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
6.14 Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51
CHAPTER 7
Materials and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.2
The Materials Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7.3
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
7.4
Solids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-19
7.5
Surface Parts (Shells). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-24
7.6
Resistances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-35
7.7
Internal Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-51
7.8
Centrifugal Pump/Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-59
7.9
Check Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-65
7.10 Rotating Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-67
7.11 Compact Thermal Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-73
7.12 Printed Circuit Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-79
iii
Table of Contents
7.13 Thermoelectric Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

7.14 Graphical Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
7.15 Feature Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
CHAPTER 8
Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3
Linear Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.4
Angular Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.5
Combined Linear/Angular Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8.6
Combined Orbital/Rotational Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.7
Nutating Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
8.8
Sliding Vane Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8.9
Free Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
CHAPTER 9
Analyze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2
Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.3
Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9.4
Message Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.5
Solution Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9.6
Result Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9.7
Convergence Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
CHAPTER 10
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.2 Convergence Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Monitor Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.4 Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.5 Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.6 Animate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.7 Report Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
iv
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 11
Results Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11.2 Results-Specific Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
11.3 Feature Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6
11.4 Entity Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-8
11.5 Results Probing on Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-9
11.6 Color Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-9
11.7 Global Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-10
11.8 Cutting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-13
11.9 Cutting Plane - Particle Trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-25
11.10Cutting Plane - Bulk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-33
11.11Cutting Surface - XY Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-34
11.12Iso Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-38
11.13Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-39
11.14Dynamic Images: Design Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-42
11.15Design Review Center (DRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-47
CHAPTER 12
Results to FEA Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12.3 FEA Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3
12.4 Transfer of Multiple Time Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-6
CHAPTER 13
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13.2 Definitions and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13.3 Assembling a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-2
13.4 Managing Analyses in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-5
13.5 Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-8
13.6 Design Review Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-12
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 14
Analysis Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1
14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.2 Incompressible Flows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3 Basic Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.4 Porous Media (Distributed Resistance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14.5 Multiple Fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14.6 Boundary Layer Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
14.7 Periodic Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
14.8 Transient Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
14.9 Height of Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14.10Mixing using the Scalar Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
14.11Moist/Humid Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
14.12Steam/Water Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
14.13Cavitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
14.14Radiation Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39
14.15Solar Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-55
14.16Compressible Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-61
14.17Joule Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-68
14.18Motion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-70
14.19Rotating Regions: Turbomachinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-72
14.20Moving Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-81
CHAPTER 15
Computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-1
15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

15.2 CFdesign Client-Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.3 Fast Track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
15.4 Analysis Queue (Batch Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
15.5 High Performance Computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
vi
CHAPTE R 1
1.1
Getting Started
Introduction
Congratulations and thank you for choosing CFdesign as your Upfront CFD Solution!
CFdesign 10 represents a major step forward for all engineers responsible for products that incorporate fluid flow and heat transfer. CFdesign is a design tool, and
incorporates many features that make flow analysis a valuable and practical part of
the product design process.
CFdesign has been developed from day one for multi-faceted product development
teams using MCAD tools such as Pro/Engineer Wildfire, Autodesk Inventor, Solid
Works, CATIA, Solid Edge, Unigraphics, One Space Designer, SpaceClaim, and
many others. Powered by proprietary numerical techniques and leading-edge computational methods, CFdesign features a true associative relationship with components and assemblies, and automatically applies the optimal mesh required for
accurate fluid and thermal simulations.
The principal benefits of CFdesign are:
A Tool for the People
No specialist skills are required

Collaborative software leveraged by an entire team
Process Continuity
CFdesign fits into existing MCAD-driven workflow
Overhead Reduction
Department-level expenses decrease

Notable savings in staff time, materials, and need for
outside services
Innovation Gateway
Allows rapid exploration of new ideas

Promotes better understanding of produce performance
1-1
Getting Started
1.2
Overview of Upfront CFD
CFdesign is built upon the Upfront CFD Solution Platform:
There are six fundamental pillars of Upfront CFD, each shown as a separate item in
the graphic. Each pillar represents a part in the process of performing a CFD analysis. The most significant aspect of this concept is that the process is repeatable-multiple design iterations can be analyzed, compared, and communicated with
those in the design chain efficiently and effectively. Each pillar is described in more
detail below:
CAD Integration
Starting in the CAD system of your choice, the component or assembly model you
build is all CFdesign needs to deliver a reliable fluid flow and heat transfer simulation. A direct link to the major geometry engines eliminates the need for IGES,
STEP, or STL. Make a change to the model in your CAD system, and the change will
be a part of the CFdesign analysis.
1-2
Getting Started
Mesh Generation
Tools such as Shell surfaces allow significant reduction in overall mesh sizes by
allowing the inclusion of solid surfaces within three dimensional volumes. Mesh
Enhancement automatically refines the mesh to focus nodes and elements in areas
of high physical gradients. Finally, new technology has been developed to mesh
large assemblies more efficiently, using less computational resources.
Simulation Scope
CFdesign solves the mathematical equations which represent heat and momentum
transfer in a moving fluid. The finite element method is used to discretize the flow
domain, thereby transforming the governing partial differential equations into a set
of algebraic equations whose solution represent an approximation to the exact (and
most often unattainable) analytical solution. The numerical formulation is derived
from the SIMPLER solution scheme introduced by Patanker1. More detail is available
in the Technical Reference.
The influence of Fluid-Structure Interaction is a very significant element in many
mechanical devices. The CFdesign Motion Module brings this capability to the world
of product design as a key element of Upfront CFD. Through simulation, this Module
allows understanding the interaction between fluids and moving solids to be integral to the product design process.
The flow analysis is often just the beginning in many analysis-design projects.
Results from CFdesign can be applied as structural boundary conditions for subsequent analysis with many popular FEA packages. Aerodynamic and hydrodynamicinduced pressures as well as temperatures can be interpolated directly onto the FEA
1. Patankar, S.V., Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Hemisphere Publishing,
New York, 1980
1-3
Getting Started
CFdesign employs finite element mesh generation with numerous intelligent algorithms to make the process automatic and transparent. By using automatic,
unstructured meshing, CFdesign quickly meshes complicated (real world) geometry
without forcing the user to become an expert in the application of mesh generation
tools. Assignment of the mesh distribution to geometry is virtually automatic, and
is based on a highly detailed geometric interrogation of the geometry.
Getting Started
mesh. This very powerful capability completes the analysis circle, and is a major
integrating factor of CFdesign into the Design Supply Chain.
Simulation Speed
The intuitive user interface in CFdesign makes setting up the simulation very easy.
Using engineering language, the user simply applies the material and operating
conditions that are needed. Combined with many intelligent algorithms, analysis
set-up is fast and easy for users with no CFD experience.
In many design situations, running many what if scenarios is the key to the optimal design. Because of time constraints, a single license often just wont get the
job done. With the Fast Track Option, our on-demand licensing plan, engineering
groups can temporarily ramp up their analysis capability in order to get the job
done quickly. Unlike an ASP or main frame scheme, this system allows engineering groups to utilize in-house computer resources without having to send out proprietary data over the internet.
Additionally, CFdesign for High Performance Computing uses shared and distributed
memory computing technologies to increase analysis speed. This is a true distributed model, and leverages both shared memory (multiple-core machines) and distributed networks, using MPI.
More information is presented in Chapter 15 of this guide.
Design Review
Results are displayed at every step of the calculation. The user can interact with the
model, and view results real-time using cutting planes, iso surfaces, xy plots, and
particle traces.
Because CFdesign is a design tool, it is very important that results from multiple
analyses be viewed, compared, and contrasted easily. The Design Review Center
makes it easy to get a true apples-to-apples comparison between all of the analyses in your project.
1-4
Getting Started
Project Collaboration
1.3
Documentation
There are three books that make up the CFdesign documentation. They are:
Book
Description
Users Guide
The fundamentals. Discusses geometry requirements, the user interface, and analysis techniques
Examples Guide
Tutorial models in a step-by-step format.

Most facets of using CFdesign are covered.
Technical Reference
Verification models, underlying theory, and Scripting language
This book, the Users Guide, contains the following chapters:

Chapter
Description
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introductory information
Chapter 2: User Interface
A detailed discussion of the User Interface
Chapter 3: CAD Connection
CAD attributes, launch methods, and basic

geometry requirements
Chapter 4: Geometry Tools
Tools for preparing the geometry for analysis
Chapter 5: Loads
Boundary Conditions and Initial Conditions
Chapter 6: Mesh Sizes
Mesh sizes and guidelines
Chapter 7: Materials
Creating and Assigning materials
Chapter 8: Motion
Creating and Assigning solid-body motion
Chapter 9: Analysis Options
Flow parameters and running the analysis,
1-5
Getting Started
Sharing results with other members of the design supply chain is easy using the
Dynamic Image, a part of the Design Communication Center. Using our free plug
in, interactive images can be viewed in PowerPoint and Internet Explorer. The person viewing a Dynamic Image can pan, zoom, and rotate the model, to see your
results from every angle.
Getting Started
Chapter
Description
Chapter 10: Review
Assessing convergence, animation, Report

Generation
Chapter 11: Results Visualization
Results Visualization tools; Dynamic Images
Chapter 12: Results to FEA

Loads
How to map CFdesign results to loads for FEA

analyses
Chapter 13: Projects
Using projects for setting up multiple analyses; Visualizing results on projects using the
Design Review Center
Chapter 14: Analysis Guidelines
Application-specific information
Chapter 15: Computing
Client-Server model, Fast Track, and High

Performance Computing
1.4
Product Configurations
CFdesign Solver comes in three different functionality configurations: Basic,

Advanced, and Motion.
Basic Solver Features
Incompressible and Subsonic
Advanced Features
Motion Features
Full compressible
Rotating machinery
Scalar models
(general scalar, steam/
water, moist air, volume filling)
Moving objects: Linear,

angular, combined linear/angular, orbital,
nutating, and sliding
vane motion
Turbulent flow
Transient
Flow-induced Motion
Heat Transfer
Radiation
Free Motion with automatic collision detection
Compressible
Laminar flow
(conduction and convection)

Steady State
1-6
Joule Heating
Getting Started
Basic Solver Features
Advanced Features
Motion Features
Solar Heating
1.5
Starting CFdesign
Direct launchers for Pro/Engineer, Inventor, Solid Works, CATIA v5, Solid Edge,
UGNX, One Space Designer, and SpaceClaim are included in the CFdesign installation. Additionally, a new analysis can be created from a Parasolid or Acis file by
launching CFdesign from the Desktop or Start Menu. The details of how to use each
launcher are discussed in the following table:
Pro/Engineer
Click Applications_CFdesign
Autodesk
Inventor
Click Tools_InventorCFdesign_Launch CFdesign
Solid Works
Click the CFdesign icon in the Solid Works Toolbar:
CATIA V5
Click the CFdesign icon in the CATIA Toolbar:
Solid Edge
Click the CFdesign icon in the Solid Edge Toolbar:
UGNX
Analysis_Launch CFdesign 10.0:
Co-Create One
Space
Designer
Click Tools_Toolbox_CFdesign Launcher

A dialog will appear containing two modes:
Selection Mode: Solid parts and assemblies
must be selected to be exported. Note that face
parts and wire parts will not be launched to CFdesign.
As Displayed Mode: All solid parts in the
selected viewports drawlist will be exported.
1-7
Getting Started
Cavitation
Getting Started
SpaceClaim
Click the CFdesign icon in the CFdesign tab:
Parasolid
(.x_t) or Acis
(.sat) file
Start CFdesign from the Desktop using the

CFdesign shortcut icon:
1.5.1
New Analysis
A new analysis is always created from geometry.
1.5.1.1
CAD Launch
When CFdesign is launched from a CAD system, the following dialog will prompt for
an analysis name:
The analysis name can (and often should) be different from the CAD part or assembly name. The reason is to allow multiple analyses based on the same CAD model
to co-exist in the same directory and not overwrite each other, even though the
geometry has changed from one analysis to the next.
1-8
Getting Started
Note that additional detail about launching from CAD tools is provided in the CAD
Connection chapter of this guide.
Geometry File
Getting Started
1.5.1.2
When CFdesign is launched from the Desktop to create a new analysis from
an existing Parasolid, Acis, or Wildfire file, click the New icon in the CFdesign Toolbar:
The following dialog will open:
Make sure the Analysis bullet is selected. Select the desired geometry file (its name
will appear in the File Name field after it is picked), and enter an analysis name in
the Analysis Name field. Click Open.
1-9
Getting Started
1.5.2
Existing Analysis
Existing analyses are opened using the Open icon in the toolbar:
The file extension for an existing analysis is .cfd. Make sure the Analysis bullet is
selected near the bottom of the dialog box.
The only time it is required to open an existing analysis from the CAD system is if
the geometry is from CATIA or Wildfire and the Mechanica launch method is used,
and a new mesh is to be built. Otherwise, it is better to open existing analyses by
starting CFdesign from the Desktop or Start menu, hitting the Open icon, and
selecting the desired .cfd file.
Note that if an existing analysis is launched from the CAD system and run, a new
mesh will be generated, even if the mesh definition is not changed.
1.5.3
Projects
A project is a collection of analyses--in the same way an assembly is a collection of

parts in most CAD tools. Projects have two primary functions: to facilitate model
set up for similar analyses and to facilitate post-processing of similar analyses. Both
functions are described in Chapter 13 of this Guide.
1-10
Getting Started
Note: An analysis is ALWAYS created from geometry--when CFdesign is launched

from a CAD tool, an analysis is always either created or opened. It is not possible to
launch from CAD (or a Parasolid or Acis file) directly into a project.
Getting Started
A project can, however, be created or opened from within an open analysis

(thereby making the analysis a member of the project):
(1) CAD
(2) Analysis
(3) Project
The opposite is also possible: an existing analysis can be imported into an open
project.
Project
Analysis
Additionally, a project can be created or opened outside of an analysis by starting

CFdesign and hitting the New or Open icon, respectively, and selecting Project.
More information is presented in the Projects chapter of this guide.
1.6
The Basic Process
This section briefly summarizes the process of setting up, running, and visualizing
results with CFdesign. After the analysis is created and named, the following general steps must be taken:
1. Confirm that the Length Units are correct on the Length Units tool bar. (Note
that if launching from Wildfire, SolidWorks, or Inventor, the units are read from the
model and are automatically set.)
2. If necessary, repair the geometry using the Geometry Tools. These tools can
also be used to fill an internal void or build a surrounding volume.
3. Using the Boundary Conditions task dialog, apply boundary conditions. If
necessary, apply initial conditions in the Initial Conditions task dialog.
4. In the Mesh task dialog, click the Automatic Size button to apply mesh distributions to the model. Construct refinement regions if needed for greater local mesh
density.
1-11
Getting Started
5. Switch to the Materials task dialog, and apply materials to all parts in the
model. If necessary, create custom materials and add them to the Materials Database. Note that some materials may already be applied from the CAD model if Settings Rules were created.
6. If the analysis is to include moving solids, switch to the Motion task dialog, and
create and assign the motion parameters.
7. In the Analyze task dialog, specify the physical models. Input the number of
iterations to run and the Results Save Interval. Hit GO to start the analysis.
8. During the analysis, switch to the Results task dialog to view the results as
they are calculated. Use the Convergence Monitor to keep an eye on the solution
progress.
9. When the analysis is finished, use the Review task dialog to assess the final
convergence and to check output messages.
10. Switch to the Results task dialog to view the results. Share results using the
Design Communication Center.
11. Optional: add the analysis to a new or existing project. Return to the CAD system and modify the geometry. Launch back into CFdesign, and create a new analysis. Place this analysis into the project. Transfer the settings from the first analysis
to this one, and run it. Compare the results in the Design Review Center.
While this may seem like a lot of steps, the User Interface is designed to provide
guidance through each, in the proper order. A separate icon controls each task dialog, and these icons are arranged vertically on the side of the User Interface. By
simply starting at the top-most icon and working down, each task is performed easily and logically.
1.7
CFdesign File Types
Here is a list of files saved for each CFdesign analysis:

Extension
1-12
Description
cfd
The analysis file. All settings, results, and analysis parameters

are stored in this file. Parasolid and Acis based geometries are
included in this file.
cts
Component thermal summary. Lists average, maximum, and

minimum temperatures for every part in the model.
Getting Started
Extension
Description
Report template information. Stores report layout and content
info for each analysis. (Reports are modified using the Report dialog on the Review task.)
res.s#
Results file. Binary file containing raw results data from iteration
#. This file does not have to be in the working directory to view
results, but is required to continue an analysis.
set
Setting file. Contains all of the settings applied within an analysis

model.
sol
Solver file. Contains convergence data for each degree of freedom for each iteration.
st
Status file. Contains a record of the analysis process and error

and warning messages, if a problem occurs. Lists residual values
for each iteration.
sum
Summary file. Contains quantitative information about the analysis.
smh
Summary history file. This contains all of the summary files from
all re-starts.
_gcp.bmp
Bitmap file of Summary Convergence data. Automatically created

for use by the Report Generator.
_mi.vtf
Model Image file: Dynamic image of analysis model. Automatically created for use by the Report Generator.
_s.cfd
Support file: Automatically created copy of the cfd file containing

only settings and geometry (parasolid and acis). Does not contain
mesh or results. Useful as a way to share analysis with other
team members or with Technical Support.
_partname
_motion.cs
v
Motion Summary File: Generated for Motion analyses. Contains a

time-summary of the forces, displacements, and velocities of
moving solids.
1-13
Getting Started
dccrt
Getting Started
There are several log files generated to assist troubleshooting problems. These
files are included in a sub-folder of the analysis folder called jobname_logs:
Extension
cfdesign.log
Description
Basic record of the licensing, communication, and analysis
steps performed by CFdesign.
_mesh.log
Record of mesh generation steps. Good file to examine if meshing problems occur.
_client.log
Describes communications and actions performed before, during, and after an analysis.
_model.log
Lists status of geometry import and error messages. Good file

to examine if problems occur when reading geometry into
CFdesign.
_solver.log
Describes communications and actions performed before, during, and after an analysis by the Solver.
_mesher.log
Describes communications between the Mesher and the Interface and actions performed between the Mesher.
Some additional files of interest:

Extension
pjt
mdb
Description
Project file. This lists the analyses in a project.
Material database file. Can be modified and placed in a location of
choice. Use File_Preferences to indicate default location.
vtf
Dynamic image file
vus
View settings file
1.8
Migrating from v9 to v10
To migrate a v9 analysis, simply open it with v10. The settings should migrate into
the v10 format. Any settings that were lost due to changes in the Parasolid or Acis
kernels will be listed in the Show Lost dialog.
After a v9 analysis has been opened in v10, it is considered a v10 analysis. This
means that results can be visualized and the simulation can be continued. When
1-14
Getting Started
the analysis is run, the mesh will be regenerated, and the results will be transferred
onto the new mesh. The Convergence Monitor will also be reset. For best results,
we recommend that v9 analyses be saved from the latest version of v9.
Note that mesh size refinements made to edges (for Automatic and Manual mesh
sizing) will not be present when the model is opened in v10. Mesh size refinements
for volumes and surfaces will be included when opened in v10.
Inventor and SolidWorks-based analyses from v9 should be launched from Inventor
or SolidWorks, respectively, into v10. This will ensure that all settings are properly
retained.
Wildfire-based analyses from v9 should be launched from Wildfire into v10. Note
that it is important to select Mechanica as the Launcher Configuration on the
AutoPrep Wildfire Launch tool, as shown below. Otherwise the settings from the
analysis will be lost.
A tool for importing material databases has been developed in v10. This is found
under the File menu, and provides a simple mechanism for migrating the v9 mateCFdesign Users Guide
1-15
Getting Started
Motion analyses from v9 cannot be continued in v10. Such analyses must be

started from iteration 0. The reason is that several of the internal settings of a
motion analysis depend on the node and element count. These will likely change
after the mesh is regenerated during the migration process (as described above),
rendering the existing motion analysis invalid.
Getting Started
rial database into the current v10 database. This is discussed in more detail in the
Materials Chapter of this manual.
1.9
Contact Information
For those customers that have purchased CFdesign directly from Blue Ridge
Numerics in the United States and Canada, please contact us for support and
licensing using:
Target
Number or Address
Phone Support
434.977.2764 (Support = Option 3)
Fax Number
434.977.2714
Support e-mail
support@cfdesign.com
License Request
licensing@cfdesign.com
Sales e-mail
info@cfdesign.com
web site
http://www.cfdesign.com
ftp site
ftp://ftp.cfdesign.com
Customer Portal
https://customerportal.cfdesign.com
Numerics in Europe, please contact us for support and licensing using:
Target
Number or Address
Sales Phone
+44 (0) 1628 501 570 (Option 1)
Support Phone
+44 (0) 1628 501 570 (Option 2)
Admin Phone
+44 (0) 1628 501 570 (Option 3)
Fax Number
+44 (0) 1628 826 768
European Support e-mail
eu.support@cfdesign.com
UK Support e-mail
uk.support@cfdesign.com
French Support e-mail
fr.support@cfdesign.com
German Support e-mail
DEsupport@cfdesign.com
License Request
eu.licensing@cfdesign.com
1-16
Getting Started
Number or Address
Sales e-mail
eu.sales@cfdesign.com
web site
ftp site
Customer Portal
Getting Started
Target
Numerics in Asia, please contact us for support and licensing using:
Target
Number or Address
Phone Support
+1 434.977.2764 (Support = Option 3)
Fax Number
+1 434.977.2714
Support e-mail
asia.support@cfdesign.com
License Request
asia.licensing@cfdesign.com
Sales e-mail
info@cfdesign.com
web site
ftp site
Customer Portal
Blue Ridge Numerics also has a strong Distribution Partner network throughout
Europe and Asia. If you purchased CFdesign through a Distribution Partner, please
contact that partner directly for support and licensing.
1-17
Getting Started
1-18
CHAPTE R 2
2.1
The User Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to use the CFdesign User Interface. Details about customization, the tool buttons, the feature tree and dialog regions, as well as entity
selection and groups are discussed. Specific details about setting up, running, and
visualizing an analysis are discussed in later chapters.
2.2
The Basic Layout
Menu Region
Toolbars
Units Selection
Task Icons
Control Bar
(Task Dialogs)
Graphics Window
Output Bar
Status Bar
2-1
The User Interface
The model is shown in the Graphics Window. The background color can be changed
using the Background Color tool button (described in the next section).
The Menu region contains several menus that control file manipulation, window
appearance, model display, projects, and tools for getting Help.
There are six tool bars: The File Tool Bar controls file manipulation activities--Creating, Opening, and Saving files. The View Tool Bar controls the display of the
interface and the model. The Window Tool Bar controls the number of views that
are displayed. The Help Tool Bar contains tools for getting assistance. The Units
Tool Bar is where the analysis units are set. The Task Tool Bar controls which task
dialog shows in the Task Dialog Region.
The Control Bar contains the Task Dialogs. These are the dialogs for setting up and
running the analysis, viewing the feature tree, modifying the geometry, and viewing results.
The Output Bar provides a convenient method to communicate errors, start-up
notes, and the Convergence Monitor. The Output bar is divided into three tabs: the
Message Window, Convergence Plot, and the Design Review Center.
The Status Bar, located along the lower edge of the Interface, displays messages
about meshing progress as well as result values obtained by probing on surfaces
and cutting surfaces (while in the Results task).
2.3
Tool Bars
This section describes the tool bar icons in the File, View, Window, and Help toolbars. Additional buttons appear when Results are displayed, and are discussed in
the Results Visualization Chapter (11).
File Toolbar
2-2
View Toolbar
Window
Help
The User Interface
2.3.1
File Toolbar
New: Create a new analysis or project.
Open: Open an existing analysis or project.

Open View Settings: Open a view settings file. (This is accessible when model results are displayed.)
Save Image: Saves several standard format image files (.gif, .tif,
.bmp, .jpg)
Save Dynamic Image: Saves a Dynamic Image (.vtf) for use
with the Design Communication Center. It can also be viewed in
PowerPoint or Internet Explorer. Unlike a traditional image, this
format is navigable, and can contain animation.
Save View Settings: Saves a results view settings file for future
use.
Print: Opens a dialog that allows specification of print settings,
and then prints the contents of the Graphics window.
2.3.2
View Toolbar
Previous (view) and Next (view): Undo and redo of orientation,
zoom, and position of model.
View as Shaded: The model is shown filled.
View as Outline: The model is shown as an outline.
2-3
User Interface
Save: Saves the current analysis file. If a project is open, saves

the project and all analyses.
The User Interface
View as Transparent: The model is shown transparent.
View Mesh as Wireframe: Displays the mesh with surfaces shown

as outlines. (Only active in Results mode.)
View Mesh as Shaded: Displays the mesh with surfaces shaded.
(Only active in Results mode.)
Peel by Surface: Toggles between surface and volume blanking in
Results Visualization.
Center of Rotation: Opens the Rotation point Control dialog, which
is useful for changing the center of rotation of the model. While this
dialog is open, a sphere is drawn on the model to graphically indicate
the center of rotation.
Reset View: The model is returned to its default orientation.
Modify Z-Clip Settings (and Crinkle Cut): Opens the Z-Clip dialog.
Use the slider bars to clip into the model. Parts of the model that are
between the plane and the user are made invisible. The following is
an example of a clipping plane:
Crinkle Cut is a way to view the mesh inside the model, and is available in Results Viewing.
2-4
The User Interface
Standard Views and Incremental Rotation: This icon launches

the Standard Views dialog for setting standard orientations and rotation in discrete increments about the screen axes.
The drop-down choices provide a quick way to orient the model without using the dialog.
Toggle Coordinate Axis and Number of Increments: When

enabled, the model coordinate axis and the axis bounding box are
displayed. The number of increments is controlled with the spin box.
Zoom to Fit: This rescales the model to fit entirely in the Graphics
window. The orientation is preserved, and the model is centered.
Mirror: Opens a dialog to enable mirroring about a selected plane.
(Only available in Results mode.)
Note: the five view controls (shaded, outline, transparent, wireframe mesh, and
shaded mesh) are each separate modes.
2-5
User Interface
One-Time Zoom: After clicking this icon, hold down the left mouse
button and drag a box around the region to zoom. Release the button when finished dragging. The icon must be clicked again for
another zoom.
The User Interface
2.3.3
Window Toolbar
Single View: One view of the model is displayed in the Graphics
window.
Split Vertical View: The Graphics window is split vertically, showing two views of the model side by side.
Split Horizontal View: The Graphics window is split horizontally,
showing two views of the model, one above and below.
Four Views: The Graphics window is split into four regions,
enabling four different displays of the model.
2.3.4
Help Toolbar
Index: Opens the Users Manual in Adobe Acrobat Reader.
About CFdesign: Brings up a dialog showing the build number
and version.
2.3.5
Units Toolbar
When an analysis is created, the default units system will be meters unless either of
the following conditions are met:
The default had been changed using File_Preferences_User Interface.
The model was launched from Pro/E, Inventor, or Solid Works. (The
length units are read from these CAD systems and applied automatically.)
If the model was created by launching from another CAD system or by opening the
geometry file directly, then it may be necessary to convert the length units. This is
done by selecting the desired system from the Length Units menu:
2-6
The User Interface
For Pro/Engineer and CATIA v5 geometries, changing the units system only
changes the analysis length unit--it does not change any dimensions in the model.
For geometries originating in other CAD systems that are Parasolid or Acis based,
changing the units system will open a dialog that contains two choices: Scale
Model Also and Change Length Units Only.
Change Length Units Only will only change the units, and not convert any dimensions. If the model originated in meters and had a one meter diameter, selecting
mm and Change Length Units Only will result in a model with a 1 mm diameter.
This is useful when the dimensions are correct but the unit system is not.
2-7
User Interface
Scale Model Also will convert the length units of the model. If the model originated in meters and had a one meter diameter, selecting mm and Scale Model
Also will result in a model that has a 1000 mm diameter.
The User Interface
2.3.6
Taskbar
The Taskbar is the road map of creating an analysis. Each icon controls a different
dialog that is key to defining an analysis. The Taskbar is shown with and without
labels:
The text labels are enabled by right-clicking on the Tool Bar to open the menu
shown above. These labels are a very helpful feature for infrequent users, and are
persistent from session to session. The Task dialogs are described later in this
chapter.
2.4
Output Bar
The Output Bar provides a convenient method to communicate errors, start-up

notes, and the Convergence Monitor. The Output Bar is divided into three tabs: the
Message Window, Convergence Plot, and the Design Review Center.
2.4.1
Message Window
The purpose of the Message window is to share status messages from the analysis.
In particular, information at start-up when an analysis is started, the status of the
geometry tools, and errors are communicated in this region. Some examples are
shown below.
2-8
The User Interface
In this case, the model came in without errors, and three void-fill regions were
automatically created:
For a new analysis, all Mesher and Solver messages are presented in the Output
Bar:
2-9
User Interface
In this case, the model had an error--it was a Wildfire model with interfering parts.
The error message simply states this and then gives the names of the offending
parts:
The User Interface
2.4.2
Convergence Monitor
The Convergence Monitor is also presented in the Output Bar:
The functionality of the Convergence Plot is described in the Review chapter.
2.4.3
The Design Review Center is available in Results mode when a project is open. This
is described in the Projects chapter of this manual.
2.5
Customization
Toolbars can be moved by hovering the mouse over the left edge of the toolbar.
When the cursor changes to the move arrows, left click and drag the toolbar to the
desired location:
A toolbar can be docked along any edge of the interface by dragging it near an edge
and dropping in place. Toolbars can be placed outside of the interface altogether.
2-10
The User Interface
The Task Bar and Output Bar can also be moved by clicking in the title region (left
mouse button), holding down the mouse button, and dragging the window.
To re-dock the Control Bar or the Output Bar, position the bar near the desired
edge, and double click (left mouse button) in the title region.
Customization
Example
Task Icons at top
Toolbars moved
to left side
Note that customization is persistent from one session to the next.
2-11
User Interface
Below is an example of a customized interface. All of the toolbars have been relocated to the left side, and the task icons are across the top:
The User Interface
Toolbar visibility is controlled with either the Window menu or by right-clicking anywhere on the toolbar or menu region:
2.6
2.6.1
File Menu
_New, _Open
These items launch a dialog for creating or opening an analysis file, and serve the
same function as the New and Open tool buttons:
2.6.2
_Save
This saves the analysis or project to the directory from which it was opened.
2-12
The User Interface
2.6.3
_Save As
Saves a copy of the current analysis to a new name and/or location. Note that the
newly created cfd file is opened, and the originally opened cfd file is saved and
closed.
2.6.4
_Save Image
Opens a dialog for selection of the image format (gif, tif, bmp, jpg), and saves the
active view to the selected folder.
_Save Dynamic Image
2.6.6
_Open View Settings & _Save View Settings
The View Settings file is used for saving and retrieving results views. Save View
Settings saves results views and objects such as cutting planes and iso surfaces.
Open View Settings retrieves and applies saved views and objects. A settings file
can be opened on a model different from the original model.
Note: non-planar cutting surfaces (described later) cannot be saved to a View Settings file.
2.6.7
Output_Support
Saves a version of the analysis file that contains just the settings and the geometry, but no mesh or results. This is a very small file, and is suitable for e-mailing to
our CFdesign Technical Support Engineers. Such a file has an _s appended to its
name.
2-13
User Interface
2.6.5
Saves a Dynamic Image (.vtf) for use with the Design Communication Center. Such
a file can also be viewed in PowerPoint or Internet Explorer. Unlike a traditional
image, this format is navigable, and can contain animation.
The User Interface
2.6.8
Output_Results Share
Saves an analysis file containing the settings and results, but not the mesh. This is
useful for sharing your entire results set with someone else in the organization
because it is significantly smaller than the original cfd file. If the user opens such a
file, they will be able to view results, but not run. Hitting Analyze_Go will result in
the mesh being generated, and the solution starting back at iteration 0. Results
Share files have an _r appended to the original analysis name.
2.6.9
Output_Archive
Saves an analysis file which contains the settings, mesh, and only the last saved
results set. This is useful for analyses in which numerous results or time steps were
saved during the run, but only the last set needs to be saved. Also, the last results
file (jobname.res.s# or jobname.res.t#) is saved. An _a file can be continued
simply by hitting Go on the Analysis Options dialog. This file is most suitable for
archival purposes if intermediate result sets or time steps are not required.
2.6.10
_Export
CFdesign can write out the model and results in several formats for use in other
tools. This menu contains the following output file formats:
_Universal Mesh
Exports only the mesh in Ideas Universal file format
_Tecplot Results
Exports the results in Tecplot file format
_FieldView Results
Exports the results in FieldView file format
_Nodal Results
Exports results on every node in the model (csv format)
2.6.11
_Print
A utility that allows printing the image in the Graphics window to either a file or to a
printer. The background color is automatically set to white, and text is shown as
black for visibility.
There are several options on the Print dialog that allow printer selection, printing to
a file, and the number of copies. Click the Preferences button for additional
2-14
The User Interface
options controlling the page layout, size, and printer options. Click the Print button
to send the job to the printer.
2.6.12
_Recent Analyses
The last five most recently opened analyses are listed. Click on one to open the file.
2.6.13
_Recent Projects
The last five most recently opened projects are listed. Click on one to open the file.
_Preferences_User Interface
This is a way to set preferred defaults and to customize the interface. The User
Preferences dialog is shown:
2-15
User Interface
2.6.14
The User Interface
All settings are invoked as soon as OK is hit. The exception is the Startup Length
Units, which is applied only when an analysis is created
2.6.14.1
Material Database
This sets which materials database CFdesign reads. (The default material database
is the one included in the CFdesign installation folder.) If your organization uses
custom materials, this option allows use of a centrally located materials database.
2.6.14.2
Report Settings
The items in the Report Settings section allow control of several parameters affecting Report generation. Use these settings to specify the locations and names of the
default analysis and project report templates, to locate a corporate logo file and to
set a user name.
A set of default templates are included in the CFdesign installation folder, and the
default User Name is the account login name. The default logo is left blank. These
items are described in detail in the Review chapter of this manual.
2.6.14.3
Startup Length Units
The choices are the standard length units systems: meters, cm, mm, feet, inchBTU/s, and inch-Watt. Note that the units from the launching CAD will override this
setting.
2.6.14.4
Perspective View
Choose to enable perspective view or disable it by default.
2.6.14.5
Navigate as Wireframe
Choose to navigate in outline mode or in the current display mode.
2.6.14.6
Navigation Mode
There are five available mouse modes. These modes are described in the next section (Navigation).
2-16
The User Interface
2.6.14.7
Preserve Blanking when Change Selection Mode
A value of Yes causes blanking to persist when the selection mode is changed.
2.6.14.8
Blank Edges when Blank Volumes
A value of Yes causes edges to blank when the associated volume is blanked. This
is especially useful for very complex geometries.
2.6.14.9
Show Coordinate Axes
A value of Yes displays the coordinate axes by default.
Number of Legend Levels
Sets the default number of legend levels when visualizing results. The default is 24
for new models. Note that the legend level control on the Results task will override
this setting for existing analyses.
2.6.14.11
Background Color
If the value = CAD Dependent (default), then the background color will automatically change to match the launching CAD system (for Wildfire, SolidWorks, and
Inventor). When an existing analysis is opened, the background color will be persistent from the previous session. The background color for a new analysis not
launched from one of these CAD tools will be the default color specified in the Background Color dialog.
If the value = User Defined, the background color will always be the value set in
the Background Color dialog.
2.6.15
_Preferences_Settings Rules
Many analysis models are based on assemblies having multiple instances of the
same part. Every instance of the part typically has the same settings, and are used
repeatedly in numerous analyses.
2-17
User Interface
2.6.14.10
The User Interface
There are two kinds of rules: Part rules and Material rules. Part rules automate the
assignment of a volumetric boundary condition and a material based on the part
name. Material rules automate the assignment of materials to parts based on their
material assignments in the CAD tool.
For many analyses, these rules greatly simplify and streamline the set-up process
by automating the application of key settings to a large number of parts, eliminating the burden of having to apply a large number of settings manually. This feature
should greatly impact electronics cooling analyses in particular due to the large
number of repeated parts in electronic devices.
Rules defined with this dialog are automatically applied when an analysis is created
if the Apply box is checked. Rules are not automatically applied when an existing
analysis is opened.
All settings rules are stored in the settings.usr file. This file is contained in the
Documents and Settings\account\.cfdesign folder, where account is the name of
login account.
The mechanics of defining Part and Material rules are described below. They are
very similar, and care should be taken to ensure that the desired type is created.
Some of the basic actions are identical between rule types:
To modify an existing rule:
1. Select the desired rule from the Rule Name menu.

2. Make changes as necessary.
3. Click the Save button.
Click Exit to close the dialog.
To copy an existing rule to a new rule:
1. Select the desired rule from the Rule Name menu.

2. Click the Save As button.
3. Enter a name for the new rule.
To delete a rule:
1. Select it from the Rule Name menu.

2. Click the Delete button.
2-18
The User Interface
2.6.15.1
Part Rules
Part Rules apply settings based on the part names from the CAD model. Settings
that can be applied as rules include volumetric boundary conditions and materials
that do not require any directional inputs in their definitions.
Boundary conditions can be defined as steady state or transient, and can be
assigned as temperature dependent. Note that temperature dependent conditions
use the temperature of the local part (and not a remote location) as the sensing
location.
The materials available for application as Part rules are Fluids, Solids, Compact
Thermal Model component, and Printed Circuit Boards.
To define a settings rule, click File_Preferences_Settings Rules. The Settings

Rules dialog will open:
1. Click the New button.

2. Select Part, and specify the name of
the rule. Click OK.

3. In the Part Name field, specify the
part name or a portion of the part name.
The rule will be applied to parts that contain the specified name as a part of the
complete name.
4. Define boundary conditions and material settings that will be applied to every
part having or containing the specified part
name
5. Check the Apply box to automatically
apply the rule when a new analysis is created.
5
6
6. Click the Save button to save the rule.

Optional: Click the Apply Now to apply the rule to the current model.
2-19
User Interface
Note that materials must currently exist in the Materials database before they can
be used in a setting rule.
The User Interface
Click the Exit button to close the dialog or specify an additional rule by clicking the
New button to repeat the process.
Click Exit to close the Settings Rules dialog.
2.6.15.2
Material Rules
With Material rules, materials assigned to parts in the CAD model (Wildfire, Inventor, and SolidWorks) are read and automatically applied to the parts in the CFdesign model when launched from CAD. This provides a very convenient way to
connect CAD materials to components in the CFdesign model. Specific properties
defined in CAD materials are not used, but rather this mechanism links the CAD
material name to the materials in the CFdesign material database.
This is a very powerful way to leverage material data that is often found in CAD
models and to automate part of the analysis set-up. With this funtionality, creation
of the material mapping could be performed once and leveraged repeatedly for
analysis studies. An example of the work flow is shown:
CAD Model
Part A has Al2014
Part B has Copper123
Part C has PCB-x11
CFdesign Model
CFdesign Material Rules
Al2014 = Aluminum_Constant
Copper123 = Copper_Constant
PCB-x11 = FR4
Part A has Aluminum_Constant

Part B has Copper_Constant
Part C has FR4
The distinction between Part rules and Material rules is that Part rules are a mapping between the CAD part name to CFdesign material and loads while Material
rules are a mapping between the CAD material (on the part) to CFdesign materials.
2-20
The User Interface
To create a Material Rule, click on File_Preferences_Settings Rules:

2. Select Material, and enter a
5
1
User Interface
name for the rule. Hit OK.

3. In the Material Name field,
enter the name of the material as it
is listed in the CAD tool.
4. In the Material Assignment
area, select the Type and Name of
the material from the CFdesign
material database.
5. Check the Apply box so the rule
will be run when a model is launched.
6. Click the Save button to save the
rule.
Close the dialog by clicking the Exit
button.
When a CAD model containing mapped materials is launched into CFdesign, the
corresponding materials will automatically be applied, and will appear in the Materials task.
Assigning Materials in CAD

Wildfire: From the assembly, open the part, and click Edit_Setup. From the Part
Setup menu, select Material. On the Materials dialog, select the desired material,
and move it to the Materials in Model group. Click Ok.
SolidWorks: Right click on the part in the Feature Tree, click Appearance, then
Material. Select the desired material from the list, and click the green Check to confirm.
Inventor: From the assembly, right click the part in the Browser bar, and click Edit.
Right click the part name again, and select Properties. Click the Physical tab. Under
Material, select the desired material. Click Apply, and then Ok.
2-21
The User Interface
2.6.16
_Preferences_Results Units
Use this dialog to specify the default units of result scalars. In previous versions,
the units for any result scalar can be changed by right clicking on a scalar quantity,
selecting Units, and picking the desired unit system. Many companies have guidelines dictating how results are communicated internally, so in some cases, it was
necessary to always manually change the unit for displayed result quantities.
This dialog allows default units to be defined, and is shown below:
The units for each quantity are listed in the adjacent menu.
The choice Default is the first item for every quantity, and is shown if no unit system is selected. Quantities with the Default selection are displayed using the
default units of the current units system.
The default units selected for a quantity will be applied to all related quantities as
well. For example, if the mm/h is selected as the default for velocity, then all velocity components as well as absolute velocity (and components) will be displayed in
mm/h. Related quantities are shown in the table:
Velocity
Velocity Magnitude
U-Velocity
V-Velocity
W-Velocity
2-22
The User Interface
Absolute Velocity Magnitude

Absolute Velocity in X-dir
Absolute Velocity in Y-dir
Absolute Velocity in Z-dir
Pressure
Static Pressure
Total Pressure
Absolute Static Pressure
Viscosity
Viscosity
Conductivity
User Interface
Effective Viscosity
Conductivity
Effective Conductivity
Temperature
Temperature
Total Temperature
Shear Stress
Shear Stress
Wall Shear Stress
2.6.17
_Analysis Notes
When conducting design studies, keeping accurate records about each analysis is
very important, especially when comparing results from a large number of models.
Recording the specific conditions of an analysis, as well as any adjustments and
important findings, is key to repeatability and organization of a large project.
Every engineer has their own particular way of maintaining information about their
analysis models. Some use spreadsheets, some use notebooks, and some use
scraps of paper. The CFdesign Notes file is a useful addition to the engineers
record-keeping tool-kit for, and is kept within the analysis file itself.
Located in File_Notes, the Notes text editor provides a convenient way of recording information about a particular analysis. The contents of the file are internal to
the analysis cfd file, so they can be easily accessed after the analysis is archived.
An external copy of the file can be saved by clicking the Save button.
2-23
The User Interface
Modifications made to the text file outside of CFdesign will not be accessible in the
CFdesign interface. This option is provided to save a copy of the notes to allow
quick access without having to open the cfd file.
2.6.18
_Import Material Database
To assist in the process of migrating from earlier versions of CFdesign, a material

database migration tool is available. This is most useful for users and companies
that have created a large number of custom materials.
To use the tool, click on File_Import Material Database.
Click the Import button to browse for the material database file that is to be
imported. This is likely the matprop.mdb file from your v9 installation folder, but it
may be another file located elsewhere:
The non-vendor supplied materials found in this file will be listed in the dialog. Click
the OK button to add them to the active material database file. This is defined on
the File_Preferences_User Interface dialog. When the migration is complete, a dialog will appear confirming the import.
Note that custom materials in the imported database file that are also in the current
database file will not be overwritten during the migration.
This tool can also be used to combine multiple database files.
2-24
The User Interface
2.6.19
_FEA Mapping
This opens the FEA Mapping dialog for mapping results to boundary conditions for
subsequent FEA analyses. This dialog is described in detail in the FEA Transfer
chapter of this manual.
2.6.20
_Exit
Closes the CFdesign User Interface. If the analysis is not running, it will be automatically saved. If an analysis is running, the Exit command shuts down only the
Interface--the analysis will continue to run.
User Interface
2.7
Display Menu
The Display menu contains controls for model appearance:
These functions are also found in the Display Toolbar, and are described above.
2-25
The User Interface
2.8
Project Menu
The Project menu contains controls for managing projects. There are two items:
Place Analysis into a Project and Bring Analysis into an open Project
To add the current analysis into a project, click Project_Place Current

Analysis into Project.
If a project is open, and the intent is to bring an analysis into the
project, click Project_Bring Analysis into Current Project.
These controls are described in more detail in the Projects chapter of this manual
(Chapter 13).
2.9
Window Menu
The Window menu provides tools for customization of the User Interface:
Bar controls
Toolbar controls
Multi-View controls
The Toolbars menu item has a sub-menu which controls the display of the five toolbars in the user interface (File, View, Window, Help, and Misc). Display of the Status, Task, Control, and Output bars are also controlled in the Window menu.
The Multi-View tools are also found on the Window Toolbar, described above.
2-26
The User Interface
Synchronous Navigation toggles the movement in multiple view ports. When

engaged, the orientation, locations, and zoom will be the same across all ports, and
navigation commands will affect all ports simultaneously.
Show Mesh Seeds controls the display of the mesh seeds while in the Meshing
task. If checked, the seeds are visible; if unchecked, they are hidden.
The Perspective Projection toggle controls if the model is shown in Perspective
View.
Background Color opens the Background color dialog.
The Background Color setting in the File_Preferences_User Interface dialog controls how the background color is automatically set based on the launching CAD
tool. This is described in the User Preferences section above.
2.10
Help Menu
The complete documentation set is integrated with the CFdesign product, and is
accessed on a context-sensitive basis using the Help button on every dialog in the
Interface. The complete manual set is also accessible from the Help menu item
from the Main Menu.
All manuals are packaged in Adobe pdf format. The Adobe Acrobat Reader is
included with the CFdesign interface, and is opened when Help buttons or items in
the Help menu are selected. The manuals can also be viewed outside of CFdesign
using Acrobat Reader. Note that the documentation is fully indexed, and includes a
table of contents. Acrobat Reader includes full search capability as well.
2-27
User Interface
The background color can also be controlled by the launching CAD system (for
Wildfire, Inventor, and Solid Works).
The User Interface
Most dialogs in the CFdesign User Interface contain a Help button. Pushing a Help
button opens the Users Guide to the appropriate location to describe the relevant
dialog or function.
2.10.1
_CFdesign Help Topics
Opens the Users Guide in Acrobat Reader. The Guide is fully indexed, and includes
a table of contents. Links within the document connect sections and chapters where
appropriate.
2.10.2
_On-Line Tutorial
Opens the CFdesign Examples Guide. Presented in Acrobat Reader, the Guide has
been formatted so that it can easily be positioned adjacent to the CFdesign interface while working through the examples. This is a convenient resource for learning
how to operate CFdesign.
2.10.3
_Technical Reference
Opens the CFdesign Technical Reference. This manual contains the suite of Verification analyses as well as a detailed description of the theoretical foundation of CFdesign.
2.10.4
_Release Notes
Opens the Release Notes which contains detailed descriptions of new functionality
in the current version.
2.10.5
_Customer Portal_Check for Updates
Connects to the Download site of the User Portal. This area contains the current
and all previous releases of CFdesign. This is a great place to check for the latest
build as updates are released.
A user account is required to access the User Portal. If you do not have an account,
please follow the instructions on the User Portal dialog.
2-28
The User Interface
2.10.6
_Customer Portal_Knowledge Base
Connects to the on-line CFdesign Knowledge Base and User Portal. This highly useful resource contains up-to-date, topical information about using CFdesign as well
as the current bug list.
2.10.7
_Customer Portal_CFD TV
Connects to a series of short videos that describe usage of key aspects of CFdesign.
The CFD tv library is always growing, and is a great resource for learning about how
to use the software.
_Customer Portal_User Forum
Connects to an on-line forum of CFdesign users. This is a great way to exchange

ideas and ask questions of your fellow members of the CFdesign User Community.
2.10.9
_Customer Portal_Contact Technical Support
Connects to the Support area of the Customer Portal.
2.10.10
_About CFdesign
Shows the build number of the current installation. You may be asked for this by a
CFdesign Technical Support Engineer.
2.10.11
_Licensing
This item opens a dialog that shows the current license status. This is very useful
for troubleshooting license problems. The dialog indicates which license server the
software is looking to for a license. It also indicates the number of Interface and
Solver licenses available. The dialog that allows selection of a specific functionality
level if the floating (network) license contains a combination of different functional
levels.
2-29
User Interface
2.10.8
The User Interface
To provide a high level of flexibility in licensing for larger installations with network
licenses, CFdesign includes the ability to check out a specific funtionality tier from a
mixed pool of licenses.
For example, if a corporate site-license includes four Advanced licenses and one
Motion license, this function allows the user to select a Motion license only when the
Motion functionality is required. For analyses that do not include solid-body motion,
the user would select an Advanced license. This would leave the Motion licenses
available for other engineers that do need the Motion capability.
For a heterogeneous CFdesign license (a license that contains seats with different
funtionality levels), the License Preferences dialog will pop up automatically when
CFdesign is started:
This dialog lists the licenses that are available, and prompts the user to select
which type of license they will use. If, for example, Advanced is selected, then the
Motion functionality will be unavailable in the CFdesign interface. If Motion is
selected, the Motion license is checked out, and the Motion functionality will be
available. (Note that Motion includes the advanced functionality set as well.)
By default, this dialog will appear every time CFdesign is started. Uncheck the
check box to make the setting permanent (and to prevent the dialog from displaying every time). To change the setting simply click Help_Licensing.
2-30
The User Interface
For node-locked licenses and homogeneous network license (meaning that all of
the seats are at the same functionality level) the Licensing dialog does not appear.
No input is required for such a license installation.
2.11
Mouse Navigation
A summary of the four mouse modes is presented in the following tables. The convention in this table refers to the mouse buttons and the roller wheel as follows:
Right Mouse Button
Left Mouse Button
Middle Mouse Button and

Scroll Wheel
Mouse
CFdesign Mode:
Zoom
Ctrl + Left Mouse Button
Rotate
Ctrl + Middle Mouse Button
Pan
Ctrl + Right Mouse Button
Wheel Zoom
Scroll Wheel rotate
Select/Deselect
Left Mouse Button
2-31
User Interface
There are five available modes: one is the traditional CFdesign mode, three are
modeled after CAD-tool mouse modes (Wildfire, Inventor, and Solid Works), and a
fifth mode, CAD Dependent, automatically changes the mouse mode to correspond
to the CAD tool from which the model was launched (Wildfire, Inventor, and Solid
Works). Mouse modes are chosen from the Navigation Mode menu of the
File_Preferences_User Interface dialog.
The User Interface
Rubberband Select
Middle Mouse Button drag
Blank an entity
Right Mouse Button
Unblank all entities
Right Mouse Button off model
Unblank an entity (undo/

redo blank history)
Ctrl + Scroll Wheel
Rubberband zoom
Shift + Left Mouse Button
Cancel during Rubberband

select or Rubberband zoom
Right Mouse Button
Align to Surface
Shift + Right Mouse Button
Roll about Center Z
Shift + Middle Mouse Button
Replay Navigation History
Ctrl + Shift + Scroll Wheel
Inventor Mode:
Zoom
F3 + Left Mouse Button
Rotate
F4 + Left Mouse Button
Pan
F2 + Left Mouse Button (and Middle Mouse)
Wheel Zoom
Scroll Wheel rotate
Select/Deselect
Left Mouse Button
Rubberband Select
Blank an entity
Right Mouse Button

redo blank history)
Ctrl + Scroll Wheel
Rubberband zoom

Right Mouse Button
Align to Surface
Roll about Center Z
2-32
The User Interface
Wildfire Mode:
Zoom
Rotate
Middle Mouse Button
Pan
Wheel Zoom
Scroll Wheel rotate
Select/Deselect
Left Mouse Button
Rubberband Select
Blank an entity
Right Mouse Button


redo blank history)
Ctrl + Scroll Wheel
Rubberband zoom

Right Mouse Button
Align to Surface
Roll about Center Z
n/a
User Interface
Solid Works Mode:

Zoom
Rotate
Middle Mouse Button
Pan
Wheel Zoom
Scroll Wheel rotate
Select/Deselect
Left Mouse Button
Rubberband Select
Blank an entity
Right Mouse Button

redo blank history)
Ctrl + Scroll Wheel
Rubberband zoom
2-33
The User Interface

Right Mouse Button
Align to Surface
Roll about Center Z
n/a
2.12
Entity Selection
The selection mode (on the Loads, Mesh, and Materials tasks) controls which type
of entity is selectable: volume, surface, or edge.
Selection Mode
Selection Method
The Selection Method allows for associative selection and the selection of groups.
Associativity is based on geometry, and provides a quick way to select multiple
entities that are related to the Selection Method type (surfaces owned by a volume,
for example).
Entities of the type shown in the Selection Method menu will highlight as the mouse
is moved over them. When picked, all of the items of the current selection mode
that are associated with the picked item will be selected. Groups are discussed later
in this chapter.
The Selection Basis modes for each selectable entity are:
Entity
Selection Method
Volume
Direct -- Volumes are highlighted and are selected

By Material -- All volumes that have the same material
are highlighted and selected together.
Surface
Direct -- Surfaces are highlighted and are selected

By Volume -- Volumes are highlighted, and all surfaces
touching a picked volume are selected.
Edge
2-34
Direct -- Edges are highlighted and are selected
The User Interface
Entity
Selection Method
By Surface -- Surfaces are highlighted, and all edges
touching a picked surface are selected.
By Volume -- Volumes are highlighted, and all edges
touching a picked volume are selected.
The four buttons adjacent to the Selection Basis drop menu simplify selection and
deselection of multiple entities:
Deselect highlighted
(in the Selection List) entity
Select Previously selected entities

Deselect All selected entities
When the mouse hovers over an entity, it is colored green. When an entity is
selected, it is colored red. When the mouse hovers over an already selected entity,
it is colored yellow.
To deselect an entity, simply click on it again, or highlight it in the Selection List
and hit the Deselect button.
To be selectable, an entity must not be occluded by another entity. If there is an
entity blocking the line of sight to the desired entity, use the right mouse button to
blank its display (see the next section).
When an item is selected, its label is shown in the Selection List.
2-35
User Interface
Select All entities
The User Interface
Multiple selected items can be highlighted in the list using the Windows standard
selection methods--hold down the control key while clicking on items to select multiple items; hold down the shift key while clicking on items to select a range.
2.13
2.13.1
Entity Visibility
Blanking
An entity can be blanked by right clicking the mouse on it. Only entities of the type
in the current selection mode will be blanked. To redisplay all blanked entities,
right click the mouse somewhere off of the model. Shown is a model with some surfaces blanked. Note how the surface underneath is now visible, and therefore pickable.
Blanking entities is very useful when applying boundary conditions and mesh sizes
to allow easy access to objects in the background.
2.13.2
Blanking Undo
To redisplay all blanked entities, simply right-click the mouse anywhere off of the
model. To redisplay the last blanked entity (or to undo the last blanking command),
2-36
The User Interface
hold the control key and roll the mouse scroll wheel. Rolling the wheel up (away
from you) will undo blanking; rolling it down (toward you) will redo blanking.
Scroll Wheel
Roll Up to undo blanking

Roll Down to redo blanking
2.14
Feature Tree
Each branch lists existing settings for the task, and in some cases allow them to be
modified easily. Most of the branches are described in their appropriate chapters
(the Boundary Conditions and Initial Conditions branches will be discussed in the
Loads chapter, for example). This section describes the branches that are specific
to the Feature Tree, and are not associated with a Dialog Task. The Results mode is
described in the Results chapter.
2.14.1
Coordinate Systems
For 3D models, the only choice is Cartesian 3D.

For 2D models, the choices are Cartesian 2D,
Axisymmetric in X, and Axisymmetric in Y.
A two dimensional Cartesian geometry is always assumed to have a unit depth.

An axisymmetric geometry is a three dimensional geometry that is uniform in the
tangential direction. Because of this uniformity, a single slice through the geometry
can be simulated as a two dimensional model. The nice thing about axisymmetric
2-37
User Interface
The Feature Tree is contained in its own Task dialog, and is divided into two modes:
Model and Results. In both modes, the primary role of the Feature Tree is to summarize applied settings as well as to modify the appearance of individual entities.
The User Interface
modelling is that a two dimensional analysis can give correct results for a three
dimensional model. An example of axisymmetric geometry is a straight pipe.
It is recommended that axisymmetric geometries be constructed in the first quadrant. Geometries that are axisymmetric about the x-axis cannot cross the x-axis
because the x-axis is the center-line. Likewise, geometries that are axisymmetric
about the y-axis cannot cross the y-axis. A unit radian depth is always assumed for
axisymmetric geometries.
2.14.2
Parts
The Parts branch contains a list of every part in the assembly. If the model is
launched from Wildfire, Inventor, or Solid Works, the parts will be colored the same
as they were in the CAD model when the Parts branch is selected:
Use the right click menu on the top level Parts branch to change the appearance on
all the parts.
Use the right click menu on an individual part to change only its appearance.
Left click on a part to highlight it in the Graphics window.
Right click on a part to bring up a menu with the following items: Outline, Transparent, and Add to Group.
2-38
The User Interface
In the Results mode of the Feature Tree, the Parts branch is not displayed in the
Feature Tree. Individual part display attributes are set using the Materials branch.
2.14.3
Naming Entities with Assigned Conditions
Geometric entities with assigned conditions can be renamed in the Feature Tree.
This feature is applicable to surfaces and edges for 3d models and edges for 2d
models that have boundary conditions, initial conditions, or mesh sizes. (Note that
part names cannot be changed within the CFdesign interface.)
2.15
2.15.1
Groups
Introduction
Geometric entities such as volumes, surfaces, or edges can be grouped based on

part name, material, common mesh size or boundary condition. Groups of entities
can then be selected with a button click to add additional settings. Groups of surfaces can also be selected for assessing wall results (post processing).
2-39
User Interface
To change the name of an entity, right click on the current name in the feature
tree, and select Change Name. Enter the new name in the dialog that appears,
and hit OK. The entity will be renamed in the feature tree, and the name will persist
in other branches of the tree if other settings are applied to the entity.
The User Interface
A Group is a homogeneous collection of entities: volumes, surfaces, or edges. A

group cannot contain a combination of entities (such as a mixture of volumes and
surfaces, for example).
2.15.2
Creating Groups
Create a group by right clicking on the

main Group branch in the feature tree,
and select Create Group
A dialog will come up prompting for a
group name. To group geometric entities (parts, surfaces, edges), select
Geometric as the Type.
To group parts by Motion (for linked
motion), select Motion as the type.
(This is described in the Motion chapter
of this manual.)
Groups can be created on the fly if
desired. This can occur when entities
are added to groups, and will be
described in the next section.
2-40
The User Interface
2.15.3
2.15.3.1
Adding Entities (and Creating Groups on the Fly)

Adding Parts from the Feature Tree
1. Parts can be added to groups by
2.15.3.2
User Interface
right clicking on part ids listed in the

Parts branch of the feature tree.
2. After selecting the desired parts,
right click, and select Add to Group.
3. A menu will come up listing available groups. Select the desired group
from the list.
4. To create a group on the fly, select
Create Group. The Create Group dialog will prompt for a name. After entering the name, the selected parts are
added to the group.
Adding Parts by Name
1. Parts can also be added to an existing group by right clicking on a group

name, and selecting Add by Name.
2. Use a regular expression to type in
part of the name that is common to the
parts to be added to the group. (Be sure
to check the Regular Expression box.)
For example, to add multiple parts with
the word chip in their name, enter
*chip*, and all parts that have the
word chip somewhere in their name will
be added to the group.
2-41
The User Interface
2.15.3.3
Adding Entities with Applied Conditions
Any volume, surface, or edge that has

an applied mesh size or boundary condition can be added to a group:
1. Right click on an entity with an
applied condition in the feature tree, and
select Add to Group.
2. All entities with the same applied
setting can be added to a group by right
clicking on an applied condition under
an entity in the feature tree, and select
Add by Value to Group.
2.15.3.4
Adding Multiple Entities From The Selection List
When applying loads, mesh sizes, or materials, the currently selected entities can be
added to a group by clicking the Group
Operation button. In the Add to Group dialog, either create a new group or select an
existing group.
2.15.4
Removing Entities from Groups
In the Feature Tree, right click on an entity

(or entities) under the Group branch, and
select Delete. This will remove the item(s)
from the group.
2-42
The User Interface
2.15.5
Deleting Groups
Delete an individual group by right clicking

on it in the Group branch of the feature
tree.
Delete all groups by right clicking on the
top level Groups branch of the tree, and
selecting Delete All.
User Interface
2.15.6
Displaying Grouped Entities
To show only the contents of a group, right

click on the group label (under the Groups
branch), and select Display Group Only.
To re-display the rest of the model, right
click in the graphics window, off of the
model.
2-43
The User Interface
2.15.7
Hiding Groups
Click Hide Group to blank (hide from view)

all entities within a certain group.
Right clicking anywhere on the Graphics
window will restore the visibility of the
objects.
2.15.8
Combining Groups
Combine the contents of groups by right-clicking on a group, and selecting the Add
Group menu item:
The other groups containing the same entity type are listed. Click one of the groups
from the list to add its contents into the current group.
The group that is selected from the pop-out menu is not altered. (Only the group
that was right-clicked is modified.)
For example, to add the volumes of Group2 (as in the above graphic) into Group1,
right click on Group1, select Add Group, and then select Group2 from the list.
Group 1 will then contain all of its original entities plus those in Group2. Group2,
however, will not be changed.
2-44
The User Interface
2.15.9
Using Groups
On the Loads, Mesh, and Materials

dialogs, groups are listed in the Group
Operation button. Only groups containing the type of entity of the current selection type are listed.
When a group is selected, the entities
are added to the Selection List.
Individual items can be deselected or
additional items added.
2.16
Task Dialogs
The Task Dialogs shown in the Task Dialog Region are activated by clicking on one
of the tool buttons in the vertical tool bar. A good sequence to follow when setting
up an analysis is to work vertically through the tool buttons.
2-45
User Interface
Groups of surfaces can be selected for use with a Wall Results calculation. The
group must have existed during the last run (if it did not exist, simply run 0 iterations prior to examining wall results). To access a group of surfaces, right click in
the Wall Results dialog Selection list, and select the appropriate group. The surfaces in the group will be added to the Selection list, and wall results on those surfaces will be reported.
The User Interface
Below is a brief description of each task. The following chapters in this Guide discuss much more detail about the use and application of each of these dialogs.
Feature Tree
The Feature Tree is divided into two
modes: Model and Results. In both modes, the
primary role is to summarize applied settings as
well as to modify the appearance of individual
entities.
Each branch lists existing settings for the task,
and in some cases allow them to be modified.
Please see the Feature Tree section of this chapter
for more information.
Geometry Tools
The Geometry Tools are four tools for
geometry repair and modification.
Edge Merge: Method of joining edges that
share a vertex with an inflection less than a specified tolerance.
Small Object: Small Object Removal is a
repair tool designed to remove very small surfaces and edges that are typically too small to be
obvious when viewing the model, but can greatly
affect meshing.
Void Fill: Creates caps at openings and fills
the void with an internal volume.
External Volume: Adds a rectangular volume around the entire model. Can be used as an
air volume for external flow analyses.
Please see the Geometry chapter for more information.
2-46
The User Interface
Boundary Conditions
Boundary conditions are applied with this dialog.
Settings such as velocity, pressure, and temperature
are applied to the surfaces of a model (to edges in 2D
models).
Volumetric heat generation and total heat generation
are applied to volumes (to surfaces in 2D models).
Transient (time-dependent) boundary conditions are
also applied and defined in the Loads task.
Please see the Loads chapter for more information.
User Interface
Initial Conditions
Initial conditions are settings that are only
effective at the beginning of the analysis. They are
mostly used for setting the condition at time=0 for
transient analyses.
Please see the Loads chapter for more information.
2-47
The User Interface
Mesh Sizes
A mesh has to be constructed which
divides the entire geometry into small pieces, or
elements.
This dialog provides tools to automatically define
a mesh as well as identify potential problem areas
within the geometry.
The Mesh Enhancement parameters are adjusted
by clicking the Mesh Enhancement button.
Please see the Meshing chapter for more information.
Materials
The physical material of each part is
assigned with this dialog. A materials database
including fluids and solids is included with the software, and the entries are selected from the Name
drop menu.
Materials can be modified and added to the materials database by clicking on the Create/Edit Material
button.
This dialog is also used to define and assign distributed resistances, internal fans, check valves, rotating regions, component thermal models, and
printed circuit boards.
Please see the Materials chapter for more information.
2-48
The User Interface
Motion
User Interface
The definition and specification of solid

motion are controlled with this dialog. Several types of engineering motions are supported:
linear, angular, combined linear-angular, orbital,
nutating, sliding vane, and free motion. All can be
defined through user-input, and most can be flowdriven.
A Motion Editor is accessed by clicking the Create/
Edit Motion button. This dialog allows specification
of non-geometric-dependent quantities such as
velocity, displacement, or driving or resistive forces.
Geometric-based parameters such as initial position
of the object, the direction of travel, and the limits
of the motion are defined on the main Motion task
dialog.
See the Motion chapter for more information.
2-49
The User Interface
Analyze
The physics to be solved are set in the
Analysis Options section. The defaults are good for
many analyses--flow, incompressible, no heat
transfer--but are easily changed if necessary.
The Solar button opens the Solar Heating dialog
which allows specification of solar loading.
The Advanced button contains controls for mixing
as well as cavitation and steam analyses.
Configure the analysis in the Output Options section. Set the Analysis Mode to Steady State (the
default) or Transient. The Results and Summary
Output Intervals are also set.
The Analysis Computer is chosen here. This is for
the Fast Track Option.
Stop the analysis by clicking the Stop button
(which replaces the Go button during the analysis).
Select additional output quantities from the Result
Quantities dialog.
See the Analyze chapter for more information.
2-50
The User Interface
Review
User Interface
This dialog contains numerous functions for

examining analysis results and the status of the
analysis.
Before the analysis, use it to set up Monitor Points
(points in space on which convergence can be
monitored).
After the analysis is complete, the Summary and
Status files are accessible from the Notes tab.
These files contain information about the results
as well as the analysis.
The Results tab lists all saved results (and time)
steps, and provides a way to include them in an
animation.
The Animate tab animates the results sets made
active in the Results tab.
Please see the Review chapter for more information.
Results
The Results dialog contains a great deal of
post-processing functionality.
The Cutting Plane, a 2D slice through the model on
which color results and/or vectors are shown, is
the primary tool, and is the basis for particle
traces, XY plots, and bulk data output.
The Iso Surface is a surface of constant value, and
is a great way of visualizing flow and temperature
distributions.
Flow-induced forces, convection coefficients, temperatures, and pressures on walls are calculated
using the Wall tab.
Settings for cutting plane and vector display are
set with the Settings tab.
Please see the Viewing Results chapter for more
information.
2-51
The User Interface
2.17
Property Table Conventions
The Boundary Conditions, Initial Conditions, Manual Meshing, Materials, Motion,

and Analyze dialogs use the new Property Table for entering settings. In every task,
the table is divided into two columns. The column on the left is the Property, and
the column on the right is the Value:
Value Column
Property Column
The Property Table is designed to provide a very consistent approach to specifying

analysis data which is also very space efficient. This section describes the conventions that are used throughout these tasks.
2.17.1
Entry Types
Every entry is one of the following types:
Menu List
Button
Pop-out dialog
Entry field
Check box
Buttons to Apply the setting, Remove it, or get Help are at the bottom of every
task.
2-52
The User Interface
2.17.1.1
Menu List
Menus contain several choices for a property, and are always marked with the down
arrow symbol. Click anywhere in the field to expand the menu list:
User Interface
To finish the assignment, click on the desired menu item.
2.17.1.2
Buttons
Buttons are action items that either apply a command directly (such as Reverse the
direction of the normal velocity) to the entry or launch another dialog (such as the
Material Editor). They appear as a word without any symbol in the value field. When
clicked, the command will be invoked, and the button will appear in the field:
2.17.1.3
Pop-out Dialog
There are several settings that require a direction or a graphical input. Examples
include the flow direction for an internal fan in Materials or the bounds location for
flow-driven motion on the Motion dialog. These entries are made using a pop-out
2-53
The User Interface
dialog. Such fields are marked with a ... symbol in the value field. Click anywhere
in the value field to bring up the pop out dialog:
Use the pop-out to specify the required direction or other input. Several have a way
to graphically select a direction by picking on the model. This is activated with the
Select Surface... button. When finished, simply click anywhere in the property
table to close the pop up.
2.17.1.4
Entry Field
Entry fields require the user to key-in a value. The text in the property column is
red and bolded. Simply click in the field, and key in the desired value. Click elsewhere in the dialog to finish the entry:
2-54
The User Interface
2.17.1.5
Check Box
Check boxes are used as a toggle. They are used when there are only two choices
for a setting--Off = unchecked or On = checked.
2.17.2
Expanding Menus
Expanded
menu
Collapsed
menu
In this case, the Active DOF menu expanded by clicking the expansion box.
In some cases, checking an option will expand the menu. Shown is the Heat Transfer selection on the Analysis Options dialog:
2-55
User Interface
In several dialogs, menus expand and collapse, based on the selections. Two examples include the Free Motion dialog in the Motion task:
The User Interface
2.18
Additional Parameters (Flags File)
There are some additional parameters that control output of optional files as well as
provide additional control to the way geometry is handled. These parameters must
be in a file called cfdesign_flags.txt, which is located in the installation directory.
The default location of the file is the CFdesign installation directory. An environment
variable called CFDESIGN100TEMP must point to the location of this file.
This file can be moved to a different location, but the environment variable must be
updated to point to the new location.
The variables in the flags file, their parameters, and their meanings are shown:
use_spaceball
This entry enables support the

Spaceball navigation device.
There are no arguments--if the
entry is in the flags file, the Spaceball is supported.
PARASOLID
SET_DISP_TOLER A B C
A = 0: off; A =
1: on
B=0
C = tolerance
value
Controls the display resolution of

parasolid geometry. The model
is displayed with a higher resolution for smaller tolerance values.
Display processing time will go
up as the tolerance value is
reduced.
ACIS SET_DISP_TOLER A
BC
A = 0: off; A =
1 on
B=0
C = tolerance
value

acis geometry. The model is displayed with a higher resolution
for smaller tolerance values.
reduced.
GRANITE
SET_DISP_TOLER A B C
A = 0: off; A =
1 on
B=0
C = tolerance
value

Granite geometry. The model is
displayed with a higher resolution for smaller tolerance values.
reduced.
2-56
The User Interface
A = 0: off; A =
1: on
B=0
C = tolerance
value
For mesh files created in thirdparty meshing tools and

imported into CFdesign, this
parameter controls the crease
angle tolerance between edges.
Smaller values (0.001) results in
more breaks between element
edges, producing more geometric pickable edges.
load_xfer_all_res A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
Enables output of loads file (containing interpolated results) for

every saved result or time step.
Default of 0 causes only last
saved result or time step to be
output.
ViewFactorUpdate A
A = number
between 1 and
100
Controls how often radiation

view factors for moving objects
are updated. A is the percentage
of the maximum diagonal of the
model. The default is 2, meaning
view factors are recomputed
when the object has moved a
distance equal to 2% of the
diagonal.
rad_model_1 A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
Enables old radiation model.

New radiation model is on by
default.
FORCED_EXTRA A
A = number of
iterations
Controls number of thermal-only

iterations when Staged Forced
Convection is enabled. The
default is 10.
2-57
User Interface
DISCRETE
EDGEANGLE_THRESHOLD
ABC
The User Interface
enthalpy_humid A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
Enables old ethalpy-based

humidity model. The new, temperature-based model is on by
default.
CFDESIGN
USE_VIZSERVER A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
Controls the Design Review

Server. The Design Review
Server is enabled by default, but
setting a value of 0 for this entry
will disable it.
2-58
CHAPTE R 3
3.1
CAD Connection
Introduction
CFdesign has very strong ties to most of the CAD tools used in industry today. By
using the same geometry engines found in these CAD systems, CFdesign reads the
native model without the need for Step or IGES translations. Parametric changes to
the geometry are read directly into CFdesign, and model settings from similar analyses are automatically applied to the modified geometry.
This functionality allows two things to occur very easily: The first is that multiple
design alternatives can be analyzed very easily--without having to go to great
lengths to fix IGES or Step translations for each what if scenario. The second is
that corporate PLM/PDM initiatives are supported--geometry manipulation occurs
ONLY in the CAD system, where it can be tracked and archived. When geometry is
manipulated in a third party system (such as many of the other CFD tools),
changes often get lost, or simply have to be re-created in the CAD system--thereby
doubling the work. With CFdesign, such issues are not a problem.
This chapter describes the type of CAD geometry needed to successfully run a flow
analysis. Guidelines for what is needed, techniques for how to obtain it, and troubleshooting tips are presented. Guidelines specific to Wildfire, CATIA, and Parasolid/Acis based CAD systems are discussed. Additionally, the connections between
the CAD and CFdesign environments and models are discussed. These connections
streamline the analysis process and simplify the workflow.
3.2
CAD Environment Connection
Two attributes from the CAD environment are read by the launcher and applied to
the CFdesign session when a model is launched: Background Color and Mouse Navigation Mode. These items are designed to improve the work-flow between the CAD
and the CFdesign environments.
3-1
CAD Connection
Note that these attributes only apply to Wildfire (2, 3, and 4), Autodesk Inventor
(11, 2008, and 2009), and SolidWorks (2007 and 2008). The launchers for other
CAD tools will be added in future updates of CFdesign.
3.2.1
CAD Background Color
When launching from one of the three CAD tools (Wildfire, Inventor, and Solid
Works), the default behavior is to use the same background color in the CFdesign
environment:
Wildfire
Inventor:
3-2
CAD Connection
Solid Works:
To override this, open the File_Preferences_User Interface dialog, and change the
setting for Background Color to User Defined.
3.2.2
CAD Mouse Navigation Mode
CAD Mouse
CFdesign Mouse
3-3
CAD Connection
The mouse navigation mode in CFdesign is automatically set to be consistent with

the navigation mode from the launching CAD tool.
CAD Connection
The default setting for Navigation Mode on the File_Preferences_User Interface dialog is CAD Dependent. In this mode, the mouse navigation in CFdesign is set
when a model is launched from CAD.
If a geometry model is opened directly into a CFdesign analysis (Parasolid, Acis, or
Wildfire), the mouse mode will automatically be set according to the following
guidelines:
Acis models are set to the Inventor Mouse Mode

Parasolid models set to the SolidWorks Mouse Mode
Wildfire models will be set to the Wildfire Mouse Mode.
Note that only the mouse controls are applied in the CFdesign user interface. Specific mouse sensitivities are not currently read from the CAD tool.
To use a specific mouse navigation mode, regardless of the launching CAD, change
the value of Navigation Mode to one of the specific settings (CFdesign, Inventor,
Solid Works, Wildfire).
Detailed descriptions of the mouse navigation modes are found in the User Interface chapter of this manual.
3.3
CAD Model Data Connection
In addition to the attributes from the CAD environment, several attributes from the
CAD model are applied to the model in CFdesign. Part colors, model orientation,
and part Materials are read from the CAD model and applied to the CFdesign analysis model.
The CAD launchers that currently support this data sharing are for Wildfire, Inventor, and SolidWorks.
3.3.1
Materials
Materials assigned to parts in the CAD model are read and automatically applied to
the parts in the CFdesign model when launched from CAD. This provides a very
convenient way to connect materials assigned in a CAD model to components in the
CFdesign model. Specific properties defined in CAD materials are not used, but
3-4
CAD Connection
rather this mechanism links the material name (from CAD) to the materials in the
CFdesign material database.
This is a very powerful way to leverage material data that is often found in CAD
models and to automate part of the analysis set-up. With this functionality, creation
of the material mapping could be performed once and leveraged repeatedly for
analysis studies.
3.3.1.1
Assigning Materials in CAD
Wildfire: From the assembly, open the part, and click Edit_Setup. From the Part
Setup menu, select Material. On the Materials dialog, select the desired material,
and move it to the Materials in Model group. Click Ok.
SolidWorks: Right click on the part in the Feature Tree, click Appearance, then
Material. Select the desired material from the list, and click the green Check to confirm.
Inventor: From the assembly, right click the part in the Browser bar, and click Edit.
Right click the part name again, and select iProperties. Click the Physical tab. Under
Material, select the desired material. Click Apply, and then Ok.
Creating Materials Rules
This mapping is supported with a new type of Rule that has been added to Settings
Rules. (This extends the Rule functionality, first introduced in v9). This rule type is
3-5
CAD Connection
3.3.1.2
CAD Connection
called a Material Rule, and maps material names assigned in the CAD model to
materials in the CFdesign material database:
CAD Model
Part A has Al2014
Part B has Copper123
Part C has PCB-x11
CFdesign Model
CFdesign Material Rules
Al2014 = Aluminum_Constant
Copper123 = Copper_Constant
PCB-x11 = FR4
Part A has Aluminum_Constant

Part B has Copper_Constant
Part C has FR4
The distinction between Part and Material rules is made when the rule is created.
(Recall that Part rules create a mapping between the CAD part name to CFdesign
material and loads settings.)
3-6
CAD Connection
To create a Material Rule, click on File_Preferences_Settings Rules:

2. Select Material, and enter a
name for the rule. Hit OK.

3. In the Material Name field,
enter the name of the material as it
is listed in the CAD tool.
4. In the Material Assignment
area, select the Type and Name of
the material from the CFdesign
material database.
5. Check the Apply box so the rule
will be run when a model is launched.
6. Click the Save button to save the
rule.
5
1
Close the dialog by clicking the Exit

button.
3.3.2
Part Colors and Model Orientation
Parts in the CFdesign model are colored the same as in the CAD model. The CAD
part colors are visible when the Parts branch of the Feature Tree is active and while
in the Analyze task dialog. The other task dialogs use a neutral color and colored
stripes to show Boundary and Initial Conditions, dots to represent mesh distribution
in Meshing or use colors that are settings-specific in Materials and Motion.
3-7
CAD Connection
When a CAD model containing mapped materials is launched into CFdesign, the
corresponding materials will automatically be applied, and will appear in the Materials task.
CAD Connection
The orientation of the model when launched from CAD is used as the initial orientation of the CFdesign simulation model:
3.3.3
Model Units
The unit system for the CAD model is automatically applied to the CFdesign analysis model when launching from CAD. The CAD units system will override the default
system specified in the User Preference dialog.
If using inches, be sure to confirm whether inch-BTU/S or inch-Watt is the desired
units system. It may be necessary to manually change this if the other system is
desired.
If the CAD model uses a unit system that is not supported by CFdesign, the units
will automatically be set to the default (either meters or the default set in the User
Preferences dialog).
3-8
CAD Connection
3.4
Flow Geometry
Geometry used for a typical fluid flow analysis is often different than that used in a
structural analysis. There are two broad classifications of flow geometry: internal
and external. Examples of internal flows include pipe flow, valve flow, and flow in
electronic enclosures. Examples of external flows, also called submerged flows,
include flow over a car, an airplane wing, or a missile.
For internal flows, a flow core must be created from the existing surrounding
geometry. The outer walls of the volume are omitted (unless they are to be used as
part of a heat transfer calculation) and the interior volume of the pipe is modeled.
Another description of the interior volume is this: a pipe is filled with water and the
water is allowed to freeze. Now, imagine that the pipe walls are removed, and all
that remained was the solid volume of ice. This volume is where the fluid exists,
and is the geometry that would be created and meshed for a CFD analysis of flow
through that pipe.
3-9
CAD Connection
In contrast, in a structural analysis the walls of the pipe would be meshed and the
interior would be omitted from the calculation domain:
CAD Connection
For external flows, it is customary to invert the geometry, meaning that the
object will be made stationary and the flow will be blown over it at the equal and
opposite speed of the object. To implement this as analysis geometry, two pieces of
geometry are needed: the object itself (missile, car, bullet, etc.) and a large calculation domain in which the object is positioned:
The shape of the domain is usually not very critical, and can be a circle, semi-circle,
rectangle, sphere, or box. Because the flow all around the object is being modeled,
it is a good idea to make the computational domain substantially larger than the
object itself. More detail about the relative size of the calculation domain will be discussed in Chapter 12 of this Guide.
3-10
CAD Connection
3.5
Outlets
More information about boundary conditions will be supplied in the Loads chapter,
but it is worth pointing out some important geometric considerations regarding outlets. CFdesign assumes that flow is normal to the outlet and that there are no gradients in the normal direction.
For this reason, it is important to create flow outlets away from sudden turns or
contractions. If the outlet is too close, the flow cannot reach a fully developed
state, which is the condition assumed by CFdesign. Also, if the outlet is too close to
an expansion area, reversed flow could result (flow re-entering).
This may cause convergence difficulties:
CAD Connection
NO
YES
3-11
CAD Connection
3.6
3.6.1
Wildfire
AutoPrep: Launcher Tool
There are three primary steps necessary to ensure that a design model in Pro/E
Wildfire is ready to be a CFdesign simulation model:
All components must be in the same units system.
The same value of absolute accuracy should be assigned to all components. (In some models relative accuracy is sufficient, but in many absolute
is required.)
Component interferences must be removed.
All of these steps can be accomplished manually within the Wildfire user interface.
However, to facilitate the model preparation process, the CFdesign launcher within
Wildfire has been redesigned to include a set of tools that accomplishes the three
steps described above.
This tool kit is called AutoPrep because it automates the preparation of the geometry for analysis.
When AutoPrep is launched within Wildfire (by clicking Applications_CFdesign), the
model is checked for consistent units, accuracy values, and interferences. This
diagnostic information is then displayed along with tools that provide a simple process for repairing problems.
3-12
CAD Connection
When the geometry is ready to launch, select the Launcher Configuration (Granite
or Mechanica), and then click the CFdesign button at the bottom of the dialog.
CFdesign will start.
Note that the changes made with AutoPrep will be saved to the CAD model prior to
launching into CFdesign.
3.6.1.1
Units
When Applications_CFdesign is first pressed, the assembly is scanned to ensure

that all components have the same units. If parts with different unit systems are
found, AutoPrep opens with the Units dialog:
2
All parts and assemblies and their corresponding units systems are listed for reference. The available units systems are also listed, and those with an * are included
in the assembly.
1. Select the desired units system from the list

2. Click the Unify All button.
(If a mistake was made, click the Reset button to return the assembly to its original
units.)
3. Once all components have the same units, click the Continue button.
Note that this dialog will not appear if all components are assigned the same units
system.
3-13
CAD Connection
CAD Connection
3.6.1.2
Auto-Accuracy
In many assemblies, it is necessary that all components be assigned a consistent

value of absolute accuracy. This is not always the case, and some assemblies will
launch without a problem if all parts have relative accuracy. The process of manually changing accuracy values can be a big job, especially for large assemblies. If
some trial-and-error is needed to get the optimal value, then the process is even
harder.
The Auto-Accuracy tab of AutoPrep provides a tool-kit for changing accuracy values
on all components that is very easy and quick:
The range of absolute accuracy values is first computed, and provides the bounds
for the slider. The geometry will regenerate at any value on this slider. (There are
occasional exceptions, but the model will be restored to its previous setting without
causing any damage.)
1. Select a value with the slider. Note that the default accuracy value is the largest
value (the far right position of the slider).
2. Click the Auto-Accuracy button to set the specified value of absolute accuracy
to all components in the model.
3. Proceed to the Interference Removal tab or start CFdesign by clicking the
CFdesign button.
3-14
CAD Connection
If the geometry is such that the specified value of absolute accuracy does not allow
a successful launch, reduce the value with the slider bar, click the Auto-Accuracy
button, and launch again.
To reset all accuracy values to their original state, click the Reset All button.
To change all accuracy values to relative, click the Set Relative Accuracy button.
3.6.1.3
Interferences
Click the Interference Removal tab to locate and fix part interferences. A list of all
interfering parts is displayed:
CAD Connection
3-15
CAD Connection
1. Click on an interfering pair from the list, and the graphical display will zoom in
on the interference:
Part = 04012401
Part = 1cylind
Interference Region
2
1
The two parts will be colored to correspond to the colors listed in the columns (blue
and green). The interference region will be colored red. This coloring is done to help
provide guidance about which part should be the cutter...
2. Click the Single Cutter button, and a dialog will open which prompts for which
of the pair should be the cutter.
3. Select the part that will cut the other part, and click the Apply button.
In this case, if we select the board part (04012401.prt), it will cut material away
from the cylinder, resulting in a shorter cylindrical chip. If we select the cylinder, it
will cut material away from the board, resulting in a cylindrically-shaped pocket in
the board.
Repeat for the other interference pairs.
4. When finished, click the CFdesign button to launch into CFdesign.

If several interference pairs include a common part, and that part is to be the cutter
(as in the board in this example), then click the Multiple Cutouts button. A dialog
3-16
CAD Connection
will open prompting for the cutter part. This part will cut material away from all
interference pairs of which it is a part.
Note that the changes made to the CAD geometry with these tools are saved as
part of the Wildfire assembly.
3.6.1.4
Launcher Configuration
All of the functions in the AutoPrep launcher tool-kit are applicable for both Granite
and Mechanica-based analyses. As part of the launch process, it is necessary to
select which method will be used:
3.6.2
Granite Launch Method
Granite is the fundamental geometry kernel in Pro/Engineer Wildfire. It forms the

basis of the default launch mechanism from Wildfire to CFdesign.
3-17
CAD Connection
The default is Granite unless the model is two dimensional (or has 2D quilts). Both
methods have their benefits and limitations, and the type of model should guide the
configuration choice. Unless a model contains aspects that are limitations for the
Granite method, it is recommended to select Granite. If a geometry is not suitable
for Granite, then use the Mechanica method.
CAD Connection
The other launch method uses Mechanica to provide the link between CFdesign and
Wildfire, and is described in the next section. The Granite-based method is
described below.
3.6.2.1
Launch Process
1. From within Wildfire, click

Applications_CFdesign.
2. AutoPrep will open. Select
the Granite Launcher Configuration option, complete any

necessary steps in AutoPrep,
and click the CFdesign button.
*See note below about Configuration Option.
3. CFdesign will open, and
prompt for an analysis name.

After entering a name, click
Open, and the model will be
read into CFdesign.
3-18
CAD Connection
* Configuration Option Note: The method that is used to launch an analysis is

stored within that analysis file, and becomes the launch method for that particular
cfd file. When a model is launched with a certain method, the analysis cannot be relaunched using the other method. A new analysis can, however, be launched using
the other method, as appropriate.
Benefits
There are a number of very useful benefits the Granite-based process offers:
After launching into CFdesign, the Wildfire interface is still accessible. It
is possible to interact with Wildfire and even close the interface if desired.
(This is a huge benefit in that it releases memory and resources that can be
used by the CFdesign analysis process.)
Wildfire does not have to be open when the analysis is meshed. During
the meshing process, CFdesign does not minimize as it does in v9.
Granite does not require a Pro/Mesh or Pro/Mechanica license.
Granite allows manipulation of the geometry using the Geometry Tools
(described in the Geometry Chapter).
This mechanism has been shown to be more robust for a number of
geometric models that had problems launching with the Mechanica method.
Wildfire-based analyses that are Fast Tracked can be meshed on the
remote machine. Likewise, analyses that are queued will be meshed when
3-19
CAD Connection
3.6.2.2
CAD Connection
their turn comes up. They do not have to be meshed prior to launching.
(This is presented in more detail in the Meshing Chapter of this manual.)
The Granite mechanism handles automatic void filling better in many
cases. It is more tolerant of caps that extend past the internal void:
caps
void region
Caps extend past the outer surface

of the void. This will void fill when using Granite.
(It will not when using the Mechanica method.)
A final benefit is that Wildfire geometry can be opened directly from the
disk. Wildfire does not have to be open to create a CFdesign analysis. This
is done by starting CFdesign from the Desktop icon, clicking the New icon,
and selecting the Wildfire part or assembly file. The model will come into
CFdesign. Note: this method does not assure associativity if the geometry
is changed (such as for a design study). If there are errors in the geometry,
it does not provide a way to address them (such as AutoPrep), and CAD
attributes are not transferred to the simulation model. This method is a
convenience, but we recommend that the model be launched directly from
Wildfire.
3.6.2.3
Limitations
Note that the Mechanica-based method (which was used in v9) is an available
launch method in v10. There are some limitations within the Granite method that
will sometimes require that Mechanica be used. These limitations are described:
The master instance will always be read. Family Tree entries and
instances will not be opened when the model is launched with Granite.
Under most circumstances, a model with simplified reps cannot be
launched directly from Granite. The reason is that there is not a way to distinguish between the different reps through Granite, so the result is that
the Master rep will come into CFdesign as the analysis model.
3-20
CAD Connection
There is an exception to this: if a simplified rep of the top level assembly is

used to exclude parts, and all remaining parts are in their master rep, the
simplified rep will be the analysis model if launched from Granite.
However, if the simplified rep of the assembly consists of simplified reps of
parts (that are substituted for the part master rep), then only the master
rep of the assembly will be the simulation model when launched from Granite.
Assemblies that contain blank parts will not come into CFdesign using
the Granite method.
Mechanica Simulation features (volumes and surfaces) are not included
in the simulation model. (Note that Mesh Refinement Regions, described in
the Meshing Chapter of this manual, provide a way to control mesh density
in much the same way that Simulation Volumes are used.)
Two dimensional models and three dimensional models containing
quilts (such as for surface parts) are not supported.
The working directory set in Wildfire must be the same directory where
the analysis geometry is stored. If the working directory is not set correctly, the launch into CFdesign through Granite will not happen.
Wildfire geometry launched with the Granite method (or by directly
opening into CFdesign) must exist locally on the users computer. This
means that the Granite method cannot be used with geometry accessed
through Pro/Intralink. There are three alternative actions for this:
Place a copy of the geometry into a local folder outside of Intralink. This will
allow the geometry and analysis to exist in the same local working directory.
Use the Mechanica launch method when launching from Intralink.
3.6.3
Mechanica Launch Method
The launch process to use the Mechanica method is very similar to the Granite
method:
1. From within Wildfire, click Applications_CFdesign.
3-21
CAD Connection
Within Wildfire, set the working directory to be inside Intralink. Note that
this will cause all of the CFdesign-generated files to be written to Intralink.
CAD Connection
2. AutoPrep will open. Select the Mechanica Launcher Configuration option, complete any necessary steps in AutoPrep, and click the CFdesign button.
3. CFdesign will open, and prompt for an analysis name. After entering a name,
click Open, and the model will be read into CFdesign.
For a new analysis, CFdesign MUST be launched from Pro/E. When you do this, you
will see that Pro/E minimizes, and is in a sleep state. You will also notice that
when you hit the GO button on the Analyze window in CFdesign, Pro/E comes back,
but is working. The mesh is actually being generated by CFdesign by reading the
part geometry from the Pro/E database. It is accessing the part and assembly information in the same way that Pro/Mesh accesses it. For this reason, CFdesign must
be launched from Pro/E when the goal is to generate a mesh.
Once CFdesign returns, the analysis proceeds automatically. Pro/E returns to a
sleep state, and cannot be accessed. To access Pro/E, do one of the following:
1. Set the number of iterations to 0, so that after meshing and pre-processing, the
analysis does not proceed. Exit out of CFdesign, and then exit out of Pro/E. Start
CFdesign from the Desktop, open the analysis, and run it.
2. While the analysis is running shut down the CFdesign interface. (The analysis
will continue to run.) After the interface is shutdown, Pro/E can be accessed or shut
down as required.
If a mesh exists, and if the goal is to do anything (modify boundary conditions,
materials, run more iterations, view results, etc.) other than generate a new mesh,
CFdesign can be started from the Desktop or Start Menu. Open the .cfd file.
Note that Mechanica Simulation Features will be included in the model when
launched using the Mechanica method. Two dimensional geometry can be launched
this way as well.
3.6.4
Automatic Flow Volume Creation in Wildfire
Many models constructed in Pro/E consist of just the physical solids (the pipe wall,
for example). There are three methods of creating the internal flow volume. The
first is to manually create it using tool within Wildfire. The second is to create capping geometry at the openings. This method is described below. The third is to create the void fill in the CFdesign environment using the Geometry Tools. This
method is described in the Geometry Tools chapter of this manual.
3-22
CAD Connection
3.6.4.1
Creating Capping Geometry in Wildfire
In the following example, the pipe wall and two internal parts were created in Wildfire:
To prepare this for a flow analysis, simply add a cap to both ends of the pipe:
CAD Connection
The Wildfire geometry shown above consists of five parts: the pipe wall, the two
internal components, and the two end caps. In this example, the caps are constructed using the inner diameter of the pipe wall, and extruded into the pipe.
Alternatively, the caps could have been extruded out of the pipe, or have been built
using the outer diameter of the pipe wall.
3-23
CAD Connection
When brought into CFdesign, the internal volume is automatically created:
The two internal parts are automatically cut from the newly created flow volume.
3.6.4.2
Guidelines when using Mechanica Launch Method
Components built in Pro/E must not interfere, so care must still be taken to eliminate part interferences from the Pro/E model.
There are a few guidelines that should be observed when launching with the
Mechanica method. (The Granite method does not require these guidelines):
3-24
CAD Connection
Parts that are inside of the void must not protrude through the outer
wall of the geometry. If this occurs, the void filling will fail. This is shown:
Part must not protrude

through end cap
When using the Mechanica launch method, end caps must not extend
beyond the geometry surrounding an opening. In this pipe example, the
cap must not extend beyond the outer diameter of the pipe. An example
that will fail is shown:
This will NOT produce a flow

volume when launched with the
Mechanica method. It WILL
when launched with the
Granite method.
3.6.5
Split Surfaces in Pro/E
When a three dimensional part is divided by another part into multiple volumes, the
result will be split surfaces. The problem with split surfaces is that they are considered by the Pro/E model to be a single surface (even though there are disconnected). When a boundary condition is applied to one of these surfaces, it may be
3-25
CAD Connection
End cap extends beyond outer

edge of geometry.
CAD Connection
lost or will jump to the other surface when the analysis is saved. An example is
shown:
Original part
Original part, divided by an

additional part.
Two surfaces, but considered

to be the same by Pro/E. Settings
applied to one surface may be lost
jump to the other.
An easy fix is to add a protrusion or cut feature to one of the volumes so that the
surfaces are unique. This will prevent conditions from jumping or being lost.
3.7
Parasolid and Acis Based CAD Systems
This section discusses geometry issues that are specific to the Parasolid and Acisbased CAD systems. Such systems include Inventor (Acis), Solid Edge (Parasolid),
Unigraphics (Parasolid), Solid Works (Parasolid), Solid Designer (Acis), and CADKey (Acis).
3.7.1
The Internal Flow Volume
The internal flow volume is created when the openings of an internal flow geometry
are capped with either a surface or volume and then read into CFdesign or within
CFdesign by using the Void Filling Geometry Tool. Capping within the CAD model is
is illustrated below:
3-26
CAD Connection
Step 1: Pipe geometry--only the physical solids exist (pipe wall and poppet):
Step 2: Pipe geometry with newly-created volumes at the ends (pipe wall, poppet,
and two end caps). The end caps were created by extruding the inner-radius curves
of the pipe. This extends the flow volume slightly, but they can be omitted from the
meshing if necessary.
CAD Connection
3-27
CAD Connection
Note: For Acis geometries, it is recommended that the end caps be larger than the
ends. The following graphic shows this:
Step 3: Geometry read by CFdesign--the flow core has been created automatically,
and is shown as the highlighted volume. Notice that there are now five volumes
listed in the Materials branch of the Feature Tree--the pipe wall, the poppet, the
two end caps, and the flow volume.
If there are objects inside of the flow volume (like a poppet for example), they will
automatically be embedded into the flow volume. This means that it is not necessary to cut out submerged objects from their surrounding geometry.
For Solid Works-based analyses, if a geometric change is made to an existing analysis model such that the topology of an internal core volume is changed, the volume settings (volume mesh size and material definition) will be lost from that core
volume. Such a change would be the addition or removal of a part or features of a
part that are inside the void. The reason for this is that core volumes are not created in the CAD tool, they are created by CFdesign when the geometry is read in.
Because of this, there is no direct geometric link between the core volume and the
original CAD model. Settings on geometric entities created in the CAD tool will be
preserved for most topological changes, however.
If it is not necessary (or desirable) to mesh various solids in a model (the pipe wall
and poppet, for example), then a no-mesh condition can be applied to them during
the mesh definition step. (This is covered in more detail in the Meshing chapter). In
the preceding example, because the flow volume was created based on the solid
geometry, the poppet is cut out from the flow volume, and fluid will not pass
through this region even if the poppet is not meshed.
3-28
CAD Connection
3.7.2
Submerged Objects and External Flows
Many analysis models are built have physical solids that are submerged in the flow.
Such objects are often involved in a heat transfer analysis, and may carry a heat
load. The method for dealing with submerged objects is very simple: Place them in
the desired location within the surrounding volume. It is not necessary to remove
interferences or to cut an internal part from the surrounding volume. CFdesign will
do this automatically. The following graphics illustrate this.
Step 1: An empty box representing the air in an electronics box.
Step 3: As the model is read into CFdesign, the components are automatically cut
from the air to remove all geometric interferences. Proper connectivity between all
contacting parts is automatically ensured.
3-29
CAD Connection
Step 2: Components are simply placed inside the box in the appropriate locations.
CAD Connection
In our example, the air volume in the CAD system was only a box. As CFdesign
read the geometry, voids for the internal components were cut into the air. This is
why the internal curves highlight when the air volume is selected.
This applies to both internal flows with submerged objects (examples include valves
with poppets and electronic packages), and for external flows simulating the flow
over a moving object. To include the obstruction as a meshable volume in the analysis model, simply place it in the surrounding volume at the desired location.
3.7.3
Two Dimensional Geometry
Often two dimensional geometry is useful for simulating axisymmetric geometry or

for simply an initial attempt at an analysis. A Parasolid or Acis surface in the XY
plane is necessary for such an analysis.
Axisymmetric geometries must be constructed relative to the x or y axis properly. If
the geometry is axisymmetric about the x axis, it cannot cross the x axis. If it is
axisymmetric about the y axis, it cannot cross the y axis. We recommend that axisymmetric geometry be constructed in the first quadrant of the coordinate axis.
3.7.4
Part Names
Part names assigned in Parasolid- and Acis-based CAD tools will now appear in the
CFdesign feature tree. Only part names are listed in the Parts branch of the feature
tree; assemblies are not listed.
From Solid Works, the naming convention of a part is based on the parent assembly
and any parts that surround that part. For example, a part called small-chip is a
member of a sub-assembly called left-board_asm. This part is also surrounded by
a part called test-box. The part name in the feature tree would then be:
TEST-BOX_U_SMALL-CHIP-4@LEFT-BOARD_ASM
The U indicates that the part SMALL-CHIP is surrounded by the part TEST-BOX.
If a part is used multiple times in an assembly, an instance number will be attached
to the part name. In the example above, this part was the fourth instance of the
part SMALL-CHIP.
3-30
CAD Connection
If the geometry was not launched from Solid Works, the part names will be a combination of the CAD part name and any part that completely surrounds it. The name
of the part listed above would be:
TEST-BOX_U_SMALL-CHIP^4
In some cases, the actual part name (without the surrounding part or assembly)
will be listed in the feature tree. This is typically because the part is surrounded by
an automatically-created flow volume.
Note that internal core parts that are created by CFdesign will be assigned the
generic name volume. This is because such parts were not created in the native
CAD tool, and hence did not have a name. Also, the name of internal core parts will
not be used within the names of other parts they completely surround.
3.8
CATIA V5
After launching CFdesign from CATIA, the CATIA interface will minimize (but CATIA
will continue to run). The CFdesign interface will start, and will prompt for an analysis name. The analysis model is then set up according to standard practices outlined in the CFdesign documentation. When the analysis is started (by hitting the
GO button on the Analyze task) the CFdesign interface will minimize and the CATIA
interface will reappear. Meshing status messages are written to the Status bar in
the CATIA interface. After meshing is completed, the CFdesign interface will reappear, and the analysis will continue.
3.8.1
Part Names
The names assigned to CATParts remain with them when the model is brought into
CFdesign.
3-31
CAD Connection
The CFdesign interface for CATIA is designed to work with V5R14, V5R15, and
V5R16. This is an associative interface that reads the geometry directly from the
CATIA database--it does not rely on file translations. Meshing is performed by
CFdesign directly on the CATIA geometry.
CAD Connection
3.8.2
Interferences
Interferences between CATIA geometry are not supported in the CFdesign interface. Please ensure that all interferences are removed before launching into CFdesign. The result of not removing them is likely a crash either when CFdesign is first
launched or when the mesh is generated.
3.8.2.1
Clash Detection
These are some general steps to detect for interferences between parts in CATIA:
1. Click Analyze_Clash. The Clash Detection dialog will appear.

2. Select Contact+Clash as the Type, and select Between all Components. Click
Apply.
3. Interfering parts will highlight in orange, and will be listed in the Check Clash
dialog.
3.8.2.2
Removing Interferences
This is a simple procedure to cut interfering parts from one another:
1. Click Insert_Assembly Features_Remove

2. Select the part that is to be cut out.
3. A dialog will appear that lists all parts that may be affected by this cut out.
Select the desired part to be cut from, and move it from the Parts Possibly Affected
area to the Affected Parts area.
4. Click OK on the Remove dialog (to verify the cut out).
3.8.3
Automatic Flow Volume Creation
Many models constructed in CATIA consist of just the physical solids (the pipe wall,
for example). To analyze the flow, however, the volume comprising the flow volume must also exist in the analysis. To reduce the amount of time and effort
needed to prepare a solid-only geometry for analysis, CFdesign has the ability to
convert a fully enclosed void into a meshable volume automatically.
3-32
CAD Connection
In the following example, the pipe wall and two internal parts were created in
CATIA:
To prepare this for a flow analysis, simply add a cap to both ends of the pipe:
CAD Connection
The CATIA geometry shown above consists of five parts: the pipe wall, the two
internal components, and the two end caps. In this example, the caps are constructed using the inner diameter of the pipe wall, and extruded into the pipe.
Alternatively, the caps could have been extruded out of the pipe, or have been built
3-33
CAD Connection
using the outer diameter of the pipe wall. In many cases, it has been found that
extending the outer edges of the cap beyond the outer edge of the flow vessel is
the recommended method of automatically generating the flow volume.
When brought into CFdesign, the internal volume is automatically created:
The two internal parts are automatically cut from the newly created flow volume.
Automatic Flow Volume Creation is enabled by default. To disable it, add the following entry in your cfdesign_flags.txt file. A value of 1 enables volume creation, a
value of 0 disables it:
CATIA FILLVOIDS 0
The cfdesign_flags.txt file can be placed anywhere on your local computer. Be sure
to set an environment variable called CFDESIGN90TEMP to point to the location of
your flags file. Its default location is in the CFdesign installation directory.
3.8.4
Model Changes
An important capability that CFdesign provides to the product design process is the
ability to conduct analyses of multiple geometric configurations. Using the Projects
feature in CFdesign greatly facilitates the management of multiple analyses, each
of which can be based on a variation of the design geometry.
3-34
CAD Connection
The CFdesign interface to CATIA supports both parametric and topological changes
to the geometry. Parametric changes are modifications to dimensions that do not
result in a change in the number of parts, surfaces, or edges. Topological changes
are a broader scope of changes, and include the addition or removal of parts or features.
Specifically, if a change is made to the geometric model, settings from a similar
analysis can be mapped to the modified geometry. If the geometric change causes
a significant change to an area (such as the removal of a feature), then locally
those settings cannot be applied. Such settings are listed in the Lost List, and can
be re-applied manually.
3.8.5
Multi-Body Parts
The use of multiple-body parts is not supported. Only the geometry from the first
body will be read into CFdesign.
CAD Connection
3-35
CAD Connection
The following graphic shows a CATIA feature tree with both an empty part body and
multiple part bodies in the same part:
Alternatively, it is possible (and allowed) to create a part body consisting of several

separate regions (volumes). An example is a sketch consisting of several nontouching outlines that is then extruded. The resulting single part body will consist of
several volumes that will then be recognized properly by CFdesign.
3-36
CAD Connection
3.8.6
Face/Edge Intersections and Tangency
The intersection of a face and only an edge is not supported. The following geometrical situation should be avoided:
In this case, only the edge of one volume contacts the surface of another volume.
This will cause an error in transferring the geometry from CATIA to CFdesign, and
should be corrected by the user prior to launching CFdesign.
The surfaces of two (or more) volumes can touch one another without error, however.:
CAD Connection
3-37
CAD Connection
A similar geometric situation that should also be avoided is a perfect tangency. An

example is shown:
In this example, a work-around would be to offset the cylinder slightly into the
block, and cut off the interfering piece.
3.8.7
Units
The default units system in CATIA is mm. Additionally, mm is the underlying units
system for the geometry engine in CATIA. Because of this, geometry read by CFdesign from the CATIA database is always in mm, even if the geometry was constructed in any other units system.
In the Units branch of the CFdesign feature tree, left click on mm to set the units
system to mm. Doing this will not convert any dimensions in the model, however.
A future enhancement to the CATIA CFdesign launcher will be to allow units conversions of geometry constructed in other units systems.
3.9
Lost List
When changes are made to a geometry (often as the next design alternative), a
new analysis is created and added to a project containing previous analyses of similar geometry. The settings (boundary conditions, mesh sizes, materials, options)
can be read from an existing analysis and applied to a new analysis with a simple
command on the feature tree. (See the Projects chapter of this Guide for more
details.)
If the geometric change was parametric in nature (dimensional change), then settings will be applied to the new geometry. If the change was topological in nature
3-38
CAD Connection
(added or deleted geometric features), then some settings may not be applied
automatically, and will have to be applied manually. An example is if a part with an
assigned heat generation load was removed from the model. The heat generation
boundary condition would be lost from the model.
In this case and for the case in which an analysis is re-opened after geometric
changes, any settings that are lost are now listed in a small dialog. The user can
reassociate these settings to the model by selecting the geometric entity and then
the setting from the list.
If settings are lost (either because a topological change eliminated some geometry
or because the topology was changed too much), a Show Lost button will appear
on the task dialog.
The Show Lost button will only appear on a dialog if settings of the dialog type are
lost.
When the Show Lost button is hit, a window will come up listing the lost settings:
CAD Connection
The number to the right of the setting indicates how many instances of the condition were lost. Lost conditions can be applied to as many entities as desired, however.
For lost mesh sizes, the type of entity the condition was applied to (volume or surface) will be indicated in the list. Note that mesh size refinements applied to edges
will not be transferred from Solid Works and Inventor-based analyses. Mesh distributions are applied to the model upon settings transfer, but only adjustments to
volumes and surfaces will be transferred. Adjustments to edges will not be applied
to the target analysis.
3-39
CAD Connection
To reassign a lost setting, first select the entity (or entities) in the model. Select the
desired setting from the list of lost settings. Hit Apply on the task dialog.
All lost lists will be cleared from the analysis when the analysis is saved.
3.10
Third Party Mesh Import
This feature allows the import of a mesh generated in a tool other than CFdesign.
Meshes in the I-DEAS .unv format and the Nastran .nas and .dat formats can
be read in by clicking File_New, and changing the File Type to CAD Mesh Files.
The model will come into CFdesign and appear as it did in the meshing tool. Separate parts in an assembly must be meshed with unique material IDs in the third
party meshing tool. Otherwise, parts will not be differentiated from one another.
In CFdesign, set up of the model is standard, with the exception that the Mesh task
dialog is not available. Note that Mesh Enhancement will not occur on an imported
mesh.
3-40
CHAPTE R 4
4.1
Geometry Tools
Introduction
In many design studies, CAD geometry requires some degree of modification to

make it suitable for simulation. In some cases, it may contain problematic entities
such as sliver surfaces or unneeded edge divisions, both often caused by inaccuracies in the CAD modeler. These artifacts can greatly complicate meshing, either
making it extremely difficult or impossible. In other cases, the model requires additional geometry for the air or fluid region such as a surrounding volume or an internal volume.
In earlier versions of CFdesign, modifying production geometry to make it suitable
for simulation always had to be done within the CAD system. This sometimes led to
delays in the analysis process, especially if CAD designers outside of the immediate
design and analysis process were involved.
Additionally, modifications to a CAD model to prepare it for simulation are often not
directly beneficial to the production geometry. The removal of a nearly invisible
sliver surface or the addition of an air volume (air seldom appears on a bill of materials!) are not usually part of the production process. Making these modifications to
the production CAD model, however, requires an additional version of the geometry, thus adding further complexity to a companys PLM or PDM systems.
CFdesign features the Geometry Tool-Kit: a collection of four geometry modification
tools that help to prepare CAD models for simulation directly within the CFdesign
environment. The four tools are divided into two classifications.
The first two, Small Object Removal and Edge Merging, repair geometry. This is
often done at a very fine level. These tools clean up problems that can be very difficult to even see within the CAD model, but can lead to meshing difficulties or even
failures.
The second two, Void Fill Creation, and External Volume, add geometry. In both
cases, these tools add geometry that in most cases will represent the working fluid.
4-1
Geometry Tools
The working fluid is often omitted from production CAD geometry as it is not a component in the manufactured part.
4.2
Geometry Tools Within the Process
The Geometry Tools are located in the Geometry Task of the Control Bar:
The tabs are arranged in the recommended order of their use:

Edge Merging --> Small Object Removal --> Void Fill --> External Volume
Obviously it is not required (or necessary) to use all of the tools for every model,
but it is recommended that if more than one is used, adhere to the order shown
above. Note that using the tools in a different order may lead to unexpected results
and possibly errors.
The two repair tools, Edge Merging and Small Object Removal, should be used prior
to assigning any other settings (boundary conditions, mesh sizes, etc.). This is
because these tools remove geometric entities from the model. Any settings
applied to the model will be removed if either of these tools are invoked.
4-2
Geometry Tools
The two tools that add geometry, Void Fill and External Volume, can be applied
after settings are applied. Note that the mesh distribution will have to be reapplied
after using either or both of these tools.
4.3
CAD and Model Requirements
Note that the Geometry Tools are available for all Parasolid- and Acis-based geometry models as well as for Pro/Engineer geometry that has been launched using the
Granite launch method.
The Geometry Tools are not available for:
Wildfire geometry launched through the Mechanica launch method.

CATIA.
The reason is that the Geometry Tools change the underlying geometry. When the
two CAD methods listed above are used, CFdesign does not have direct access to
the underlying geometry, and therefore cannot change it.
Geometry Tools are not available for meshed models imported into CFdesign. These
are fully meshed models that are either in Nastran (.nas or .dat) or Ideas universal
(.unv) formats. They do not contain any geometry, so modification of the model is
not possible at this time.
The Void Fill and External Volume tools are not available for 2D models.
4.4
Basics
The first repair tool, Edge Merging, unifies edges that meet at a common vertex at
an inflection angle less than a specified tolerance. This tool provides the benefit of
reducing the number of edges, especially small ones, which leads to reduced overall
mesh density, and faster analysis times.
The inflection point is determined by the included tangency angle which has an
upper limit in the Edge Merging dialog of 15 degrees.
4-3
Geometry Tools
4.4.1
Edge Merging
Geometry Tools
Some examples of Edge Merging are shown:
3 degrees
Edge Merging will have not effect if more than two edge meet an a vertex. Also, it
will not merge edges that meet at an included angle larger than the specified angle:
Not possible to merge

these edges
4-4
Angle is too sharp to

merge these edges
Geometry Tools
4.4.2
Process
When the Edge Merge tab is entered, edges that can be merged are marked with an
arrow. The mesh that is created on the geometry without merged edges is also
shown.
Edges to be merged are identified by selection of the included angle; there is no

provision for direct selection of edges. The process is described:
1. The default included angle is 5 degrees.
Vary this value as needed, but be careful not

to select a value that will remove intentional
vertices.
2. The number of edges to be merged is
shown.
3. Click the Merge button to invoke the command.
1
2
Image of mesh after edges are merged:
Geometry Tools
4-5
Geometry Tools
4.4.3
Validity Checks and Error Messages
After the Edge Merge operation is performed, a validity check is performed on the
modified geometry. If the operation failed or if the resulting geometry is invalid,
then an error message will appear that says: Edge Merge operation failed. The
previous version of the model must be restored to continue.
Additionally, one or both of the following messages will be written to the Output
bar: Edge merge failure encountered or The updated model is invalid.
If the validity check returns any of these messages, click OK on the pop-up warning
dialog to return the model to its state prior to the Edge Merge operation attempt.
4.5
4.5.1
Small Object Removal

Basics
Small Object Removal is a geometry repair tool, not a part suppression tool. It is
better to suppress parts from the model in the CAD tool. This tool is designed to
remove very small surfaces and edges that are typically too small to be seen.
An example of an exaggerated sliver surface is shown, before and after Small
Object Removal:
Sliver surface
Sliver to be removed
Result is a tiny gap

that will be paved
over when meshed
Note that after Small Object Removal is applied, there may still be visual artifacts
of the removed entity. These indicate where the removal occurred, but are largely
4-6
Geometry Tools
ignored when the mesh is generated. Some edges (shown dashed above) may represent a constraint for the mesher, depending on the nature of the removed entity.
Entities are considered for removal based on their sizes relative to the minimum
refinement length and their comparative size distributions throughout the geometry. The slider range is determined using the same mechanisms as in Edge and Surface mode Model Diagnostics. Objects are considered for removal if they are within
a certain range of the minimum refinement length.
(Note, manual modification of the Minimum Refinement Length diagnostics quantity
does not influence the tolerance used in Small Object Removal.)
Sliver surfaces often either prevent successful mesh generation or result in an
excessive mesh density.
The box on the left has a very tiny sliver loop in the middle of the top surface. With
this loop, the mesh density was very high in this region. The box on the right shows
the effect after it was removed by Small Object Removal: the mesh density was
considerably less.
Geometry Tools
4-7
Geometry Tools
4.5.2
Process
When the tool is first opened, arrows are drawn on the model to indicate candidates
for removal:
We recommend that Small Object Removal be invoked before any analysis settings
are applied. In the event that settings are present when SOR is run, they will be
removed from the model (after a warning is provided).
1. The Surface and Edge highlight mode is
only for visualization. If a surface is identified

for removal, associated edges will be removed
as appropriate.
Usage of Small Object Removal is based on a

tolerance, not direct selection of entities.
2. Use the slider bar to vary the Tolerance.

Reducing the value will identify fewer items
for removal.
3. The number of surfaces and edges to be

removed are listed.
4. Click the Remove button to finish the

command.
4-8
3
4
Geometry Tools
After applying Small Object Removal, the candidate entities are removed, and will
not be a part of the simulation model:
4.5.3
Every effort is made to ensure that the range of the Minimum Size slider will produce a valid model. However, to ensure that SOR does not collapse or otherwise
damage the model, the geometry is checked for validity after SOR is run.
If a problem is found, the following error message will appear in the Output bar:
Small object removal failed at a tolerance of n%, where n is the value specified in the dialog. Additionally, a popup dialog will contain the warning: Small
object removal failed at the specified tolerance and the previous model
state must be restored. Reduce tolerance and try again.
4.6
4.6.1
Void Fill
Basics
4-9
Geometry Tools
The typical CAD model consists of the solid parts, but not fluid parts. The fluid
region is usually contained within and around the solids, but in most cases is not
explicitly constructed as part of the geometric model.
Geometry Tools
Geometry that consists only of solid parts will typically have openings where the
working fluid (air, water, etc.) will enter and leave:
In this state, such a model would not be suitable for a flow analysis (because of the
lack of a flow part).
To aid the process of obtaining the fluid region, automatic creation of completely
enclosed internal void regions has been a part of CFdesign for several versions.
However, it always required the user to create the capping geometry within the
CAD model. This is an example of the situation described in the introduction of this
chapter--the need to create geometry that does not pertain to the actual production model.
The Void Fill tool provides a facility to create capping surfaces that bound a watertight internal void. The surfaces and volume that are created with the Void Fill tool
are actual geometry that can have boundary conditions, materials, etc., and are
meshed as part of the simulation model. Because of this, the resultant void fill volume must not overlap any other volumes (although it may completely surround
other parts). More detail is provided in the Validity Checks and Errors section
below.
4.6.2
Process
Starting with a geometry consisting of solid parts, the procedure to create a void fill
region consists of two parts:
4-10
Geometry Tools
1. Create the capping surfaces that completely bound the internal region. Capping
surfaces must be planar, and cannot overlap any other surfaces.
For each opening, select the edges that bound the opening. Only edges that contact
the first selected edge of an opening and are co-planar with it can be selected.
A function called Auto-Close will attempt to automatically identify any remaining

edges needed to close the surface loop if such can be done unambiguously.
4-11
Geometry Tools
In the image above, the loop is ambiguous because there are two edges that share
each vertex with the selected edge. After selecting the first edge, there are two
possible loops that could be taken and still maintain a planar surface. At this point,
the loop is ambiguous, so the loop is not automatically closed yet...
Geometry Tools
By selecting the next edge, the entire loop is then automatically completed:
A bounding surface is completely defined when the Build Surface button is active.
Click it to build the surface, and then repeat the process for the remaining openings.
2. When all bounding surfaces are complete, click the Fill Void button.
4-12
Geometry Tools
If the void fill region was constructed, the following message will be written to the
Output bar:
Fill Void Successful; there were 1 part(s) created. (The actual number of
created parts will be written in the message.)
Regions created with the Void Fill tool are added to the Parts branch, but are named
Volume. At this point, they are considered part of the analysis, and can be
meshed.
Note: The Void Fill tool cannot be applied after the External Volume tool (described
in the next section) is applied.
4.6.3
Surface Creation
4-13
Geometry Tools
If a surface that overlaps another surface is created, as shown below, or if the

edges of an existing surface are selected, the following error message will appear in
a pop-up: Selected loop bounds an existing surface.
Geometry Tools
Selecting outer edges

will not produce a
valid cap surface
because the interior
surface
If the surface could not be constructed, the following error will appear: The new
surface could not be constructed.
A validity check is performed after surfaces are created, and if a surface renders
the model invalid, the following message is written to the Output bar: Updated
model is invalid owing to formation of an inappropriate surface. The original model must be restored to continue. At this point, the only option is to hit
OK on the pop-up dialog, and the offending surface will be removed from the
model.
Volume Creation
If the region was not created successfully because a water-tight void was not
defined, the following message will be written to the Output bar:
An insufficient number of surfaces were defined to perform a fill void.
If this happens, examine the model to determine where the leak is and construct
the remaining bounding caps.
A check is performed after the internal volume is created to ensure that a valid
model still exists. If the resulting geometry is no longer valid, the following error
will be written: Updated model following fill void is invalid. The original
model must be restored to continue. Click OK on the pop-up dialog to remove
the offending volume.
4-14
Geometry Tools
This error is typically caused by topological errors in the geometry or by an attempt

to construct a void fill region that overlaps existing geometry, as shown below:
YES
NO
In the first example, surfaces are built at the ends of the hollow pipe, and a void fill
volume is created. The pipe has an object inside that is completely immersed in the
void fill volume.
In the second example, the pipe already contains an internal volume. If caps are
constructed at either end of the pipe, the resulting void fill region would overlap the
existing volume. This is not considered valid, and the tool would not allow this to be
created.
4.7
4.7.1
External Volume
Basics
In all of these cases, the air volume surrounding the device is rarely included as
part of the production CAD model. When the CFdesign external flow analysis is run,
4-15
Geometry Tools
Some devices are immersed in air or water, and the design is dependent on how
the flow external to the device behaves. Examples include objects like bicycles,
wings, exterior automotive components, and other aerodynamic devices. Other
examples include devices subject to external natural (free) convection in which the
movement of air (or other working fluid) surrounding the device is what drives the
thermal behavior of the device.
Geometry Tools
the engineer will have to either add a surrounding volume or obtain help from
someone else in their team.
With the External Volume tool, a part for the surrounding air (or fluid) can be constructed directly on the simulation model within CFdesign, without having to add a
fluid part to the CAD geometry.
4.7.2
Process
The External Volume tool creates a rectangular volume that completely surrounds
the original geometry. The volume cannot contact or intersect any part of the
model, and the minimum size (imposed by the creation tools) is 5% larger than the
geometry in all three Cartesian directions. Note that only one external volume can
be created within a session.
4-16
Geometry Tools
When the External Volume tab is first opened, a red outline of the external volume
is displayed surrounding the model:
Use the direction bullets and the Size Adjustment controls to set the dimensions for
the volume:
1. Select an axis.
2. Use the up and down arrows to set the
desired size in the x direction. There are three

ways to do this:
Use the mouse roller wheel to adjust the
dimension quickly
Use the arrows for more precise sizing
Key in a value for exact sizing of the region.
Repeat with the other axes.
Geometry Tools
3. When finished, click the Create button.
4-17
Geometry Tools
An external volume created with this tool becomes part of the analysis, and can
have boundary conditions, mesh sizes, etc. applied to it.
4.7.3
A validity check is performed after creation of an external volume. If an error is

found, the following message is written: An enclosing part could not be added
to the existing model. A pop-up dialog will show the option to undo the change
and restore the model to its original state.
Additionally, if possible, the error location will be marked graphically with an orange
dot. This dot will be removed from the display after leaving the External Volume
tab.
If a material could not be assigned to an external volume, a message indicating
that will be displayed. The only action is to remove the external volume. This is a
rare condition.
4-18
Geometry Tools
4.8
The Undo Button
The Undo button on the four Geometry Tools contains two levels of memory. The
first click of the Undo button will remove the most recent modification. For example, if Small Object Removal was applied, then Edge Merging, and then a Void Fill
region was created, clicking Undo will remove the Void Fill region. The second click
of Undo will remove all other geometry changes, and will restore the geometry to
its original state.
The Undo button works in the same manner on all four tools. It does not matter on
which tool the undo button is hit--the first time will remove the most recent modification. The next time will return the model to its original state.
Note that after the model is meshed (run), the Undo button has only a single stage,
and will restore the geometry to its original state.
4.9
Portability of Geometry Modifications
The modified geometry is stored within the cfd file as well as the original geometry.
Likewise, a support file contains both. When a support file is saved, the original
geometry (parasolid or acis only) is written to the working directory, and the modified geometry is contained within the support cfd file. Note that it is not possible to
export modified geometry as a separate file.
4.10
Geometry Tools in a Project
Each geometry tool is associative in a slightly different manner:
4-19
Geometry Tools
Modifications made by the Geometry Tools are associative. This means that within a
project, modifications made using the geometry tools will transfer (in addition to
analysis settings) when settings are transferred between analyses. Additionally,
when an existing analysis is re-launched after making a change in the CAD system,
any modifications using Geometry Tools in the original model will be reapplied (persist), as much as possible.
Geometry Tools
Edge Merging: The Include Angle value is associative between the analyses as
is the command to merge the edges. Specific edges are not associative between
analyses--only the tolerance.
Small Object Removal: Again, only the Minimum Allowable Object size and the
command to Remove are associative. Specific objects (sliver surfaces and/or
edges) are not associative between analyses.
Void Fill: On the target model, an attempt to construct caps using the same
edges as the source model is made. If successful, the command to create the internal void is then associative.
External Volume: An external volume of the same relative scale and shape is
constructed around the target model. Checks are performed to ensure that the volume does not contact the new model. The volume is rescaled automatically relative
to the modified model, to avoid any intersections.
4-20
CHAPTE R 5
5.1
Loads
Introduction
This chapter describes both the physical significance of loads as well as how to the
correctly assign them in the CFdesign user interface. Loads can be classified into
two categories: Boundary Conditions and Initial Conditions.
Examples of Boundary Conditions include a known velocity, volume flow or mass
flow rate at an inlet, a specified temperature, a heat flux or film coefficient or specified pressure. Boundary conditions are enforced through the entire course of an
analysis.
Examples of Initial Conditions include temperature, pressure, or humidity, and are
typically applied to larger regions of a model. Initial Conditions are only enforced at
the beginning of the analysis, and do not persist throughout the simulation. Initial
Conditions are most often used to specify the starting state of transient analyses.
Most of this chapter is dedicated to the physics and application of Boundary Conditions. Initial Conditions are very similar, and the specifics of using the Initial Conditions task dialog are discussed in a dedicated section toward the end of this
chapter.
5-1
Loads
5.2
Boundary Conditions Task Dialog
The Boundary Condition task and usage instructions are presented:
Choose the Selection Mode.

Select the entity.
Set the Type of condition.
Set the Units (if applicable).
Set the Time variation (Steady State or
Transient).
6. Apply condition-specific settings such as
Normal or Component for Velocity or Static or
Gage for Pressure.
7. Specify the value.
8. Change flow Direction, if applicable.
9. Click Apply to finish the command.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5-2
6
7
Note that different boundary condition types

require different (more or fewer) entries.
Other commands: The Remove button will
remove the boundary condition of the type
shown in the Type drop menu from the
selected entity or entities. The Remove All
button removes all boundary conditions from
the model.
Loads
5.3
Surface Boundary Conditions
Loads
5.3.1
Velocity
To apply velocity normal to a planar surface,

set the Method to Normal.
Enter the value in the Velocity Magnitude
field.
Reverse the flow by clicking the Reverse Normal button.
To apply velocity components, change the
Method to Component, and check the
desired components. Enter the velocity values
in the Magnitude boxes.
Click the Apply button to finish.
5.3.2
Rotational Velocity
This condition applies a rotating velocity to a wall, and is used for simulating a
rotating object surrounded by a fluid. An example is the rotating disk in a computer
5-3
Loads
hard drive. This condition does not induce flow caused by rotation (as in a pump
impeller), and is not a turbo-machinery condition.
Enter the velocity in the Rotation
Speed field.
To set the rotational axis, first set the
Point on Axis. Click the pop-out, and
select a surface. The centroid of the
selected surface will be a point on the
axis.
To set the Axis Direction, click the
pop-out. Choose the Global X, Y, or Z
axes to choose a Cartesian direction as
an axis direction.
To graphically set the direction, click
the Pick on button, and select a surface. The axis will be normal to the
selected surface.
5.3.3
Volume Flow Rate
A Volume Flow Rate is applied to a planar inlets

or outlets. The flow direction must be the same
when applying to multiple surfaces at the same
time.
Enter the value in the Volume Flow Rate
field; change the flow direction with the
Reverse Normal button.
5-4
Loads
5.3.4
Mass Flow Rate
Loads
A Mass Flow Rate is applied to a planar inlets or

outlets. The flow direction must be the same
when applying to multiple surfaces at the same
time.
Enter the value in the Mass Flow Rate field;
change the flow direction with the Reverse
Normal button.
5.3.5
Pressure
Enter the value in the Pressure field.

Select either Gage or Absolute.
Also select either Static or Total. (Default is
Static.)
The recommended pressure condition for most analyses is Gage, Static.

Gage is a relative pressure, and is the default. Absolute pressure is the sum of the
gage and the reference pressures (set in Materials).
Total pressure is the sum of the static pressure and the dynamic pressure, and generally should not be used for most incompressible analyses. For certain analyses,
such as some turbomachinery applications, the total pressure is physically constant
and the static pressure and velocity vary. For these analyses, applying a non-zero
total pressure boundary condition is a recommended strategy.
Total Pressure can also be used for some compressible analyses. Please see the discussion about Outlets in the Physical Boundary Section of this chapter.
5-5
Loads
5.3.6
Temperature
Enter the value in the Temperature field.

Select either Static or Total.
Static is the recommended temperature for
most analyses. Use total temperature as an
inlet temperature for compressible analyses
with heat transfer.
5.3.7
Slip/Symmetry
Select surfaces, and click the Apply button to assign a Slip condition. There is no
value associated with the slip condition.
The slip condition allows fluid to flow along a wall (as opposed to stopping at the
wall as in a non-slip condition). The fluid is prevented from flowing through the
wall. Slip walls are also useful for defining a symmetry plane. The symmetry region
does not have to be parallel to a coordinate axis. For axisymmetric analyses, the
symmetry condition along the axis is automatically set, and does not need to be
applied manually.
This boundary condition can be used with a very low viscosity to simulate Euler or
inviscid flow.
5.3.8
Unknown
Select surfaces, and click the Apply button to set an Unknown condition. There is no
value associated with the unknown condition.
This is a natural condition meaning that boundary is open, but no other constraints are applied.This is most used for supersonic outlets where the outlet pressure or velocity is not known, and applying either condition would result in shock
waves or expansion waves at the outlet.
5-6
Loads
5.3.9
Scalar
This is a unitless quantity ranging between 0

and 1 that represents the concentration of the
tracking (scalar) quantity.
Loads
5.3.10
Humidity

and 1 that represents relative humidity (1 corresponds to a humidity level of 100%).
5.3.11
Steam Quality

and 1 that represents the steam quality (1 corresponds to a quality of 100%--pure steam).
5.3.12
Heat Flux
Heat flux is a surface condition that imposes a

given amount of heat directly to the applied
surface. It is a heat value divided by area.
Specify the value in the Heat Flux field.
For example, if the heat input is 10W, and the area is 5 sq. inches, then the applied
value will be 10W/5 sq. inches = 2 W/sq. inch. Heat flux can be applied to outer
walls, to solid-solid interfaces, and to fluid-solid interfaces.
5-7
Loads
5.3.13
Total Heat Flux
Total Heat flux is a surface condition that

imposes a given amount of heat directly to the
applied surface.
Specify the value in the Total Heat Flux field.
This is a heat flux condition that is applied directly without having to divide by the
surface area. This is very important because the value does not have to be recalculated if the area of the applied surface is changed. Total heat flux can be applied to
outer walls, to solid-solid interfaces, and to fluid-solid interfaces.
5.3.14
Film Coefficient
This condition is most often used to simulate a

cooling effect.
Specify a film coefficient (convection coefficient) in the Film Coefficient field. Specify the
Reference Temperature and the desired
units.
5.3.15
Radiation
Specify the surface emissivity in the Emissivity field.

Specify the background temperature in the Ref
Temperature field.
This condition simulates the radiative heat transfer between the selected surface(s)
and a source external to the model. It is a sort of radiation film coefficient in that
it exposes a surface to a given heat load using a source temperature and a surface
condition.
5-8
Loads
5.3.16
External Fan
Loads
Enter the rotation speed of the fan in the

Rotational Speed field. Change the direction
with the Reverse Direction button. (Direction
is drawn with an arrow.)
Enter the fan curve by clicking the Fan Characteristic Edit button. This table described
below.
Enter a slip factor (between 0 and 1) in the
Slip Factor field.
Click Insert to add rows between defined
rows.
Click the Plot button to view the plot.
The Import button imports a comma separated variable (CSV) file, and the Save button
saves the curve information to a CSV file.
To enter a fan that pulls flow (at an outlet),
enter all flow rate and pressure values as negative.
The slip factor is the ratio of the true rotational speed of the flow to the rotational
speed of the fan blades. Due to inefficiencies in the fan, slip can result in a slower
flow tangential flow velocity than expected. CFdesign determines the flow tangential velocity component by multiplying the slip factor by the user-supplied fan rotational speed. The default slip factor is 1.0. This means that the rotational speed of
the flow is the same as the rotational speed of the fan.
5-9
Loads
5.3.17
Current
Used only to define a Joule heating analysis,

apply the Current to one end of the solid
through which Joule heating is occurring.
Current is a total current, not a current density.
Note: Joule heating is the generation of heat by passing an electric current through
a metal. Also known as resistance heating, this feature allows the simulation of
stove-top burner elements as well as electrical resistance heaters.
5.3.18
Voltage
Used only to define a Joule heating analysis,

apply the Voltage to the other end of the solid
through which Joule heating is occurring.
A value of 0 Volts is typically used.
Alternatively, a voltage difference can be applied to the solid to represent a potential difference. In this mode, do not specify a Current condition.
5.3.19
Periodic
The specified Periodic condition values are the

Pair ID and the Side ID. Use the same Pair ID
for both members of a pair, and use different
Side IDs for each member of a pair.
On the inlet periodic pair, for example, use a Pair ID of 1 on both sides, and assign
one side a Side ID of 1 and the other a Side ID of 2. On the outlet, assign a pair ID
of 2 to both members of the pair, but use a Side ID of 1 for one side and a Side ID
of 2 for the other. Do not use the same pair ID for surfaces that are not periodic
with one another.
Periodic boundary conditions (cyclic symmetry) enable the simulation of a single
passage of an axial or centrifugal turbomachine or of a non-rotating device with
repeating features (passages).
5-10
Loads
Periodic boundaries are always applied in pairs; the two members of a periodic pair
have identical flow distributions. The two members of a periodic pair must be geometrically similar.
Periodic pairs are used at the inlet and outlets of repeating devices:
Loads
Periodic Pair 1
Periodic Pair 2
Periodic boundary conditions are a convenient way to include the effect of multiple
repeating features in a simplified model. Because of the repeating geometry, the
flow upstream and downstream of a device will be the same for each passage.
5.3.20
Transparent
The radiation model allows for the computation of radiative heat transfer through
transparent media. The level of transmissivity of such media is defined as a material property on the Materials Task dialog. To simulate transparent media that is
completely immersed in the working fluid, only the material transmissivity needs to
be specified. To simulate transparency through surfaces on an exterior solid, the
Transparent boundary condition is also required:
This boundary condition is used to indicate that an exterior surface of a
solid part is transparent, allowing radiative energy to pass through it (such as
through a window). Exterior wall surfaces that do not have this condition are considered opaque, and will not allow radiative energy to pass through them, regardless of the value of transmissivity assigned to the material.
The only value needed is the Background
Temperature. This is the temperature of the
environment outside of the analysis domain.
5-11
Loads
An example of the application of this condition is to simulate a room heated by sunlight coming in through a window on an external wall of the model:
Room Temperature = 20 C
Window (solid part),

Ambient Temperature = 30 C
The temperature specified with this boundary condition is used to define the incoming radiation flux according to this equation:
""
= ( T background )
Transparent BCs should only be applied to external boundaries so that the incoming
flux is external to the analysis domain. This boundary condition can only be used
with transparent parts--parts that have a non-zero value of transmissivity.
Solar heating problems should not use transparent BCs because the set up of the
solar heating problem requires a sky dome and ground structure that define the
entire external boundaries. If windows are modeled in these cases, these transparent materials would be internal to the analysis domain which would make transparent boundary conditions inappropriate.
If an external transparent part is not assigned a transparent boundary condition,
the emissivity and transmissivity will automatically be set to 0 because the following relation is observed:
reflection = 1 - emissivity - transmissivity.
In such a case, the external boundary will be perfectly reflective (like a silver backing on a mirror) with the exterior of the model. This is done to conserve energy;
because no background temperature is defined, the heat loss or gain cannot be
computed.
Note that radiation must be enabled (on the Analyze dialog) for the Transparent
boundary condition to work.
5-12
Loads
The Background Temperature can be varied with time by clicking the Transient bullet, and specifying the time function.
5.4
Volumetric Boundary Conditions

Loads
5.4.1
Heat Generation
The Heat Generation condition is a volumetric heat load on a geometric volume.

The specified value must be divided by the volume of the part. This is most often used to
simulate the presence of heat-dissipating components in electronics assemblies.
For axisymmetric models, divide by the volume
of the revolved part (2 x Pi x Radius).
Specify the value in the Heat Generation
field.
5.4.2
Total Heat Generation
This is the recommended condition for most heat-load applications as the value
does not have to be adjusted if the part volume changes.
The Total Heat Generation condition is a heat
load that is not divided by part volume.
For axisymmetric models, the volume is based
on 1 radian, so divide the intended value by 2
Pi.
Specify the value in the Total Heat Generation field.
5-13
Loads
5.4.3
Temperature Dependent Heat Generation
This allows the heat generation to vary with temperature. Physically, such a condition is a thermostat, and allows for the simulation of a heating device that shuts off
(or greatly de-powers) once a target temperature is reached. Temperature-dependent heat generation is available for both volumetric and total heat generation
boundary conditions. The location of the sensing temperature can be set to be
either the centroid of the part or at some other user-selected location.
Change the Temperature Dependent
setting to Enabled. Open the Sensing
Location pop-out menu.
To choose the part centroid as the
sensing location, simply click the Part
Centroid button.
To select a different location, click the
Select Surface button, and click on a
surface. The centroid of that surface
will be the sensing location.
A temperature-dependent heat generation allows for the simulation of industrial
processes that operate within a narrow temperature band by adjusting the heat
input to maintain the target temperature.
Note: Heat Generation cannot vary with temperature and time simultaneously.
5-14
Loads
5.5
Transient Conditions
To make a boundary condition vary with time:
the variation.
There are seven variational methods, each
described below:
5.5.1
Loads
1. Change the Time to Transient.

2. Select the Time Curve method and define
Constant
Ramp Step
Periodic
Harmonic
Polynomial
Inverse Polynomial
Power Law
Piecewise Linear
Constant
The Constant variation method makes the value

unchanging throughout the calculation. The condition
does not change, unless the value is manually
changed.
5-15
Loads
5.5.2
Ramp Step
The Ramp-Step function combines a linear

ramp function with a flat step function.
Refer to the sketch below for the parameter
meanings. The T# values are the times that
inflections occur. The F# values are the min
and max of the variables. One cycle of this
function goes from T4 to T4.
The ramp step function should be specified
such that the maximum value (F1) occurs
first at time T1. At time T2, the value starts
to ramp down. At time T3, the function hits
its minimum value (F2). At time T4, the
value starts to ramp up.
5.5.3
Periodic
The Periodic type of boundary condition

is exponential in time. The Functional
Form is shown in the dialog.
Note that the function can be decaying in
time by entering negative values for the
B1 or B2 parameters. Also, only one
set of values is required, either A1,
B1 and C1 or A2, B2 and C2.
The default for all the parameters is
zero.
5-16
Loads
5.5.4
Harmonic
5.5.5
Loads
The Harmonic type of boundary condition

is similar to the Periodic except that the
variable is a function of sine and cosine
functions. As in Periodic, only one set of
values need to be specified: either the cos
or the sin values. Note that the cos and sin
functions do change sign, so negative values of the variable can result if improper
parameters are entered on this dialog.
Power Law
The Power Law function raises time to

an exponent value.
5-17
Loads
5.5.6
Polynomial and Inverse Polynomial
The Polynomial and Inverse Polynomial variational methods rely on a table

of data points. A curve is fitted to the
data using the specified order. Care
should be taken with higher order functions: Such polynomials contain inflection points which may cause the data to
change sign.
To check the curve fit of the polynomial
or inverse polynomial, click the Plot
button.
5.5.7
Piecewise Linear
The Piecewise Linear function type

connects the inputted data points with
linear segments, and interpolates
between them.
To make a function repeat for all time,
check the Repeating box.
5-18
Loads
5.6
Physical Boundary Types
This section describes the different kinds of physical boundaries and relates them to
the boundary condition types available in CFdesign.
Loads
5.6.1
Inlets
Inlets are most often defined with either non-zero velocity components
or a gage static pressure, or...
An inlet can be a fan. The inlet flow rate will vary with the pressure
drop through the device, or...
Volumetric flow rate can be assigned as an inlet condition, or...
Mass flow rate can be assigned as an inlet condition, or...
Total Pressure can be used at the inlet of supersonic flow models if that
is the only quantity known.
For heat transfer analyses, specify the temperature at all inlets.
For subsonic conditions at the inlet, specify velocity OR pressure, not
both.
For supersonic inlet conditions, specify both the velocity and the static
pressure. This is necessary only if the inlet is nearly sonic or faster. For
more information about Compressible analyses, please see the Analysis
Guidelines chapter of this manual.
For compressible flow analyses that include heat transfer, specify a
total temperature as well as a velocity and pressure.
When using a general scalar, specify the scalar at all inlets, even if the
value is zero.
To include swirl (an out of plane velocity component) in a 2D axisymmetric analysis, specify the third component of velocity (usually the z-component).
It is not necessary to specify turbulence quantities at any inlet. The
inlet turbulence intensity used to calculate the turbulent kinetic energy and
turbulent energy dissipation is set in the Turbulence menu launched from
the Options dialog.
5-19
Loads
5.6.2
Outlets
The recommended (and most convenient) outlet condition is a gage

static pressure with a value of 0. If this condition is used at an outlet, then
no other conditions should be applied to that outlet.
If the outlet velocity, mass flow rate, or volumetric flow rate is known,
then any of these conditions can be applied to the outlet. If this is done,
then a pressure must be specified at the inlet.
An external fan boundary condition pulling flow from the model can be
applied to an outlet.
If the outlet flow is supersonic, the Unknown boundary condition is
often the recommended condition. Unknown is a natural condition meaning that such an outlet is simply open, and no other conditions (velocity or
pressure) are enforced.
Outlet conditions should be positioned far enough downstream from
sudden turns or contractions to allow the flow to reach a fully developed
state, which is the condition assumed by CFdesign. Furthermore, if the outlet is too close to a sudden expansion, flow will come back in through the
outlet. This may cause convergence difficulties:
YES
NO
5.6.3
Walls
AutoWall sets wall conditions automatically on all surfaces that are not
defined as inlets, outlets, symmetry, slip, or unknown.
It is not necessary to set a zero velocity (no-flow) condition at any
fluid/solid interface.
5-20
Loads
Wall turbulence conditions are set automatically by CFdesign.

For heat transfer calculations, walls with no specified thermal boundary
conditions will be considered perfectly insulated.
Graphical Indications
Loads
5.7
Unlike most other analysis packages that use vectors or some number of symbols
to indicate the presence of a boundary condition, CFdesign uses colored stripes to
mark boundary conditions. The colors are defined in a legend that appears in the
lower left corner of the Graphics Window:
In this case, an orange stripe on the inlet face means that a Pressure is applied.
The green stripe on the inlet means that a temperature is applied. The green
stripes along the outer surfaces mean that a film coefficient is applied.
There is no need to memorize the meaning of the colors because they are always
defined in the legend. This legend only shows boundary condition types that have
been applied to the current model.
5-21
Loads
5.8
Feature Tree
All applied boundary conditions are listed on the Model mode of the feature tree:
These listings are very helpful for checking, editing, and deleting loads.
To highlight an entity with an applied condition, left click your mouse
on an entity ID--it will appear red in the Graphics window.
To edit an applied condition, right click on the condition, and select
Edit. The task will change to the Boundary Condition task, and the entity
will be selected.
To delete an applied condition, right click it and select Delete.
To delete all applied conditions, right click on the top-level Boundary

Conditions branch, and select Delete All.
5-22
Loads
5.9
Initial Conditions
5.9.1
Applying Initial Conditions
Choose the Selection Mode.

Select the entity.
Set the Type of condition.
Set the Units (if applicable).
Check to Re-initialize the condition if necessary.
6. Specify the value.
7. Apply condition-specific settings such as
Static or Total for Temperature or Static or
Gage for Pressure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3
5
6
7
Note that different initial condition types

require different (more or fewer) entries.
Other commands: The Remove button will remove the boundary condition of the
type shown in the Type drop menu from the selected entity or entities. The
Remove All button removes all boundary conditions from the model.
5-23
Loads
Unlike boundary conditions, initial conditions are only enforced at the beginning of
the analysis. They are primarily used for transient analyses, but sometimes they
are useful for steady state analyses (temperature, in particular).
Loads
There are seven quantities that can be applied as initial conditions: Velocity, Pressure, Temperature, Scalar, Humidity, Steam Quality, and Height of Fluid. All can be
applied to surfaces or volumes, except Height of Fluid, which on a volumetric condition.
Note that applying a Height of Fluid condition marks a region as containing fluid,
and activates the Height of Fluid function in the Solver. See Chapter 14 for more
details about Height of Fluid analyses. Details for the other quantities are described
in the preceding Boundary Condition sections.
It is generally not recommended to apply a velocity initial condition to a steadystate flow analysis. Studies have shown that the best initial velocity for most
steady-state flow calculations is the default of 0.
5.9.2
Re-Initialize
Checking the Re-Initialize check box resets a quantity on a selected entity of the
analysis model. This box is accessible only after the analysis has been run.
Normally, initial conditions only take effect on a model when the analysis is first
started (either from iteration 0 or from time 0). When the Re-initialize box is
checked, however, all of the applied initial conditions will take effect again. This
allows the user to discard a result quantity on an analysis while preserving other
results fields. It also allows the user to apply an initial condition to all or part of the
model mid-run--even though some iterations have already been completed.
An example of the use of this feature is if a flow solution is run to completion, and
then the user realizes that an initial temperature condition is necessary for the subsequent transient thermal portion of the analysis. To accomplish this, simply apply
the desired temperature initial condition, check the Re-initialize box, and run the
thermal portion of the analysis. The initial condition will be applied to the model,
and the analysis will proceed.
The Re-initialize check box will be cleared automatically after the analysis is
started. This is to prevent unwanted re-initialization in subsequent re-starts of the
analysis.
5-24
CHAPTE R 6
6.1
Mesh Sizes
Introduction
Prior to running a CFdesign analysis, the geometry has to be broken up into small,
manageable pieces called elements. The corner of each element is called a node,
and it is at each node that a calculation is performed. All together these elements
and nodes comprise the mesh (also known as the finite element mesh).
In three dimensional models, each element is a tetrahedral: a four sided, triangular-faced element. In two dimensional models, each element is a triangle. Both are
shown:
Constructing these elements into the geometry is done automatically by the software, so that step does not require any work on the part of the user. What the user
needs to do, however, is tell the software what element size(s) to use, and where
to use them. There is a lot of flexibility to this, and the following sections help to
define what sort of mesh size is required and how to apply it.
To help identify and locate problem areas in CAD geometry, CFdesign incorporates
a new Geometry Diagnostics utility into the analysis process. This function interrogates the geometry in a very detailed manner to determine the location of potential
problem areas. These areas may cause difficulty in the determination of mesh
sizes, the mesh generation, and even in the solution stability of the analysis.
One of the questions most often asked by new (and experienced) users of CAE tools
(including CFdesign), is what mesh sizes should they apply to their analysis models.
6-1
Mesh Sizes
Techniques based on geometry shape as well as anticipated flow behavior have

been developed and communicated, but mesh sizing is still an area that confounds
many casual users.
In CFdesign, a geometry-based, automatic mesh sizing facility has been developed
that solves this problem. This facility performs a comprehensive topological interrogation of the geometric model, and assigns mesh sizes based on curvature, geometric gradients, and neighboring features. Building on this automation, extrusion
meshing has also been implemented to greatly facilitate the meshing of long,
skinny parts such as pipes and heat sinks.
6.2
Geometry Diagnostics
The Diagnostics function searches for surfaces that are extremely thin and edges
that are extremely small relative to the rest of the model. In many cases, these
entities are caused by poor geometry creation practices, a lack of design intent, or
are the result of multiple format conversions throughout the life of the design
model.
Diagnostics is a selection Type on the Meshing task. The controls for each selection
mode perform different actions, but all are designed to help identify problems and/
or simplify the analysis model:
6-2
Mesh Sizes
6.2.1
Part Mode Diagnostics
Parts are omitted from an analysis by Suppressing them in the Diagnostics dialog:
Set the Selection mode to Volume. (In 2D,
surfaces will be selected and can be suppressed.)
Select parts that are to be excluded from the
analysis model.
Click the Suppress Selected Part(s) button.
To resume a suppressed part, select it, and
click the Resume Selected Part(s) button.
Mesh Sizes
To resume all suppressed parts, click the

Resume All Parts button.
Suppressed parts will appear with the word Suppressed in the Mesh branch of the
feature tree.
They will also be colored light blue to differentiate them from active parts.
When parts are suppressed or resumed after mesh sizes are assigned, a recalculation of the mesh distribution will automatically occur on the modified model. If the
suppressed or resumed parts do not appreciably change the Minimum Refinement
6-3
Mesh Sizes
Length, then the mesh distribution will automatically be recalculated after leaving
the Part mode of the Diagnostics tab.
If the Minimum Refinement Length is affected, then a message will come up indicating this, and the mesh distribution will not be recalculated until another task is
opened or the analysis is saved. This allows modification of the Minimum Refinement Length on the Edge mode. The mesh distribution can be rebuilt by opening
the Automatic tab, and clicking either the Automatic Size or Play Macro button or by
changing tasks.
6.2.2
Surface Mode Diagnostics
Surface mode Diagnostics identifies potentially problematic surfaces that may lead
to meshing difficulties. Examples of such surfaces include slivers, very thin annular
surfaces, and surfaces with a cusp or tangency region.
Annulus
Sliver
6.2.2.1
Cusp
Problematic Surfaces
Surfaces are deemed problematic based on the separation distance between

edges. The variation of separation distances is assessed to determine a minimum
threshold. All surfaces with an edge separation distance below this threshold are
considered potentially problematic, and are shaded.
Extremely high-aspect ratio surfaces such as slivers and annuli have edges that are
very close to each other within the separation distance. Surfaces that contain tangencies may be mostly well formed, but can be considered problematic because of
the tangency between two or more edges.
Problematic surfaces have been the reason for many meshing failures or solution
problems due to a badly distorted mesh. Identifying and locating them before
attempting to run the analysis is essential to reducing wasted time and effort. This
6-4
Mesh Sizes
dialog provides two ways of dealing with problematic surfaces: identification and
refinement.
6.2.2.2
Identification
The first function, identification, is performed by coloring the surfaces orange. A

slider on the dialog varies the edge separation distance from the threshold to the
minimum. By moving the slider to the left, the display is restricted to progressively
smaller surfaces until the far left position--which shows the very smallest surface or
surfaces. Displayed problematic surfaces can then be added to a group and saved
to an external text file for reference. The text file makes it convenient to locate the
surfaces in the CAD model and apply a fix.
Mesh Sizes
Keep in mind that the principal objective of Surface Diagnostics is to locate the
smallest surfaces in the model. Such surfaces are often unintentional surfaces that
will make meshing difficult or impossible. However, there are situations in which
small surfaces are intentional, and cannot be removed. In some cases, surfaces
may be identified that are simply the smallest surface in the model, without having
any inherent flaw. In this case, they will likely be ignored by the Automatic Refinement. In other cases, very small surfaces are identified that are truly high aspectratio slivers, and will be refined automatically to ensure the successful creation of a
quality mesh.
6-5
Mesh Sizes
6.2.2.3
Automatic Refinement
The second function is Automatic Refinement. This is an attribute that is assigned

to high aspect-ratio surfaces that causes them to be refined automatically by the
Automatic Mesh Sizing facility. This is used primarily for surfaces that fit the following criteria:
Very high aspect-ratio (longer and thin)

Close proximity to larger surfaces
This function is fully automatic, and only affects high aspect-ratio surfaces. Its purpose is to ensure that such surfaces are meshed finely enough so that the specified
mesh sizes do not significantly exceed the dimensions of the surface. These
reduced length scales are then propagated to the surrounding entities, resulting in
a smooth transition.
After Automatic Mesh sizing has occurred, surfaces that will be automatically
refined are shaded in an olive color.
Extreme transitions have been found to have a detrimental effect on both the generation of the mesh as well as the solution accuracy.
6-6
Mesh Sizes
6.2.2.4
Surface Diagnostics Process
When the CAD model is first read into CFdesign, the geometry is scanned and problematic surfaces are identified. If found, the controls in the dialog are available to
identify and store them to a text file or group:
The Status group indicates if any problem
surfaces are found. Only problem surfaces
are then displayed, and are colored orange
for clarity. The Arrows check box toggles
arrows that point to the small surfaces.
(Note: the surfaces highlighted by default
are considered for automatic refinement.)
See Note 1 below.
Mesh Sizes
Use the Highlight Surfaces slider to vary

the edge separation distance. Moving to the
left reduces the separation distance, and
shows the smallest surfaces.
Change the displayed maximum edge separation by keying a new value in the Max Size
field. This is useful for showing more surfaces. Restore the default value with the
Restore Default Max button.
Save the displayed surfaces to an external
text file with the Save to a Text File button.
See Note 2 below.
Add surfaces identified as problematic to a
group with the Save to a Group button.
Note 1: All surfaces are blanked except the problem surfaces, right clicking in the
Graphics window will redisplay all surfaces; clicking on the slider will blank all but
the problem surfaces again.
6-7
Mesh Sizes
Note 2: The filename of the text file containing small surfaces is the analysis name
followed by the word surface. If the analysis name is run1, then the text file will
be run1-surface.txt.
6.2.3
Edge Mode Diagnostics
Edge Mode Diagnostics locates edges that are extremely small relative to other
edges in the geometry. Variations in edge length greater than several orders of
magnitude are often indicative of a geometric problem which may cause difficulty
for the mesher. The distribution of edge length values throughout the model is also
calculated, and is then used to determine the Minimum Refinement Length as
used by the mesher.
The Minimum Refinement Length is the threshold edge size that will be allowed to
influence the mesh in neighboring features. Edges that are below this size will be
meshed, but will only have a node at each end. Such small edges are meshed with
a single small element, but that small element size will not propagate to other features in the model.
The Edge Mode dialog provides two mechanisms for dealing with extremely small
edges: Identification of small edges and Adjustment of the Minimum Refinement
Length.
6.2.3.1
Small Edge Identification
When the model is first opened, all edges that are three orders of magnitude or
more smaller than the largest edge in the model are identified, and the slider can
be used to vary the highlighted size.
A default Minimum Refinement Length is automatically determined based on
relative edge lengths throughout the model. This value is shown in the Min Refinement Length field in the dialog, and is the default slider position. When the slider is
at this position, all highlighted edges fall below this value, and will only be meshed
with two nodes.
Note: If a large number of edges are smaller than the Minimum Refinement
Length, it may be necessary to reduce its value. In such cases, the Mesh
task dialog will open directly to the Edge Diagnostic panel, and many
6-8
Mesh Sizes
edges will be marked with arrows. Reducing the Minimum Refinement

Length will improve the chances of successfully generating a mesh.
If no edges are less than three orders of magnitude smaller, then the slider will be
grayed out.
6.2.3.2
Adjustment of the Minimum Refinement Length
The Minimum Refinement Length provides control over whether (and to what
extent) smaller length scales propagate throughout the mesh. This feature does not
remove small features, but can limit their effect upon local length and mesh scales.
6-9
Mesh Sizes
Edges that are the current size indicated by the slider and smaller are highlighted.
Mesh Sizes
As an example, the model shown has four very small edges at the corners of the
cut-out. Each edge is highlighted, and is identified with an arrow:
Edges that are shorter than the default Minimum Refinement Length are meshed
coarsely, and do not affect neighboring geometry
To increase the refinement on
small edges, and hence
INCLUDE their effect in the
model:
Reduce the Minimum Refinement Length to a value LESS

than the length of the particular edge.
This will improve the mesh on very small features, but may increase the number of
nodes and elements in your analysis model. This is necessary if significant edges
fall below the default Minimum Refinement Length. In the image below, the Minimum Refinement Length is set to be smaller than the length of the four small
edges. Notice their effect on the mesh:
6-10
Mesh Sizes
Edges that are longer than the default Minimum Refinement Length are meshed
finer, and do affect neighboring geometry.
To decrease the refinement
on such an edge, and hence
EXCLUDE its effect on the
model:
Increase the Minimum Refinement Length to a value

GREATER than the length of the
particular edge.
In the image below, the Minimum Refinement Length is set to be larger than the
small edges. The mesh distribution will be considerably more coarse. The edges will
be meshed, but will not strongly affect the mesh on surrounding geometry:
Mesh Sizes
Changes to the Minimum Refinement Length affect the model globally, and are not
isolated to a particular location. Care must be taken so that the Minimum Refinement Length is not accidently made larger than other important edges elsewhere in
the model. Doing so will effectively remove their influence on the mesh, and may
lead to accuracy issues.
Note that if the Minimum Refinement Length is changed after applying Automatic
Mesh Sizing, the mesh distribution must be reapplied by clicking the Automatic Size
button. Otherwise, the new Minimum Refinement Length will not affect the mesh
distribution.
6-11
Mesh Sizes
6.2.3.3
Edge Diagnostics Process
When the CAD model is first loaded, all edges are scanned and a Minimum Refinement Length is determined. If any edges are shorter than this length, the controls
in the dialog are active, and the edges are highlighted.
The Status group indicates that edges three
orders of magnitude smaller than the longest
edge exist with the message Potential Problems Found. The Arrows check box toggles
arrows that point to all small edges to help
locate them.
Use the Highlight Edges slider to vary the
edge length. Move to the left to reduce the
length; the far left position shows the smallest edge in the model.
Change the maximum displayed edge length
by keying a new value in the Max Size field.
This is useful for showing more edges.
Restore the default value with the Restore
Default Max button.
Save the displayed edges to an external text
file with the Save to a Text File button. The
text file containing edges will be automatically named: analysisname-edges.txt.
Add the displayed edges to a group with the
Save to a Group button.
If necessary, change the Minimum Refinement Length by either keying in a new value
or by clicking the Use Highlight Length button. The default value can be restored with
the Restore Minimum Length Scale button.
6-12
Mesh Sizes
6.3
Fully Automatic Mesh Sizing
CFdesign provides a completely automatic mode of mesh definition. By completely

skipping the Mesh dialog from your analysis set-up, the mesh distribution will automatically be computed when the analysis is started. The process is automatic and
seamless.
Specifically, the Interface detects that the Automatic Size button has not been
pressed, and that no mesh sizes were assigned manually. The default Minimum
Refinement Length will be used, and all critically small surfaces will automatically
be compensated for in the mesh (using the Surface Refinement scheme described
in Surface Diagnostics).
Automatic/Interactive Mesh Sizing
The controls in the Automatic tab of the Mesh task dialog allow automatic mesh size
assignment, local user-controlled refinement (or coarsening), and mesh extrusion
for linear, uniform cross section parts.
The benefits to this facility are numerous:
Greatly simplified set-up of analysis models resulting in less time spent
assigning mesh sizes.
More efficient mesh distributions--the mesh is fine where required, and
coarse where it can be.
Improved solution accuracy due to better mesh quality and mesh transitions.
Improved solution robustness--good mesh transitions lead to a wellposed mathematical model.
6-13
Mesh Sizes
6.4
Mesh Sizes
Assigning mesh sizes is now a one step process (with two optional steps):
1. Click the Automatic Size button.
With a push of the Automatic Size button, CFdesign performs a comprehensive

topological interrogation of the analysis geometry and determines the mesh size
and distribution on every edge, surface, and volume in the model. Geometric curvature, gradients, and proximity to neighboring geometry are all considered when
assigning element sizes and mesh distributions.
It does not matter which selection mode (volume, surface, or edge) is active when
this button is clicked.
This process is fast, but can take a few minutes for larger geometries containing
3000 or more edges.
6-14
Mesh Sizes
Models with Automatic Sizing mesh distributions are shown:
Mesh Sizes
6-15
Mesh Sizes
The mesh distributions on each of these cases were computed automatically simply
by clicking the Automatic Size button. Note that surfaces and edges with high curvature are meshed finer, and those with little or no curvature are meshed coarser.
Edges that are close to other edges are assigned smaller element sizes which can
even vary along the span of the edge.
Note that if the Minimum Refinement Length (on the Edge Diagnostics panel) is
changed after applying Automatic Sizing, a message will prompt the user to reapply
Automatic Sizing. If Auto Sizing is not invoked again, the mesh distribution will not
be affected by the modified Minimum Refinement Length.
The dots drawn on the model indicate how the actual mesh will appear on the
model. The location and spacing of the dots does not change if the Selection Mode
is changed. If there are edges in a model that do not have dots, this is a sign that
the surfaces are not meshable. This is usually caused by extremely thin surfaces or
some other geometric flaw. This should be corrected in the CAD model prior to running the analysis.
The display of the dots is controlled with a toggle (Show Mesh Seeds) on the Window menu.
After sizing is invoked, there are two optional steps available:
Select entities for refinement by switching the selection mode, and
graphically selecting them. Use the Size Adjustment slider.
Select volumes for extrusion meshing. The Extrusion controls are available only when volumes eligible for extrusion are selected.
6.5
Size Adjustment
The underlying criteria for the Automatic Mesh Sizing facility is the geometry. Mesh
is automatically concentrated in regions of high curvature and rapid size variation.
In certain situations, however, significant flow gradients in a simple geometric
region may require a finer mesh than assigned by the Facility.
An example is a volume constructed in the wake region in an aerodynamics model.
The volume is quite simple, so its automatically-defined mesh will be coarse.
6-16
Mesh Sizes
Because the flow will be quite energetic, and will have high gradients, a finer mesh
is required:
A mechanism is provided that allows for the local adjustment of automatically

assigned mesh sizes on volumes, surfaces, and edges after Automatic Sizing has
been invoked.
face, or Edge), then select the desired entities.
Mesh Sizes
1. Set the selection mode (Volume, Sur-
2. Use the Size Adjustment slider to
refine or coarsen the mesh on the selected

entities. The size preview points will update
as the slider is moved.
3. To apply a uniform mesh on a part, click

the Use Uniform button.
4. Click the Apply button to confirm the

changes.
5. All adjustments (including Uniformity)
since the last Spread Changes can be undone

by clicking the Cancel button.
6. When all adjustments are made, click the
2
3
Spread Changes button. This function

recalculates the mesh distributions throughout the model to reconcile applied changes
with the mesh on neighboring geometry.
6-17
Mesh Sizes
The process is illustrated:
Original mesh size on wake region.
6.5.1
Mesh refined to 0.4 on wake region.
Slider
The slider uses a parametric scale that extends between 0.2 and 5, with a default
position of 1.0. This allows the mesh size to be reduced to 1/5th or increased to as
much as 5 times the original size. To apply a value that exceeds the minimum or
maximum range, (smaller than 0.2 or larger than 5), type the scaling value into the
field to the right of the slider.
As the slider is moved, the modified distribution updates dynamically. After deciding on a desired slider position, click the Apply button. This ensures that the setting will be available in the replay Macro file (used for rebuilding the mesh
distribution and when settings are applied to modified geometry).
The Cancel button will return the slider position to 1--effectively undoing any
adjustments made to an entity after either the automatic size specification or since
the last Spread Changes command.
Note that the mesh quality constraints embedded in this system may override
adjustments that excessively coarsen the mesh. This is done to prevent a mesh
definition that will result in a poor-quality or failed mesh.
6.5.2
Spread Changes
When the Spread Changes button is pushed, all modified settings are resolved
with neighboring settings to ensure proper element transitions. The slider position
for each adjusted entity resets to 1--the middle of the slider range. This means that
6-18
Mesh Sizes
the newly assigned size becomes the default size for subsequent adjustments. Note
that the slider does not reset when the Apply button is pressed.
In general, however, the Spread Changes button should be used sparingly because
pushing it initiates a complete recalculation of the mesh distribution. If Spread
Changes is not pressed prior to leaving the Meshing dialog, the function will be
invoked automatically when the analysis is started or when the analysis is saved.
6.5.3
Uniform Sizing
After the Use Uniform button is clicked, the slider will reset to 1. This allows subsequent modification of the size on the entity.
Uniformity can be removed from an entity by selecting it and clicking the Cancel
button IF this is done prior to hitting the Spread Changes button. After Spread
Changes is clicked, Uniformity cannot be removed directly from the model.
6.5.4
Play Macro
The relationship between size adjustment on entities and the recalculation of neighboring length scales when the Spread Changes button is selected is quite complex.
This makes it potentially difficult to exactly recreate a mesh distribution on a complicated model if multiple adjustments occurred.
To facilitate this process, a log file containing all size adjustment commands is
automatically recorded when Automatic Sizing is invoked. Every size adjustment
and instance of the Spread Changes button is recorded, and can be played back to
exactly reproduce a mesh distribution on a given model.
The file is first created when the Apply button is clicked after adjusting a size, and
commands are automatically appended as they are issued. When the Delete All
6-19
Mesh Sizes
A uniform mesh distribution can be applied to an entity by selecting it, and clicking
the Use Uniform button. This command modifies the underlying length scales
throughout the entity to be the same, based on the smallest length scale on the
object. It is not necessarily persistent, however, and subsequent changes to neighboring entities can cause the mesh to again vary. For this reason, we recommend
that Uniformity is applied after other adjustments have been made.
Mesh Sizes
button is hit, the mesh distribution is removed from the model, and the Play Macro
button becomes active. Click it to re-assign the mesh distribution to the model.
Invoke the file by clicking the Play Macro button. The button is available when a
mesh distribution containing adjustments did exist, but was deleted. It is also available if the distribution is deleted, and the Automatic Size button is pressed, and will
overlay saved adjustments over the default mesh distribution.
This assigns the exact mesh distribution that was previously saved. Note that a
specific macro should only be applied to the same geometry. Applying this file to a
different geometry will lead to unexpected results.
The file is named with the analysis name with the extension .meshlog. To use a
mesh log with another analysis based on the same geometry, copy the meshlog file
to the new analysis name, and click the Play Macro button.
The macro file is stored with the analysis file, and a copy is extracted to the working
directory when the analysis is opened. If a macro file exists for that analysis, it will
be overwritten by the one extracted from the analysis file. When an analysis is
closed, the macro file in the working directory is copied into the analysis file. If
there is no macro file in the working directory, then any macro file in the analysis
file will be deleted. If the analysis is closed but not saved, the external copy of the
macro file is not packed into the analysis file.
A macro file can be deleted through the CFdesign interface in these three ways:
1. Click the Automatic Size button when the model has a distribution that
has been adjusted with the Size Adjustment slider. This resets the distribution throughout the model to the default, deleting the macro file.
2. After deleting the mesh distribution, click the Automatic Size button,
and adjust sizes. The first click of the Automatic Size button can be followed by
clicking the Play Macro button to overlay it on the model. If, however, sizes are
adjusted after hitting the Automatic Size button but prior to hitting the Play Macro
button, the macro will be removed because a new adjustment strategy is assumed.
3. After deleting the mesh distribution, click the Automatic Size button
twice. As mentioned in step 2, the first click of the Automatic Size button can be
followed by clicking the Play Macro button. If the Automatic Size button is clicked
again, however, the macro is removed.
6-20
Mesh Sizes
6.5.5
General Guidelines
This is a summary of the areas in which manual refinement is often recommended:

Distributed Resistance Regions: In general, three elements through
the width of a distributed resistance is recommended for best accuracy. For
very thin geometry, this may not be practical. Some modifications were
made in CFdesign v9 that improve the accuracy through a coarse mesh in a
distributed resistance to about 20% or better.
Internal Fans: The mesh distribution in an internal fan should be
adjusted to produce at least two elements in the flow direction of the fan.
Wake Regions: Illustrated above, geometry constructed in highvelocity or high-gradient regions should be refined to ensure adequate representation of the flow physics. In some models, a uniform mesh distribution is useful, especially if the default distribution has a lot of variation. Use
the Use Uniform button to apply a uniform mesh.
Motion Path: The mesh distribution in the path of a moving object
should be refined as described in the Motion Chapter of the Users Guide.
This will allow the velocity and pressure distributions to be calculated properly and prevents mesh bleed-through. A uniform mesh is often recommended for the motion path, and is prescribed using the Use Uniform
button.
Rotating Regions: A uniform mesh should be used when possible on a
rotating region. This is recommended because the default automatic sizing
will often cause the initial position of the impeller to influence the mesh on
the rotating region, potentially causing problems as the impeller rotates.
With a uniform mesh on the region, the mesh will not skew the results.
6.6.1
Refinement Regions
The Basics
One of the basic guidelines of constructing an analysis model is to ensure that the
mesh distribution throughout the model is sufficiently fine or coarse to support the
flow and temperature gradients efficiently. In regions where the flow moves in a
single direction without much gradient, a coarser mesh will often suffice. In regions
where the flow has a degree of circulation and gradients, a finer mesh is often
6-21
Mesh Sizes
6.6
Mesh Sizes
required. Examples of such flow phenomena include wakes, separation/reattachment zones, and circulation vortices.
Assigning a locally finer mesh is not difficult if there were geometric features in the
vicinity of the high-gradient region. If there is no geometry in a particular region, in
versions prior to v10, there were two alternatives: assign a fine mesh distribution
to a large part of the model to ensure that the local region is fine enough or create
additional geometry in the CAD model that can be used to hold a locally fine distribution.
The problem with the former alternative is that a much larger mesh can be generated, resulting in longer than necessary analysis times.
The problem with the latter is that it results in geometric features that are irrelevant to the original CAD model because they are only necessary for the simulation
model. Adding such refinement parts to the CAD model can lead to additional versions of the geometry that need to be maintained within a companys PLM or PDM
system.
This problem has been addressed through the addition of Mesh Refinement
Regions. These regions are created within the CFdesign User Interface as a way to
provide additional control for the mesh distribution, without the need for supplemental geometry in the CAD model.
Mesh Refinement Regions are rectangular volumes (or surfaces for 2D models) that
hold a mesh distribution. They are only used to make the local mesh finer. It is
important to note that Refinement Regions are not real geometry, and as such cannot hold any other settings (such as materials or boundary conditions).
Refinement Regions are available for models from all CAD types and launch methods.
6-22
Mesh Sizes
6.6.2
The Process
In the model shown, a wake downstream of the car will require a locally finer mesh
in that region. There is no geometry on which a finer distribution can be specified,
so the resulting mesh is likely too coarse to adequately resolve the wake:
Begin by assigning a mesh distribution to the model (Automatic Size button on

the Mesh task).
6-23
Mesh Sizes
To create a Refinement Region in the anticipated wake area downstream of the car,
follow this procedure:
Mesh Sizes
Open the Mesh Refinement Regions dialog by clicking the Regions button on the
Meshing dialog.
1. Click the Add button to create a region.

2. Define the region size with the X, Y, and Z bullets and the Positive and Negative Direction
adjustment boxes. Move the region in the active
direction using the Move slider.
Hint: The adjustment boxes dial in the coordinate

locations of each dimension of the region. Adjust this
by keying-in a value, changing it with the arrows, or
using the mouse roller wheel.
The following steps apply if Automatic Sizing is used:

3
3. Click the Get Local Mesh Size button. This ini-
tializes the mesh size on the region to be the smallest length from its surroundings that is included
within the region.
4
5
4. Refine the mesh density with the slider.

5. Click the Spread Changes button to see the
effect of the region on the surrounding mesh distributions.

If manual mesh sizing is used, key in an element
size in the field shown in step 4, and hit the Enter
key.
Create additional regions as needed by clicking the Add button, and repeating the
process.
If a Refinement Region is moved or resized after sizes are assigned, the sizes will
be removed, and the distributions will no longer appear on the region. This is to
ensure that the relative sizes (between the region and the surroundings) are always
consistent with each other.
6-24
Mesh Sizes
Note that multiple regions can exist within a model, and they can overlap and even
extend outside of the original model (although no elements are created outside of
the original geometry).
The Refinement Region, refined mesh, and results are shown:
Mesh Sizes
It is important to note that the flow solution may take longer to develop within
Refinement Regions due to the finer mesh.
6-25
Mesh Sizes
6.7
6.7.1
Extrusion
Introduction
Historically, tet-meshing high-aspect-ratio geometry requires a large number of

elements, and a long calculation time. In CFdesign, a much more efficient method
for meshing such geometry is introduced in the form of extrusion meshing.
The extrusion function in CFdesign stretches triangular faces into multiple layers of
wedge (prism) elements through the length of three dimensional parts with a uniform cross section. Extrusion meshing often greatly reduces the element count in
high aspect-ratio parts, and improves flow accuracy in models dominated by form
drag, such as pipe flow.
Extruded meshes are structured meshes, but can contact or even be immersed in
regions meshed with unstructured tetrahedrals. This is called non-conformal
meshing, and is a condition in which the nodes in the extruded section do not line
up automatically with the surrounding mesh. CFdesign detects and deals with this
situation automatically. Because of the bookkeeping that this requires, it is not possible to change the mesh in a model containing extruded regions and continue from
a saved analysis. When the mesh is changed, it is necessary to start the analysis
back at the beginning.
Assuming the geometric constraints are met, extrusion meshes can be used on
moving objects and for solids in rotating regions (such as fan blades), but not the
rotating region itself.
Extrusion meshes cannot, however, be used for models with radiation.
The default advection scheme is recommended when using extrusion.
6-26
Mesh Sizes
6.7.2
Examples
Some examples of extruded meshes are shown:

A pipe with extruded mesh contacting a tet-meshed block. The element
faces on the circular end of the pipe
that contacts the block are extruded
down the length of the pipe.
It is immersed in air that is tet meshed.

The nodes do not line up, but the two
parts are automatically linked computationally.
A rectangular box is extrusion

meshed. There are three extrusion
directions available for this box, and
the Extrusion dialog allows selection
of the desired one.
6-27
Mesh Sizes
This heat sink is extrusion meshed:
Mesh Sizes
6.7.3
Assigning Extrusion
In its most automatic form, the Extrusion capability computes both the end mesh
distribution and layer growth based on the geometry. Manual controls are also provided that enable control of layer growth, end biasing, and the number of extrusion
layers.
Available after Automatic Mesh Sizing has been invoked, select one or more volumes for extrusion, and click the Extrude Mesh button:
The Extrude Mesh button is active only when at least one volume eligible for extrusion has been selected. A set of guidelines describing extrusion eligibility are given
below.
Clicking the Extrude Mesh button opens the Extrusion dialog.
The Automatic check box controls the operation of the dialog: when it is enabled,
the Automatic Sizing controls the number of layers and the end layer sizes. When
disabled, additional controls are available.
6-28
Mesh Sizes
6.7.3.1
Automatic Enabled
In this mode, the Automatic Sizing feature matches the layer sizes originating at
each end of the part with the length scales used in the surface mesh at each
respective end.
Mesh Sizes
1. Modify the growth with the Growth

slider if more or less layer stretching is
desired. The default is 1.3.
2. Select the Extrusion Direction, if
applicable.
3. While this dialog is open, the interactive Extrusion Preview line will show on the
model.
4. Click OK.
OK closes the dialog, and assigns Extrusion to the selected part(s).
Note: Before applying extrusion to multiple identical parts in which it is critical that
the mesh be identical, select the end surfaces of each channel, and click the Use
Uniform button. This will help ensure that the mesh through passages such as heat
sink channels or pipe rows will be equivalent.
6-29
Mesh Sizes
6.7.3.2
Automatic Disabled
In this mode, more control is provided for the layering.
1. Modify the growth with the Growth

slider if more or less layer stretching is
desired. The default is 1.3.
2. Select the Extrusion Direction, if
applicable.
3. Select the type of End Layering.
4. Select the number of Layers.
5. While this dialog is open, the interactive Extrusion Preview line will show on the
model.
6. Click OK.
OK closes the dialog, and assigns Extrusion to the selected part(s).
6.7.3.3
Extrusion Preview
A Preview Line is drawn through the part to indicate the layers. This is interactive,
and updates as settings in the Extrusion dialog are adjusted. While this dialog is
open, surfaces will blank on the active parts by right clicking on them to allow visibility of the preview. The Preview line below shows the extrusion for a Growth setting of 1:
6-30
Mesh Sizes
6.7.3.4
Growth
The Growth slider controls the degree of layer stretching through the part. When
Automatic is enabled, the amount of acceptable growth also determines the number of layers. The growth value is a constraint which governs the maximum rate
which the element layers can grow from one element to the next. The range of this
slider is from 1.0 to 2, with a default of 1.3. At the minimum setting (1.0), the layers will be nearly the same size:
The amount of growth from one layer to the next can be described with this equation:
( y ) ( g ) ( x )
x = amount of growth of a layer
y = amount of growth of next layer
g = growth parameter
6-31
Mesh Sizes
At the default growth (1.3), the layers will be approximately 30% larger in the part
center:
Mesh Sizes
At the maximum setting (2), the layers will be quite large relative to the ends:
When Automatic is unchecked, the number of layers is controlled with the Layers
slider. The Growth parameter behaves differently than when Automatic is enabled,
and does not represent a constraint. Growth values in the range of 20-50 are not
considered extreme in many cases.
6.7.3.5
Extrusion Direction
The Extrusion Direction menu is available if:
A single part is selected AND

There are multiple possible extrusion directions, such as in a box.
If multiple parts with more than one potential extrusion direction are selected,
CFdesign will automatically select the extrusion direction that is most closely
aligned with the longest dimension of the part bounding box. If the variation in part
bounding box dimensions is minimal, then the direction most closely aligned with
the maximum dimension of the assembly bounding box is used.
6-32
Mesh Sizes
The Extrusion Direction menu lists each possible direction, and the preview line
updates to correspond to the selected direction:
Mesh Sizes
6.7.3.6
End Layering
Available only when Automatic is unchecked, the End Layering menu controls the
biasing of layers through the extrusion path. When a single part is selected, the
options are:
Uniform
Small at
Small at
Small at
Large at
End
Start
Both
Both
The determination of the Start and the End of the part is based on the internal
topological direction of the part, and is not user-controllable. The Preview line
graphically indicates on which end the layers will be smaller.
When multiple parts are selected, only the Small at Both and Large at Both options
are available.
6-33
Mesh Sizes
6.7.3.7
Layers
Available only when Automatic is unchecked, the Layer slider controls the number
of extrusion layers. The slider range is between 10 and 100. To specify a value outside of this range, simply type it in the field adjacent to the slider.
6.7.4
Extrusion Geometry Guidelines
The Extrusion button on the Mesh task dialog is active only when the following conditions are met:
Automatic Sizing has been invoked

One or more extrudable parts have been selected.
An extrudable part is defined as:

a part whose cross-section is uniform (the topology of the part must be
invariant in the extrusion direction)
a part that has a linear extrusion path
a part that is three dimensional
a part whose surfaces are uniform in at least one extrusion direction
a part whose ends are parallel to each other
a part that is topologically identical between the endcaps--it must have
the same number and orientation of bounding edges on both surfaces
There are several physics limitations regarding extrusion meshing:

Rotating regions cannot be extrusion meshed.
Analyses with radiation cannot have any extruded-meshed parts.
Surface parts cannot contact parts that are extrusion meshed.
Parts with embedded-physics materials such as internal fan, centrifugal
blower, and check valve materials cannot be extrusion meshed.
Each of these points is explained:
6-34
Mesh Sizes
6.7.4.1
Uniform Cross-Section
For a part to be extrudable, it must have the same cross-section in at least one
direction. If a part consists of an extrudable region connected to another region
with a different cross section, the part is not extrudable:
Not Extrudable
Mesh Sizes
In this example, because all three regions are in the same part, the part is not
extrudable. The pipe and channel protruding out from the box would be extrudable
if they were separate parts forming an assembly.
6.7.4.2
Linear Path
Only parts that have a linear extrusion path are eligible for extrusion. Parts that
bend, even if the cross section is uniform, are not extrudable:
Not Extrudable
6-35
Mesh Sizes
6.7.4.3
Three Dimensional Parts
Only three dimensional parts are supported by extrusion. Two dimensional surfaces
in 2D analyses must be free meshed.
6.7.4.4
Uniform Surfaces in at Least One Direction
It is not possible to extrude in a direction if edges on a surface are normal to that

direction:
This edge is the culprit!
No
No
Yes
The edge on the top surface of this box prevents extrusion in the two directions
marked No because the surface is not uniform in those directions. The other
direction is fine because the edge is uniform through the entire extrusion direction.
6-36
Mesh Sizes
6.7.4.5
Ends that are Parallel to Each Other
The surfaces at the ends of an extrudable part must be parallel to each other. This
is an extension of the uniform cross-section rule, and explicitly applies the rule to
the ends of the volume:
Not Extrudable
Rotating Regions
Objects within a rotating region that have a uniform cross-section that satisfy the
requirements for mesh extrusion can be extruded. The mesh inside of the rotating
region, however, cannot be extruded because the interface between the rotating
region and the adjacent stator must be a conformal (matching) mesh.
6.7.4.7
Radiation
Extruded meshes are not compatible with radiation calculations. An error will be
issued if objects are extrusion meshed and Radiation is enabled.
6.7.4.8
Surface Parts
Surface parts cannot touch parts that are extrusion meshed. This limitation applies
to surface parts used as obstructions (solids), contact resistance, and distributed
resistances.
6.7.4.9
Embedded Physics Materials
Parts assigned embedded physics materials such as internal fans, centrifugal

blowers, and check valves cannot be extruded.
6-37
Mesh Sizes
6.7.4.6
Mesh Sizes
6.8
Geometric Changes
When geometry is changed in the CAD tool and launched back into an analysis or
when settings are transferred between analyses in a project, the entire model will
be Automatically Sized, and any customizations to the mesh distributions will be
applied back to the model.
This process is performed by automatically sizing the modified geometry, and then
replaying the Macro mesh file. Automatically sizing the model accounts for dimensional changes and ensures that newly introduced parts will have a mesh distribution. Replaying the macro ensures that adjustments to the mesh distribution on any
parts, surfaces, or edges are also preserved.
Additionally, when transferring settings in a project, the minimum refinement
length is adjusted proportionally based on the modified geometry and the value set
in the source analysis.
The entire process is automatic, and is designed to ensure that the mesh distribution is preserved as much as possible when modifications are made to the model.
There are three potential status messages that can occur:
Model entity map was complete. Full Macro played. This means that a complete one-to-one correspondence existed between the original and the modified
geometry. All adjustments to the original model were transferred to the modified
model.
Model entity map was partially complete. Partial macro played. This means
that the number of components differs between the original and the modified
geometries. Mesh distribution adjustments are transferred, but there are either
new parts that have the default mesh distribution or parts were removed.
Model entity map failed. Macro deleted. This means that none of the original
components were found in the model after updating the geometry. The result of
this is that the model will be auto-sized, but no size adjustments from the original
model will be transferred to the new one.
The following mesh attributes are also transferred between analyses in a project:
The Minimum Refinement Length, but may be scaled from the source
value based on the geometry modifications in the target model
6-38
Mesh Sizes
The fact that the mesh was defined using Automatic Sizing.
Extrusion data if the corresponding source surfaces can be determined.
6.9
Advanced Parameters
Several additional parameters are contained on the Advanced dialog, accessible by

clicking the Advanced button:
Mesh Sizes
These define constraints that affect the behavior of the Automatic Mesh Sizing facility globally. These parameters should be used with caution as they may have a significant impact on the resulting mesh.
6.9.1
Resolution Factor
The Resolution Factor controls the relative fineness of the mesh in response to the
curvature detected on the model entities. Though this parameter has global scope,
the effects are localized to regions of high curvature. Smaller values result in a finer
mesh on model entities with curvature. Regions with no curvature are not affected
by this parameter.
The default value is 1.0, and the acceptable range is between 0.1 and 3.0. Values
outside of this range are rejected.
6-39
Mesh Sizes
6.9.2
Local Stretching
This parameter controls the quality of the distribution computed by Automatic Sizing. It is a constraint on the rate at which point distributions may expand or contract along an edge. Smaller values cause slower variation in the distribution from
regions of high to low curvature. A value of 1.1 represents a permissible growth
rate of 10% between adjacent elements within a distribution on a model edge. A
value of 1.5 represents a growth rate of 50%.
This parameter influences distributions along individual edges as well as distributions between edges. The net effect is that controlled blending is introduced along
and across model entities.
The default Local Stretching value is 1.1, and the acceptable range is 1.01 to 2.0.
6.9.3
Minimum Points on Edge
For entities lacking curvature, a minimum level of resolution is guaranteed by this

parameter. Increasing this value increases the minimum number of nodes on an
edge. This is a constraint and not a prescription on the computed resources. If a
small edge is in close proximity to a highly curved entity, these smaller length
scales may drive the resolution on the small edges to be higher than the prescribed
minimum value.
6.9.4
Points on Longest Edge
This parameter controls the minimum number of points on the longest edge in the
model. It is most relevant for geometry with no curvature such as the surrounding
box for an external flow model. This setting may be superseded by the influence of
length scales on other model edges in conjunction with how the local stretching
constraint dictates a smaller length scale. This may cause more points on the longest edge than the value specified by the Points on Longest Edge parameter.
6.9.5
Surface Limiting Aspect Ratio
This parameter introduces an additional constraint during Automatic Sizing that

affects the distributions on edges which bound high aspect surfaces as described in
Surface Mode Diagnostics. During Automatic Sizing, surfaces identified by the diag-
6-40
Mesh Sizes
nostics facility are examined to ensure that the distributions generated for the
bounding edges reflect length scales whose size is no greater than the product of
the computed separation distance and the Surface Limiting Aspect Ratio. This limiting length scale may be smaller than that derived from the local curvature, and if
so, the distributions are based on this constraint.
With this parameter, the user can introduce a further constraint on length scales
ensuring that they are not larger than a specified factor of the dimensions of the
surface. This can significantly enhance the robustness of the meshing operation.
Any value greater than or equal to 1 is permitted for this parameter.
6.10.1
Manual Application of Mesh Sizes

The Principle Guidelines
Leaning how to create a good mesh definition can sometimes be the most intimidating part of the analysis process. It does not need to be. There are two fundamental rules that should always be considered when defining the mesh on any
model.
The first rule is that the geometric shapes must be adequately defined. It is
very important that the mesh sizes that you define on a model be such that none of
the geometric features are mis-represented. An example is the mesh definition on a
round tube. Too few elements (too large an element size) and that round tube will
be approximated as a square duct:
The other principle guideline is that elements need to be concentrated

where flow gradients occur. Where there is a lot of fluid movement, there needs
to be more elements. Where there is little fluid activity (all the fluid moving in one
direction, for example), the mesh can be a little more coarse.
6-41
Mesh Sizes
6.10
Mesh Sizes
6.10.2
Basic Strategy
To ensure that a mesh definition is fine enough without being so fine that computational resources are wasted, the following steps are recommended when performing any CFD analysis:
First, determine if there are any symmetries, and divide the geometry
in the CAD system as appropriate. Look for geometric symmetries, but be
sure that the flow will be symmetric as well.
Determine if the analysis can be modeled as a 2D or an axisymmetric
geometry. A 2D approximation may be a good place to start, especially if
you are unsure of how to solve a particular type of flow problem.
Examine the geometry, identifying probable high and low gradient
regions for all solution variables (u, v, w, P, T, k and ).
Identify solid material zones and fluid zones and keep them as separate
geometric entities or parts.
If there are areas with small, repeating geometric details (such as perforated plates or baffles), try using distributed resistances to model these
zones, instead of meshing the detail.
Assign mesh sizes to all volumes in the model, and then apply finer
sizes to surfaces and edges where necessary in order to capture strong flow
gradients or to represent complicated geometric features.
Perform an analysis on a coarse mesh (no more than 25,000 nodes)
to qualitatively assess the flow features present and identify meshing needs
in high gradient regions without a severe time penalty.
Looking at the results on the coarse mesh, refine the mesh in the high
gradient regions.
To ensure that the final solution is not mesh-dependent, compare the
two solutions from the coarse and fine meshes. If they are substantially different, then it is a good idea to construct a mesh that has at least 10%
fewer nodes than the fine mesh, obtain a solution and compare. The idea is
to have two meshes that vary in number of nodes by 10% or more and that
give the same solution. This solution is then said to be mesh-independent.
In any finite element analysis, more elements are required in areas where spatial
gradients of the solution variables are high. In CFD, an additional physical phenomenon called velocity-pressure coupling must also be accurately represented on the
mesh to ensure continuity of fluid mass over the entire solution domain. This distinction elicits the following two requirements:
6-42
Mesh Sizes
Many more elements must occupy the domain than in a typical structural analysis.
Transitions in element size must be relatively smooth so that the area
or volume of adjacent elements does not vary substantially.
In attempting to satisfy these criteria, engineers sometimes construct very large

CFD finite element models, particularly when the geometry is complex. Typical 2D
fluid flow analyses will require anywhere from 1,000 to 25,000 nodes; 3D analyses
often range from 15,000 to 1,000,000 nodes! These ranges are exceeded in some
applications. With computing hardware evolving so rapidly, expect to see these
numbers continue to climb.
6.10.3
Locations of Mesh Refinement
Solid Boundaries
Spatial gradients for velocity, pressure, turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent
energy dissipation will generally be highest near a solid boundary, typically a containment wall or the surface of an immersed body. This is particularly true if the
flow is constrained by a tight clearance, forced to turn around a sharp corner or
suddenly brought to rest at a stagnation point. Accordingly, mesh density must be
greatest in these regions.
When analyzing turbulent flow, the element size adjacent to a solid boundary is
particularly important for accurate prediction of shear stress. This ultimately affects
the calculation of pressure drop across the solution domain. The k- and RNG turbulence models in CFdesign compute a non-dimensional distance from the wall, y+,
at all nodes adjacent to a solid boundary. This value is useful in determining
whether the elements adjacent to solid boundaries are sufficiently sized.
The y+ values may be viewed as a results quantity. In general, they should be kept
within the range 35<y+<350. It is impractical and unnecessary for all y+ values to
be within this range, but it is a good general guideline. This range is most critical
for flows that experience a great deal of pressure drop due to shear. Examples of
such situations are the flow through long pipes and flow over aerodynamic bodies.
6-43
Mesh Sizes
This section contains information about where you should pay close attention to
your mesh definitions. The underlying theme of this discussion is that the mesh
should be fine enough to capture gradients and changes in the flow. Gradients may
be due to geometric features, boundary conditions, or distributed resistance areas.
Mesh Sizes
In flows where form drag dominates the pressure drop, the y+ criteria is not nearly
as important. The use of Boundary Mesh Enhancement and Boundary Mesh
Adaptation is strongly recommended to ensure that the mesh is fine enough near
all walls of the domain.
See Section 5.3.4 for more information about Mesh Enhancement, and to learn how
CFdesign automatically takes care of the considerations discussed above.
Inlet/Outlet Passages
In general, elements should be concentrated at inlet openings to allow solution gradients to develop. In some situations (compressible flows, for example), the
regions near outlets should also have a fine mesh. If the outlet has been placed far
enough out from the solution domain, no refinement is necessary. The goal is that
the outlet should not strongly affect the solution.
Thermal Boundaries
Similar to the inlet passages, elements should be concentrated near walls with
thermal boundary conditions. Usually near these boundaries, the heat transfer rate
(which is the temperature gradient) is the highest. You should also try to concentrate nodes at the edges of these boundaries so the discontinuity in heat transfer
can be captured accurately.
Sudden Change in Boundary Conditions
The area surrounding the separation point between two boundary condition types
must have a refined mesh to adequately resolve the discontinuity. An example is
the point at the intersection of an insulated wall and a specified heat flux boundary
in a convection analysis.
Near Distributed Resistances/Porous Media Elements
Because of the extra pressure drop across distributed resistance/porous media elements, you should refine the mesh in and around these regions to resolve the
velocity and pressure gradients.
Rotating Regions
6-44
Mesh Sizes
It is good practice to concentrate the mesh on rotating regions and solids enclosed
within a rotating region. The flow gradients are typically quite high within rotating
regions, and the geometric shapes are often very intricate.
Moving Solids
The fluid region surrounding a moving solid (and in the intended path of the solid)
are areas in which the mesh should be focused. The fluid gradients that occur as a
result of a moving solid can be quite severe, and the mesh must be fine enough to
capture them. Please see the Motion chapter of this manual for more detail about
the meshing requirements of motion analyses.
Manually Applying Volumes and Surface Mesh
1. Set the Selection Mode, and select only the Surfaces or Volumes to which the
intended mesh size will be applied. (Chapter 2 contains more information about
entity selection.)
(Note: it is always good practice to assign volume sizes to ALL volumes in the
model. Use surface and edge sizes to refine the mesh as necessary.)
2. Enter the Element Size (in the length units of the analysis).
3. As mesh sizes are applied to the geometry, the approximate number of elements to be generated is shown.
This estimate updates automatically as element sizes are added, removed, and
modified. Note that the estimated mesh size is only available for manual mesh sizing.
4. Click the Apply button.

Other commands: The Delete button will remove the mesh size on the selected
entity or entities. The Delete All button removes all mesh sizes from the model.
The steps for applying mesh sizes on surfaces is the same as for volumes.
6.10.5
Manually Applying Edge Mesh Sizes
Set Edge as the selection type, and select the edges in your model.
6-45
Mesh Sizes
6.10.4
Sizes
Mesh Sizes
1. Select to enter an Element Size or the Number Of Elements.

2. If the Number of Elements is entered, then elements can be biased (clustered)
along the edge. Be sure to enter a Bias Factor (a value greater than 1.0). When
biasing, elements can be concentrated at the Start, End, in the Middle, or at Both
Ends of the edge.
3. Hit Apply.
6.10.6
Which Size Wins?
Because an edge can have so many different element sizes, it is critical to know
which size will actually be used by the mesher:
The smallest size on an entity will be used by the mesher.
6.11
Once a mesh size is applied, mesh seeds appear along all the edges of the part.
These points indicate nodal locations, once the mesh is generated. (They do not
appear when any task other than Mesh Sizes is active.)

To turn off the display of mesh reference points, uncheck Show Mesh Seeds from
the Window menu (located on the Menu bar).
If Automatic Sizing was used, the reference points will appear where the nodes will
be generated, independent of the selection mode.
6-46
Mesh Sizes
If sizes were assigned manually, reference points for each selection mode will
appear independently. For example, if a certain size is applied to the volumes of a
model, there will be corresponding reference points on all the curves of those volumes. If a smaller size is then applied to some of the surfaces, then when in Surface Selection mode, only the reference points for those surface definitions will
appear. Likewise, if some other size is applied to some of the edges, then when in
Edge Selection mode, only the reference points for those edge definitions will
appear.
All applied mesh sizes are listed on the feature tree:
To delete all applied mesh sizes, right click on the top-level Mesh Size branch,
and select Delete All. To disable the visibility of mesh reference points, click the
Window menu, and deselect Show Mesh Seeds.
6.12
6.12.1
Mesh Enhancement
The Basics
Mesh Enhancement is the addition of element layers along all fluid-wall and fluidsolid interfaces. First introduced in version 4.1, it has played a major role in augmenting the defined mesh to produce a smooth flow distribution along all walls,
which is vital for accurate flow and temperature prediction. Additionally, Mesh
Enhancement has seamlessly ensured adequate mesh across small gaps, which can
be very difficult manually.
6-47
Mesh Sizes
These listings are very helpful for checking, editing, and deleting mesh sizes. To
highlight an entity with an applied condition, left click your mouse on it--it will
appear green in the Graphics window. To edit an applied condition, right click it,
and select Edit. To delete an applied condition, right click it and select Delete.
Mesh Sizes
Note that because the enhancement layers are added before the mesh is generated, it is not possible to add layers to meshes imported as nas or unv formats.
Mesh Enhancement creates layers before the 3D mesh is constructed. Diagnostic
algorithms detect and avoid element clashes in small gaps automatically. Element
layer height across each surface is uniform, and is based on the smallest length
scale on a surface. Gradual transitioning between surfaces ensures gradual variations in element height throughout the model.
Layer uniformity is important for accuracy in certain analyses. Examples include

flows in which the turbulence is very sensitive to the flow near the walls and within
long, narrow channels. In the latter case, meshes that have been enhanced have
been shown to be significantly less disruptive than non-enhanced meshes to the
flow near the walls, resulting in improved flow uniformity throughout the channel.
6-48
Mesh Sizes
6.12.2
The Process
The Enhancement button on the Mesh task dialog accesses the Mesh Enhancement
dialog:
Enable Mesh Enhancement: toggle Mesh
Enhancement (on by default)
Automatic Layer Adaptation: toggles automatic layer thickness adjustment that ensures
proper layer height based on the turbulent law of
the wall y+ parameter. This is most useful for
external aerodynamic studies.
Mesh Sizes
Number of Layers: Controls the number of layers of prismatic elements. Up to five layers can
be created. The default is three.
Layer Factor: Controls the layer thickness. The
layer height is determined by multiplying this
factor by the local isotropic length scale for that
surface. Reduce this factor for thinner layers and
reduced total thickness.
Mesh Enhancement is on by default.
6.12.3
Effect of Changing Settings on Restart
Because the Mesh Enhancement layers are constructed prior to the 3D mesh, certain changes to analysis settings after the analysis has been meshed (and run) will
cause the entire mesh to be regenerated. If the analysis is continued from a saved
iteration or time-step, the results will be mapped to the new mesh.
Changes to analysis settings that will cause a re-generation of the mesh include:
Changing a material type. An example is changing a solid to a fluid.
Changing a material but not its type (example: air to water) will not cause
the model to re-mesh.
Adding or removing a flow boundary condition (such as velocity, pressure, volume flow rate, mass flow rate, external fan, slip, unknown, periodic, and external fan). Changing the value of an applied condition will not
cause a re-mesh.
6-49
Mesh Sizes
Adding or removing a motion assignment.

Modifying a boundary mesh enhancement parameter.
6.12.4
Automatic Layer Adaptation
This feature works in conjunction with Boundary Mesh Enhancement, and is useful
for high speed aerodynamic flows where the distance between the near-wall node
and the wall-node is critical for accuracy. To use this, click on both Enhance
Boundary Mesh, and Automatic Layer Adaptation. A minimum of three
Enhancement layers is required.
This feature is ideal for external flows such as vehicle aerodynamics and hydrodynamics. It is not so useful for slower speed internal flows. The way it works is that
starting at iteration 37 (after the flow has had a chance to become established), the
y+ values throughout the domain are inspected. The near wall node positions are
then moved closer or away from the walls in order to make the y+ value fall within
the optimum range for turbulent flow. The near-wall nodal positions are adjusted
with every successive iteration. There is only a slight time penalty for this adjustment scheme.
If you have run an inflated mesh analysis but did not activate Boundary Mesh Adaptation at the beginning, it can be turned on any time during the analysis. If Adaptation is activated mid-run, be sure to run the analysis for at least another 50
iterations.
6.13
Generating the Mesh
The dialog discussed in this chapter is used only for mesh size definition on the
geometry. The generation of the mesh is part of the analysis, and is not a separate
step. When the GO button on the Analyze dialog is hit, CFdesign will construct the
mesh according to the element sizes prescribed using this dialog. If a mesh already
exists (and you are simply continuing the analysis), then a new mesh will not be
created.
To view the mesh prior to running the analysis, simply set the number of iterations
to 0, and hit GO. After the mesh is generated, the Solver will stop, and the mesh
can be examined carefully.
6-50
Mesh Sizes
To help diagnose meshing problems, please consult the Analysis Guidelines chapter
of this manual.
6.14
Error Reporting
Geometry is checked at several stages during the process, and errors are reported
to the Output bar.
There are four primary places during the analysis process in which the geometry is
checked:
Upon initial import. At this stage, the geometry is checked a number of
ways for validity.
After geometry tools are invoked. Because the geometry is changed as
a result of the tools applied, it is checked again for validity.
Application of Automatic Mesh Sizing. If a geometric problem is identified that will likely cause problems during mesh generation, it will be identified graphically and its location will be written to the Output bar.
During the mesh generation process. If an error is encountered, every
effort is made to capture the error and show its location both graphically
and in the Output bar. Additionally, meshing errors are written to the mesh
log file (analysisname_mesh.log), located in the analysisname_logs
subfolder.
Errors that occur during meshing are written to the Output bar and to a subfolder
called analysisname_mesher, located under the working directory.
6-51
Mesh Sizes
Enhanced error reporting has been added for surface parts as well. If an unsupported condition is detected (such as a solid surface part on a fluid-solid interface),
a warning will be provided during start-up. The options are to continue the analysis
and ignore the surface parts or to stop the analysis and manually fix the condition.
Mesh Sizes
6-52
CHAPTE R 7
7.1
Materials and Devices
Introduction
Materials are physical substances, and are key to the CFdesign analysis. There are
two distinct material types available in an analysis: fluids and solids. Devices are
models of physical devices, and include internal fans, centrifugal fans, resistances,
check valves, rotating regions, Printed Circuit Boards, Compact Thermal Models,
and Thermoelectric Coolers. Materials and devices are assigned and created using
the same processes and dialog, and are described in this chapter.
The work flow for assigning materials and devices is very similar to the other model
set-up tasks (Loads and Mesh Definition): pick a part (volumes for three dimensional models and surfaces for two dimensional models), make selections on the
dialog, and hit Apply. Visual indication is given by coloring parts by material (a legend defines the color-material correspondence). Assigned materials and devices are
listed on the feature tree for additional reference.
The Material Editor makes creating and editing materials and devices very convenient. Numerous property variations are available, allowing for great flexibility
when creating materials.
As part of the installed CFdesign package, the Material Database includes numerous
fluid and solid materials. Additional materials can be added to the database at the
push of a button. The materials database file can be placed anywhere in a companys network to allow easy standardization for all CFdesign users to companyspecific materials.
7-1
Materials & Devices
7.2
7.2.1
The Materials Database

Basic Operation
The Material Database contains materials and devices in the same file. It is controlled with three buttons under the Material Database group:
1
2
3
1. To add a material or change properties, click the Edit button. This will open the
Material Editor.
2. To delete a user-defined material from the database, click the Remove button.
Note that materials that come with the software cannot be deleted.
3. To store a new material to the Materials Database, click the Save button in the
Database group on the Materials dialog.
4. Materials that are not saved to the database will have a * prepended to their
names. They will be saved in the cfd file, but will not be available for other analyses
unless they are saved to the Materials Database.
5. If a material saved to the database is edited (remember that the default
(installed) materials cannot be edited), a * will appear before the name, indicating that the material is different from the one in the database. When the Save button is hit, a prompt will ask for confirmation that you want to save the edited
material.
6. When an existing analysis containing a material not stored in the Material Database is opened, the word local will be appended to the material name. This material will exist in the analysis, and can be used. Hit the Save button to add it to the
Materials Database (and the word local will disappear the next time the analysis is
opened).
7. If an analysis is opened that contains a material that has the same name as a
database material, but has different properties, the name of the analysis will be
appended to the material name to prevent the two different materials from conflicting.
7-2
Materials & Devices
8. The default location of the Materials Database is in the CFdesign installation
folder. If this location is not appropriate (for sharing with multiple users, for example), then the database can be placed elsewhere on the network. Use
File_Preferences_User Interface to indicate the location of the database file.
This setting will be saved, and will not have to be altered every time the software is
used.
7.2.2
Importing Material Databases
To assist the process of migrating from earlier versions of CFdesign or importing

other material databases, a material database migration tool is available from the
File Menu. This is most useful for users and companies that have created a large
number of custom materials and need to share or consolidate databases.
To use the tool, click on File_Import Material Database.
Click the Import button to browse for the material database file that is to be
imported:
Materials & Devices
The non-vendor supplied materials found in this file will be listed in the dialog. Click
the OK button to add them to the active material database file. This is defined on
the File_Preferences_User Interface dialog. When the import is complete, a dialog
will appear confirming the import.
Note that custom materials in the imported database file that are also in the local
database file will not be overwritten during the import.
This tool can also be used to combine multiple material database files.
7-3
Materials & Devices
7.3
7.3.1
Fluids
Assigning Fluid Materials
1. Select the parts to which the fluid will be

applied.
2. Select Fluid from the Type pull-down

menu.
3. Select the specific material from the
Name pull-down menu.
4. If the desired fluid does not exist, create a
new material by hitting the Edit button, and

use the Material Editor to enter the necessary
properties.
5. If a new material was created or modified,

save it to the Material Database (optional).
4
5
6. Click Apply to apply the material.

Note: Care should be taken to avoid placing
two different fluids in direct contact. Different
fluids can exist in the same analysis if they
are separated by a solid.
6
7.3.2
Installed Database Materials
Several variations of air and water are included with the software. These materials
cannot be edited or deleted, but each can be selected as the Read From material
7-4
Materials & Devices
on the Material Editor when creating a similar new material.
Material
Description
Air Constant
The properties do not change
Water Constant
Air Buoyancy
H2O Buoyancy
Air Not STP

H2O Not STP
Density changes with temperature. A buoyancy property

should be selected when solving for natural convection-where the density of the fluid changes with the temperature.
A Not STP property should be used when temperature
and/or pressure are far from standard conditions.
Useful for humidity (moist air) calculations. These properties are only of the gas, not the gas/liquid mixture. (The
liquid properties are determined using the steam tables.)
If a new material is created based on moist air, pay special attention to the gas constant, the reference properties, and the specific heat.
H2O Steam/Liquid
Useful for analyses of steam/water mixtures. Change the

Reference Pressure if your operating conditions are at a
different pressure.
H2O Vapor
Vapor state of water needed for cavitation analyses.
H2O_Buoyancy
Liquid state of water for natural convection analyses.
Sea_Water
Properties of salt water
Steam Buoyancy
Sets the properties of steam, but only allows density to

vary with equation of state, not the steam tables. No
other properties vary.
Steam Constant
Sets the properties of steam, but does not allow for any
property variation. This is useful if the temperature and
pressure variations are small.
Ammonia
Constant
Blood
non-Newtonian
CO2
Buoyancy
CO2
Constant
Ethylene Glycol
Constant
7-5
Materials & Devices
Air Moist
Materials & Devices
Freon
Constant
Glycerin
Constant
Helium
Buoyancy
Helium
Constant
Hydrogen
Buoyancy
Hydrogen
Constant
Mercury
Constant
Nitrogen
Buoyancy
Nitrogen
Constant
Oxygen
Buoyancy
Oxygen
Constant
7.3.3
Creating Fluid Materials
Shown is the Material Editor dialog for Fluids:
1. The Type is set on the main Materials dialog. To create or edit a fluid, select
Fluid as the type.
7-6
Materials & Devices
2. Assign a name to the material. The names of the default database materials
cannot be used for new materials. To modify a default database material, save it to
a new name. Note: Spaces are not permitted in material names.
Note that it is possible to select a similar material from the Read From drop menu.
This is a convenient starting-point for creating new materials.
3. Click the property button that is to be defined.

4. Select the Variation Method from the Input Region, and enter the appropriate
Values and units for the selected property.
6. Modify the Reference Properties, if necessary. If these parameters are modified, care should be taken to modify them for all fluids in a model.
7. When all properties are defined, click the OK button. This will make the new
material available for only the current analysis.
7.3.3.1
Fluid Properties
Property
Variational Methods
Density:
Constant, Equation of State, Polynomial,

Inverse Polynomial, Arrhenius, Steam Table,
Piecewise Linear, and Moist Gas
the amount of mass per volume

Viscosity:
dynamic (absolute) viscosity is
used
Conductivity:
the thermal conductivity
Specific Heat
Constant, Sutherland, Power Law, Polynomial, Inverse Polynomial, Non-Newtonian

Power Law, Hershel-Buckley, Carreau, Arrhenius, Piecewise Linear, and Steam Table, First
Order Polynomial, Second Order Polynomial
Constant, Sutherland, Power Law, Polynomial, Inverse Polynomial, Arrhenius, Steam
Table, Piecewise Linear
Constant, Polynomial, Inverse Polynomial,
Arrhenius, Steam Table, Piecewise Linear
7-7
Materials & Devices
The Material Editor is used to create materials different from those supplied with
the software. There are six basic properties that are needed to define a fluid. Most
of these properties can be made to vary with temperature, pressure or scalar, in
several different ways. The following table lists the properties and the available
variational methods.
Materials & Devices
Property
Variational Methods
Compressibility
Choice of:
Cp/Cv (gamma, the ratio of specific heats) -useful only for compressible gas analyses or
Bulk Modulus -- useful only for compressible
liquid analyses. See note below about Bulk
Modulus.
Emissivity -- useful for radiation

analyses. The emissivity specified on a fluid is assigned to contacting walls. Note that the
emissivity assigned to a solid
will take override the value
assigned to a contacting fluid.
Constant, Piece-wise Linear variation with

temperature. (This is useful for spectral radiation analyses.)
Wall Roughness -- useful for

applying variable roughness
height to include effects of friction
Constant.
See Guidelines Chapter for more details on

Spectral radiation.
See note below about the Wall Roughness

property.
Bulk Modulus
The bulk modulus and the density of a liquid are key to determining the speed of
sound through that liquid:
The definition of bulk modulus is: K = ------ .

2
Given that the speed of sound, a, is defined as: a = ------ , this works out to be:
a =
K
---
Source: White, F. M., Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill, New York, New York, 1986.
The bulk modulus is used only for compressible liquid (water hammer) analyses.
The value of bulk modulus is automatically set for the liquid materials included in
the Material Data Base. For user-defined materials, the correct value of bulk modulus is only required if liquid compressibility is to be analyzed. An example of a liquid
compressibility, water hammer, is described:
7-8
Materials & Devices
Water is flowing through a straight pipe at 10 in/s. At a certain time, a valve at the
end of the pipe is suddenly closed. A pressure pulse will move through the water at
the speed of sound through water. This phenomena is called a water hammer,
and is analyzed with a transient analysis to predict the movement of the pressure
wave through the water. Instead of using the Ideal Gas Law and the ratio of specific
heats to determine the sound speed, we will use the density and the bulk modulus
of the water.
Wall Roughness
Enter a physical dimension (in the units available in the drop menu) of the roughness height. Such heights are typically very small--cast iron pipes, for example,
have a typical wall roughness height of 0.0102 inches.
A value of wall roughness height specified on a fluid is automatically applied by the
Solver to the wetted walls touching that fluid. A value of wall roughness height
specified on a solid is applied to all wetted surfaces (surfaces contacting a fluid) of
the part. A non-zero wall roughness height applied to a solid will prevail over a wall
roughness applied to a fluid that touches it.
Specified wall roughness heights work best when closely adhered to the Turbulent
Law of the Wall. This means that the non-dimensional distance (y+) from the wall
node to its near-wall node must be between 35 and 350. The easiest way to enforce
this constraint is by checking the Automatic Layer Adaptation box on the Mesh
Enhancement dialog (found on the Meshing task). This will allow the Solver to
adjust this near wall node distance along all walls in the model, based on the local
flow conditions.
7-9
Materials & Devices
Wall roughness heights are implemented into the turbulence wall model, and do not
affect the geometry. The flow must be turbulent for wall roughness heights to take
effect. They will be ignored for laminar flows.
Materials & Devices
7.3.3.2
Property Variation Methods
Property variation methods used for both fluid and some solid properties are
described here:
Constant
Enter the value and units as appropriate.
Power Law
T n
------ -----
o T o
enter a Reference Value (of the
property) = o ,
the Power Law Exponent = n
and a Reference Temperature (in
the Reference Properties group).
(Note: The Reference Temperature
is only used at start up to calculate an
initial reference density. The field
value of temperature is used during
the calculation to determine density.)
7-10
Materials & Devices
Equation of State
P
= ------RT
Enter P = Reference Pressure,

R = Gas Constant,
and T = Reference Temperature.
The Reference Pressure is used both
to calculate an initial reference density
and also throughout the calculation to
determine the absolute pressure. See
the Technical Reference Guide for
more information.
Materials & Devices
For adiabatic compressible analyses,

the static temperature used to calculate density is determined from both
the local stagnation and dynamic temperatures. See the Technical Reference for a discussion of Adiabatic
Compressible Flow.
7-11
Materials & Devices
Arrhenius
E
------RT
------- = e
Enter a property Reference Value =
and the Activation Energy = E.
Sutherland
- ---T 1.5 T o + S
------------------ -
o T o
T+S
Enter a property Reference Value =
o ,
the Sutherland constant=S
and a Reference Temperature in
the Reference group)
7-12
Materials & Devices
Non-Newtonian Power Law
----- = p
o
A
B
Cutoff Viscosity (A): This is the

viscosity of the fluid as a Newtonian
fluid.
C
D
Cutoff Strain Rate (B): The strain

rate at which the fluid becomes NonNewtonian.
Viscosity Coefficient (C): The viscosity of the fluid when the fluid
becomes Non-Newtonian.
D (P>0)
A
C
D (P<0)
B
If a viscosity cutoff is not applicable, simply enter values for the Viscosity Coefficient and the Power Law Exponent and leave the Cutoff Strain Rate at the
default. Make the Cutoff Viscosity = the Viscosity Coefficient.
Example: A non-Newtonian fluid has a viscosity of 0.0033 Pa-s. The Power
Law index is known to be 0.62. This fluid does not have a cutoff viscosity,
meaning that it behaves as a non-Newtonian fluid through its range of properties.
The material is defined by specifying the following properties:
Cutoff Viscosity = 0.0033 Pa-s
Cutoff Strain Rate = 0
Viscosity Coefficient = 0.0033 Pa-s
Power Law Exponent = -0.38 (= 0.62-1)
7-13
Materials & Devices
Power Law Exponent (D): Determines whether the fluid is shear

thickening (P > 0) or shear thinning
(P < 0). A Power Law Exponent of 0
is a Newtonian fluid. (The power law
exponent is related to the power law
index as p = n-1.)
Materials & Devices
To model a non-Newtonian fluid with a constant viscosity that starts to vary at a

given strain rate, input this viscosity and the strain rate in the Cutoff Viscosity
and Cutoff Strain Rate fields, respectively.
----- = k p
o
Enter the constant k in the Viscosity Coef (k) field.
Herschel-Buckley (viscosity
variation)
= y + km
nm
Enter the Yield Stress = y ,

the Flow Behavior Index = n m ,
and the Consistency Factor = k m
7-14
Materials & Devices
Carreau (viscosity variation)

(n 1)
---------------
2
----------------- = [ 1 + ( ) 2 ]
o
Enter the Zero Strain Viscosity =

o ,
the Infinite Strain Viscosity = ,
the Time Constant = ,
and the Power Law Index = n.
First Order Polymer (viscosity)

B
= A exp ( CT )
Materials & Devices
Enter the Viscosity factor = A,

the Shear factor = B,
and the Temperature factor = C.
= shear rate calculated during the
analysis
T = temperature calculated during the
analysis
Note: the coefficients must be entered
in SI units, regardless of the analysis
length units system.
7-15
Materials & Devices
Second Order Polymer (viscosity)

ln( )=A1 + A2ln( ) + A3T + A4[ln( )]2
+ A5[ln( )]T + A6T2
The constants A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, and
A6 are constants that define the material.
= shear rate calculated during the
analysis
T = temperature calculated during the
analysis
Note: the coefficients must be entered
in SI units, regardless of the analysis
length units system.
To properly set up a bivarient non-Newtonian Fluid, you first need to curve fit your
data to fit the following model:
ln( )=A1 + A2ln( ) + A3T + A4[ln( )]2 + A5[ln( )]T + A6T2
When curve fitting data, ensure that the resulting surface is well defined beyond
the extremes of the data set. This is typically difficult with natural logs in the equation without the addition of artificial (non physical) data points added to the original
data set.
With the data set in metric units, a linear regression can be performed using each
multiplier of the equation to determine the coefficients for input into CFdesign. For
example in Excel, create columns for the natural log of the viscosity in Pa-s, the
natural log of the shear rate in inverse seconds, the temperature in C, the natural
log of the shear rate in inverse seconds squared, the natural log of the shear rate in
inverse seconds multiplied by the temperature in C, and the temperature in C
squared. Use the add-in for data analysis and select Linear Regression with the y
value as the first column, and the x values as the remaining columns. The six coefficients will be output.
7-16
Materials & Devices
Polynomial and Inverse Polynomial

Data points are required for a polynomial or inverse polynomial property variation.
Density, conductivity, and specific
heat can vary with temperature,
pressure, or scalar.
Viscosity can vary with temperature,
pressure, scalar, or strain rate.
Each data point is entered on a separate line. To insert a data point
between two existing lines, click on
the point after the desired new point
and click on the Insert button. All
the subsequent data points will be
pushed down one row.
The polynomial order is specified in the

Order field. The order should be less
than the number of data points to get a
good fit. It is always a good idea to plot
the property values to ensure they follow
the expected trends using the Plot button. Polynomial orders greater than 3 are
generally not useful because of unexpected inflection points.
Data in .csv format can be imported
using the Import button. Data is saved to
a .csv file using the Save button.
7-17
Materials & Devices
The range of values should encompass the range of the independent

variable (temperature, pressure, or
scalar) of your analysis. CFdesign
will automatically clip the property
value if it exceeds the upper or lower
values of the independent variable.
Materials & Devices
Piecewise Linear
The Piece Wise Linear variation uses a
linear interpolation between entered
data points. Data points are entered
into the table in the same manner as
polynomial and inverse polynomial
data (see above).
Density, specific heat, and conductivity can be varied with temperature,
pressure, or scalar.
Viscosity can vary with temperature,
pressure, scalar, and strain rate.
The choice of independent variable is
made using the drop menu (showing
Temperature in the above example).
Use the Plot button to check the data.
Data in .csv format can be imported
using the Import button. Data is saved
to a .csv file using the Save button.
7.3.3.3
Reference Properties
The Reference Temperature is only used at start up to calculate an initial reference density. The field value of temperature is used during the calculation to determine density.
The Reference Pressure is used both to calculate an initial reference density and
also throughout the calculation to determine the absolute pressure. See the Technical Reference Guide for more information.
For adiabatic compressible analyses, the static temperature used to calculate density is determined from both the local stagnation and dynamic temperatures. See
the Technical Reference for a discussion of Adiabatic Compressible Flow.
7-18
Materials & Devices
7.4
7.4.1
Solids
Assigning Solid Materials
1. Select the parts to which the solid will be

applied.
2. Select Solid from the Type pull-down

menu.
3. Select the specific material from the
Name pull-down menu.
4. If the desired solid does not exist, create

a new material by hitting the Edit button,
and use the Material Editor to enter the necessary properties.
5. If a new material was created or modi-
Materials & Devices
fied, save it to the Material Database

(optional).
4
5
6. Click Apply to finish.
7.4.2
Installed Database Materials
Several solid materials are included with the software. These materials cannot be
edited or deleted, but each can be the Read From material when creating a simi-
7-19
Materials & Devices
lar new material.
Material
Description
Aluminum Constant
Copper Variable
Conductivity varies with temperature
Glass Constant
Iron Constant
PCB 12 Layer X, Y,
or Z
Effective conductivities are used to represent the layers of

a printed circuit board. The direction is the component
normal to the board--the conductivity is considerably less
than the other two (in plane) components
PCB Plastic for

Laminate Constant
The constant properties of printed circuit board plastic
Steel Variable
Conductivity varies with temperature
Brick
Constant
Glass Wool
Constant
Gold
Constant
Gold
Variable
Gypsum-Board
Constant
Hardwood
Constant
Lead
Constant
Magnesium
Constant
Mercury
Constant
Nickel
Constant
Particle Board
Constant
Platinum
Constant
Plywood
Constant
Polystyrene
Constant
Silicon
Constant
Silicon
Variable
Silver
Constant
7-20
Materials & Devices
Tin
Constant
Titanium
Constant
Tungsten
Constant
Wood (soft)
Constant
Zinc
Constant
7.4.3
Creating Solid Materials
Shown is the Solids Material Editor:
1
2
Materials & Devices
5
6
1. The Type is set on the main Materials dialog. To create or edit a solid, select
Solid as the type.

2. Assign a name to the material. The names of the default database materials
cannot be used for new materials. To modify a default database material, save it to
a new name. Note: Spaces are not permitted in material names.
7-21
Materials & Devices
Note that it is possible to select a similar material from the Read From drop menu.
This is a convenient starting-point for creating new materials.
3. Click the property button to be defined.

4. Select the Variation Method from the Input Region, and enter the appropriate
Values and units for the selected property.
6. When all properties are defined, hit the OK button. This will make the new
material available for only the current analysis.
7.4.3.1
Solid Properties
The Material Editor is used to create additional materials not supplied with the software. There are four basic properties that are necessary to define a solid for use
with CFdesign. Most of these properties can vary with temperature, pressure or
scalar, in several different variational methods; these properties and methods are
listed in the following table:
Property
Variational Methods
Conductivity -- the same value

for thermal conductivity can be
used for all three directions, or
each component can be different.

Piecewise Linear.
Density -- only needed for transient analyses.

Piecewise Linear.
Specific Heat -- only needed for

transient analyses.

Piecewise Linear.
Emissivity -- useful for radiation

analyses. The emissivity specified on a solid will override the
value assigned to contacting
fluid.
Constant, Piecewise Linear variation with

temperature (useful for spectral radiation
analyses.)
Transmissivity -- useful for radiation analyses; see note below
Constant, Piecewise Linear variation with

temperature
7-22
Y and Z directions also have: Same as X-Dir.
Materials & Devices
Property
Variational Methods
Electrical Resistivity -- only

needed for Joule heating analyses.

Piecewise Linear (varies with temperature).
Wall Roughness -- useful for

applying variable roughness
height to include effects of friction
Constant. Please see note in Section 6.3.3.1

about Wall Roughness.
Transmissivity
Transmissivity is a measure of how much radiative energy can pass through an
object. A value of 1 indicates that the object is completely transparent, and that
radiative energy can pass completely through it. A value of 0 means that the object
is opaque. The permissible range of transmissivity values is between 0 and 1.
Two variation methods are available for transmissivity: Constant and as a Piecewise
Linear table varying with temperature. Transmissivity is a unitless parameter. The
default value is 0.
+1
If the sum of these two values exceeds 1, an error message will be displayed when
the analysis is started.
Transmissivity can only be assigned to solids. The radiation model considers fluids
to be non-participating, so it is not possible to simulate radiative heat transfer
through dark or muddy fluids.
To simulate a transparent object completely immersed within a fluid:
Model the object as a solid and mesh it (it cannot be a suppressed
part).
Assign a transmissivity value between 0 and 1 to the solid material to
allow radiation to pass through the object.
To simulate radiative heat exchange between a transparent solid and the environment, such as a window:
7-23
Materials & Devices
The sum of Transmissivity and Emissivity must be less than or equal to 1.
Materials & Devices
Model the window as a solid in the model.

Assign a transmissivity value to the material for that solid.
Assign a Transparent boundary condition to that surface. This boundary
condition includes a background temperature
Surface parts cannot be used to simulate transparent media. A non-zero value of

transmissivity applied to surface parts will be ignored. Likewise, non-zero values of
transparency assigned to moving solids are ignored--transparency is not supported
for moving solids or within rotating regions.
Note that absorption of radiation energy by transparent solids is not included in the
radiation model.
Electrical Resistivity
The resistance per area multiplied by the length of the device. A value for resistivity
is required for any solid that is heated by the Joule effect.
rL
A
The relationship between resistivity and resistance is: R = ----------R = resistance (ohms)
r = resistivity (ohms-length unit)
L = length of the device
A = cross sectional area
For more information, please consult the Joule Heating section of the Analysis
Guidelines chapter of this manual.
7.4.3.2
Solid Property Variational Methods
Variational methods are described in the Fluid Property Variation section: 7.3.3.2.
7.5
7.5.1
Surface Parts (Shells)

Thin Obstructions
Surface Parts are two dimensional surfaces incorporated into three dimensional
geometry. They are typically used to simulate very thin objects such as guide vanes
7-24
Materials & Devices
or sheet metal that the flow must pass around. They are useful because they eliminate the need to model very thin geometry with three dimensional volumes. Meshing such volumes can be very difficult and can result in very large meshes. The
reason is that an element that is small enough to represent the thickness will be so
small that a huge number of them are required across the other dimensions of the
object. By representing such objects only with surfaces, the elements only need to
be small enough to represent the shape of the object, eliminating the thickness
from the model.
This is shown in the following graphics. The model on the left contains a thin-walled
obstruction that is modeled as a volume. The element size needed to represent this
volume is quite small (because the part is so thin), so the element count is large
(about 158,000 elements in this example). The model on the right, however, uses a
Surface Part to represent the thin obstruction. The element size on the surface part
is not vastly different from that of the surrounding air, and the overall element
count (model size) is considerably smaller (about 38,000 elements for this example):
7.5.2
Sheet metal obstruction modeled with

a Surface Part.
Thermal Layers
Surface Parts can be used to conduct heat as well as obstruct flow. They will exhibit
the same heat transfer characteristics as three dimensional volumes in that they
will conduct heat in all directions. For this reason, a thickness value is required
7-25
Materials & Devices
Sheet metal obstruction modeled with

a 3D volume.
Materials & Devices
when defining Surface Parts. This is discussed in the Specifying Surface Parts section.
Surface Parts can be used to simulate thin layers of material between or within chip
packages. Layers of epoxy or other substances are commonly used between thermal components, and the effect of their contact resistance must be included. A Surface Part material can be applied to a surface that represents an epoxy layer,
eliminating the need to model the substance with a thin three dimensional volume.
This approach will still account for the thermal conduction between the chip components, but will greatly simplify the modeling process and reduce the size of the
mesh (analysis model size).
The Solid Material Editor dialog allows specification of thermal conductivity or resistance. If the conductivity of the layer is known, select Conductivity in the dialog,
and enter the appropriate value. Alternatively, if the resistance is known, select
Resistance, and enter the value.
7-26
Materials & Devices
7.5.3
Contact Resistance
The Contact Resistance material is used to simulate the resistance to heat transfer
at the interface of two parts (typically a chip and heat sink or chip and board) due
to imperfections and tiny gaps in the mating surfaces in 3D models.
Chip
Contact Resistance
(Surface Part)
PCB
Unlike the other surface part applications, Contact Resistance does not require a
thickness. The only required parameter is the Resistance. When a contact resistance is applied between two solids, only the temperature gradient normal to the
surface part is considered. In-plane temperature gradients are disregarded.
2
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
Begin by specifying a material name in the Name field.

Enter a Resistance value and associated units.
Click the Apply button.
Click the OK button to close the dialog.
7-27
Materials & Devices
To create a Contact Resistance material, set the selection mode to Surface, and set
the Type to Contact Resistance. Click the Edit button, and the Material Editor will
open:
Materials & Devices
7.5.4
Rotating Machinery
Another application for Surface Parts is the analysis of thin-bladed turbomachinery

devices using Rotating Regions. Surface Parts can greatly simplify the modeling of
thin sheet-metal fan blades. Instead of meshing around very thin three-dimensional blade volumes, represent the blades as surfaces within the rotating region,
and assign a Surface Part material to them.
7.5.5
Assigning Surface Parts
Surface parts can be constructed in two different ways in the CAD model: as features or separate parts or by using surfaces on existing volumes. Assigning a Surface Part material in CFdesign is very easy using the Materials task dialog. This is
discussed later in this section.
7.5.5.1
Surface Parts using CAD Surface Features
Surface parts are always assigned to surfaces. In many cases, it is practical to construct floating surfaces within the three dimensional model. Some CAD tools allow
such surfaces to be separate components in an assembly. Others require that these
surfaces just be features within a part. An example of a surface feature or part is
shown:
7-28
Materials & Devices
The surface is not part of a closed region, but if a solid material is assigned to it (as
described above), it will obstruct the flow:
7.5.5.2
Surface Parts on Surfaces of Volumes
When assigning Surface Parts to represent an epoxy layer in an electronic chip set,
it is not necessary to create a separate surface in the CAD model. Simply select an
appropriate surface on one of the chips, and assign a solid material to it. The thermal resistance and the physical thickness are then included in the analysis, without
having to complicate the geometry with very thin volumes or creating a huge finite
element mesh.
7-29
Materials & Devices
In some situations, it is easier to include a volume within an assembly, and assign

one or more surfaces to be Surface Parts. In such a situation, the part itself will be
a fluid (and hence not an obstruction), but the surface or surfaces will be solids,
and will block flow.
Materials & Devices
An example of a surface that is part of a volume is shown:
The volume is assigned a fluid material, but because the two front surfaces are
assigned a solid material, they are considered to be Surface Parts, and will obstruct
the flow:
7.5.5.3
Additional Guidelines
A few additional notes regarding Surface Parts:

Surface Parts are not applicable to edges in two dimensional models.
It is not necessary to assign a Surface Part material to surfaces that are
walls. If a surface is on a solid part, it is a wall. If a surface is on an external
boundary (no material on one side of it), then it is wall.
7-30
Materials & Devices
CFdesign does not support a Surface Part material assigned to the

external surfaces of a flow volume. (Some attempt this in an effort to simulate a sheet metal thickness.) Application of external heat transfer boundary conditions (such as heat flux and film coefficient) is also not
recommended. The reason is that Surface Parts that are on external boundaries are not completely incorporated into the calculation--their material
and thickness information will not be included. Because of this, there will
not be a thermal gradient calculated across external Surface Parts. An
alternative to applying Surface Parts for external wall surfaces is to leave
the external surface unspecified, making it a wall by default. When this is
done, externally-applied heat transfer boundary conditions will then be
properly incorporated into the simulation.
Multiple layers of material cannot be represented by applying multiple
layers of Surface Parts. To represent a laminate of thin materials, apply a
single Surface Part material that uses an effective thermal conductivity
based on the conductivity values of the laminate materials.
Surface Parts must be completely enclosed in a 3D volume. Surface
Parts cannot extend outside of the 3D model.
It is not possible to change the mesh on a model containing surface
parts and continue the analysis from a saved iteration. When the mesh is
changed, the analysis must be started back at the beginning (iteration 0).
Surface parts must not contact parts that are extrusion meshed.
7-31
Materials & Devices
Materials & Devices
7.5.5.4
Specifying Surface Parts in the Materials Dialog
The Material task dialog has been modified to include the option to select surfaces
for material assignment.
1. Select Surface as the Entity Selection

type.
2. Select the surfaces from the model.
3. Select the Type.
4. Select or create a solid material.
5. Specify a Shell Thickness.
6. Select the desired units for thickness.
7. Click Apply.
3
5
4
6
7.5.5.5
Shell Thickness
The Shell Thickness value is required, but is only used in the calculation of conduction heat transfer. The thickness value will not modify the geometry in any way,
and there will be no graphical representation of the thickness value.
7-32
Materials & Devices
7.5.6
Visualization of Surface Parts
The standard visualization tools in CFdesign work with Surface Parts. Cutting planes
and iso surfaces will display results caused by the presence of Surface Parts. Using
shift+ctrl, results on Surface Parts can be probed by hovering the mouse.
The displayed value of pressure on Surface Parts depends on which side of the Surface Part is viewed. The leading side of a Surface Part will show high pressure, and
the wake side will show lower pressure:
Wall results are assessed on Surface Parts by selecting the appropriate side of the
surface. In the example above, selecting the leading side would show a higher wall
force than selecting the drag side.
7-33
Materials & Devices
When visualizing results, Surface Parts are listed in the Feature Tree under the
Materials branch. They are listed separately from volume parts--even those with
the same material. Surface Parts can be used as the source surfaces for non-planar
cutting surfaces. This is discussed in more detail in the Results Visualization chapter
of this manual.
Materials & Devices
7.5.7
CAD Guidelines
Different behavior regarding the inclusion of Surface Parts as surfaces that are not
connected to volumes has been observed in several CAD tools. These guidelines are
described below.
7.5.7.1
Pro/E Wildfire
Surfaces that are to be Surface Parts should be created as separate parts and
added to an assembly consisting of the surrounding flow volume part and any other
Surface Part and 3D parts. If a Surface Part is included as a quilt feature in a part,
the part may either not come into CFdesign correctly or it will incur meshing difficulties. Also, Surface Parts must not interfere, and must not cross one another.
Multiple Surface Parts can meet along an edge, however. Surface Parts that are not
connected (completely disjointed) must be created as separate parts, and included
as components in the assembly.
Note that quilts are not supported when launching with the Granite launch method.
They are only supported when launching using the Mechanica method.
7.5.7.2
Solid Works
Surface Parts can be created as either separate parts in an assembly or as surface

features in a 3D part. Surface Parts can interfere with one another, and disjointed
surfaces can be included in the same part.
7.5.7.3
Solid Edge and Inventor
We have found that the most convenient way to include Surface Parts is to create a
3D part with the surface shape of the desired Surface Part. Mesh the volume as a
fluid, and assign a Surface Part material to the surface, as described in the preceding section called Surface Parts on Surfaces of Volumes.
7.5.7.4
CATIA v5
We have found that the most convenient way to include Surface Parts in CATIA
models is to create a 3D part with the surface shape of the desired shell. Mesh the
volume as a fluid, and assign a Surface Part material to the surface, as described in
the preceding section called Surface Parts on Surfaces of Volumes.
7-34
Materials & Devices
7.6
Resistances
In some analyses, the actual flow geometry may contain a large number of holes or
obstructions. For example, baffles are used in many electronics packages, and
often have hundreds of holes through which the air must pass. To model each and
every hole would be tedious, expensive and unnecessary.
The alternative is to simulate the presence of such holes or obstructions with a distributed resistance region. In this method, the mesh elements in this region are
assigned a resistance parameter usually using either the free area ratio (proportion
of free to total area) or a loss coefficient based on the known pressure drop. This
resistance simulates the effect of the obstructions without using an inordinate number of elements. Other examples of porous media include radiators, vents, screens,
filters and packed beds.
Materials & Devices
7-35
Materials & Devices
7.6.1
Assigning Resistances
1. Select the part or parts.

2. Choose Resistance as the Type.
3. Select the Material Name.
(If the material does not exist, see the following section for how to create resistance materials.)
4. Select the flow direction through the resistance using the pop-out dialogs. Select the
two directions normal to the flow direction.
See below for further detail.
5. Hit Apply to apply the material.
Note: distributed resistance regions should not contact an external boundary condition. Likewise, it is not recommended to apply boundary conditions to any surface
of a distributed resistance material. Doing so may cause convergence difficulties
and will affect the flow rate reported in the summary file. If a distributed resistance
contacts an external boundary, it is good practice to add an extension onto the
region (so that the boundary condition is not applied directly to it).
There are three different methods of assigning the flow direction through a resistance region: aligned with a Cartesian direction, not aligned with a Cartesian direction, through a cylindrically shaped region.
7-36
Materials & Devices
7.6.1.1
Aligned with Cartesian
To align the flow through the resistance region with a Cartesian direction, open the
pop-out dialog on the Flow Direction line, and select one of the Cartesian directions
(Global X, Global Y, or Global Z). Select the remaining directions for the other
two directions.
7.6.1.2
Not Aligned with Cartesian
To align the flow with a selected surface, open the pop-out dialog, and click the
Select Surface button:
Materials & Devices
Resistance values for the normal directions specified on the Resistance Material Editor will be used by the Solver. The following image shows flow passing through a
resistance object that is inclined at an angle to the flow. In this example, the Flow
7-37
Materials & Devices
and Normal Direction 1 resistances were set to the same value. Obviously, the values can be different if desired:
Flow Direction
Select this surface
as the normal surface
for the Flow Direction.
Normal Direction 1
Select this surface

as the normal surface
for the Normal Direction
The flow is turned slightly, but is not completely realigned to be normal to the resistance object.
To force the flow to be normal to a resistance (to produce a vent resistance), set
the Normal Direction resistances to be at least three orders of magnitude greater
7-38
Materials & Devices
than the Through Flow K. This will cause the flow to turn so that its direction is normal to the resistance object.
7.6.1.3
Cylindrically Shaped Region
7-39
Materials & Devices
Use Radial for the Flow Direction to simulate a cylindrically-shaped resistance. The
other two directions will automatically be set to Axial and Tangential:
Materials & Devices
Specify the direction of Normal Dir 1 to set the direction of this component: This is
required for correct calculation of the orientation of the material object.

Flow enters axially, but
must pass through radial
resistance region
Surface normal to
axial direction
Resistance Region
(annulus)
Flow Inlet
Another application for the Radial flow direction resistance is for a bank of resistive
cylinders over which the flow must pass. In this case, the flow direction is again
Radial, and an axial direction (select a surface normal to the axis of the cylinder)
must be selected:
7.6.1.4
Resistance Surface Parts
Surface parts can also be used as distributed resistance regions. Applications

include very thin baffles, perforated plates, and any type of very thin obstruction
that would be very cumbersome and computationally expensive to model as a volume.
7-40
Materials & Devices
Shown are examples of a baffles modeled with surface parts:
Materials & Devices
7-41
Materials & Devices
On the Materials task, the Resistance material type is available when Surface selection mode is invoked:
Set Surface as the Selection Mode
Select the surface(s) from the model.
Change the Type to Resistance.
Select a resistance material from the Name
menu or click the Create/Edit Material button
to create one.
5. Specify a Shell Thickness.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The flow direction through a surface part will

automatically be normal to the part, so no further directional assignments are necessary.
6. Click Apply.
3
4
Cross-flow resistance is automatically set very

high so that all flow is aligned normal to the
surface.
Unlike volumes, Surface parts cannot be used to simulate pressure drop within the
plane of the object (secondary losses). All pressure loss will be in the direction normal to the plane, and the flow will be constrained to be normal to the surface. To
allow for secondary-direction flow through a resistance, a volume must be used for
the resistance region.
A nodal reorganization is performed during startup processing to ensure connectivity between the distributed resistance region and the surrounding mesh. This
means that it is not possible to change the mesh and continue the analysis from a
7-42
Materials & Devices
saved iteration. If the mesh is changed in a model containing a distributed resistance surface part, the analysis must be started back at the beginning (iteration 0).
Distributed resistance surface parts are very flexible, and can contact the surrounding wall on one or more edges and even be completely submerged within the fluid:
It is very important that the fluid mesh between the edge of a floating resistance
surface and the neighboring wall have at least a single row of nodes between them.
If no nodes exist in this region, an error will be issued:
Materials & Devices
Region between edge and

wall must have more
than 1 row of
nodes.
Surface Part Resistance
Distributed resistance surface parts can be planar or arbitrarily shaped. The flow
direction will always be locally normal to the surface part. Note that there are limitations to the shape of a surface part. Very high curvature surfaces are not suitable
7-43
Materials & Devices
for use as distributed resistances, and an error may be given. An example of an

unsuitable surface is shown:
Too much curvature

to be used as a resistance
surface part.
The recommended shapes for resistance surface parts are planes and hemispheres:
Multiple resistance surface parts cannot be joined together to form a composite

resistance region, and cannot touch other surface parts. A resistance must be composed of a single surface part. Surface parts that share an edge will cause an error
in the analysis processing:
Note: surface parts are not available for 2D models.
7-44
Materials & Devices
7.6.2
Creating and Editing Resistances
No resistance materials are included in the installed Materials Database, so it is

necessary to create at least one before using a resistance. The Material Editor for
resistances is shown:
4
2
6
7
Creating Resistance Materials is similar to creating fluid and solid materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Type must be set to Resistance (this is set on the Main Materials dialog).
Enter a material name. Note: spaces are not permitted in material names.
Hit the button of the component to define (Properties group).
Select the Variation Method.
Enter the Value(s).
Hit the Apply button.
Hit OK when all information is entered.
A Resistance material definition does not reference specific Cartesian components.

Instead, the values are saved as the Through-Flow, and the two Normal Components. The specific Cartesian orientation of the material is specified when a resistance material is applied to a part.
7-45
Materials & Devices
The Variation Method and Value for each component is entered separately, but it is
recommended that the same variation be used for all three components.
Materials & Devices
A thermal conductivity can also be assigned to a resistance material. This can be

different from the surrounding fluid, and is important for heat transfer analyses in
which the material will play a thermal role.
No other fluid property information is required to define a resistance. The Solver
automatically applies the fluid property information from the surrounding fluid to
the resistance. For this reason it is very important that a resistance region only
contact one fluid material type. If, for example, a resistance contacts air on one
side and water on the other, an error will result, and the analysis will not run.
There are five different resistance variational methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Constant Loss Coefficients

Free Area Ratio
Friction Factor
Pressure-Flow Rate Curve
Permeability Coefficient (Darcy equation)
7.6.2.1
Constant Loss Coefficient:
Losses through a media can be expressed in terms of an additional pressure gradient:

2
u
p
------- = K i -----i x i
2
where Ki is the loss coefficient in the global i coordinate direction. Each global coordinate direction can have its own unique loss coefficient.
Loss coefficients in CFdesign are expressed without units, and are independent
of the length of the resistance in the model. The equation describing these losses is
written in terms of a pressure drop instead of a pressure gradient:
u2
p = i ----i2
Values for can be found in many fluids texts and the hydraulic resistance reference, Handbook of Hydraulic Resistance, 3rd Edition by I.E. Idelchik, published by
CRC Press, 1994 (ISBN 0-8493-9908-4).
Alternatively, this is a good method to use if measured data for pressure drop versus flow rate is available. Use the equation for Delta P shown above: substitute in
7-46
Materials & Devices
the known values of pressure and velocity to determine a value. Enter this value
for the Through-Flow K.
To input a loss coefficient, select the desired direction and choose Constant as the
Variation Method. Enter the appropriate value of (as described above) in the
Through-Flow K Value field.
Often the normal direction coefficients will be 50-100 times larger than the through
flow loss value. This simulates a flow straightener.
The Permeability value can be specified in conjunction with the Constant resistance
method as well as the Friction Factor method. This allows a resistance to be specified in the form:
2
V
P 1 P 2 = VL + -----------2
Where is the viscous resistance term, which is the reciprocal of permeability.
The value of permeability is required in the resistance Material Editor, and is used in
the pressure drop equation in the following manner:
where is the value of permeability. The unit of permeability is the Darcy, and is
expressed in terms of length squared.
The term (in the above equation) is the standard loss coefficient.
The combined pressure drop equation is then:
2
1
V
P 1 P 2 = --- VL + -----------2
Where:
is the permeability, in units of length squared.

V is the velocity
L is the length over which the resistance acts
is the viscosity
is the loss coefficient
is the fluid density
7-47
Materials & Devices
1
= --
Materials & Devices
The value of permeability specified for one component is automatically applied to

the other components.
To enter a constant resistance or a friction factor without the contribution of a permeability, simply leave the Permeability value 0. Likewise to apply a permeability
value without a constant loss coefficient or friction factor, change the Variation
Method to Permeability, and enter the appropriate value of permeability. More
detail about this method is described in the Darcy Equation description, below.
7.6.2.2
Free Area Ratio
An easy way to represent a perforated plate or a baffle that has a known open
(free) area is to use a free area ratio.
The free area ratio is the ratio of the open area to the total area of an obstruction:
A open
f = -----------A total
To input a free area ratio, select the desired direction and choose Free Area Ratio
as the Variation Method. Enter the appropriate ratio in the Value field. A value of 1
indicates that the region is completely open, and the flow will encounter low resistance. The two normal directions are typically closed, so use a value of 0 to indicated a completely closed--high resistance condition.
7.6.2.3
Friction Factor
The friction factor method can be used to simulate a long length of tube or pipe. In
this method, the excess pressure drop is written as:
2
f u
p-----= ------- -----i x i
DH 2
7-48
Materials & Devices
where f is the friction factor and DH is the hydraulic diameter. On the Material Editor, select the desired direction, and choose Friction Factor as the Variation
Method:
Enter the Hydraulic Diameter and the simulated Pipe Length (as well as the desired
units).
b
In the Moody method, the Moody formula is used to calculate the friction factor.
The obstruction Roughness height must be entered in the correct length units.
In the equation method, enter the coefficients a and b, as shown in the equation
above.
7.6.2.4
Head Capacity Curve
A head capacity table controls the flow rate based on the calculated pressure drop.
7-49
Materials & Devices
Select the friction factor calculation method: Moody or the equation f = aRe ,
where Re is the Reynolds number based on the hydraulic diameter of the pipe.
Materials & Devices
To input a head capacity curve, select the desired direction and choose Head
Capacity Curve as the Variation Method. Enter the pressure and flow rate values
in the following table:
Click the Insert button to create a new line between two existing lines. Use the
Import button to bring in data in Excel .csv format. Save a table of data to a
.csv file using the Save button.
A set of controls on the dialog allows the selection of the driving (independent)
variable: pressure or flow rate. For the other distributed resistance methods, the
pressure is determined as a function of the velocity. However, because in previous
versions of CFdesign, the flow rate was a function of the pressure when using the
Head Capacity curve, this toggle has been added.
By default, this toggle is set so that the pressure is a function of the flow rate (making flow rate the independent variable). This variation method is more consistent
with the other resistance variation methods, and will produce pressure drop results
that are consistent with expected values.
Analyses that are converted from previous versions of CFdesign will have this toggle set to Pressure as the independent variable when opened into CFdesign 8.0.
7-50
Materials & Devices
7.6.2.5
Permeability
A permeability can be input using the Darcy equation. Unlike loss coefficients which
have different resistance values in the three directions, a permeability provides a
constant resistance in all directions. An example is a packed bed of stones.
The governing equation for pressure drop as a function of permeability is:
p
------- = Cu i
x i
where C is the viscosity coefficient, is the viscosity (of the surrounding fluid) and
ui is the velocity in the global i coordinate direction.
To represent a porous media, select Permeability from the Variation pull-down
menu, and enter just the value of the permeability, , as shown in the following
equation:
1
P 1 P 2 = --- VL
The units of permeability are length squared.
7.7
Internal Fans
Internal fans simulate an axial momentum source within the interior of the geometry. Fans can have a constant flow rate, or the flow rate can vary with a headcapacity curve so that the fan operating point depends on the pressure drop
through the device.
7-51
Materials & Devices
Note that the length over which a permeability acts must be represented accurately
in the geometry. The reason is that the Length term in the above equation is determined from the meshed geometry. Unlike the loss coefficient (K) variation method,
the length over which a permeability acts is not divided out of the equation.
Materials & Devices
7.7.1
Assigning Axial Fans

2. Choose the Internal Fan/Pump as the
Type.
3. Select the a fan from the Name menu.
(If the material does not exist, see the following section for how to create fan materials.)
4. Select the Flow Direction of the fan by
selecting either a Cartesian direction or by

selecting Pick on Surface.
If Pick on Surface is selected, you will be
prompted to pick a planar surface on the fan
part that is normal to the flow direction.
Use the Reverse button to change the flow

direction if necessary.
5
5. If the fan is to be temperature dependent,

click the Thermostat button, and define the
temperature behavior as described below.

6
To specify the flow direction, open the pop-out dialog on the Flow Direction line,
and select either the Global X, Y, or Z axes to choose a Cartesian direction as a flow
7-52
Materials & Devices
direction. To graphically set the direction, click the Select Surface button, and
select a surface. The flow direction will be normal to the selected surface:
Note: internal axial fans should not be placed on an external boundary. Likewise, it
is not good practice to apply boundary conditions to any surface of an internal fan
material. Doing so may cause convergence difficulties and will affect the flow rate
reported in the summary file. If an internal fan contacts an external boundary, it is
better to either create an extension onto the fan inlet (so that the boundary condition is not applied directly to the fan) or simply use an external fan boundary condition instead of an internal fan material.
7.7.2
Thermostatic Controls
This allows internal fans (and blowers) to be dependent on a temperature within

the model. The fan will run as long as this trigger temperature is above (or below)
a pre-defined cut-off. When the temperature at the thermostat location is below (or
above) the cut-off, respectively, the fan will not run.
7-53
Materials & Devices
Parts assigned an internal fan material should not be extrusion meshed. The Solver
does not support internal fans with extruded elements.
Materials & Devices
Check the Thermostat box on the Internal Fan/Pump Materials task to expand the
Internal Fan Thermostat controls. This dialog allows for specification of a Trigger
temperature and a thermostat location:
1. Click the Thermostat box to activate an internal fan thermostat.
2. Set the thermostat location by
opening the Location pop-out, and

selecting a surface on the model.
3. Click the Select Surface, and pick a
surface in the model. The centroid will
be the sensing location.
4. Specify the Trigger Temperature
and units.
5. Select the fan dependence on temperature: Below Trigger (to keep
things warm) or... Exceed Trigger (to
keep things cool).
6. Click Apply to finish.
1
4
2
5
The average temperature on the surface is used as the sensing temperature. (Any
surface in the model can be used.) While this dialog is open, the interface allows for
the selection of a surface. Only one surface can be used as a sensing surface, so
selecting a new surface will update the selection list. The surface ID is written in the
space called Location, and the surface in the model is highlighted.
7-54
Materials & Devices
7.7.3
Creating and Editing Axial Fans and Pumps
No internal fans are included in the installed Materials Database, so it is necessary

to create at least one before using a fan. The Material Editor for internal fans is
shown:
1
2
4
5
6
7
1. The Type must be set to Internal Fan/Pump (this is set on the Main Materials
dialog).
2. Enter a material name. Note: spaces are not permitted in material names.
3. Hit the button of the Property to define.
4. Select the Variation Method.
5. Enter the appropriate Value(s).
7. Click OK when all information is entered.
A Fan material definition does not reference specific Cartesian components.
Instead, the Through-Flow-Rate is entered. The specific Cartesian orientation of the
fan is specified when a fan material is applied to a part.
No other fluid property information is required to define an internal fan. The Solver
7-55
Materials & Devices
Creating Fan Materials is similar to creating fluid and solid materials:
Materials & Devices
the fan. For this reason it is very important that a fan part contact only one fluid
material type. If, for example, a fan contacts air on one side and water on the
other, an error will result, and the analysis will not run.
7.7.3.1
Flow
There are three ways to specify the flow: as a constant value, a head-capacity (PQ)
curve, or as a specified velocity profile:
Constant
Enter the Flow Rate Value and
appropriate units.
Fan Curve
Enter the Flow Rate and Pressure
into the table. This information often
comes from fan manufacturer data.
Data in .csv format can be
imported using the Import button.
Data is saved to a .csv file using
the Save button.
7-56
Materials & Devices
Velocity Profile
The table allows input of radius,
axial velocity, swirl velocity (circumferential), and radial velocity.
Enter velocity profile data in the
table. Values for Radius and Axial
Velocity are required. Values for
Swirl Velocity and Radial Velocity are
optional. Alternatively, data can be
read in from a comma-separated file
(.csv). Data can be prepared in an
Excel spreadsheet and saved to a
.csv format.
More information is given below.
The Velocity Profile flow variation method allows the specification of the velocity
profile for an internal fan. It provides a mechanism to apply the velocity distribution
computed from a detailed rotating region fan analysis to a simple geometric representation of that fan in a subsequent system-level analysis.
A velocity profile distribution can be computed from a separate rotating region
analysis by creating a radial line of monitor points from the center to the outer edge
7-57
Materials & Devices
In some instances, certain fans such as large industrial units deliver a non-standard
velocity distribution. When several such fans are present, the default uniform
velocity distribution provided by the internal fan material does not adequately predict the flow profiles and the interaction between the fans. This information, however, is required for a complete understanding of the overall flow distribution
throughout the enclosure.
Materials & Devices
of the fan. These monitor points should be created prior to running the analysis so
that a time history of velocity is generated.
y
z
x
Create the line of monitor points along a Cartesian axis, if possible. This will greatly
facilitate determining the radial position of each point. In the example shown
above, the points all have the same y and z coordinates, and the origin is at the
center of the fan. The radial position of each point is its x coordinate.
If the points are aligned along a Cartesian axis, then each velocity component will
directly correspond to a component needed for the fan profile: axial, radial, and
swirl. In the example above:
x coordinate = radius
x velocity component = radial velocity
y velocity component = swirl
z velocity component = axial
After the analysis is complete (so that the velocity values are converged on a time
averaged basis), save the velocity components for each monitor point from the
Convergence Motor table into an Excel spreadsheet, and save as a .csv file.
7-58
Materials & Devices
7.7.3.2
Rotational Speed
The rotational speed is an optional parameter, and can only be entered as a constant value.
7.7.3.3
Slip Factor
The slip factor is the ratio of the flow rotational speed to the fan blade rotational
speed. Due to inefficiencies in the fan, slip can cause the tangential velocity of the
flow to be slower than that of the fan blades. CFdesign will determine the tangential
velocity of the flow by multiplying the slip factor by the specified fan rotational
speed.
The default slip factor is 1.0. This will cause the rotational speed of the flow to be
the same as the rotational speed of the fan. The permitted range of slip factor values is between 0 and 1. Values outside of this range are not allowed by the User
Interface.
7.8
Centrifugal Pump/Blower
This device models the flow through the impeller of a centrifugal device, so the
volute geometry is required. Flow can also be made to enter radially/tangentially
and exit axially (as in a radial in-flow turbine).
7-59
Materials & Devices
A complement to the axial fan device, this is a material type that changes the flow
direction from axial to radial. The user specifies a flow rate (constant or a fan
curve) as well as an optional rotational speed.
Materials & Devices
7.8.1
Assigning Centrifugal Pumps and Blowers

2. Choose the Centrifugal Pump/Blower as the
type.
3. Select the device from the Name menu.
4. Select the Axis of Rotation by clicking the
Axis of Rotation pop-out button.
5. Select the inlet surface or surfaces by clicking on the Inlet pop-out dialog button.
6. Select the outlet surface or surfaces by
clicking on the Outlet pop-out dialog button.

2
7. If the blower is to be temperature dependent, click the Thermostat button, and define
the temperature behavior as described in the
Axial Fan section.
4
5
6
8. Click Apply finish.
If the centrifugal pump/blower material device does not exist, see the following
section for information about creating one.
7-60
Materials & Devices
To specify the axis of rotation, open

the pop-out dialog on the Axis of Rotation line, and select either the Global X,
Y, or Z axes to choose a Cartesian
direction as the axis direction. To
graphically set the direction, click the
Select Surface button, and select a
surface. The axis will be normal to the
selected surface.
Select the inlet and outlet faces of the

blower by opening the pop-out, clicking
the Select Surface button, and selecting the surface from the blower device.
This must be done for both the inlet
and the outlet.
This is shown
Surrounding
Flow Volume
Inlet Surface
Centrifugal Blower
Outlet Surfaces
7-61
Materials & Devices
For a pump or blower-type device, the inlet is typically the axial surface. Care
should be taken when constructing the geometry that the inlet surface does not
touch the outlet surface.
Materials & Devices
Alternatively, the device may be an annulus, like a squirrel cage. In this case, the
inlet would be the interior annular surfaces, and the outlet would be the exterior
cylindrical surfaces (as shown above).
Parts assigned a centrifugal blower material should not be extrusion meshed. The
Solver does not support centrifugal blowers with extruded elements.
7.8.2
Creating Centrifugal Pumps and Blowers
No centrifugal pumps are included in the installed materials, so it is necessary to

create at least one before using a pump. The Material Editor for centrifugal pumps
is shown:
6
7
1. The type must be set to Centrifugal Pump/Blower (this is set on the main Materials dialog).
2. Enter a material Name. (Note: no spaces.)
3. Hit the button of the Property to define.
5. Enter the appropriate Values.
7-62
Materials & Devices
The Flow Rate and the Rotational Speed are necessary inputs. The specific direction
of flow and rotational direction are not part of the material definition. These settings are entered on the Material task dialog, making them particular to the
assigned geometry.
No other fluid property information is required to define a centrifugal pump. The
Solver automatically applies the fluid property information from the surrounding
fluid to the pump. For this reason, it is very important that a pump contact only one
fluid material type.
There are two ways to input flow rate: as a constant value or as a head-capacity
(PQ) curve.
Materials & Devices
7-63
Materials & Devices
7.8.2.1
Flow Rate
Constant
Enter the Flow Rate Value and the
appropriate units.
Fan Curve
Enter the Flow Rate and Pressure
Head data into the table. This information often comes from fan manufacturer data. Data in .csv format
can be imported using the Import
button. Data is saved to a .csv file
using the Save button.
7.8.2.2
Rotational Speed
The rotational speed is an optional parameter, and can only be entered as a constant value.
7-64
Materials & Devices
7.9
Check Valves
Check valves shut when the flow rate reaches a user-specified minimum value, and
are often used to prevent back flow. Check valves can be represented using a resistance parameter, reducing the need to model the geometry.
7.9.1
Assigning Check Valves

2. Choose Check Valve as the Type.
(If the material does not exist, see the following section for how to create the material.)
1
4. Select the Flow Direction of the check valve

with the Flow Direction pop-out.
Materials & Devices

2
3
To specify the flow direction, open the pop-out dialog on the Flow Direction line,
and select either the Global X, Y, or Z axes to choose a Cartesian direction as a flow
7-65
Materials & Devices
direction. To graphically set the direction, click the Select Surface button, and
select a surface. The flow direction will be normal to the selected surface:
Parts assigned a check valve material should not be extrusion meshed. The Solver
does not support check valves with extruded elements.
7.9.2
Creating and Editing Check Valves
No check valves are included in the installed Materials Database, so it is necessary

to create at least one before assigning one. The Material Editor for check valves is
shown:
Step 1
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
Step 6
Step 3
Step 7
Creating Check Valve Materials is similar to creating fluid and solid materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The Type must be set to Check Valve (this is set on the Main Materials dialog).
Enter a material name. Note: spaces are not permitted in material names.
Hit the button of the Property to define.
Select the Variation Method.
7-66
Materials & Devices
5. Enter the appropriate Value(s).

A Check Valve material definition does not reference specific Cartesian components. Instead, the flow direction is specified when a check valve material is applied
to a part.
No other fluid property information is required to define a check valve. The Solver
the check valve material. For this reason it is very important that a check valve
material contact only one fluid material type. If, for example, a check valve contacts air on one side and water on the other, an error will result, and the analysis
will not run.
Two parameters are required to define a check valve: the Full Open K Factor and
the Cutoff Flow Rate.
The Full Open K factor is used to simulate the fact that even a wide open valve
causes loss to the flow. This value can be very small, but it is not recommended to
use a value of 0.
7.10
Rotating Regions
Part of the CFdesign Motion Module, the Rotating Region allows for the analysis of
rotating machinery such as pumps, turbines, and mixers. The rotating region is an
envelope that surrounds a spinning device. Throughout the analysis, the rotating
region rotates about its center-line, and any solids within the region will rotate as
well.
There are numerous ways to define the rotation using a rotating region. Such
methods include a user-defined rotational speed, a driving torque, and a fluiddriven approach that spins because of the hydrodynamic (or aerodynamic) forces
imparted by the flow.
Please consult the Guidelines chapter of this Guide for more information about
Rotating Machinery analyses.
7-67
Materials & Devices
The Cutoff flow rate is the flow rate at which the valve begins to close.
Materials & Devices
7.10.1
Assigning a Rotating Region
A new material type has been added to the Material Task Dialog: Rotating Region.
When defining a rotating region, select this type from the Type drop down of the
Material Task dialog. To create or edit a Rotating Region, hit the Create/Edit Material button to bring up the Material Editor.

2. Choose Rotating Region as the Type.
(If the material does not exist, create one
using the Create/Edit button.)
4. Choose the Axis of Rotation with the popout dialog.
5. Click Apply to apply the material to the

part.
7-68
Materials & Devices
To specify the axis of rotation, open

the pop-out dialog on the Axis of Rotation line, and select either the Global X,
Y, or Z axes to choose a Cartesian
direction as the axis direction.
the Select Surface button, and select
a surface. The axis will be normal to
the selected surface.
The center of rotation will be calculated automatically based on the geometry of the
rotating region. For this reason, it is important that the rotating region and the solid
(or cut-out) rotor have the same center.
Note: Solids embedded in a rotating region should be assigned a solid material.
CFdesign will rotate such a solid because it is embedded in a rotating region.
Materials & Devices
7-69
Materials & Devices
7.10.2
Creating and Editing Rotating Regions
No rotating region materials are included in the installed Materials Database, so it is

necessary to create at least one before designating a part as a rotating region. The
Material Editor for rotating regions is shown:
Step 5
Step 1
Step 2
Step 6
Step 3
Step 4
Step 7
Step 8
Creating a rotating region is similar to creating fluid and solid materials:
1. The Type must be set to Rotating Region on the Main Materials dialog.
2. Enter a material name. Note: spaces are not permitted in material names.
3. Select the Analysis type: Known Rotational Speed, Known Driving Torque, or
Free Spinning.
4. Click the Property button to define.
6. Enter the appropriate Values.
8. Click OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
The parameters that define a Rotating Region are based on the type of analysis to
be run. There are three different scenarios: Known Rotational Speed, Known Driving Torque, and Free Spinning. The type is selected from the drop menu as
described in Step 3, above.
7-70
Materials & Devices
7.10.2.1
Analysis Type: Known Rotational Speed
Enter the rotational speed of the rotor in

either radians per second or RPM.
A variable rotational speed can be entered
by changing the Variation Method to
Table, and entering data points for rotational speed vs. time.
Materials & Devices
7-71
Materials & Devices
7.10.2.2
Analysis Type: Known Driving Torque
This method is useful for modeling a

device that is rotated by a known driving torque (such as from a motor).
Torque can be entered as a constant
value or as varying with time or RPM
using a piece-wise linear data table.
(The direction of applied torque is set as
the rotational direction on the main
Material Task dialog.)
If there is a resistive torque acting on
the device, subtract that from the
Known Torque value. For example, if the
known motor torque is 100 N-m, and
the resistive torque is 5 N-m, then apply
a value of 95 N-m.
In addition to torque, enter the inertia of
the rotating device. This is commonly
the rotational inertia of the rotor and
shaft and anything that is connected to
the shaft (such as a motor or flywheel if
the rotating device is a turbine). An easy
way to determine an approximate inertia is to multiply the combined mass of
the rotor, shaft, and shafted accessories
by the average radius squared. This
approach is reasonable if the intent of
the analysis is to run the device to a
steady state condition.
If the intent of the analysis is to obtain a
detailed time history of the rotational
speed, then a more precise value of
inertia is necessary.
7-72
Materials & Devices
7.10.2.3
Analysis Type: Free Spinning
In this case, the rotor starts with no rotational speed, and will spin up based on the
applied fluid loading. Specify the inertia of
the mechanical components and the rotor.
The steady rotational speed will occur when
the net hydraulic torque is zero.
If the device is free spinning, but a known
resistive torque exists:
1. Set the Analysis Type to Known Driving
Torque,
2. Apply the resistive torque as a negative
value.
This will cause the device to spin up due to
the surrounding flow, and will find a steady
rotational speed when the net hydraulic
torque is zero.
Compact Thermal Model
7.11.1
Introduction
The Compact Thermal Model material type allows for the simulation of integrated
circuits using a two resistor compact thermal model. Compact models provide a
geometrically simple way to simulate the performance of electronic components
using a resistor network.
This modeling method uses very simple geometry to represent a very complicated
device. A more rigorous method uses the entire geometry of the device, and is
often referred to as a detailed model. Detailed models typically produce the highest degree of accuracy, but due to their complexity, require a large mesh and hence
require long analysis times.
The following chip configurations are supported by this type of modeling:
BGA (ball grid array)
7-73
Materials & Devices
7.11
Materials & Devices
PBGA (plastic ball grid array)

TBGA (taped ball grid array)
FC-BGA (flip chip ball grid array)
QFP (quad flat pack)
PQFP (plastic quad flat pack)
NQFP (no-lead quad flat pack)
SOIC/SOP (small-outline IC/ small-outline package)
Note that vertical chips such as the TO200 are not supported by this model. It is
recommended to model such chips using a detailed model.
The typical two resistor compact thermal model consists of just three nodes: the
junction, the case, and the board. The junction is also referred to as the die or the
chip. The case is the top surface of the package, and is where a heat sink may be
mounted to the package. The board node is a single point of contact between the
board and the package. The nodes are connected by a thermal resistance between
the case and junction (Theta jc), and a resistance between the junction and the
board (Theta jb). The resistor network is shown:
Case
Theta jc
Junction
Theta jb
Board
In the two resistor compact model, heat transfer is only computed at the three
nodes (case, junction, and board). The sides of a two resistor compact model are
considered adiabatic. Only the case and board sides allow heat transfer to their surroundings. The case and board sides of the device are isothermal, and are modeled
with a high conductivity in the in-plane direction.
Note that the two resistor compact model is a simplified representation of an actual
device, and the literature indicates that they are typically accurate to about 1030%. This model is a simplification, but one that is acceptable for many designlevel what if analyses.
7-74
Materials & Devices
The resultant quantities of a two resistor compact model analysis are the temperatures at the board, junction, and case. In addition, the heat flux to the case and the
board are provided.
Unlike a detailed component model, the two resistor compact model is modeled as
a cuboid. The device must contact a PCB part, and a heat sink may be attached to
the case side of the component.
An example is shown:
Compact Thermal
Model Component
PCB
Heat loading on a two resistor compact model is typically applied as a total heat
generation boundary condition. Note that a transient heat generation condition can
be applied, but because the specific heat and density of the component are not
included in the material definition, a time-accurate solution will not be available.
7-75
Materials & Devices
Because the heat transfer computation is only performed on the three nodes of the
network, a finite element mesh is not constructed through the device. The outside
surfaces are meshed to provide connectivity between the two resistor device and
the surrounding geometry.
Materials & Devices
7.11.2
Assigning Compact Thermal Materials
1. Select the component part or parts from the

model.
2. Choose Compact Thermal Model as the

Type.
3. Select the device from the Name menu if it

exists.
4. If the material does not exist, see the following section for how to create 2 Resistor
Component materials.
No direction data is required when assigning a 2

Resistor Component material. CFdesign automatically determines the orientation based on
the location of the contacting PCB.
3
4
A requirement of the compact thermal model implementation is that the device

must contact either a PCB material (described in the previous section) or a solid
material with PCB in its name. From this, the orientation of the device is determined automatically. The side of the component touching the PCB material is the
7-76
Materials & Devices
board side, and the board node is at the center of the board surface of the component. The opposite side is the case side.
case side
compact thermal
model component
board side
PCB
An error is given if a Compact Thermal Model Material does not contact a PCB material (or a solid material with PCB in its name) when the user leaves the Materials
task dialog.
7.11.3
Creating a Compact Thermal Material
Only two parameters are required to define a two resistor Compact Thermal Model
on the Material Editor: the resistance between the junction and the board Theta
JB and the resistance between the junction and the case, Theta JC.
Materials & Devices
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 5
Step 3
Step 6
1. Select Compact Thermal Model as the Type on the Material Task dialog.
2. Enter a name for the material in the Name field on the Material Editor. (Spaces
are not allowed for material names.)
3. Click either the Theta JB or Theta JC button.
7-77
Materials & Devices
4. Enter a value and appropriate units. (Note that the only available variation
method is Constant.)
5. Click Apply.
6. After specifying both values, click OK to close the dialog.
Values for the resistances (Theta JB and Theta JC) can often be obtained from the
component manufacturers specifications.
7.11.4
Data Extraction and Visualization
For visualization purposes, the device is divided into two regions--the junction and
the case. Each region of the component has its own temperature which is governed
by the resistance values and the surrounding conditions. A single rectangular element comprises each layer, and is shown:
For every two resistor component, the following data is available:
Board Temperature
Junction Temperature
Case Temperature
Heat transfer between the junction and the board
Heat transfer between the junction and the case
This data is viewed with these methods:
7-78
Materials & Devices
Left click on the component name in the Materials branch of the feature
tree. This will show a pop-up window on the component listing the data:
7.12
Printed Circuit Boards
Printed circuit boards (PCB) are used in a wide variety of electronics applications.
Because PCBs play an important role in the temperature and heat flux distribution
within a device, it is important to accurately represent their thermal characteristics
accurately.
7-79
Materials & Devices
Open the Component Thermal Summary from Review_Notes.

View the Component Thermal Summary by generating a report from
Review_Report.
Materials & Devices
PCBs are typically constructed of multiple layers of copper foil and a dielectric
material (a glass-reinforced polymer called FR4):
Component Trace
20% Copper
thickness, t = 0.07 mm
Total PCB thickness = 1.6 mm
Component Planes
95% Copper
Component Trace
20% Copper
Dielectric layers
Because of the complexity of these components, it is often desirable to model them

using simple geometry in conjunction with effective properties to simulate the heat
transfer. Two conductivity values are needed: the normal conductivity (knormal) and
the in-plane conductivity (kin-plane). These values are computed as shown:
N
t k C
i
k in plane =
i-------------------------------=1
N
i=1
k normal =
i=1
---------------------N
ti
------------k C
i
i=1
N = the maximum number of layers

k = layer conductivity
t = thickness
C = metal content
E = coverage exponent
A new material type, Printed Circuit Board, has been added to the Materials dialog
of the CFdesign interface. The PCB is represented as a simple geometric volume
(even though physically PCBs can be quite complicated). The geometric physical
specifications of the PCB such as the layer thickness and the amount of metal per
7-80
Materials & Devices
layer are specified as material attributes, and the effective conductivities are then
computed automatically and applied to the geometry throughout the analysis.
This material type provides a convenient way to include the thermal effects of a
PCB in a simple, homogeneous geometry without having to include the geometric
details of the various layers, traces, and planes:
Materials & Devices
7-81
Materials & Devices
7.12.1
Assigning a Printed Circuit Board Material
1. Select the PCB part or parts from the
model. PCBs should be modeled as three

dimensional volumes having the same physical
size and shape as the actual PCB. No internal
layers should be modeled within the PCB.
1
2. Choose Printed Circuit Boards as the

Type.
3. Select the material from the Name menu if

it exists.
4. If the material does not exist, see the previous section for how to create PCB materials.
2
3
No direction data is required when assigning a

PCB material. CFdesign automatically determines the through and planar directions based
on the relative dimensions of the part.
5. Hit Apply to apply the material.
As with all materials, PCB materials are stored with the analysis file, even if the
material is not saved to the material database. Clicking the Save Database button
on the Material Task dialog will save existing PCB materials to the database for use
with later analyses.
7-82
Materials & Devices
7.12.2
Creating a Printed Circuit Board Material
No PCB materials are included in the installed Materials Database, so it is necessary

to create at least one prior to applying a PCB material. There are three steps necessary to create a PCB material:
1. Specify the Total PCB Thickness. In this step, the total physical thickness of the
circuit board is specified.

2. Define the trace layers. In this step, the solid material that makes up the traces
is selected from the Solid Material library. This material is typically copper, and is
available by default in the Solid Material library. Additionally, the thickness and percentage of metal of each layer are specified.
3. Define the dielectric material. The solid material that makes up the dielectric is
selected from the Solid Material database. This material is listed in the Solid Material database under the name: PCB_Plastic_for_Laminate
Each step is described in detail below:
Step 1: Total PCB Thickness
Step 3
Step 1
1. Click the Total PCB Thickness button.

2. Enter the thickness of the printed circuit board in the Thickness field as well as
the units. Constant is the only variation method for PCB thickness.
3. Click Apply to save the value.
7-83
Materials & Devices
Step 2
Materials & Devices
The thickness can easily be obtained from the CAD model or from the actual device.
Using this value and the sum of the trace layer thicknesses, the thickness of the
dielectric layer is automatically computed.
Step 2: Traces and Planes

In this step, the solid material that makes up the traces and planes is selected from
the Solid Material library. Additionally, the thickness and percentage of metal of
each layer are specified.
Step 2
Step 4
Step 1
Step 3
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
1. Click the Traces and Planes button.

2. Select the trace material from the Material drop-down menu. This menu lists
all of the solid materials stored in the material database. Copper is the most commonly used material for PCB trace layers. If a material that has variable properties
is selected, a median value will be used for the PCB material. This property value
will be constant throughout the analysis.
Note: To use a material that is not in the list, close this dialog, and switch to Solid
Materials on the Material task dialog. Create the desired solid material using the
Solid Material Editor. This material will then be available on the PCB Material dropdown menu.
3. Enter a line for each layer, and specify the thickness and the percent metal content. For example, if the 35% of the layer is copper, enter 35 in the % Metal
column.
7-84
Materials & Devices
4. Add additional rows by clicking the Insert button; remove rows with the Delete
button.
5. A two-column table of data in .csv format can be imported by clicking the
Import button. Likewise, input data can be saved to a .csv file by clicking the
Save button.
6. The Coverage Exponent is a weighting function used to account for the effect of
the configuration and concentration of copper within the board on the in-plane conductance. The default value is 2. A value of 1 is most applicable for strips or grids;
a value of 2 is applicable for spots or islands.
7. Click Apply to save the values and to activate them with the equivalent properties calculation.
Step 3: Dielectric
The dielectric layer is typically a glass-reinforced polymer that gives the PCB its
rigidity, and surrounds the copper layers. In this step, the solid material that makes
up the dielectric layer is selected from the Solid Material database:
Step 2
Step 1
Step 4
1. Click the Dielectric button.

2. Select the trace material from the Dielectric Material drop-down menu. This
menu lists all of the solid materials stored in the material database. FR4 is the most
commonly used material for PCB trace layers.
7-85
Materials & Devices
Step 3
Materials & Devices
If a material that has variable properties is selected, only the value for the x-direction conductivity will be used for the PCB dielectric material. This property value will
be constant throughout the analysis. Note: anisotropic dielectric conductivity is not
supported.
To use a material that is not in the list, close this dialog, and switch to Solid Materials on the Material task dialog. Create the desired solid material using the Solid
Material Editor. This material will then be available on the PCB Material drop-down
menu.
3. Click the Apply button to activate the material.

4. Click OK to finish.
The effective normal and in-plane conductivity values are computed when the Apply
button is clicked. The effective density and specific heat are also computed for the
PCB. These values are used by CFdesign during the heat transfer calculation to
determine the temperature distribution throughout and around the PCB.
7.13
Thermoelectric Devices
Thermoelectric Cooler devices, also known as Peltier modules, are solid-state,

semiconductor-based electronic heat pumps that move heat away from critical
components to keep them cool. They come in a wide variety of sizes and capacities,
and are used in a wide assortment of applications including electronics, medical
(transport devices to keep tissue cool), and food and beverage handling (coolers).
The Peltier effect is the driving phenomena behind TEC devices. This effect is found
when a temperature differential occurs as a result of a DC current applied across
two dissimilar materials.
TEC devices typically consist of two ceramic plates that sandwich a series (from one
to several hundred) of thermoelectric couples. The couples consist of N- and P-type
semiconductor material doped with bismuth-telluride. The N type material contains
an excess of electrons, and the P type material has an electron deficit. The couples
of a TEC devices are connected in series electrically and in parallel thermally.
TEC devices are often used for cooling, but can be also used for heating. Either
way, they are well suited for applications in which precise temperature control is
7-86
Materials & Devices
needed. A DC power supply is needed to operate a TEC, and the polarity determines the direction of heat movement (from cold to hot or hot to cold).
A simple schematic of a TEC device is shown:
Device to be cooled
Qc
Tc
Pin (I * V)
Th
Qh
Heat sink
In this diagram, the TEC device is used as a cooling device.
The typical inputs to define a TEC device are:
I = current
V = voltage
Tc = cold-side temperature
Th = hot-side temperature
DT = delta T = Th - Tc
Pin = power into the device = I*V
Qc = heat pumped by the module (heat drawn into the cold side)
Qh = heat rejected from the device = Pin + Qc
COP = coefficient of performance = Qc / Pin
a = Seebeck Coefficient
r = electrical resistivity
k = thermal conductivity
h = TEC device height
A = device hot or cold surface area
G = geometry factor (ratio of pin cross sectional area to couple height)
N = number of couples (provided by manufacturer)
7-87
Materials & Devices
Materials & Devices
TEC devices can be used in a single-stage or a multi-stage configuration for

increased thermal capacity. Note that in v10, only single stage devices are supported.
7.13.1
Creating TEC Material Devices
A few sample TEC material devices are included in the Material/Device database. To
modify any of these parameters, change the Name of the material. Changes cannot
be applied to material devices that are shipped with CFdesign.
There are four steps needed to create additional devices using the Material Editor:
1
2
3
4
1. Define the TEC Geometry: This is the Geometry Factor, G, the units of G, and
the number of couples contained within the device. G is the ratio of a pin cross-sectional area to the couple height.
2. Define the Control Method: This defines the mode of operation of the TEC
device. The default choice is Tcold, which defines the TEC device to have a cooling
effect with a target cold temperature.
3. Define Material Parameter Coefficients: Seebeck Coefficient, Electrical
Resistivity, and Conductivity: These values are temperature-dependent, and are
defined with polynomials. The coefficients in the sample devices are a good starting
point, but check with the TEC manufacturer for coefficient values for specific
devices, as needed.
7-88
Materials & Devices
4. Specify the TEC Parameter Limits: These are the manufacturer supplied
limiting performance parameters for specific devices. It is very important to use the
correct parameter values for the specific device in the analysis model.
Step 1: Define the TEC Geometry
2
3
4
1
Click the TEC Geometry button.

Enter the units of the Geometry Factor, G.
Enter the Geometry Factor, G.
Enter the Number of Couples of the specific device.
Click Apply to save the value.
Materials & Devices
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7-89
Materials & Devices
Step 2: Define the Control Method
3
1
1. Click the Control Method button.

2. Select the control method. The choices are:
TCold: target cold temperature. The TEC device removes heat from the
3. Click
7-90
user-defined TEC surface to maintain this temperature. This is the control method for cooling a device.
THot: target hot temperature. The TEC device adds heat to the userdefined TEC surface to maintain the temperature. This is the control
method for heating a device.
Voltage: Use if only the Voltage going to the TEC device is controlled.
Current: Use if only the current going to the TEC device is controlled.
Power: Use if the power going to the TEC device is controlled.
Apply to save the value.
Materials & Devices
Step 3: Define the Material Parameter Coefficients.
1
3
4
1. Click the Seebeck Coefficient button.

2. Either use the coefficients from the sample devices or input different coefficient
These expressions are second order polynomials that vary with the average temperature, Tav. The coefficient values vary by manufacturer, and the default values
supplied in v10 are published in the reference below.
Seebeck Coefficient, a, (units of V/K):
a = 0.000210902 + 3.4426e-07(Tav - 23) - 9.904e-10(Tav - 23)2
Electrical Resistivity, r, units of Ohm-m:
r = 1.08497e-05 + 5.35e-08(Tav - 23) + 6.28e-11(Tav - 23)2
Conductivity, k, units of W/m-K:
k = 1.65901 - 0.00332(Tav - 23) + 4.13e-5(Tav - 23)2
7-91
Materials & Devices
values. Click Apply to save the values.

3. Repeat with Electrical Resistivity, and click Apply.
4. Repeat with Conductivity, and click Apply.
Materials & Devices
Step 4: Specify the TEC Parameter Limits

2
1. Click the TEC Parameter Limits button.

2. Specify the manufacturer-supplied limiting operating parameters. These
parameters will limit the performance of the device within the CFdesign analysis. If
the system is such that target temperature can only be maintained by surpassing
the maximum values, a warning will be given during the analysis to indicate that
the TEC device parameters have been exceeded.
QMax is the maximum heat load the device can absorb through the cold
side. It is the power that corresponds to a temperature difference
across the module of DT = 0, at the maximum current (Imax).
IMax is the DC current that results in a maximum temperature difference (DTMax). It is not the highest value of current the module can
accept, but rather the current that results in DTMax. (It is the maximum current that can be applied to the device before the resultant
Joule-heating surpasses the cooling effect. TEC devices operated above
their maximum rated current will add more heat to the system than
they will remove through the Peltier effect.)
VMax is the maximum voltage for Imax with no heat load.
DTMax is the maximum temperature differential that can be maintained
across the module at Imax, with no heat load.
3. Click Apply to save the values.
Reference: Rowe, D.M., CRC Handbook of Thermoelectrics, CRC Press, Boca Raton,
1995.
7-92
Materials & Devices
7.13.2
Assigning TEC Material Devices
Select the part that will be a TEC device.

2. Choose Thermoelectric Component
as the Type.
3. Select the material from the Name
menu if it exists. If the desired device does

not exist, click the Edit button, and input
the parameters in the Material Editor. The
previous section describes the TEC Material
Editor.
2
4. Select the TEC surface, which is the
surface where the target temperature is

maintained. Activate the pop-out by clicking in the right-side column of the Cold
Side Surface field. Click on the sensing
surface of the device. (Surfaces co-planar
to the sensing surface will be selected as
well.)
Materials & Devices
5. Hit Apply to apply the material device

to the part.
Note: TEC devices cannot contact a Compact Thermal Model material.
Note that TEC material devices can only be applied to six-sided cuboid shaped
objects.
7-93
Materials & Devices
7.13.3
Results Extraction and Visualization
The physical performance of the TEC device within the assembly is best visualized
by plotting temperature:
Chip
TEC
Cold Side
In the case shown above, heat is moved from the chip to the heat sink, and the
sensing surface of the TEC device is maintained at 25 C. By hovering the mouse
above the TEC device, a pop-up window will appear, showing a collection of data:
7-94
Materials & Devices
This data is also saved in the Component Thermal Summary file, accessible from
the Review_Notes task dialog:
The output quantities are:
Number of Couples
Control Mode
Status (Normal if operating limits are not exceeded. Otherwise, the
status indicates if the limits of the device were exceeded. This indicates
that the device would not be able to satisfy the desired target temperature within the system.)
Cold side temperature
Cold Side heat transfer
Hot Side temperature
Hot Side heat transfer
Electric power consumption
Operating Current
Coefficient of Performance (Qc / Pin)
Figure of Merit
7-95
Materials & Devices
Materials & Devices
7.14
Parts are colored by their applied materials. The legend in the upper left corner
defines the color for each material. All parts with the same material are colored the
same except for parts contained within rotating regions. Parts that are enclosed
within rotating regions will be colored differently from other parts of the same
material.
7.15
Feature Tree
All applied materials are listed on the feature tree. These listings are for informational and for view attribute control only. All material definition is controlled
through the task dialog:
7-96
Materials & Devices
When the Materials branch is selected, the model is shown colored by its material
assignments. The Material color legend is also displayed.
The mouse right click options allow part appearance modification.

Materials & Devices
7-97
Materials & Devices
7-98
CHAPTE R 8
8.1
Motion
Introduction
The CFdesign Motion Module provides the ability to analyze the interaction between
solid objects in motion and the surrounding fluid. The effect of the motion on the
fluid medium as well as the flow-induced forces on the object can both be analyzed
efficiently and quickly.
The Motion Module was first introduced in CFdesign v7, with the introduction of
user-prescribed Linear motion. Since then, six motion types have been added,
resulting in support for seven varieties of motion:
Linear
Angular
Combined Linear/Angular
Combined Orbital/Rotational
Nutating
Sliding Vane
Free Motion
For all but two of the motion types, movement is either prescribed using input
parameters or is driven by the flow. (Sliding Vane is user-prescribed only, and Free
Motion is flow-driven only.) Each motion type is defined by specifying only the
applicable properties and directions, but does not require definition of all six
degrees of freedom. The displacement, velocity, or location of objects in motion is
either explicitly prescribed by the user or is driven by the forces imparted from the
surrounding flow. In the case of the latter, externally applied driving and resistive
forces (such as springs) can be defined that influence the motion of the object.
A new task dialog just for Motion has been added to the CFdesign interface. This
was done to reduce the complexity of the Materials task. However, as in Materials,
color coding of objects with motion and Feature Tree listings allows easy identification of applied settings.
8-1
Motion
8.2
8.2.1
Guidelines
Basic Process
Only objects that are solids (as assigned on the Materials dialog) can be assigned
motion. Solids will appear shaded in the Motion task, all other materials will appear
in outline mode.
This is an overview of the steps necessary to assign motion to a solid object.
1. Choose the Selection Mode.

2. Select the entity.
3. Select the type of motion. The choices are:
Linear, Angular, Combined Linear/Angular,

Combined Orbital/Rotational, Nutating,
and Sliding Vane, and Free Motion.
4. Click the Edit button. This brings up the
Motion Editor for defining the motion.
5. Set the needed axes, directions, center of
rotation (or nutation). Pop-out dialogs contain
controls for graphical selection of these values.
6. Set an initial position, if needed.
7. Check the Flow Driven box if the motion is
flow driven.
8. If flow-driven, set the bounds as necessary.
9. Preview the motion by clicking the Preview
button.
10
9
Note that a moving solid cannot pass through more than one fluid type.
The following topics are discussed in the Guidelines chapter of this manual:
6
8
Note that different motion types require different (more or fewer) entries.
8-2
4
5
Motion
Geometry
Meshing
Surface Parts in Motion
Solid Motion Solution Strategy
Radiation for Moving Parts
Time Step Determination
Continuing after making changes
8.2.2
Previewing Motion
The path of motion is verified prior to the analysis by clicking the Preview button.
The Preview function is available as soon as the motion is defined, and can be used
prior to clicking the Apply button on the task dialog. To preview the motion of all
defined moving solids in a model, click the Preview button when no parts are
selected.
The Preview dialog is shown:
Use the slider bar to step the object through the defined path to ensure that the
specified parameters satisfy the analysis intent. The time span is given based on
the defined motion. A pseudo-time span is used for flow-driven motion so that the
defined path can be examined.
8.2.3
Groups of Motions (Linked Motions)
In many devices, two or more objects that are driven by the flow are physically
connected in some manner so that their motions are related. Examples include
Because of a mechanical linkage between the object, the motion of one is dependent on the motion of the others.
8-3
Motion
Hydraulic rams that slide linearly together through multiple cylinders

Gears in a gear pump rotate in opposite directions at the same rotational speed
Motion
To link the motion of two or more objects, use the Group functionality to add the
parts whose motions are to be linked. When creating the group, select Motion as
the type on the Group Creation dialog:
Grouping is only applicable to flow-driven motions that are assigned the same
motion type. If a linear and an angular motion are grouped together, for example,
the linking is not possible, and will hence be ignored.
The linking functionality depends on the direction(s) of motion for the relevant
parts being fully defined. Objects with linked motions can move in different directions or even rotate in opposite directions. In the case of a gear pump, for example,
the two gears rotate in opposite directions from one another. Assign the directions
for both objects as appropriate, and add the two motions to the same group. As the
flow moves them, they will move with the same rotational velocity, but in the
assigned directions.
Note: objects with linked motions do not have to physically touch one another in
the CFdesign analysis.
8.2.4
Visual Dominance
When visualizing results for some motion analyses, the moving solid will appear
behind another part as it is animated through it. This other volume is often the
8-4
Motion
flow volume, so this situation makes it very difficult to see the moving part. An
example of this is shown:
Enabled by default for Moving Solids, the setting is controlled through the Materials
branch of the feature tree when displaying results:
The result is that moving solids appear over non-moving solids. This allows a clear
view of the moving solid and the flow surrounding it
Motion
8-5
Motion
8.3
Linear Motion
Linear motion is the motion of a solid in a straight line. Examples include a piston
moving in a cylinder, a hydraulic ram in a chamber, and objects on a conveyor belt
moving through a curing process. The linear motion of solids can be fully prescribed, or it can be driven by the flow. If flow-driven, additional parameters are
required including the bounds of motion and relevant resistive or driving forces.
Examples of flow-driven linear motion include the above items, as well as the simulation of valves opening and closing.
8.3.1
Assigning Linear Motion
1. Select the object or objects that are to move.
(Objects that are assigned motion simultaneously

will have the same motion.)
2. Select Linear as the type of motion from the

Type pull-down menu.
3. Click the Edit Motion button. This brings up

either the User-Prescribed Motion Editor or the
Flow-Drive Motion Editor. The parameters of the
motion are entered on this dialog. These parameters are described in the next sections.
4. Specify the Linear Motion Parameters: Direc-
tion, Initial Position, Max and Min bounds (for

flow-driven only), and if the motion is to be flowdriven.
5. Click Apply.
8-6
Motion
8.3.1.1
Direction
Either key in a vector or use the pop-out to set the direction of travel of the object.
Choose the Global X, Y, or Z axes to
choose a Cartesian direction as the motion
direction.
To graphically set the direction, click the
Select Surface button, and select a surface. The motion direction will be normal to
Click the Inverse button to switch the
direction.
Only planar surfaces may be selected.
An example of assigning linear direction:
Y
Direction of Travel
Select either Global X or

Select Surface, and select the
surface normal to the direction
of travel.
The specified direction of travel is the reference direction, and all directional-dependent parameters are relative to it. Specified positive displacements will move the
object in the reference direction. Negative displacements will move the object in
the opposite direction.
8-7
Motion
Flow-driven parameters such as driving forces and resistive forces reference this
direction as well. Positive values of a driving force will act in the direction of the
Direction Vector; negative values will act in the opposite direction. In contrast, positive resistance forces will act in the opposite direction of the Direction Vector; negative resistance forces will act in same direction as the Direction Vector.
Motion
8.3.1.2
Initial Position
Either key in a value or use the pop-out slider dialog to modify the initial position of
the object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for finetuning the model if the position of the object in the CAD is different from the true
starting position.
The positive direction of adjustment is in the Direction of Travel. Use the slider to
move the object in the Direction of Travel in both the positive and negative directions.
8.3.1.3
Minimum and Maximum Bounds
Use the Minimum and Maximum fields to set the bounds of motion for flow-driven
motion. (This is only required, and available, for flow-driven motion.) Bounds can
be set by keying in a bounding position or using the slider to graphically set the
position. The default state is that the motion is unbounded.
To key-in a location in the field, click in the field, and specify the
desired coordinate. For example, if 1.5 inches is entered as a minimum
value, then the object cannot go beyond 1.5 inches in the negative direction of travel. This distance is relative to the initial position of the object.
To specify the value graphically, use the pop-out dialog to position the
plane at the desired boundary with the slider. The graphical plane moves
normal to the direction of travel. All locations are relative to the initial position.
The Min and Max boundaries can be specified using different methods.
Note that the bounds are relative to the initial position specified with the Initial
Position Slider.
8.3.2
Defining User-Prescribed Linear Motion
In this section, methods to define linear motion are described. When an object
moves according to a fully-prescribed linear motion, it does not react to the flow.
8-8
Motion
The object will move in the direction and across distances that are explicitly specified.
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
Step 6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Linear, and be sure Flow-Driven is
unchecked.
2. The only property for user-prescribed linear motion is the Distance.
3. Select the Variation Method (described below).
4. Enter the appropriate values.
Motion
8-9
Motion
8.3.2.1
Distance Variation Methods
Reciprocating
This method causes the object to oscillate
linearly along a prescribed distance, in a
specified time.
The Half Period Time is the time it takes
the object to move from the start position
to the end of the stroke.
The Distance is the length of the stroke.
Start
End
Distance
Table
The Distance is relative to the Initial Position prescribed on the Motion task Dialog.
Enter Distance and Time data into the
table.
The Cyclical box defines the motion by
repeating only forward passes through the
distance table.
The Reciprocating box defines the motion
by alternating forward and reverse passes
through the distance table.
8.3.3
Defining Flow-Driven Linear Motion
In this section, methods to describe objects in motion that respond to the surrounding fluid flow are described. The motion of such objects is influenced by the
flow as well as user specified driving and resistive forces. The origins of such forces
8-10
Motion
do not have to be included in the analysis model--the forces act on the object in a
user-prescribed manner to either push the object in its prevailing direction or to
impede its progress.
In several places in this section, the Direction Vector of the object is referenced.
This is the direction specified on the Motion task dialog. Because the true direction
of flow-driven motion is not always known prior to the analysis, this direction is
really the Reference Positive Direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces
are then relative to this direction.
Flow-driven objects may start off moving at a known velocity, and either speed up
or slow down based on their interaction with the surrounding fluid (and applied
forces).
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
Step 6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Linear, and be sure Flow-Driven is
8-11
Motion
checked.
2. Three properties are available, but entries are not required: Initial Velocity,
Driving Force, and Resistive Force.
3. For each property, select the Variation Method...
4. ...and enter the appropriate values, as necessary. The Variation Methods are
described below.
Motion
8.3.3.1
Initial Velocity Variation Method
Constant
If the object is in motion at the beginning
of the calculation (and not starting from a
dead-stop), the initial velocity should be
specified. The object will travel at this
velocity at the on-set of the calculation,
and will react to the flow forces appropriately.
8.3.3.2
Driving Force Variation Methods
Driving forces are forces that are positive when acting in the direction of motion
specified on the Motion task dialog. A negative driving force will act in the opposite
direction.
Examples of driving forces include electromagnetic and other body forces as well as
forces imposed by objects omitted from the analysis geometry. The force will act in
the same direction as the direction of motion (as specified on the Motion task dialog).
F
Direction Vector:
(Reference Direction)
A driving force can be used to represent the force of gravity on an object by specifying the weight of the object as the driving force, if gravity is acting in the direction of travel.
8-12
Motion
Constant
Enter a constant force value to apply an
unchanging force to the object throughout
the entire analysis.
Table
If a driving force is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of driving
force and time.
As with all table entries, the values can be
retrieved from an Excel .csv file or likewise saved to one.
Resistive Force Variation Methods
8-13
Motion
8.3.3.3
Applied resistive forces affect the motion of the object by acting against its specified direction of travel, impeding its progress. A positive value of a resistive force
acts in the opposite direction of travel; a negative value acts in the direction of
travel.
Motion
In addition to constant and tabular specification, resistive forces can be specified as

a spring. This is a virtual spring, and does not exist in the geometry model.
F
Direction Vector:
A resistive force can be used to represent the force of gravity on an object by specifying the weight of the object as the resistive force, if gravity is acting opposite the
direction of travel.
Constant
Enter a constant force value to apply an
unchanging resistive force to the object
throughout the entire analysis.
8-14
Motion
Table
If a resistive force is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of resistive force and time.
Spring
Four parameters are required to specify a
spring:
Engagement Displacement: the distance traveled before touching the spring
Compression Displacement: the distance traveled before fully compressing
the spring (relative to the starting point).
This is the limit of travel, and is considered
a hard stop.
Motion
Engagement Force: the amount of force

the spring exerts at the engagement displacement. (This is the spring pre-load. If
none exists, enter 0).
Compression Force: the amount of force
the spring exerts at the compression displacement.
8-15
Motion
Recall that the Direction Vector specified for flow-induced motion is the reference
positive direction. Depending on the flow, the true direction of the object may
change. However the Direction Vector specified on the Motion task dialog is really a
Reference Direction for the signs of applied forces and displacements.
Because springs are typically a resistive force, a positive spring force will act in the
direction opposite of travel of the objects reference direction; a negative spring
force acts in the reference direction.
Likewise, a positive displacement is in the reference direction; a negative displacement value is opposite to the reference direction.
Note that all spring displacements are relative to the initial position defined using
the Initial Position slider on the Motion task dialog.
The following diagrams describe setting up several scenarios involving springs.
If the object is not touching the spring at time = 0, then the configuration may
appear as:
Starting Point
Engagement
spring
Displacement
Compression
Displacement
spring
Forces and Displacements are positive values.
8-16
Reference
Direction
Direction of
Spring Force
Motion
If the object is touching the spring at time=0, then the engagement displacement is
0:
spring
Starting Point
spring
Compression
Displacement
Reference
Direction
Direction of
Spring Force
Forces and Displacements are positive values.

If at time = 0 the spring is fully compressed by the object, then the compression
displacement is zero, and the engagement displacement is the distance to where
the spring is no longer compressed:
Starting Point
Compression displacement = 0
spring
Reference
Direction
spring
Direction of
Spring Force
Engagement
Displacement
Spring forces are negative because they act in the Reference Direction.
Motion
8-17
Motion
If the object has to travel in a direction opposite of its Reference Direction to contact a spring, then the displacements should be applied as negative values:
Starting Point
spring
spring
Engagement
Displacement
Compression
Displacement
Reference
Direction
Direction of
Spring Force
Displacements and are entered as negative values.

Spring forces are also negative because they act in the Reference Direction.
Note that only one spring is allowed on a moving part. Because of this, a forward
and backward spring cannot be applied to the same part.
The relationship between the required parameters and the spring constant is given
as:
F compression F engagement
------------------------------------------------------------- = K
D compression D engagement
8.4
8.4.1
Angular Motion
Description
Angular motion is the rotation of an object about a centerline. Examples of applications that should be solved with this functionality are positive displacement pumps
(such as gear pumps and trichodal pumps), check or reed valves, and other devices
with an angular movement. Unlike rotating regions (applied as a material type in
the Materials task dialog), objects with an angular motion can have paths that
8-18
Motion
interfere--such as gear teeth in a gear pump or multiple mixing blades in an eggbeater:

The lobed cam rotates about its center. Its
lobes mesh with the static lobes of the surrounding piece. Flow is induced through a
positive displacement mechanism by
changing the volume of the flow region.
Use Angular Motion to define this
motion.
Turbomachinery devices (centrifugal, mixed-flow, and axial pumps and turbines)

should be analyzed using Rotating Regions:
The impeller in this centrifugal compressor
rotates, but does not touch any other solid
object. It induces flow by transferring
energy to the fluid (through a momentum
transfer, in the classic turbomachinery
sense.)
Use a Rotating Region to define this
motion.
Motion
Assign Angular Motion to devices that move fluid (liquid or gas) using a volume displacement or that simply move through fluid. Conversely, surround a rotating
8-19
Motion
device with a rotating region that moves fluid through an energy transfer. Such
devices rely on the Coriolis effect and centripetal acceleration.
Rotating regions will produce a more accurate answer, and typically require less
computational resources. Moving solids (specified angular motion) are more versatile, and can solve a wider variety of applications.
The following table lists several devices, and how the rotational motion should be
specified:
8-20
Pump
Rotating Region
Turbine
Rotating Region
Compressor
Rotating Region
Fan
Rotating Region
Blower
Rotating Region
Gear Pump
Angular Motion
Positive-Displacement Pump
Angular Motion
Cammed Lobes
Angular Motion
Egg-beater
Angular Motion
Check Valve
Angular Motion
Motion
8.4.2
Assigning Angular Motion
1. Select the object or objects that are to move.
(Objects that are assigned motion simultaneously

will have the same motion.)
2. Select Angular as the type of motion from the

Type pull-down menu.
3. Click the Edit Motion button. This brings up

either the User-Prescribed Motion Editor or the
Flow-Drive Motion Editor. The parameters of the
motion are entered on this dialog.
4. Specify the Angular Motion Parameters: Axis of
Rotation, Center of Rotation, Initial Position, Minimum And Maximum Bounds (for flow-driven only),
and if the motion is flow-driven.
3
4
5. Click Apply.
8.4.2.1
Axis of Rotation
Either key in a vector or use the pop-out to set the axis of rotation. The rotational
direction uses the right hand rule convention.

Select Surface button, and select a surface. The axis will be normal to the
selected surface.
8-21
Motion

choose a Cartesian direction as the axis of
rotation.
Motion
For example:
The desired axis of rotation is the Global Z,
and the rotation direction is positive.
Either enter a unit vector of 0,0,1 or open

the pop-out and click the Z button, or
select the surface normal to the Z button.
X
Z
The Direction of Rotation is the reference direction for all directional-dependent

parameters. For user-prescribed rotation, a positive angular rotation will rotate the
object in the Direction of Rotation. A negative angular rotation will rotate the object
in the opposite direction.
Flow-driven parameters such as driving torque and resistive torque reference this
direction as well. Positive values of a driving torque will act in the direction of the
Axis of Rotation; negative values will act in the opposite direction. In contrast, positive resistance forces will act in the opposite direction of the Direction Vector; negative resistance forces will act in same direction as the Direction Vector.
8.4.2.2
Center of Rotation
The center of rotation is the point through which the axis of rotation passes. There
are two ways to specify it: as the centroid of a selected surface or by keying-in
coordinates.
To specify the centroid of a surface, open
the pop-out, click the Select Surface button, and select the surface.
8-22
Motion
The axis of rotation will pass through the centroid of the selected surface:
Select surface to
set centroid as
center of rotation
Axis of rotation
8.4.2.3
Initial Position
This is used to modify the initial angular position of the object from the as-built
location in the CAD model, and is very useful for fine-tuning the model in case the
initial position of the object in the model is not quite correct.
The positive direction of adjustment is in the direction defined by the Axis of Rotation. Either key in an angular value or use the slider on the pop-out dialog to rotate
the object about the axis of rotation in both the positive and negative directions.
8.4.2.4
Minimum and Maximum Bounds
Use the Minimum and Maximum fields to set the bounds of rotation for flow-driven
angular motion. (This is only required, and available, for flow-driven rotation.)
Bounds can be set by keying in an angular bounding position or using the slider on
the pop-out dialog to select an angular position. The default state is that the motion
is unbounded.
The minimum and maximum boundaries can be specified differently, if necessary.
Position Slider.
Motion
8-23
Motion
8.4.3
Defining User-Prescribed Angular Motion
In this section, methods to define angular motion are described. When an object
moves according to a fully-prescribed angular motion, it does not react to the flow.
The object will rotate in the specified direction at the prescribed angular velocity.
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
Step 6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Angular, and be sure Flow-Driven
is unchecked.
2. The only property for user-prescribed angular motion is the Angle through
which the object will sweep.
8-24
Motion
8.4.3.1
Angle Variation Methods
Constant
Enter the angular speed at which the
object will rotate throughout the analysis.
The units pull-down menu allows selection
of either radians per second or RPM.
Oscillating
This method causes the object to oscillate
angularly through a prescribed angle, in a
specified time.
The Half Period Time is the time it takes
the object to rotate from the start position
to the end position of the angular displacement.
The Angular Displacement is the included
angle of the stroke.
End
Angular
Displacement
Motion
Center of Rotation
(specified on the
Motion task dialog)
Start
8-25
Motion
Table
The table allows for specification of an
angular position at specific times.
The angle is relative to the Initial Position
prescribed on the Motion task dialog.
Enter Angle and Time data into the table.
repeating only forward sweeps through the
angle table.
by alternating forward and reverse sweeps
through the angle table.
8.4.4
Defining Flow-Driven Angular Motion
In this section, methods to define rotating objects that respond to the surrounding
fluid flow are described. The motion of such objects is influenced by the flow as well
as user-specified driving and resistive torques. The origins of such torques do not
have to be included in the analysis model--they act on the object in a user-prescribed manner to either accelerate the rotation of the object or to slow it down.
In several places in this section, the direction of rotation of the object is referenced. This is the rotational direction specified as part of the axis of rotation on the
Motion task dialog. Because the true rotational direction of flow-driven motion is
not always known prior to the analysis, this direction is really the reference positive
direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces are then relative to this direction.
8-26
Motion
Flow-driven objects may start off rotating at a known velocity, and either speed up
forces).
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
Step6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Angular, and be sure Flow-Driven
is checked.
2. Three properties are available for specification, but entries are not required:
Initial Angular Velocity, Driving Torque, and Resistive Torque.
described below.
Motion
8-27
Motion
8.4.4.1
Initial Angular Velocity Variation Method
Constant
If the object is rotating at the beginning of
the calculation (and not starting from a
dead-stop), the initial velocity can be
specified.
The object will rotate at this velocity at the
on-set of the calculation, and will react to
the flow forces appropriately.
8.4.4.2
Driving Torque Variation Methods
A driving torque is positive when applied in the reference direction of motion (as
specified on the Motion task dialog). A negative driving torque will act in the opposite direction.
Examples of driving torque include electromagnetic and other body torque as well
as torque imposed by objects omitted from the analysis geometry. The torque will
act in the same direction as the direction of motion (as specified on the Motion task
dialog).
Driving Torque
Direction of Rotation
(as defined on the
Motion task dialog)
A driving torque can be used to represent the force of gravity on an object if gravity
is acting in the direction of travel. Specify a driving torque that is the product of the
weight of the object and the length of the moment arm connecting the centroid to
the center of rotation.
8-28
Motion
Constant
Enter a constant torque value to apply an
unchanging torque to the object throughout the entire analysis.
Table
If a driving torque is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of driving
torque and time.
Resistive Torque Variation Methods
8-29
Motion
8.4.4.3
Applied resistive torque affects the rotation of the object by acting against its specified rotational direction, impeding its progress. A positive value of a resistive
torque acts in the opposite direction of rotation; a negative value acts in the direction of rotation.
Motion
In addition to constant and tabular specification, resistive torque can be specified

as a torsional spring. This is a virtual spring, and does not exist in the geometry
model.
Resistive Torque
Direction of Rotation:
A resistive torque can be used to represent the force of gravity on an object if gravity is acting opposite the direction of travel. Specify a resistive torque that is the
product of the weight of the object and the length of the moment arm connecting
the centroid to the center of rotation.
Constant
unchanging resistive torque to the object
throughout the entire analysis.
8-30
Motion
Table
If a resistive torque is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of resistive torque and time.
Spring
Four parameters are required to specify a
torsional spring:
Engagement Angle: the rotation before
touching the spring
Compression Angle: the rotation before
fully compressing the spring (relative to
the starting point). This is the limit of
travel, and is considered a hard stop.
Engagement Torque: the amount of
torque the spring exerts at the engagement angle. (This is the spring pre-load. If
none exists, enter 0).
Motion
Compression Torque: the amount of

torque the spring exerts at the compression angle.
Recall that the angular direction defined by the Axis of Rotation is the reference
positive direction. Depending on the flow, the actual rotational direction may
8-31
Motion
change. Note, however that the signs of applied torque and angular displacement
values are defined by this rotational direction.
Because torsion springs are considered a resistive force, a spring force with a positive value will act in the direction opposite to the objects reference rotational direction (it is impeding the forward progress of the object, therefore it is a resistance).
Likewise, a negative spring torque acts in the objects reference rotational direction. (The spring is aiding the forward progress of the object, and is hence acting
not as a resistance but as a driver, so its sign is negative).
A positive spring angle is in the reference direction; a negative angle value is opposite to the reference direction.
The following diagrams describe setting up several scenarios involving torsional
springs.
Note that all specified displacements will act relative to the initial position specified
with the Initial Position slider on the Motion task dialog.
If the object is not touching the spring at time = 0, then the configuration may
appear as:
Reference
Rotational
Direction
Engagement
Angle
Compression
Angle
Direction of
Spring Torque
Spring Torque and Angles are positive values.

If the object is touching the spring at time=0, then the engagement angle is 0:
Reference
Rotational
Direction
Engagement
Angle = 0
Compression
Angle
Direction of
Spring Torque
Spring Torque and Angles are positive values.
8-32
Motion
If at time = 0 the spring is fully compressed by the object, then the compression
angle is zero, and the engagement angle is the angle to where the spring is no
longer compressed:
Starting Point
Compression
Angle = 0
Engagement
Angle
As shown, Spring Torque and Angles are negative values.
Reference
Rotational
Direction
Direction of
Spring Torque
If the flow is such that the object rotates in an angle opposite of its reference angle
to contact the spring, then the engagement and compression angles should be
applied as negative values:
Engagement
Angle
Compression
Angle
Spring Torque and Angles are negative values.
Reference
Rotational
Direction
Direction of
Spring Torque
Note that only one torsional spring is allowed on a moving part. Because of this,
multiple torsional springs acting in different directions cannot be applied to the
same part.
The relationship between the required parameters and the spring constant is given
as:
Motion
T compression T engagement
-----------------------------------------------------------= K
compression engagement
8-33
Motion
8.5
8.5.1
Combined Linear/Angular Motion

Description
In Combined Linear/Angular motion, the object translates linearly along the path
specified on the Motion task dialog. The instantaneous linear position of the object
is determined either by user-specification or as a result of flow-induced forces.
As the object translates, it will also rotate about a user-specified axis. The direction
of rotation is either determined by the user or is a result of flow-induced forces. For
flow-induced rotation, developed torque is used to compute angular accelerations.
If both motions are flow induced, it is assumed that the two motions are uncoupled
and work independently. The linear translation equations update the center of rotation over time and the rotation equations update the directional cosines over time,
thus yielding a combined motion.
The location of the axis of rotation is determined by the translation of the object.
Conversely, the direction of translation is not affected by the rotation. (This kind of
motion is implemented using the Sliding Vane motion type, described later in this
chapter.)
Examples of combined motion include an object sliding along a path and rotating
about its center axis. The center of rotation is translating with the object:
Direction of Translation
Time A
Time A+1
Another example is an oscillating piston whose axis of rotation is its direction of

travel. This is a typical configuration found in many flow meters.
Rotation Direction
Direction of Translation
8-34
Motion
8.5.2
Assigning Combined Linear/Angular
1. Select the object or objects that are to

move.
2. Select Combined Linear/Angular from

the Type menu.
3. Click the Edit Motion button. This brings
up either the Motion Editor for User Defined or

for Flow Driven. The parameters of the motion
are entered on this dialog.
4. Specify the Linear Motion Parameters:
Direction, Initial Position, and Maximum and

Minimum bounds (for flow-driven only), and if
the motion is Flow-Driven.
3
4
5. Specify the Angular Motion Parameters:
Axis of Rotation, Center of Rotation, Initial Position, and Minimum And Maximum bounds (for
flow-driven only), and if the motion is FlowDriven.
6. Click Apply.
6
8.5.2.1
Linear Motion Parameters
Motion
Direction Vector
8-35
Motion
choose a Cartesian direction as the motion
direction.
Select Surface button, and select a surface. The motion direction will be normal to
direction.
Y
Direction of Travel

of travel.
Flow-driven parameters such as driving forces and resistive forces reference this
direction as well. Positive values of a driving force will act in the direction of the
Direction Vector; negative values will act in the opposite direction. In contrast, positive resistance forces will act in the opposite direction of the Direction Vector; negative resistance forces will act in same direction as the Direction Vector.
Initial Position
the object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-
8-36
Motion
tuning the model if the position of the object in the CAD is different from the true
starting position.
Linear Minimum and Maximum Bounds

Use the Minimum and Maximum fields to set the bounds of motion for flow-driven
motion. (This is only required, and available, for flow-driven motion.) Bounds can
be set by keying in a bounding position or using the slider to graphically set the
position. The default state is that the motion is unbounded.
value, then the object can not go beyond 1.5 inches in the negative direction of travel. This distance is relative to the initial position of the object.
Position Slider.
8.5.2.2
Angular Motion Parameters
Axis of Rotation
Motion
8-37
Motion

rotation.
selected surface.
For example:
Y
X
Z

Flow-driven parameters such as driving torque and resistive torque reference this
direction as well. Positive values of a driving torque will act in the direction of the
Axis of Rotation; negative values will act in the opposite direction. In contrast, positive resistance forces will act in the opposite direction of the Direction Vector; negative resistance forces will act in same direction as the Direction Vector.
8-38
Motion
Center of Rotation
coordinates.
Select surface to
set centroid as
center of rotation
Axis of rotation
Initial Position
angular motion. (This is only required, and available, for flow-driven rotation.)
8-39
Motion
Angular Minimum and Maximum Bounds
Motion
is unbounded.
Position Slider.
8.5.3
Defining Combined Motion
The two elements of Combined motion, Linear and Angular, are defined independently as User-prescribed or Flow-driven. The Flow-Driven check boxes on the
Motion task dialog govern how each element is defined on the Material Editor. The
possible combinations of user-prescribed and flow-driven are listed:
User-Linear/User-Angular
Flow-Linear/User-Angular
User-Linear/Flow-Angular
Flow-Linear/Flow-Angular
The following sections describe how to set up User-prescribed and Flow-driven

motions. Only the Material Editors for completely user-defined and completely flowdriven are shown, but the variation methods described are applicable to the two
user-defined/flow-driven combinations, as well.
8.5.3.1
Defining User-Prescribed Motions
In this section, methods to prescribe linear and angular motions are described.
When an object moves according to a fully-prescribed motion, it does not react to
the flow. The object will move and rotate only in the specified directions, across distances that are explicitly specified, and at prescribed angular velocities.
If one of the two motion elements is to be user-prescribed, then only that one will
be defined using the User-prescribed properties (as shown below). The other will be
defined using the Flow-Driven properties (as shown in the next section).
8-40
Motion
The Material Editor for User-Prescribed-Linear/User-Prescribed-Angular is shown:
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Combined Linear/Angular. (If
Flow-Driven is unchecked for both types of motion, then both types will be Userprescribed.)
2. Click the Distance property button for Linear Properties.
3. Select the Variation Method for Distance.
5. Hit Apply.
Step 7
Step 8
Step 6
Step 10
6. Click the Angle property button for Angular Properties. (This defines the angle
through which the object will sweep.)
7. Select the Variation Method for Angle.
8-41
Motion
Step 9
Motion

9. Hit Apply.
10. Hit OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
8.5.3.2
Variation Methods for User-Prescribed Motions
The following table lists the variation methods for User-Prescribed properties for
Linear and Angular motion. More details and illustrations for both types of motions
are contained in the preceding Linear and Angular sections, respectively.
Linear
Motion
Distance
Linear
Motion
Distance
Angular
Angle
Please see section 8.3.2.1 for a detailed description.
Motion
8.5.3.3
Constant
Angle
Oscillating
Angle
Table
Motion
Angular
Table
Motion
Angular
Reciprocating

Defining Flow-Driven Motions
In this section, methods to describe objects in linear and angular motion that
respond to the surrounding fluid flow are described. The motion of such objects is
influenced by the flow as well as user-specified driving and resistive forces and
torque. The origins of such forces do not have to be included in the analysis model-they act on the object in a user-prescribed manner to either accelerate the object
in its direction and angle travel or to slow it down.
In several places in this section, the Direction Vector and the Direction of Rotation of the object are referenced. These are the directions specified on the Motion
task dialog. Because the true direction of flow-driven motion is not always known
prior to the analysis, this direction is really the Reference Positive Direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces are then relative to this direction.
8-42
Motion
Flow-driven objects may start off moving at a known velocity, and either speed up
forces).
The Material Editor for Flow-Driven-Linear/Flow-Driven-Angular is shown:
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Combined Linear/Angular. (If
Flow-Driven is checked for both types of motion, then both types will be flowdriven.)
2. Define each of the Linear properties by first clicking on the desired property
button: Initial Velocity, Driving Force, and Resistive Force. (It is not required
to specify any or all of the properties.)
3. For each property, select the Variation Method.
4. Enter the appropriate values, as necessary
5. Hit the Apply button.
Motion
8-43
Motion
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 6
Step 10
6. Define each of the Angular properties by first clicking on the desired property
button: Initial Angular Velocity, Driving Torque, and Resistive Torque. (It is
not required to specify any or all of the properties.)
8. Enter the appropriate values, as necessary.
8-44
Motion
8.5.3.4
Variation Methods for Flow Driven Motions
Linear
Motion
Initial
Velocity
Constant
Linear
Motion
Driving
Force
Constant
Linear
Motion
Driving
Force
Table
Linear
Motion
Resistive
Force
Constant
Linear
Motion
Resistive
Force
Table
Linear
Motion
Resistive
Force
Spring
Angular
Initial
Angular
Velocity
Constant
Driving
Torque
Constant
Driving
Torque
Table
Resistive
Torque
Constant
Resistive
Torque
Table
Resistive
Torque
Spring
Motion
Angular
Motion
Angular
Motion
Angular
Motion
Angular
Angular
Motion


Motion
Motion
8-45
Motion
8.6
8.6.1
Combined Orbital/Rotational Motion

Description
Combined Orbital/Rotation motion is another double motion--the object rotates

about its axis of rotation, and also orbits about an axis parallel to its axis of rotation. Rotational motion is described in the Angular Motion section of this chapter.
Orbital motion is the circular displacement of an object about an axis. The orientation of an object in pure orbit (with no rotational component) does not change. This
is shown below:
Time = a
8-46
Time = a+1
Time = a+2
Motion
The combined rotation and orbital motion is shown below (in this graphic the rotation and orbital speeds are the same).
Time = a
Time = a+1
Time = a+2
The orbital speed is often slower than the primary rotational speed, however.
A typical application for Combined Orbital/Rotational motion is a pump shaft with
an eccentric orbit (or whirl) component. The shaft rotates about its centerline, but
also has an eccentric rotation about an additional axis. By specifying an orbit on an
object, it is possible to understand the force imbalance imparted on bearings and
other fixtures as a result of a shaft orbit.
Rotation Direction
Center of Rotation
Orbital Direction
Center of Orbit
8-47
Motion
Both motions can be either user-prescribed or flow-driven. If the orbit is flowdriven, then the forces acting on the moving object are summed and appropriate
accelerations are computed. Velocities and displacements are limited to the circular
orbital path using the following relationships.
Motion
8.6.2
Assigning Orbital Motion

move.
2. Select Combined Orbital/Angular from

the Type menu.
1
up either the Motion Editor for User Defined or

for Flow Driven. The parameters of the motion
are entered on this dialog.
4. Specify the Orbital Parameters: Orbit Axis,
Center of Orbit, Initial Position, Maximum/Minimum Bounds (for Flow-Driven), and if the
orbital motion if Flow-Driven.
3
4
5. Specify the Rotational Parameters: Axis of
Rotation, Center of Rotation, Initial Position,

Maximum/Minimum Bounds, (for Flow-Driven),
and if the rotational motion is Flow-Driven.
6. Click Apply.
The parameters required for the Orbital and the Rotation definition are specified in
the same manner as angular motion. Descriptions of these parameters are discussed in Sections 8.4.2.1 through 8.4.2.4 of the Angular Motion section of this
chapter.
8.6.3
Defining Combined Orbital/Rotational Motion
The two elements of Orbital motion, the rotation and the orbit, are defined independently as User-Prescribed or Flow-Driven. The Flow-Driven check boxes on the
8-48
Motion
Motion task dialog govern how each element is defined on the Material Editor. The
possible combinations of user-prescribed and flow-driven are listed:
User-Prescribed Rotation/User-Prescribed Orbit

Flow-Driven Rotation/User-Prescribed Orbit
User-Prescribed Rotation/Flow-Driven Orbit
Flow-Driven Rotation/Flow-Driven Orbit
The following sections describe how to set up User-Prescribed and Flow-Driven

Orbital motion. Only the Material Editors for completely user-defined and completely flow-driven are shown, but the variation methods described are applicable
to the two user-prescribed/flow-driven combinations, as well.
8.6.3.1
Defining User-Prescribed Orbital and Angular Rotation
In this section, methods to prescribe both angular motions (the orbit and the rotation) are described. When an object moves according to a fully-prescribed motion,
it does not react to the flow. The object will orbit and rotate only about the specified
axes, and at prescribed angular velocities.
If one of the two motion elements is to be user-prescribed, then only that one will
be defined using the User-Prescribed properties (as shown below). The other will be
defined using the Flow-Driven properties (as shown in the next section).
Motion
8-49
Motion
The Material Editor for User-Prescribed Orbit/User-Prescribed Angular is shown:
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 6
Step 5
Step 7
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Combined Orbital/Rotational. (If
Flow-Driven is unchecked for both types of motion, then both types will be Userprescribed.)
2. Click the Angle property button for Orbital Properties.
3. Select the Variation Method for Orbit.
5. Hit Apply.
6. Repeat for the Angular Rotation property.
7. Hit OK when finished to close the dialog.
8.6.3.2
Variation Methods for User-Prescribed Orbital Motion
Since both elements in an orbital motion are angular rotations, both use the same
angular property variations described earlier in this chapter. The following table
8-50
Motion
lists these variation methods for User-Prescribed Orbital motion, and lists where to
find more details and illustrations about each.
Angle
Constant
Angle
Oscillating
Angle
Table
8.6.3.3
Defining Flow-Driven Orbital and Angular Rotation
In this section, methods to describe orbital and angular motions that respond to the
surrounding fluid flow are described. The motion of such objects is influenced by
the flow as well as user-specified driving and resistive forces and torque. The origins of such forces do not have to be included in the analysis model--they act on
the object in a user-prescribed manner to either accelerate the object or to slow it
down.
In several places in this section, the Direction of Rotation of the object are referenced. These are the directions specified on the Motion task dialog. Because the
true rotational direction of flow-driven motion is not always known prior to the
analysis, this direction is really the Reference Positive Direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces are then relative to this direction.
Motion
8-51
Motion
The Material Editor for Flow-Driven Orbit/Flow-Driven Angular Motion is shown:
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
Step 6
Step 7
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Orbital. (If Flow-Driven is
checked for Orbital and Angular, then both types will be flow-driven.)
2. Define each of the Orbital properties by first clicking on the desired property
button: Initial Angular Velocity, Driving Force, and Resistive Force. (It is not
required to specify any or all of the properties.)
4. Enter the appropriate values, as necessary.
6. Repeat for the Rotation properties.
Note that forces (instead of torques) are used to describe the Orbital motion. This is
done because the orbit is really a displacement motion, so force, displacements,
and velocities are more applicable than torque and angular displacements, and
angular velocities. The relationship between torque and force for the orbit is
expressed in terms of the eccentricity radius (eps):
8-52
Torque = force * eps

Omega = velocity / eps
Theta = displacement /eps
Motion
8.6.3.4
Variation Methods for Flow-Driven Orbital Motion
The orbital motion element uses forces, and the angular rotation element uses
torque. The following table lists these variation methods for Flow-Driven Orbital
motion, and lists where to find more details and illustrations about each:
Initial Angular
Velocity
Constant
Driving Force
Table
(Orbital)
Resistive Force
Table
(Orbital)
Driving Torque
Table
(Orbital)
Resistive Torque
Table
(Orbital)
Note: Springs are not available for either motion element in combined orbital/rotational motion.
8.7
8.7.1
Nutating Motion
Description
Nutation is a type of motion used in several types of liquid flow meters. A nutating
object is inclined at an angle to a reference axis. As the normal vector of the object
rotates about the reference axis, the angle between the normal vector and the reference axis remains constant. The result is that the object actually wobbles about
Motion
8-53
Motion
the reference axis, but does not change angular position relative to it. A coin wobbling along its edge as it slows from a spin is a good example of nutating motion.
Center of Nutation
The image above describes nutating motion. The three quantities that are defined
through the User Interface are the Tilt Axis, the Axis of Nutation (Nutating Axis),
and the Center of Nutation. The Tilt axis is normal to the disk, and rotates about
the Nutating axis through the Nutating Angle. The Nutating Axis is typically a global
Cartesian axis, but is not required to be one. The Center of Nutation is typically the
center of the disk. This point is often constructed at the origin or some other easily
defined point. The other quantities shown in the graphic above are determined
automatically, and do not require explicit definition.
The series of images below show a nutating disk. The disk wobbles about its axis,
but it does not actually rotate. The angular position of the slot in the disk does not
change throughout the nutation.
8-54
Motion
8.7.2
Assigning Nutating Motion

nutate.
2. Select Nutating as the type of motion

from the Type menu.
up either the Motion Editor for User Prescribed

or for Flow-Driven.
4. Specify the Nutating Motion Parameters:
Tilt Axis, Axis of Nutation, Center of Nutation,

Initial Position, Minimum And Maximum
bounds (for flow-driven only), and if the
motion is Flow-Driven. The parameters are
described below.
5. Click Apply.
8.7.2.1
Tilt Axis
The tilt axis is the axis normal to the disk. As the disk nutates, this is the axis that
Motion
8-55
Motion
is pinned at the Center of Nutation and rotates about the Axis of Nutation.
Key in the vector representing the Tilt
Axis, or open the pop-out dialog.
choose a Cartesian direction.
The Tilt Axis on an actual nutating device is shown:

Using the Pick Option,
select this surface
as the surface
normal to the
Tilt Axis.
The resultant Tilt

Axis at the current
position of the
disk
The absolute orientation of the tilt axis will change as the object nutates, but the
orientation relative to the object will remain constant. The direction of this axis
determines the direction of Nutation according the right hand rule convention.
8-56
Motion
8.7.2.2
Axis of Nutation
The Axis of Nutation is the axis that remains constant throughout the nutation process.
Key in the vector representing the Axis
of Nutation, or open the pop-out dialog.
choose a Cartesian direction.
Because this axis does not move, it is often convenient to construct the model such
that a Cartesian axis is the Axis of Nutation. This allows easy specification of the
axis. The Axis of Nutation is shown:
y
x
z
In this case, the Axis of Nutation is the Global Y axis.

Motion
8-57
Motion
8.7.2.3
Center of Nutation
The Center of Nutation is the center point of the nutating object.

There are two ways to specify this: Key
In the coordinates or open the pop-out
dialog, and click the Select Surface button. Select a surface; the centroid of a
selected surface will be the Center of
Nutation.
The center point is the center of motion, and is typically the center of the object.
Because of this, it is often convenient to construct the CAD model such that the
center of the nutating object is at a known coordinate. In the example shown
below, the Center of Nutation is actually the origin (0,0,0), which made defining it
very easy:
The Center of Nutation

in this model is at
the origin.
8.7.2.4
Initial Position
This slider on the pop-out dialog is used to modify the initial angular position of the
object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-tuning the model in case the initial position of the object in the model is not quite correct.
8-58
Motion
The positive direction of adjustment is in the direction defined by the Axis of Nutating. Use the slider to rotate the object about the axis of nutation in both the positive and negative directions.
8.7.2.5
Minimum and Maximum
nutating motion. (This is only required, and available, for flow-driven nutating.)
is unbounded.
Position Slider.
8.7.3
Defining User-Prescribed Nutation
In this section, methods to define nutating motion are described. When an object
moves according to a fully-prescribed nutating motion, it does not react to the flow.
The object will nutate in the specified direction at the prescribed nutation velocity.
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Motion
Step 5
Step 6
8-59
Motion
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Nutating, and be sure Flow-Driven
is unchecked.
2. The only property is the Nutating Angle through which the object will sweep.
8-60
Motion
8.7.3.1
Nutation Angle Variation Methods
Constant Nutating Angular Speed

Enter the angular speed at which the
object will nutate. The units pull-down
menu allows selection of either radians per
second or RPM.
Table
The table allows for specification of a
Nutation Angle position at specific times.
The angle is relative to the Initial Position
prescribed on the Motion task dialog.
Enter Nutation Angle and Time data into
the table.
repeating only forward sweeps through the
angle table.
by alternating forward and reverse sweeps
through the angle table.
8.7.4
Defining Flow-Driven Nutation
8-61
Motion
In this section, methods to define nutation that responds to the surrounding fluid
flow are described. The motion of such objects is influenced by the flow as well as
user-specified driving and resistive torques. The origins of such torques do not have
to be included in the analysis model--they act on the object in a user-prescribed
manner to either accelerate the object or to slow it down.
Motion
In several places in this section, the direction of nutation of the object is referenced. This is the nutation direction determined by the direction of the Tilt Axis or
the Axis of Nutation (as defined on the Motion task dialog.) Because the true nutation direction of flow-driven motion is not always known prior to the analysis, this
direction is really the reference positive direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces are then relative to this direction.
Flow-driven objects may start off with an initial nutation velocity, and either speed
up or slow down based on their interaction with the surrounding fluid (and applied
forces).
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
Step 6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Nutating, and be sure Flow-Driven
is checked.
2. Three properties are available for specification, but entries are not required:
Initial Nutation Velocity, Driving Torque, and Resistive Torque.
described below.
8-62
Motion
8.7.4.1
Initial Nutation Velocity Variation Method
Constant
The object will nutate at this velocity at
the on-set of the calculation, and will react
to the flow forces appropriately.
If the object starts from rest, leave this
value specified as 0.
8.7.4.2
Driving Torque Variation Methods
A driving torque is positive when applied in the reference direction of motion (as
applied on the Motion task dialog). A negative driving force will act in the opposite
direction.
Examples of driving torque include electromagnetic and other body torques as well
as torque imposed by objects omitted from the analysis geometry. The torque will
act in the same direction as the direction of motion (as specified on the Motion task
dialog).
Constant
unchanging torque to the object throughout the entire analysis.
Motion
8-63
Motion
Table
A driving torque that varies with time is
specified using the table of torque vs.
time.
8.7.4.3
Resistive Torque Variation Methods
Applied resistive torque affects the nutation of the object by acting against its specified nutation direction, impeding its progress. A positive value of a resistive torque
acts in the opposite direction of nutation; a negative value acts in the direction of
nutation.
Constant
unchanging resistive torque to the object
throughout the entire motion.
8-64
Motion
Table
If a resistive torque is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of torque
and time.
8.8
8.8.1
Sliding Vane Motion

Description
Sliding Vane is a variation of Combined Linear/Angular motion. In the Combined

Linear/Angular motion type, the path of linear translation is specified by the user,
and is not changed by the rotational motion. Sliding Vane motion is the opposite:
the location of the axis of rotation is specified by the user, does not change, and
controls the direction of linear translation.
The most common application of this type of motion is found in sliding-vane positive displacement pumps. Vanes or pistons rotate about the center-line of the
Motion
8-65
Motion
impeller, but translate radially. The direction of linear travel changes at every angular position. The axis of rotation, however, remains constant. This is shown:
Direction of
translation changes
based on angular position.
Sliding vane motion is specified only as a user-prescribed motion. Flow-driven sliding vane motion is not currently supported.
8-66
Motion
8.8.2
Assigning Sliding Vane Motion

move.
2. Select Sliding Vane as the type of motion

from the Type menu.
Motion Editor. The parameters of the motion

are entered on this dialog, and are described
in the next sections.
4. Specify the Linear Motion Parameters:

Direction Vector and Initial Position.
5. Specify the Angular Motion Parameters:
Axis or Rotation, Center of Rotation, and Initial Position.
3
4
5
6. Click Apply.
8.8.2.1
Linear Motion Parameters
Direction Vector
Motion
8-67
Motion
choose a Cartesian direction as the
motion direction.
Select Surface button, and select a
surface. The motion direction will be
normal to the selected surface.
direction.
Y
Direction of Travel

of travel.
Initial Position
the object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for finetuning the model if the position of the object in the CAD is different from the true
starting position.
8-68
Motion
8.8.2.2
Angular Motion Parameters
Axis of Rotation
rotation.
selected surface.
For example:

X
Z

Center of Rotation
Motion
8-69
Motion
coordinates.
Select surface to
set centroid as
center of rotation
Axis of rotation
Initial Position
8.8.3
Defining Sliding Vane Motion
In this section, methods to specify the linear and angular components of Sliding
Vane motion are described. When an object moves according to a fully-prescribed
motion, it does not react to the flow. The object will move and rotate only in the
specified directions, across distances that are explicitly specified, and at prescribed
angular velocities.
8-70
Motion
The Linear properties on the Sliding Vane Material Editor are shown:
Step 3
Step 1
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Sliding Vane.

Click the Distance property button for Linear Properties.
Select the Variation Method for Distance.
Enter the appropriate values.
Hit Apply.
Motion
8-71
Motion
Step 7
Step 8
Step 6
Step 9
Step 10
6. Click the Angle property button for Angular Properties. (This defines the angle
through which the object will sweep.)
7. Select the Variation Method for Angle.
9. Hit Apply.
8.8.4
Variation Methods for Sliding Vane Motions
The following table lists the variation methods for the linear and angular components of Sliding Vane motion. More details and illustrations for both types of
motions are contained in the preceding Linear and Angular sections, respectively.
Linear
Motion
Distance
Linear
Motion
Distance
8-72
Reciprocating
Table
Motion
Angular
Angle
Motion
Angular

Angle
Motion
Angular
8.9.1
Oscillating
Angle
Motion
8.9
Constant
Table
Free Motion
Description
Unlike the other motion types (linear, angular, combined, etc.), Free Motion allows
for motion in any direction. This is the most flexible of the motion types, and can be
used to simulate the unconstrained (or partially constrained) movement of objects
within an active flow field.
The motion is always flow driven, and is defined by enabling or disabling any of the
six degrees of freedom. Limits can be defined for each degree of freedom, but collisions with walls, static and other moving solids are automatically detected.
Forces can be applied to objects in free motion as well as gravity. Freely-moving
solids can be subjected to initial linear and/or angular velocities as well.
Objects in free motion cannot pass through other solids, walls, symmetry or surfaces with periodic conditions. They will, however, be allowed to pass through
openings (such as fluid boundaries with specified velocities, flow rates, or pressure
conditions).
8-73
Motion
Care should be taken when defining the mesh for free motion analyses. For the
constrained motion types, the path of the object is known, and the mesh can be
refined within that path. This often reduces the mesh requirements on other areas
of the model that do not directly influence the motion. In a free motion analysis,
however, the path is often less certain, so a higher mesh density may be required
throughout more of the model in order to adequately resolve the motion of the
object. Please consult the Users Guide for more information on the mesh requirements for motion analyses.
Motion
As an object in free motion moves through a flow field, CFdesign tracks the forces
and torque acting on it, and uses this information to update its position. When a
collision occurs, the forces, torque, and location of impact are computed, and are
used to determine the reaction. A coefficient of restitution of 0.5 is used to compute
the momentum exchange between objects as they collide. Reactions include bouncing, glancing, and spinning:
Bounce
Glance
Spin
More details about collisions are presented at the end of this section.
8-74
Motion
8.9.2
Assigning Free Motion

move.
2. Select Free Motion as the type of motion

from the Type menu.
Motion Editor, which allows specification of initial linear and angular velocities of the object.
This dialog is described in the next section.
4. Specify the applicable Free Motion Parameters: Active Degrees of Freedom (DOF),
Applied Force, and Gravity.
2
3
4
5. Click Apply.
8.9.2.1
Specifying Active Degrees of Freedom
For two-dimensional models, the Z translation, X and Y rotations are inactive

because motion in these directions is not possible for models oriented in the xy
plane.
8-75
Motion
By default, objects in free motion can move in any direction. Expand the Active DOF
menu to view the six degrees of freedom. None are enabled by default, indicating
that movement is prevented in all directions and about all axes. Checking a degree
of freedom allows motion in that direction (or about that axis).
Motion
Translation
Use the Minimum and Maximum pop-out dialogs to set the bounds of motion.
Bounds can be set by keying in a bounding position or using the slider on the popout dialog to graphically set the position. The default state is that the motion is
unbounded.
value, then the object can not go beyond 1.5 inches in the negative direction of travel. This distance is relative to the initial position of the object.
Rotation
Use the minimum and maximum fields to set the bounds of rotation. Bounds can be
set by keying in an angular bounding position or using the slider on the pop-out
dialog to select an angular position. The default state is that the motion is
unbounded.
8.9.2.2
Applied Force
This set of controls provides a way to specify an optional force acting on the object.
There are three basic parameters required to specify a force on an object in free
motion: The Force Direction, the Force Magnitude, and the Location of force
application on the object:
1. Force Direction
The Force Direction is specified by either keying-in a direction vector, or using the
pop-out dialog to select a Cartesian direction or a surface that is normal to the force
direction.
8-76
Motion
It is necessary to select the Type of force application. This can either be a Constant Vector or Vary by Orientation with position of the object.
If Constant Vector is selected, the direction of force will not change
even as the object orientation changes. The force direction remains constant, even if the object rotates about an axis. This is shown:
Initial Position. Force is applied

in the negative x direction.
Object rotates because of torque about

object center. Force is still directed
in the negative x direction. The resultant
torque will vary as the object changes
orientation.
If Vary by Orientation is selected, the direction of force will vary relative to the coordinate system, but will remain constant relative to the
object. This is the recommended way to apply a constant torque to an
object in motion. This is shown:
Initial Position. Force is applied

in the negative x direction.
2. Force Magnitude
Select if the force is Steady State or if it is Transient from the Time Dependent
line.
8-77
Motion
Object rotates because of torque.

Force is constant relative to the object,
but varies relative to ground.
The resultant torque remains constant
as the object moves.
Motion
If the force is steady state, enter the value in the Magnitude field. If the force is
transient, open the pop-out dialog to specify a piece wise linear relationship
between force and time.
Be sure to select the units of force in the Unit field.
3. Location
The final step is to specify the location of the applied force on the object. There are
two methods: Key-In a location or open the pop-out dialog, and select a planar surface. The centroid of the surface will be the point of application of the force.
This point must be on or in the moving object. A specified point of application that
does not contact the object in its initial location will cause the force to not act on
the object throughout the analysis.
8.9.2.3
Gravity
The Gravity menu allows for specification of a gravitational acceleration to act on

the object. Expand the Gravity menu, and check the Earth box to indicate that the
object is subjected to the Earths gravitational pull. Enter a unit vector to indicate
the direction of the gravitational force (or select one graphically using the pop-out
dialog).
To define a gravitational pull that is different from that of Earth, uncheck the Earth
box, and enter the gravitational acceleration in the appropriate direction. The units
of this value will be in terms of the analysis length unit.
8.9.3
Defining Free Motion
Most of the parameters governing free motion are defined directly on the Motion
Task dialog. The exception are the initial linear and angular velocity components.
8-78
Motion
These values are assigned on the Motion Editor, which is accessible by clicking the
Edit Motion Properties button:
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 1
Step 5
By default objects in free motion start from rest. To define a free motion state that
has an initial velocity or rotation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the velocity or angular velocity component from the Properties list.
The variation method for all initial velocity values is Constant.
Enter the appropriate value and select the units.
Click the Apply button.
Click the OK button to close the dialog.
8.9.4
Collision Detection
As mentioned, objects in Free Motion will react with walls and solids when they collide, thereby preventing penetration with other objects.
Collision detection is enabled only for collisions involving at least one
object in free motion.
If a free motion object strikes another object in free motion, both
objects will adjust their paths to avoid penetration. The impulse exchanged
during the collision as well as a contact path are calculated. The contact
force (which is the impulse divided by the time step) is applied to both
objects at their respective contact points.
8-79
Motion
Motion
If a free motion object strikes an object in user-specified motion, the

free motion object will adjust to avoid penetrating the other object. The
forces from the collision are applied to both objects, respectively, but will
not affect the motion of the object in user-specified motion. (The collision
force is included in the motion output data for both parts, however.)
If a free motion object strikes an object in fluid-driven motion, the free
motion object will adjust to avoid penetrating the other object. Forces from
the collision are applied to both objects, and will move the fluid-driven part
in its constrained path of motion.
The mesh must follow the guidelines described in the Users Manual for
the motion path. If the mesh is too coarse, the moving object may pass
through an obstruction instead of colliding with it.
Collision detection is sensitive to the time step size. If the time step is
too large, moving objects may pass through an obstruction instead of colliding. A good guideline is the time step size indicated by the Estimate function on the Analyze dialog.
If an object in free motion strikes a wall or static solid, a collision will also occur,
and the object will bounce or deflect appropriately.
8-80
CHAPTE R 9
9.1
Analyze
Introduction
The Analyze dialog contains two sections: Analysis Options and Output Options.
Analysis Options contains settings that determine the physics of the analysis. This is where
heat transfer, compressibility, and mixing models
are enabled.
The Output Options region is where the analysis
is started. The analysis mode is set here, as are
the number of iterations or time steps, and the
Save intervals. The Analysis Computer is also
set here for the Fast Track Option--the ability to
run the analysis on a computer different from
the one used to build the analysis. The GO button is also on this dialog
9-1
Analyze
9.2
Analysis Options
The Options dialog is used to set basic conditions and parameters of the analysis.
The default settings define an incompressible,
turbulent flow analysis, with no heat transfer.
The parameters are all engineering in nature,
and are discussed in this chapter:
9.2.1
Flow
Compressibility
Heat Transfer
Radiation
Gravity
Turbulence
Solar Heating
Scalars
Cavitation
Flow
If flow is turned On, the pressure and momentum equations for the fluid motion
will be solved. Turn flow Off for conduction-only heat transfer analyses.
Note: For forced convection analyses, the flow and heat transfer calculations can be
run separately (although it is not required). After the flow analysis finishes, turn
flow to Off, and turn Heat Transfer On (discussed below). For natural convection
analyses, flow and heat transfer must be run concurrently.
9.2.2
9.2.2.1
Compressibility
Incompressible
Characterizes any flow for which the maximum Mach number is less than 0.3. For
more information about incompressible flows, please refer to the Incompressible
Flows section of the Analysis Guidelines chapter of this manual.
9-2
Analyze
9.2.2.2
Subsonic Compressible
Subsonic compressible flows are flows that are compressible but contain no shocks.
If there is heat transfer, the static Temperature equation is solved. This equation
neglects viscous dissipation and pressure work effects. If there is no heat transfer,
the total temperature is held constant and the static temperature is determined
from:
2
V
T = T
+ --------0
static 2c
P
Be sure to enter a value for Total Temperature for subsonic compressible flows
without heat transfer. This constant value of total temperature will be used in the
equation shown above.
Additionally, be sure to define a material in which density varies with Equation of
State (see the Materials chapter, Chapter 6, for more information).
9.2.2.3
Compressible
Compressible flows are flows that have a Mach number greater than 0.8 with or
without heat transfer and shocks.
If there is heat transfer, the total Temperature equation is solved. This equation
includes terms for viscous dissipation and pressure work. The static temperature is
determined from the equation shown above.
For compressible flows without heat transfer, enter a value for Total Temperature.
Additionally, the density of the fluid must vary with Equation of State (see the
Materials chapter for more information).
If water is chosen as the material and compressible is selected, then the water
hammer problem will be solved.
9-3
Analyze
In particular, the fluid velocity must be low enough so that heat generation due to
viscous shearing work on the fluid is negligible. Typically, a Mach number of 0.7-0.8
is the maximum for which this is true.
Analyze
For more detailed information about running compressible analyses, please refer to
the Analysis Guidelines Chapter of this manual.
9.2.3
Heat Transfer
The default setting of Off considers the calculation to be adiabatic, and will not
solve for any heat transfer effects.
When Heat Transfer is turned On, conduction, forced convection, mixed convection,
and natural convection are computed as appropriate. To include internal radiation,
check the Radiation box on the Radiation group. If Joule heating boundary conditions (current and/or voltage) are applied, heat transfer must be enabled to solve
for Joule heating.
For more information about heat transfer, please see the Heat Transfer section of
the Analysis Guidelines chapter of this manual.
9.2.3.1
Forced Convection Automation
In forced convection analyses, flow and heat transfer can be run separately
because the flow does not depend on the temperature distribution. This is an efficient approach because it saves time by not having to run flow and heat transfer
together throughout the entire analysis.
9-4
Analyze
Auto Forced Convection controls this the automation of forced convection analyses.
To automatically run a forced convection analysis in separate flow and heat transfer stages:
Analyze
1. Enable Flow and Heat Transfer.

2. Check the Auto Forced Convection box.
3. Specify the number of iterations for the
flow-only solution in Output Options.
4. Click GO to start the analysis.
Note that both Flow and Heat Transfer must be

enabled on the Options dialog. The Staged
Forced Convection check box will not be active if
any properties vary with temperature or if thermostatically-controlled internal fans are used.
The following occurs after GO on the Analyze dialog is pressed:
1. The analysis will run as Flow-only (heat transfer is disabled) until either the
analysis converges (as determined by the Automatic Convergence Assessment) OR

the prescribed number of iterations is complete.
2. Flow will then be disabled and heat transfer enabled, and the analysis will run
an additional fifty iterations (heat transfer only) or until the solution reaches convergence.
To change the number of thermal-only iterations, add this entry to your CFdesign
flags file:
FORCED_EXTRA #
where # is the number of thermal-only iterations the Solver should run. Note that
this entry is case sensitive.
If the Stop button is pressed during the flow-only portion, the analysis will end after
the current iteration, and will not run the heat-transfer portion of the calculation.
9-5
Analyze
9.2.3.2
Radiation
Turn Radiation On to include surface-to-surface radiation effects in a heat transfer

analysis. Radiation is typically most relevant when the field temperatures are very
high. The radiation model is a non-participating model, meaning that radiation
occurs between the walls and the fluid medium (the air) is not directly affected by
the radiation. When radiation is activated, the start-up processing of the analysis
will generally take longer due to the view factor calculation.
Radiative heat transfer through transparent media is supported, as well as geometric symmetry. The radiation model computes radiative heat transfer to moving solids and moving surfaces, and is the basis of the solar heating model. The radiation
model has very rigorous book-keeping to keep track of the radiative energy balance, and reports the amount of heat transfer due to radiation and the radiative
energy balance for each part in a model. The result is that reciprocity is enforced,
to ensure that the radiative heat transfer between parts with large size differences
is computed accurately.
The radiation model is designed for use with all of the supported geometry types:
two and three dimensional Cartesian and axisymmetric about the X and Y axes.
Be sure to set the emissivity of the walls and solids (in the Materials dialog). Emissivity set as a fluid property is automatically applied to all contacting wall surfaces.
Because the radiation model is non-participating, emissivity values set on fluid
materials are not relevant to the fluids. Emissivity set on a solid material overrides
any specified value on the contacting fluid.
For more information about radiation, please see the Radiation section of the Analysis Guidelines chapter of this manual.
9.2.3.3
Gravitational Vector
Use the Gravity Vector for buoyancy driven flows (natural convection). (You should
NOT specify a gravity vector for forced convection flows.) Because most natural
convection analyses occur on Earth, all that is required to set up gravity is to make
sure the Earth box is checked (it is by default) and to indicate the direction of gravity in your model with a unit vector. For example, if your model is constructed such
that down is in the negative Y direction, then the unit vector for gravity should
be:
9-6
Analyze
X = 0; Y = -1; Z = 0
For buoyancy driven flows on other planets (or where the gravity is different from
that on Earth), uncheck the Earth box, and enter the magnitude (in the analysis
units) and the direction of the gravity vector.
To include gravity as a force acting on a moving solid, do not specify gravity on the
Options dialog. Alternatively, assign a driving or resistive force equal to the force
imparted from gravity. The gravitational force may be added to some additional
driving or resistive force, if necessary.
9.2.4
Quick Convection_Forced
Quick Forced Convection provides a trend-predictive solution method for calculating

the flow and temperature distribution in forced convection environments. It produces a flow and temperature distribution within a few iterations, as opposed to the
100+ iterations required by the standard (Navier-Stokes based) forced convection solution.
It is a powerful tool for running design iteration comparisons across multiple scenarios in a very short amount of time.
When Quick Forced Convection is enabled, the flow is computed using a potential
flow computation that is complete in one iteration. The film coefficients on all solids
are then computed based on the flow results, and a thermal calculation is automatically run for several iterations until converged. The result is an approximate flow
and thermal solution that is computed much faster than a standard flow/thermal
analysis.
It is best suited for applications in which the flow is not subject to a great deal of
circulation or wake activity. The flow in many electronic enclosures generally fits
this description in that it wake and circulation activity are both fairly low in most
enclosures.
9-7
Analyze
Note: be sure to choose a buoyancy material or set the density to vary with
equation of state on the Material Dialog
Analyze
9.2.4.1
Usage
Setting up a Quick Forced Convection analysis is very similar to a standard forced

convection analysis.
A flow-moving condition must be specified on the model. This can be a
specified velocity, volume or mass flow rate, or external fan boundary condition. An internal fan or centrifugal blower material can also be used.
A pressure condition must be specified in the model. Even for a fully
enclosed environment, a specified pressure is required. This can be applied
to a small internal surface on a solid part.
A temperature boundary condition is required. Heat loads (such as total
heat generation) are often applied to these analyses.
Meshing requirements are consistent with standard forced convection analyses.

To enable Quick Forced Convection, check the Forced box under the Quick Convection group on Analyze:
The number of iterations will automatically be set to 10. When the GO button is
pressed, the mesh will generate (in the standard manner), and the flow-field will be
computed in the first iteration. The thermal solution is then computed automatically, and is typically complete in three to four iterations.
If a change is made to the analysis settings, and the GO button is hit, the solution
will always start back at 0 iterations. It will not continue from the current results.
Visualize the results using the suite of results tools. There is not a special procedure
necessary to examine and extract results from a Quick Forced Convection analysis.
9-8
Analyze
9.2.4.2
Applications and Limits
If the device to be analyzed depends on any of these flow mechanisms, be aware

that results from a Quick Forced Convection analysis may differ significantly from
the actual velocity and temperature distributions.
Quick Forced is a steady-state solution method, and cannot be run as transient (nor
motion or rotating). Additionally, radiation is not supported by Quick Forced. All
fluid material properties must be constant. Variable properties such as variable
density or steam or humidity models are not supported in a Quick Forced analysis.
Quick Forced Convection is best suited for forced convection electronics applications. It will produce a velocity solution that has limitations (as described above),
but if the geometry does not cause significant wakes or circulation regions, then
Quick Forced Convection will yield trend-correct results that can be used to drive
the design of an electronics package early in the design cycle. Only the temperature
9-9
Analyze
The velocity computation in Quick Forced Convection is based on potential flow.This

means that the flow is considered inviscid, laminar, incompressible, and that there
are no wakes:
Analyze
on the solids is computed; the temperature field of the working fluid is not computed.
After a promising design configuration is identified, it is recommended to run a separate standard forced convection analysis to determine a more accurate flow and
temperature field. Do not base final decisions on the results produced from Quick
Forced without backing them up with a standard (Navier-Stokes-based) flow and
temperature calculation.
Note that when restarting with standard forced convection (after disabling Quick
Forced), the solution will start from 0 iterations. It is not possible to continue a
standard solution from Quick results.
9.2.5
Quick Convection_Natural/Free
Many natural or free (buoyancy-driven) convection analyses require a large number

of iterations to become fully converged. The flow and thermal solutions are tightly
coupled, but the temperature distribution in the solids can take a longer time than
the flow solution to fully converge.
Quick Natural/Free Convection addresses this problem by automatically running a
coupled flow and thermal simulation (in the same manner as a traditional natural
convection analysis) followed by mapping the film coefficients to all solids in the
model, and then running a conduction-only thermal solution in the solids.
9-10
Analyze
The result is a much faster temperature distribution throughout the solids within
the analysis. The intent of Quick Natural/Free Convection is a faster, more accurate
method of solving natural convection analyses. The increased accuracy will be most
apparent in the temperature distribution of the solids.
9.2.5.1
Usage
Setting up a Quick Natural/Free Convection analysis is very similar to a standard

natural convection analysis with a few exceptions.
The simulation model must have at least one solid part. If the model
contains a TEC device, it must contact at least one solid part. If not, then
Quick Natural/Free will be automatically disabled.
The fluid material must be either a buoyancy material or allow density
to vary with temperature.
A gravity vector must be specified.
A temperature boundary condition is required. Heat loads (such as total
heat generation) are also often applied to these analyses.
Geometry configuration and meshing requirements are the same as for traditional
natural convection analyses.
To enable Quick Natural/Free Convection, check the Natural/Free box under the
Quick Convection group on Analyze:
9-11
Analyze
Unlike Quick Forced Convection, Quick Natural/Free uses the full Navier-Stokes
solver to arrive at a coupled flow and thermal solution within the model. The time
savings occurs after this step is complete (after 200 iterations) in that the thermal
solution throughout the solid parts is accelerated. This method will deliver a time
savings over a fully coupled natural convection solution of potentially several hundred iterations.
Analyze
Specify a gravity vector in the two fields below the Natural/Free check-box. If the
Gravity Method is set to Earth, then specify a unit vector in the Gravity Direction
field. If the Method is set to Components, then enter the components in the Gravity
Components line in the analysis length units.
The number of iterations will automatically be set to 200. When the GO button is
pressed, the mesh will generate (in the standard manner), and the coupled flow
and thermal solution will progress for 190 iterations. For the final 10 iterations, the
flow solution is frozen, and just the thermal solution is computed.
9.2.5.2
Additional Considerations
A traditional coupled natural convection analysis can be switched to a Quick Natural/Free solution and continued. If the number of iterations run as a standard analysis is less than 190, then upon restarting the analysis, the solution will run as a
coupled solution until 190 iterations have been completed, and then automatically
convert to a Quick Natural/Free solution. If the original coupled solution was run
more than 190 iterations, then upon restart, the Quick Natural/Free solution will be
invoked immediately.
Note that only steady-state solutions are supported for Quick Natural/Free, and
that an error will be given in the analysis is set to transient with Quick Natural/Free
enabled. Also, mixing models such as scalar, steam, cavitation, and humidity are
not supported with Quick Natural/Free.
9.2.6
Optional Settings
There are three additional sets of controls on the Options dialog: Turbulence,
Solar Heating, and Advanced. These controls are accessed by clicking their
respective buttons on the Options Dialog.
9-12
Analyze
9.2.6.1
Turbulence
The Turbulence dialog is used to toggle turbulence on and off, to select the turbulence model and to modify the default values for the turbulence model parameters.
Analyze
If Laminar is selected, then the flow will be solved as laminar. If Turbulent is

selected (the default) then the analysis will be solved as turbulent. Most engineering flows are turbulent, however. If there is some uncertainty about which setting
to use, then first try laminar. If the flow should be solved as turbulent, the calculation will typically diverge within the first ten to fifteen iterations.
Turb Model
Five turbulence models are available:
k-epsilon, the default turbulence model, is typically more accurate
than the constant eddy viscosity, but more computational intensive and
slightly less robust. It is not as resource intensive as the RNG model, but
still gives good results.
Low Re k-epsilon is well suited for low speed, but turbulent flows. The
Reynolds number of such flow is typically between 1,500 and 5,000.
This turbulence model is well suited for pipe flows and external aerodynamic flow in the transition between laminar and turbulent as well as flow
situations that have both high speed and low speed areas. Other flow situations that perform well with the Low Reynolds turbulent model include:
1. A high-speed jet entering a large room. The jet is highly turbulent when it first
enters the room, but the flow slows down considerably, and the Reynolds number
drops. These types of flows can be very unstable when run with k-epsilon.
2. Buoyancy-driven (natural convection) flows that are barely turbulent.
Because this turbulent model does not use wall functions, Mesh Enhancement should be always be enabled when using Low Reynolds k-epsilon. We
9-13
Analyze
recommend increasing the number of mesh enhancement layers to 5 (using

the Mesh Enhancement controls on the Meshing dialog).
Note that analyses run with this turbulence model may not be as stable as
those run with the k-epsilon model. Because of this, the Intelligent Solution
Control should be enabled (the switch is located in the Solution Control dialog launched from the Analyze task dialog.) Likewise, analyses run with this
model may take more iterations to reach a fully converged solution.
High Reynolds flows that are run with the Low Reynolds turbulence model
will generally produce the same solution as would the k-epsilon model.
Likewise, laminar flows that are run with this model will produce similar
results to a solution run as laminar.
The RNG turbulence model is more computational intensive, but sometimes slightly more accurate than the k-epsilon model, particularly for separated flows. This model works best for predicting the reattachment point
for separated flows, particularly for flow over a backward-facing step. When
using the RNG model, it is often recommended to start with the k-epsilon
model and after this model is fairly well converged, enable the RNG model.
The constant eddy viscosity model is slightly less rigorous than the
other two models, but more numerically stable. This is a good choice for
lower speed turbulent flows and some buoyancy flows. This is also useful if
one of the other two models caused divergence.
The Mixing Length turbulence model is primarily designed for internal
natural convection analyses. Use of the mixing length model, in some
cases, has been shown to reduce run times and provide better accuracy
than the default turbulence model for internal buoyancy-driven flows.
Auto Startup
Auto Startup controls the Automatic Turbulent Start-Up (ATSU) algorithm.
This algorithm goes through a number of steps to obtain turbulent flow solutions.
The algorithm starts by running 10 iterations using a constant eddy viscosity
model, so the k and epsilon equations are not solved. With this solution as an initial
guess, the two-equation turbulence model is started. At iteration 10, a spike in the
convergence monitoring data will appear for the k and epsilon equations. Other
steps are then taken to gradually arrive at the converged result. These steps may
involve spikes in the convergence monitoring data at iterations 10, 20 and 50. After
50 iterations, the ATSU is turned off automatically.
9-14
Analyze
If Lock On is selected, the ATSU stays on during the entire analysis until the user
manually clicks it off. If there are convergence difficulties after iteration 50 (divergence within 10 iterations), then you should enable Lock On. If the ATSU is turned
on, you should run at least 200 iterations to ensure convergence of the turbulent
flow solution.
Turb/Laminar Ratio
The Turb/Laminar Ratio is the ratio of the effective (turbulent) viscosity to the
laminar value. This is used to estimate the effective viscosity at the beginning of
the turbulent flow analysis. In most turbulent flow analyses, the effective viscosity
is 2-3 orders of magnitude larger than the laminar value. The default value is generally suitable for most flows.
For some flows, it is helpful to increase the Turb/Lam Ratio to 1000 or even 10,000.
Such flows typically involve a small, high speed jet shooting into a large plenum.
Such flows are typically momentum-driven, and benefit from a larger turbulent viscosity at the beginning of the calculation.
Additionally, this affects the value of viscosity when the constant-eddy viscosity
turbulence model is used.
Turbulence Intensity
The Turbulence Intensity Factor controls the amount of turbulent kinetic energy
in the inlet stream. Its default value is 0.05 and should rarely exceed 0.5. The
expression used to calculate
1
2
turbulent kinetic energy at the inlet, k in , is: k in = --- I ( u + v + w )

where I is the Intensity Factor and u, v and w are velocity components.
Advanced
The quantities in the Advanced dialog are described in detail in the CFdesign Technical Reference.
9-15
Analyze
If Extend is selected, an extended version of the ATSU is activated. This method is

useful for difficult analyses, particularly compressible analyses. The minimum number of iterations that should be run with this algorithm is 400.
Analyze
9.2.6.2
Advanced
The Advanced dialog has controls for mixing (using the scalar quantity) and cavitation:
Scalar--Mixing, Humidity, and Steam

The default is No Scalar meaning that the scalar calculation is not part of the analysis.
The transport of a general scalar variable is modeled when General Scalar is
selected. This scalar might be the salinity in a seawater fluid flow analysis, a mixture fraction in a multi-species analyses or some marker.
The Diffusion Coefficient controls the mass diffusivity of the scalar quantity into
the surrounding fluid. A value of 0 will prevent any diffusion of the scalar quantity.
This quantity is D AB in Ficks Law:
j A = D AB m A
where jA is the mass flux of species A. This is how much of A is transferred (per
time and per unit area normal to the transfer direction). It is proportional to the
mixture mass density, and to the gradient of the species mass fraction, mA. The
units of the Diffusivity coefficient are length squared per time.
Select Humidity to account for moist gas. Both the relative humidity and the condensed water can be post-processed. Note that the condensation of a moist gas can
be modeled by CFdesign, but the evaporation of water into a gas stream cannot.
Heat transfer must be turned On. If the relative humidity is dependent upon the
pressure, you should also enable Subsonic Compressible. Remember to enter the
9-16
Analyze
correct properties for the gas (only the gas, not the moist mixture) on the Materials
Dialog. A summary of the steps for setting up a humidity (moist air) analysis are:
Please consult the Moist/Humid Flows section of the Analysis Guidelines chapter for
more information about humidity analyses.
Select Steam Quality to enable the fluid to be a homogeneous mixture of water
and steam. The scalar is the steam quality (0 if no steam, 1 if all steam). Properties
are calculated using the steam tables. Heat transfer must be turned On. For this
type of flow, the energy equation is written in terms of enthalpy. Enthalpy can also
be post-processed.
Please consult the Steam/Water Flows section of the Analysis Guidelines chapter for
more information about humidity analyses.
Cavitation
Cavitation is a physical phenomenon that occurs in many high-velocity liquid flows
when the liquid pressure falls below the vapor pressure, resulting in the formation
of vapor bubbles. It is commonly found in high speed liquid valves as well as
pumps, and can greatly reduce the efficiency of these devices. Prolonged cavitation
can lead to pitting and erosion of the device, resulting in costly downtime and
repairs.
The cavitation model in CFdesign tracks the vapor bubble volume fraction, and predicts the onset and location of bubble formation within the flow. It is best suited for
predicting small regions of cavitation, and will not run well when large regions of
the flow flash to vapor. This cavitation model is based on modelling a collection of
bubbles, not a total vapor region.
When cavitation is enabled, the fluid pressure will not fall below the vapor pressure.
(If cavitation is disabled, the pressure is allowed to fall below the physical limit.)
Cavitation is not enabled automatically for liquid flows. To enable it, check Cavitation on the Advanced dialog.
Please consult the Cavitation section of the Analysis Guidelines chapter for more
information about cavitation analyses.
9-17
Analyze
1. Assign humidity boundary conditions to all inlets.

2. Assign a moist-air property to the flow region (or regions).
3. Select Humidity from the Scalar sub-dialog on the Options task.
Analyze
9.2.6.3
Solar Heating
Solar heating plays a significant role in the reliability and performance of many
mechanical and electronic devices that are subjected to outside environmental conditions. In some situations, the worst-case solar loading during the hottest part of
the day is of interest. In other situations, the intent is to understand the periodic
temperature variation that occurs from diurnal heating (multiple cycles of day and
night).
The Solar Heating functionality allows study of both scenarios. Solar heating can be
run as a steady state analysis to learn the temperature distribution caused by solar
loading at a particular instant in time. Alternatively it can be run as a transient
analysis to study the time history of the temperature distribution over several days
and nights.
The Solar model only works in conjunction with the new radiation model, and as
such supports radiative heat transfer through transparent media. With solar heating, the effect of shadowing on other objects is also supported. The Solar Heating
dialog allows for specification of specific geographical locations as well as input of
latitude and longitude. The date, time, compass direction, and object orientation
relative to the sky are also specified. A full report of the radiative energy balance
similar to the reports shown in the previous section is provided during and after the
analysis.
Radiation must be enabled to run a solar heating analysis. Solar heating is not supported unless both Heat Transfer and Radiation are enabled on the Options dialog.
9-18
Analyze
To configure solar heating, click the Solar Heating button on the Options dialog.
Note that this button is not active unless both Heat Transfer and Radiation are
enabled. The Solar Heating dialog is shown:
Analyze
1. Check the Enable Solar Heating box to include solar heating in an analysis. The
dialog is grayed out unless this box is checked.
2. Select the geographical location. There are two ways to do this. Method 1 is to
select the country and city from the drop-down menus. Method 2 is to check the
Manual box, and enter the Latitude and Longitude coordinates and offset from
Greenwich Mean Time (in the GMT box). The GMT offset is used to accurately determine the time zone.
Method 2
Method 1
When specifying the location manually
The latitude must be between -90 and 90 degrees.

The longitude must be between -180 and 180 degrees.
The GMT must be between -12 and 12.
9-19
Analyze
3. Set the Date and Time. Change each value by clicking on it, and use the up and
down arrows to modify the value. (Direct entry in these fields is not supported.)
Note that all times are considered to be Standard Time--Daylight Savings Time is
not supported due to the wide variation of its use throughout the world.
Click the value
Change with the arrows
4. Specify the orientation of the model. The Compass Direction defines which way
the model is facing. The Celestial Orientation defines which way is up by selecting
either the direction of the sky or the ground. For both directions, select the convenient direction or orientation, and select the direction from the adjacent menu. The
direction can either be a Cartesian axis or specified by selecting a direction graphically on the model.
Define as a
Direction and
Cartesian axis
Orientation
or graphically
5. Click the OK button to close the dialog.

For more information about setting up and running solar heating analyses, please
see the Solar Heating section of the Analysis Guidelines chapter of this manual.
9.3
Output Options
This section of the Analyze dialog contains the commands to start and stop the calculation. The analysis mode can be set to steady state (the default) or transient.
The Results and Summary Output Intervals are set on this dialog. The analysis
computer is also set here. This is for the Fast Track Option--the ability to run the
analysis on a computer different from the one used to build the analysis. The anal-
9-20
Analyze
ysis can always be stopped by hitting the Stop button (which replaces the Go button during the analysis.)
1. Set the Analysis Mode to either Steady

State or Transient.
If Transient, set the Transient Parameters

(time step size, etc.)
2. Set the Save Intervals for Results and/or
Summary
3. Select the Analysis Computer (the local
computer is the default).
4. If continuing an analysis, select the iteration or time step to Continue From.
5. Enter the number of Iterations (or Time
Steps) to Run.
Analyze
1
2
6
7
6. Optional: select additional Result Quantities.
7. Hit GO to start the analysis.
9.3.1
Analyze Mode: Steady State or Transient
The default selection, Steady State, causes the analysis to be independent of

time. Switching to Transient causes the analysis to be time-dependent. It is possible to switch between the two modes during an analysis. Transient boundary conditions are set up on the Boundary Conditions dialog. Note that all Motion analyses
(rotating machinery and moving solids) are run as transient.
9-21
Analyze
9.3.2
Transient Parameters
Three parameters are necessary for transient analysis: Time Step Size, Stop
Time, and Number of Inner Iterations:
9.3.2.1
Time Step Size
The Time Step Size is always in seconds. The correct choice of time step depends
on the time scale of the analysis. For non-motion flow analyses, the time step size
is a fraction of the mean flow velocity, and should be at least a tenth of the time
needed to traverse the length of the device. In many cases a much smaller time
step size will be required to adequately resolve the flow.
For non-motion heat transfer analyses, the time scale is usually much larger, so a
larger time step size can be used. The time step should be no more than one tenth
of the expected heat-up time. In cases involving diurnal solar heating, a much
larger time step can be used because the time scale is typically a day or more. A
time step for a typical diurnal heating analysis can be on the order of 100 seconds
or more.
If Intelligent Solution Control is enabled, CFdesign automatically calculates a time
step size based on convergence progression and the mesh. This time step size is
usually quite small, and often a larger step size can be used effectively.
For Rotating analyses, a time step size ranging from individual blade passages to
complete revolutions can be used effectively. Smaller time step sizes are recommended for devices with large number of blades to resolve the interaction between
blades and surrounding, non-rotating geometry.
To facilitate this, a time step calculator is available that computes the time step size
based on either a prescribed number of degrees per time step or the number of
9-22
Analyze
blades. Open the dialog by clicking the pop-out button on the Time Step Size line.
This is only available when a rotating region is present:
Analyze
Select either the Degrees per Time Step or the Number of Blades, and enter
the appropriate value. The time step will be computed based on the rotational
speed specified as part of the Rotating Region. If the number of blades is specified,
the time step size will be computed using a single time step per blade passage.
If the model contains multiple rotating objects, the fastest rotational speed is used
as the basis for the time step size computed in this dialog.
More details about proper time step size are presented in the Guidelines chapter of
this manual.
The time step size for moving solids analyses is computed based on the specified
motion parameters and the mesh size. When the Analyze dialog is first opened after
assigning Motion parameters, the time step size is computed automatically. If
changes are made to the flow or motion velocities, click the button to recalculate
the default time step.
This will not conflict with the time step size determined by Intelligent Solution Control, but rather computes a reasonable starting time step size.
9.3.2.2
Stop Time
For transient analyses, the analysis can be stopped when a specific time has been
reached, after a certain number of time steps, or whichever comes first.
Enter a specific time (in seconds) in the Stop Time field to indicate when the solution should stop. This is a very useful way to end certain transient analyses in which
Intelligent Solution Control is enabled. An example is the simulation of flow-driven
motion because it is not known how many time steps will be required to complete a
certain amount of time. If it is not desired to stop the analysis at a certain time,
9-23
Analyze
enter -1 in the Stop Time field, and be sure to specify the number of time steps
to run.
Enter the number of steps to run in the Time Steps To Run field. After completing
the indicated number of time steps, the solution will stop. This is a recommended
way to run transient analyses whose time step size will not likely change. If the
number of time steps to run is not important (only reaching the stop time is), then
enter -1 as the number of time steps to run, and be sure to specify a Stop Time.
If both a Stop Time and the number of Time Steps To Run are specified, then the
first of the two that is met will cause the analysis to stop. For example: the user
wants to run a transient for 3 seconds, but doesnt want to exceed a total number
of time steps of 1000. The user would set the Stop Time as 3, and the Number of
Time Steps to 1000. If 1000 time steps are calculated, but only 2.5 seconds have
passed, the solution will stop. Alternatively, the solution would stop if 3 seconds is
reached in only 450 time steps.
9.3.2.3
Inner Iterations
This controls the number of inner iterations for each time step during a transient
analysis.
Because CFdesign uses an implicit method to discretize the transient terms in the
governing equations, the calculation has to be iterated at each time step. This transient inner iteration is similar to a global steady state iteration. The governing
equations are solved at each inner iteration as they are at each global iteration in a
steady state analysis. The difference is that far fewer inner iterations are needed in
a transient time-step because the transient equations are much more numerically
stable.
Typically, 5-10 inner iterations per time step are sufficient for a transient analysis.
If the convergence monitor indicates that this is not enough (the convergence plot
does not flatten), this number can be increased. If the convergence monitor shows
that this is too many inner iterations (curves are flat for several iterations), you can
decrease this number.
For Motion (Rotating and Moving Solid) analyses, we recommend only one inner
iteration per time step. This has been found to work very well for a wide variety of
Motion analyses.
9-24
Analyze
9.3.3
Save Intervals
Sets how often the results and summary information are stored to the disk.
These saved results sets/time steps can be used for continuing the analysis from an
earlier result set if there is a problem--in effect returning to an earlier saved state
of the analysis without having to run it out again from the beginning. Results from
saved result sets or time steps can also be animated.
The intermediate summary information is available in the summary file (analysisname.sum). Summary information from intermediate iterations is appended to the
summary history file (analysis-name.smh). This information is useful for tracking
the progress of an analysis.
9.3.3.1
Steady State
For steady state analyses, indicate the interval of Steps to be saved as a constant
value or enter a table.
9.3.3.2
Transient
For transient analyses, results can now saved at either a specified interval of time
steps or at a specified interval of seconds. The principal reason for this feature
(besides greater flexibility) is that when Intelligent Solution Control varies the time
step size (as described above) for transient analyses there is no way to ensure that
results are saved at the desired times. This feature provides the ability to save
transient results at exactly the desired times.
9-25
Analyze
When the Results Output Interval is set to the default value of 0, results are saved
only when the analysis stops (either completing the specified number of iterations
or because the Stop button was pressed). For complicated analyses, it is recommended to set a non-zero Results Output Interval. (Be careful that your Results
Output Interval is not so small as to exceed your hard-drive capacity.)
Analyze
The Save Intervals selection for Transient analyses are shown:
When transient results are saved by specifying a time interval, the time step size
will be adjusted automatically (assuming Intelligent Solution Control is on) such
that a result will be calculated at the desired time. Intelligent Solution Control
includes the specified time save interval as part of its criteria in determining time
step size.
For example: the user wishes to save results every 3 seconds. However, as Intelligent Solution Control varies the time step (to ensure stability) it finds that a time
step size of 1.7 seconds is optimal. The first time step is then calculated at 1.7 seconds. Knowing that the user wants to save the results at 3 seconds, the next time
step is adjusted from 1.7 (which would put the solution at 3.4 seconds) to 1.3 seconds. This forces a result to be calculate at 3 seconds so that the desired result is
saved.
If Intelligent Solution Control is not enabled, the time step size is not changed
automatically. Because of this, if the time save interval does not correspond to the
user-specified time step size, only results solved at the specified time step are
saved.
For example: the user specifies a time step size of 2 seconds, but disables Intelligent Solution Control. However, they also enter a time save interval of 1 second. As
the solution progresses, results are only calculated every 2 seconds, so the result
at 1 second is not saved. Likewise, the result at 3 seconds and 5 seconds, etc., are
not saved either. Only results at 2, 4, 6, etc. seconds are saved.
The summary file can also be saved using an interval of results steps or of time.
9-26
Analyze
9.3.3.3
Save Table (Steady State or Transient)
For example: tabular data for steps and save frequencies was entered as shown
above. The result will be that from step 0, output is saved every 5 steps. At step
30, output is stored every 10 steps. Finally, from step 100, output is saved every
100 steps. If 300 steps were run, results from the following steps would be saved
to the disk:
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300
From step 30,
From step 0,
From step 100,
save every 10
save every 5
save every 100
9-27
Analyze
In addition to saving results and summary data at a constant interval as described

above, a table capability allows saving iterations or time steps at varying intervals.
Checking Table and clicking the Edit button brings up a table for input of step (or
iteration) number and the save interval.
Analyze
In the example above, the intervals led to the next interval definition quite naturally. If, however, the table looks like:
If the analysis is run 300 steps, results will be saved at:

5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300
which is the same as the first example because changes in the save frequency
occur only at steps in which data is saved.
The table can be used to specify a save frequency based on time as well. When a
time on the table is reached, the save frequency will change. For example, in the
table shown below:
every second is saved from time 0 until time=2 seconds. At 2 seconds, results are
saved every 5 seconds. Finally, at 10 seconds, results are saved every 20 seconds.
9-28
Analyze
9.3.4
Analysis Computer (Server Monitor, Fast Track)
For a single-seat installation, the default setting shown in the Analysis Computer
drop menu is the name of the machine. This means that analyses will run locally
without requiring any additional steps. During the analysis, CFdesign can be shut
down and the analysis will continue to run. (Check the Task Manager.) When the
CFdesign interface is started again and that analysis opened, either the current status of the analysis will show, or it will be completed and the final results will be
available.
Building upon these concepts, CFdesign features the Fast Track Option. This is a
way to run analyses on remote computers (on your network). Analyses are set up
locally (on the Interface Computer), but assigned to run on the machine chosen in
the Analysis Computer drop menu. Every machine on the network that is set up
as an Analysis Computer will be listed here.
More information is provided in Chapter 15 of this guide, and detailed set-up
instructions are provided in Fast-Track.pdf, found in your CFdesign installation
folder.
9.3.5
Continue From
The default entry in the Continue From drop menu is the last saved iteration or time
step. When GO is hit, the analysis will continue from the value shown in this drop
menu.
If a previous iteration or time step is chosen, then all subsequent saved iterations
or time steps will be deleted from the analysis (after a prompt is displayed confirming that this is OK).
Changes made to the mesh definitions, boundary conditions, or materials will be
automatically incorporated into the analysis. If a mesh size is changed, but the
Continue From menu is not reset to 0, a new mesh will be generated, the current
results will be interpolated onto this new mesh, and the analysis iteration count will
be reset to 0. Note: all intermediate saved results files (and time steps) will
9-29
Analyze
CFdesign is built upon a client/server architecture. This enables an analysis to be

built on one machine, the User Interface Computer, and run on another
machine, the Analysis Computer.
Analyze
be deleted. The analysis will then proceed with the saved results mapped to the
new mesh except for analyses containing the following features:
Extruded elements
Surface parts (solid or distributed resistance)
Motion (moving solids)
Rotating region
Periodic boundary conditions
Note: for existing analyses originally launched from Pro/Engineer but opened subsequently from the Desktop, the Mesh Size task-dialog will not be available. Furthermore, if the existing mesh sizes are deleted (through the Feature Tree), the
Analyze dialog will be grayed out. This is because the analysis MUST be opened
from Pro/Engineer to generate a new mesh.
9.3.6
Iterations (or Time Steps) to Run
This is the number of additional iterations or time steps to be run once GO is hit.
9.3.7
Go and Stop
Hitting the GO button starts the analysis. Once the analysis is started, it changes to
the STOP button. Hitting the STOP button will stop the analysis at the end of the
current iteration.
For a new analysis, the mesh will be generated prior to any iterations being solved.
For analyses started from Pro/Engineer (using the Mechanica method) or CATIA,
meshing occurs in the CAD interface--causing CFdesign to minimize while the CAD
tool appears. All status messages will appear in the List region of the CAD interface.
After the mesh is generated, the CAD tool will minimize and CFdesign will come
back up and the analysis will proceed. During the analysis, the CAD tool will remain
in a minimized state, and can not be accessed. To shut down the CAD tool (to free
up more memory), shut down the CFdesign interface--the analysis will continue to
run--and then shut down the CAD tool. CFdesign can then be started again, and the
running analysis opened. The analysis will continue to run even when the CFdesign
interface is shut down.
9-30
Analyze
For Acis and Parasolid based CAD systems, the CFdesign interface does not minimize during the meshing, and status messages are listed in the Information field of
the Analyze dialog.
9.4
Message Window
In this window on the Analyze dialog, status messages are written out during the
generation of the mesh and model pre-processing. Every pre-analysis calculation
performed on the model is listed here. A small summary of the model is also presented, and lists the number of inlets and outlets, number of nodes and elements,
and the units systems. If an error occurred during processing, it will be stated here.
Also be sure to check the Status window found in the Review dialog, Notes tab
for error messages.
9.5
Solution Control
Accessed with the Solution Control button on the Analyze dialog, this is a set of
tools that provides control over how quickly the solution field progresses, to ensure
a robust, converged solution. In addition to the manual controls, CFdesign contains
a great deal of Analysis Intelligence which automatically controls the rate of convergence as well as determines when the analysis is no longer changing (converged).
This automation is described first, and then the manual controls and the theory
behind them are described subsequently.
9-31
Analyze
To just generate the mesh and not run any iterations (this is sometimes useful to
inspect the mesh prior to running a large analysis) set the number of iterations to
0, and hit GO. The mesh will generate, but the analysis will not proceed. The mesh
can be inspected using the Results dialog. (Note: it is not necessary to assign
boundary conditions, materials, or set up any analysis options if the goal is just to
generate the mesh. Obviously these tasks must be completed prior to running the
analysis.)
Analyze
9.5.1
Intelligent Solution Control
This capability is one of the keys to the robustness of the CFdesign solution. By
employing elements of control theory to examine the trends of each degree of freedom, CFdesign automatically adjusts the convergence controls and the time step
size to attain a solution. If the solution is changing too quickly from one iteration to
the next, this algorithm automatically slows down progress in an effort to maintain
stability. Alternatively, if the solution is stable and progressing too slowly, the algorithm will allow the calculation to evolve quicker, resulting in reduced solution
times.
Intelligent Solution Control is enabled by default for several analysis types (as
described below), but can be disabled on the Solution Controls dialog (launched
from the Analyze task dialog):
The convergence control values that Intelligent Solution Control chooses can be
plotted on the Convergence Monitor by selecting Relax Parm from the third pulldown menu.
The convergence control values are shown for all degrees of freedom over the
range of iterations.
9-32
Analyze
The application of Intelligent Solution Control with different types of analyses is

described:
9.5.1.1
Steady State Analyses
Intelligent Solution Control adjusts the time step size and the convergence control
settings to achieve solution stability. The result is that even very physically
demanding analyses that would have required manual adjustment of convergence
controls will now run with virtually no manual intervention.
Steady state analyses are run internally as transient solutions when Intelligent
Solution Control is enabled. Each time step consists of only one inner iteration, so
solution times are not significantly longer (as is often the case in true time-varying
transient analyses). Because of this, each time step is considered a single iteration.
Saved results files follow this naming convention:
analysisname.res.s#.
where analysisname is the name of the CFdesign analysis, and # is the number of
the time step (effectively the iteration number for steady state analyses). Note that
the same convention is used when Intelligent Solution Control is disabled.
To run steady state analyses, ensure that Steady State is the selected Analysis
Mode on the Analyze dialog (it is by default). Also, when specifying how often
results are saved to the disk, the default save interval is expressed in terms of iterations (instead of seconds).
Intelligent Solution Control behaves slightly differently when solving for temperature. Unlike the other solution variables in which the convergence controls and time
step are adjusted, for temperature, only the time step is adjusted. Because of this,
the value of the convergence control for temperature (as set in the dialog) will
affect the rate of convergence of the energy equation. By varying the time step
internally, Intelligent Solution Control enforces and maintains stability of the
Energy Solver throughout the analysis. The default value for temperature converCFdesign Users Guide
9-33
Analyze
If an analysis simply will not converge even with Intelligent Solution Control
enabled, then the mesh should be evaluated to determine if a finer mesh concentration is needed. Also, the applied conditions and materials need to be inspected to
ensure that the physics are being simulated correctly. If modifications to the mesh
and/or physics still do not produce a converged solution with Intelligent Solution
Control, please contact your technical support representative.
Analyze
gence control has been increased to 1.0 in CFdesign 8.0 in an effort to reduce solution times of heat transfer analyses.
9.5.1.2
Transient without Motion
For transient analyses that do not include moving objects, Intelligent Solution
Control adjusts only the time step size, and does not modify any convergence control settings. This is done to prevent artificially affecting the time accuracy of the
solution. (Reducing the convergence control slows down solution progression by the
Solver, so it is always a good idea to use the default convergence control settings
for non-Motion transient analyses.)
We have found that in some cases the time step size that Intelligent Solution Control selects can be smaller than truly necessary for convergence, which may result
in significantly longer solution times. For this reason, Intelligent Solution Control is
disabled by default for transient analyses. It is recommended to manually assign a
time step size based on the physics of the analysis model.
9.5.1.3
Transient with Motion
For solid motion analyses, Intelligent Solution Control is disabled by default

(although it can be enabled if necessary). Because it will only reduce the time step
size, if the motion is user-prescribed, enabling it will generally result in longer solution times, with only a fairly small increase in stability.
For motion analyses that include flow-driven moving objects, we recommend that
you enable Intelligent Solution Control. This will adjust the time step size to ensure
that the object passes through only one element per time step. As the velocity of
the object increases the time step will be automatically reduced to ensure stability.
As the motion of the object slows, the time step size will be increased, but will not
exceed the time step size manually set in the Time Step Size field on the Analyze
dialog.
Intelligent Solution Control has been optimized for use with transient analyses
involving moving objects, and, as such, is recommended for use with flow-driven
Motion.
9-34
Analyze
9.5.1.4
Transient with Rotating Regions
We recommend that you enable Intelligent Solution Control for rotating analyses
that are either free-spinning or driven by a known torque. This will automatically
determine and vary the time step size throughout the analysis. The time step size
will be modified to ensure that no more than three degrees of rotation pass for each
time step. This criteria has been found to be quite stable for rotating analyses.
9.5.2
Automatic Convergence Assessment
Automatic Convergence Assessment determines when a solution is converged-when the solution stops changing--and automatically halts the calculation. It examines small and large frequency changes throughout the solution field, and evaluates
the local and global fluctuations of each degree of freedom.
Automatic Convergence Assessment is automatically enabled for the same types of
analyses as Intelligent Solution Control. Automatic Convergence Assessment is
enabled or disabled by clicking the Advanced button on the Solution controls dialog,
and checking or unchecking the Automatic Convergence Assessment box:
9-35
Analyze
For rotating region analyses, Intelligent Solution Control is disabled by default

(although it can be enabled if necessary). Because it will only reduce the time step
size, if the rotational speed is known, enabling it will generally result in longer solution times, with only a fairly small increase in stability.
Analyze
Automatic Convergence Assessment removes the guess-work of knowing when a

solution is completed. Four different parameters are evaluated, and the threshold
criteria levels can be changed with the slider bar. By default, the criteria are set to
be moderate--between Loose and Tight. This will provide reasonable convergence
for a wide variety of analysis types. Reasonable means that the convergence criteria are rigorous, but not exhaustively so. They will consider a 1% variation in the
Summary trends to be converged. This is appropriate for most analyses with exceptions listed below.
Change the slider setting to Loose for a preliminary analysis in which extremely
high accuracy is not the goal. Such analyses are very useful for identifying trends in
a design. Convergence will typically occur with fewer iterations, but the results may
not be as accurate. Change the slider to Tight to invoke more rigorous convergence
criteria. This is useful for a final analysis in which a high level of convergence and
accuracy is necessary.
It has been observed that in some analyses in which aerodynamic- or hydrodynamic-induced forces are of interest, the solution may be considered converged
and stopped by Automatic Convergence Assessment before the forces have actually
stopped changing. The forces in such analyses (such as aerodynamic flows over
thin bodies) often require many hundreds of iterations to reach fully converged
force values, and may require additional iterations beyond where Automatic Convergence Assessment will stop the calculation. In such cases, it is recommended to
disable Automatic Convergence Assessment and run additional iterations. Monitor
the forces manually to ensure that they have stopped changing.
Additionally, flows that rely only on shear drag for their pressure drop, such as flow
through a pipe, tend to require more iterations to converge. In such analyses, the
default slider setting may halt the calculation prematurely. For this reason, it is recommended to change the setting to Tight for pipe flow analyses that do not contain
any form-drag.
Reliance on Automatic Convergence Assessment is not recommended for transient
analyses that will not reach a steady-state solution such as Rotating, Motion, or
vortex shedding analyses. By their nature, none of these types of analyses will ever
typically reach a numerically converged state that satisfies Automatic Convergence
Assessment. For this reason, it is recommended that the stopping criteria be evaluated manually based on the desired time span of the analysis or other physical
objective.
9-36
Analyze
For more information about these Convergence Criteria, please consult the CFdesign Technical Reference.
9.5.3
Intelligent Solver Selection
Using condition numbers and several parameters in the coefficient matrix, CFdesign
selects the solver best suited for the given analysis type. The result of this is a significant reduction in calculation time, and greater calculation efficiency. There are
no user-modifiable controls associated with this feature.
9.5.4
Manual Convergence Tools
The Solution Control dialog controls the solution progression rate so that the
chance of divergence is minimized. Values are adjusted by moving the slider bar
toward Slower or Faster between 0 and 0.5 (or in some cases, 1.0). Note that if
you specify 0, the degree of freedom will not be allowed to progress with the solution at all.
The default values are the best settings for most analyses. However, if Intelligent
Solution Control is disabled, solution difficulties can often be resolved by manually
reducing the progression rate for pressure to 0.1-0.3. This is generally the most
effective way to minimize solution difficulties, particularly if they occur in the early
iterations of a calculation. Reducing the rate on the velocity components, in conjunction with pressure, to 0.1-0.3 may be necessary in some cases.
The progression rate on variables and properties can be adjusted only for those
quantities that are changing in the analysis. For example, the temperature rate can
only be adjusted if Heat Transfer is turned On on the Options dialog. Likewise, the
progression rate on the Density, Specific heat (Cp), and Conductivity properties can
only be adjusted if these properties are variable, as set in the Material Editor.
The progression rate is applied to the solution in the following manner:
9-37
Analyze
Because certain numerical solvers are better suited than others for various analysis
types, CFdesign now uses an algorithm to automatically select the optimal solver
for every analysis. Certain model attributes such as the aspect ratio of the flow passages, the number of flow passages, and the overall length of the device all play a
role in which solver is selected.
Analyze
= r new + ( 1 r ) old
where r is the control parameter, is the dependent variable, the new subscript
refers to the latest solution and the subscript old refers to the previous solution.
Values greater than 0.5 (default) are not used for most solution variables.
For compressible analyses, an additional method of control is also available: Pressure Control and Temperature Control. (Temperature Control is available for
incompressible analyses as well.) A value between 1e-3 and 1e-6 can be selected
for these parameters. They are necessary for compressible analyses because the
numerical conditioning for such analyses can often be poor. For most compressible
analyses, a value of 1e-3 is adequate for pressure (and temperature if Heat
Transfer is enabled in the Options dialog). However, if convergence difficulties
persist, it may be necessary to reduce the value.
The value set for Pressure and Temperature control is a sort of pseudo-transient
relaxation that is implemented in the solution in the following manner:
i N d
i N d
old
A + ----------------------- +
------------------------
=
+
F
A
i
i t
i, j j
i, i t
i
inertia
inertia
ji
This sort of solution control is most often referred to as inertial relaxation.
9.5.5
Advection Schemes
Advection is the numerical mechanism of transporting a quantity (velocity, temperature, etc.) through the solution domain. Four such methods are available in CFdesign. The advection scheme can be changed by clicking the Advection button, and
9-38
Analyze
selecting the scheme of choice. The recommended applications of the four advection schemes are described in the table below:
ADV 1
This is the default scheme for nearly all analyses

(except rotating regions). It is the work horse, and
is recommended as a starting point for most analysis types.
ADV 2
(Petrov-Galerkin)
ADV 3
(Flux based scheme)
ADV 4
(Min-Mod scheme--
Petrov-Galerkin variant)
Numerically stable
Recommended for meshes aligned with flow
direction
Numerically diffusive for meshes not aligned
with flow
Works well for geometries with numerous
internal obstructions
Works well for extruded meshes
Moderate numerical stability (less than ADV
1)
Less numerical diffusion for random meshes
Recommended for pressure driven flows
Recommended for compressible flows
Default for scalar and energy transport
equations
Default for rotating region analyses
Numerically unstable for most flows
Can only be used for INCOMPRESSIBLE
flows
Cannot be used for moving solids analyses
Specially tuned for drag or external flow
problems
Mesh Enhancement must be invoked.
Moderate numerical stability (less than ADV
1)
Specially tuned for flows in long narrow
ducts
9-39
Analyze
(Monotone streamline
upwind)
Analyze
9.6
Result Quantities
This dialog lists the results quantities that are available for viewing after the analysis is completed.
The default quantities are the most widely used, but additional quantities are available if needed.
After running the analysis, to output additional quantities, select them from this
list, set the number of iterations to 0, and hit GO. These additional quantities will be
available for viewing on the Results dialog.
By default, the film coefficient result quantity is calculated based on heat transfer
results (thermal residual). However, sometimes it is advantageous to obtain film
coefficient data based on the flow solution. This is accomplished by using an empir-
9-40
Analyze
ical correlation. The dialog is accessed by clicking the Options button on the
Optional Post-Processor Output dialog. The dialog is shown:
Analyze
This dialog allows the film coefficient to be calculated in two ways.

The first uses the energy equation solution in the fluid and calculates the residual
heat going to the walls.
a
The second uses an empirical formulation of the form: Nu = cRe Pr
Nu is the Nusselt number, Re is the local Reynolds number, and Pr is the Prandtl
number. The flow solution is used to calculate the Reynolds and Prandtl numbers.
Use either the default values for a, b, and c, or select new values. Note that the
definition of Reynolds number and Nusselt number requires a length constant. If
you are unsure what to use for these length scales, use the default of 1.
Note: Vorticity is the measure of the spin (angular speed) of a fluid particle. The
mathematical definition of vorticity is the curl of the velocity vector. Another way to
look at it is that vorticity is twice the angular rotation (omega). Since omega is a
measure of the net angular rotation, vorticity is a measure of the local spin of the
fluid particle. (If omega, the angular velocity, = 0, then the flow is irrotational and
the vorticity is zero.)
9.7
Convergence Monitor
While the analysis is running the Convergence Monitor is displayed below the
Graphics window. A detailed description of the Monitor is given in the Review chapter of this manual.
9-41
Analyze
9-42
CHAPTE R 11
11.1
Results Visualization
Introduction
CFdesign has a powerful set of results visualization tools to help view, extract, and
present analysis results quickly, easily, and efficiently. A very graphical, CAD-like
set of tools as well as several ways to output graphical images and data make communicating analysis results with other members of the design supply chain very
easy.
The full suite of visualization tools is available during the analysis as well as after
completion to provide constant graphical feedback about the status of the analysis.
This powerful run-time environment is extremely helpful for monitoring the analysis, and understanding the progression of the solution.
The Results-specific icons, the Feature Tree, and the Results dialog task are all discussed in this chapter. There are several icons that are unique to the Results task,
and make viewing results easier. The Feature tree contains a summary of the settings that were in effect for the displayed results.
The Results dialog task is divided into four primary functions: Global, Cut Surface,
Iso Surface, and Wall. The usage of these as well as other important information
about results visualization are presented in this chapter.
11-1
Viewing Results
11.2
Results-Specific Icons
Most of the icons in the user interface are discussed in Chapter 2, the User Interface Chapter. However, there are several icons that are specific to post-processing,
and are discussed here:
Shaded Image.
The model is shown
filled.
View Lines. The

mesh lines are
shown
Outline Image.
The outline of the
model is shown.
Transparent. This
works in conjunction with a shaded
image, and makes
the model transparent.
11-2
Viewing Results
Show Mesh. Displays surface mesh.

(Shaded Image
should be enabled.)
Peel by Surface.
Toggles between
surface and volume
blanking (with the
right-mouse-button). Default is volume blanking.
(Note: surface peeling is not available
for parts with
assigned motion
(Moving Solids).)
Viewing Results
11-3
Viewing Results
Crinkle Cut
The Crinkle Cut provides a
three-dimensional interior
view of the analysis mesh. This is a
visually interesting and very useful
way to examine the element distribution, transitions, and shape within
the model.
This view is controlled with the ZClip dialog. Check the Crinkle-Cut
box to show the model in this manner
When crinkle-cut is enabled, the
model is automatically shown in
shaded mode, and the mesh is displayed.
The cut is only updated as the slider
on the Z-Clip dialog is moved.
Unlike the standard z-clip, the crinkle-cut will not update when the
model is navigated.
Closing the Z-Clip Control and Crinkle-Cut dialog will disable the crinkle-cut view from the model.
This method provides a more visually accurate method of viewing the
mesh inside a three dimensional
model than showing the mesh lines
on a cutting plane.
11-4
Viewing Results
Mirror
Part mirroring reflects displayed
geometry about a plane. This is very
useful for results on models that have been
divided by symmetry.
The Mirror icon opens the Mirror dialog box.
Check the Mirror Enabled box to activate
mirroring.
A model can be reflected about a single
plane at a time.
There are two ways to set the reflection
plane:
Select any planar surface on
the model when this dialog is open.
Click the X-Y, Y-Z, or Z-X buttons to reflect the model about the
Cartesian planes.
Mirroring is active after the dialog is closed,
if it was not disabled.
Viewing Results
When mirroring is active, results visualization entities (cutting planes, particle traces,
iso surfaces, etc.) that are visible in the
original model will also be shown in the
reflection.
Disable mirroring by unchecking the Mirror
Enabled box.
11-5
Viewing Results
Multiple Views
These four icons control the number (and
orientation) of different results and/or
orientations of the same model.
The Active view is marked with the
CFdesign logo in the lower right corner.
Each view will navigate independently
of the others unless the views are synchronized with the menu option:
Window_Synchronous Navigation.
Note that when an analysis showing multiple views is closed and re-opened, the
results will be displayed with only the single, active view. Likewise, only the single,
active view will be saved to a view settings file or to a Dynamic Image file.
When multiple views are used with the Design Review Center, each view pane will
show the same model in the desired manner. When the next analysis is shown, all
views will update to the next model. In this way, it is possible to compare multiple
views of analyses in a project. This provides a way to compare several views and
perspectives of each model.
11.3
Feature Tree
The Results Task Feature Tree behaves differently from the Feature Tree shown in
the other tasks. Most of the branches are informational only, and do not allow any
modification to assigned settings. The Length Units, Coordinate System, Boundary
and Initial Conditions, and Mesh Size branches behave this way.
Additionally, each of the branches lists the settings that were assigned to produce
the current results. If a boundary condition or mesh size is changed after results
are obtained, they will not be listed on branches of the Results Feature Tree until
the analysis is run with the new settings. However, any new settings will be listed
on the feature tree for the other tasks.
11-6
Viewing Results
11.3.1
Analysis Settings
The Boundary Conditions, Initial Conditions, and Mesh Size branches list the
settings for the current analysis, and left clicking on the entity label (volume,
surface, or edge label) will cause that entity to highlight. This is a convenient way
to determine the location of settings while viewing Results. Click the label again to
turn off the highlighting.
11.3.2
Materials
The Materials branch lists each material and the associated parts.
Left clicking on a part label causes that part to highlight in the Graphics region.
To remove the highlighting, left click again on the part label.
Right clicking on a specific material branch brings up a menu with display controls that are applied to all parts with that material.
Right clicking on a part label brings up the same display control menu but
applies only to that part.
Additionally:
Visible toggles the visibility of the part.
Transparent displays the part with transparent surfaces.
Set Transparency Value opens a dialog
allowing control of the transparency level. A
value of 0% is opaque; a value of 100% is
completely transparent.
Show Results toggles the display of analysis
results on the part.
Show Color opens a Color Palette dialog for
assigning colors to parts. Results are not
shown on a part when it is colored.
11-7
Viewing Results
Most of these commands are view settings,

and perform the same function as the tool-bar
icons described earlier.
Viewing Results
Iso Surfaces and Cutting Planes

The feature tree lists cutting planes and iso surfaces:
This information is only for summary purposes, and there is no interaction with
these entities through the tree. This functionality is available in the Results task
dialog.
11.3.3
Groups
The groups branch lists every group that had been created prior to running the
most recent set of iterations or time steps. Because groups are composed of geometric entities, and the displayed entities in Results mode are all based on the analysis mesh, there is no facility for direct visualization or manipulation of groups or
group entities through the feature tree.
Groups of surfaces can be used in the Wall Calculator, however, by right clicking in
the List region of the Wall dialog, and selecting the appropriate group of surfaces.
11.3.4
Annotations
Annotations (written descriptions on the Graphics window) are listed individually

under the Annotations branch. Each entry can be modified, deleted, and moved
directly through the feature tree. More information about Annotations is presented
in the Review chapter of this manual.
11.4
Entity Blanking
In the default mouse mode, right clicking on an object will cause it to be blanked
(hidden) from view. Click the right mouse button off of the model to re-display all
blanked items. Click the middle mouse button to re-display the last blanked item or
to undo a total re-display command.
11-8
Viewing Results
By default, right clicking on the model blanks the volume that it touches. To enable
surface blanking, click the Volume/Surface toggle tool button to Surface (pressed
in):
An unobstructed view of an object must exist to blank it. If a cutting surface or an

iso surface is in front of the intended object to be blanked, it will not blank. Move or
delete the cutting or iso surface, and then blank the object.
Note: surface blanking is not currently available for parts that are assigned motion
(Moving Solids). This is a capability that will be added in a later version of CFdesign. Also, surfaces that are blanked will not appear blanked when saved to a View
Settings file or to a Dynamic Image. Blanked volumes, however, will be blanked in
both.
11.5
Results Probing on Surfaces
To probe on a cutting plane, hover the mouse over the cutting plane, and hold the
shift key. The results are also displayed in the Status bar.
11.6
Color Legends
Each time the global result is changed in the Feature Tree, the color legend updates
to show the new quantity. Additionally, because each cutting plane and iso surface
can show a unique result quantity, a new color scale is drawn for each unique quantity.
11-9
Viewing Results
Result values can be probed on any surface--walls, openings, slip faces, internal
fluid surfaces, etc., by hovering the mouse over the area of interest and holding
down the shift and control keys simultaneously. The value of the active scalar is
displayed on the Status bar:
Viewing Results
Each color legend has a title that indicates which display entity is displaying the
result, and the units of the result quantity
11.7
Global Dialog
The Global dialog controls the display of results throughout the model. It contains
controls for the global scalar and vector quantity, legend range, and the displayed
iteration or time step.
11.7.1
Scalar
The Global Scalar dialog controls the appearance of results throughout the model:
The displayed iteration

or time step
The global scalar result

and units
Number of legend
levels
Legend Range
Part-dependent legend
range
Contour controls
Filtering controls
The Iterations/Time Steps menu contains the saved iterations for

the analysis. The highest saved iteration or time step is the default entry in
the menu.
11-10
Viewing Results
The Result is the quantity that is shown on the model. Scalars on cutting surfaces and iso surfaces are controlled on their respective dialogs.
The default number of legend levels is 24. Adjustments to this value
are persistent from one session to the next of a particular analysis. (The
default number of levels can be changed through the File_Preferences_User
Interface dialog.)
The Legend Range is controlled by changing the Min and Max values
or by setting it to a part. To do this, check User Specified (if the analysis
is running), click the Set to Part button, and click on the part. To restore
the range to the default, click the Reset button.
Contours on model surfaces are toggled with the Show box in the
Contours section.
Filtering controls the display for a given scalar range. Areas of the
model that fall outside of the filter range are not displayed.
Viewing Results
11-11
Viewing Results
11.7.2
Global Vector
The Global Vector dialog controls the appearance of vectors in the results view:
Global Vector result to

be displayed
Attributes to control
all vectors
Toggle to show global
vectors
Clamping
(all vectors)
Filtering
(all vectors)
Toggle and control
for uniform length
(all vectors)
The Global Result vector (and the Show Global Vectors check box)
control the display of vectors on all openings and internal fluid surfaces.
Vectors on cutting planes and iso surfaces are controlled on their respective
dialogs.
Attributes: Control the length of vectors with the Scale Factor. It is
recommended to check the Scale Relative to Model box. When checked,
the scale factor is between 0 and 1. Unchecked, and it can be greater than
1.
11-12
Viewing Results
Arrow heads are toggled with the Show Arrowheads box. The Arrowhead Size can be varied from 0 (no arrow heads) to as big as necessary.
The default size of 1 is based on the average vector length.
Clamping: Sets maximum and minimum cut off values for vectors.
Vectors that fall outside of this range will be resized to the length corresponding to the maximum or minimum value, as appropriate.
Filtering limits the display of vectors to only those that fall within the
specified range.
Same Length: If enabled, all vectors will be displayed as the same
length. The slider bar controls this length.
11.8
Cutting Surfaces
Cutting surfaces are the primary tool for visualizing data on three dimensional models. Traditionally, cutting surfaces have been used simply to visualize fringes or
vectors on a planar slice through the model. In CFdesign, cutting surfaces have
several additional roles:
They
They
They
They
can present results data on planar and non-planar surfaces

provide a seed plane for particle traces
provide a method to extract bulk data through any cross section
serve as a basis for XY-plots.
In addition to the user-interface roles of the cutting surface, results can be probed
at any location on a planar cutting surface by holding down the shift key, and positioning the mouse at the point of interest. The value at that location is shown in the
Status Bar at the lower-left corner of the Interface. The units of this value correspond to the units selected from the Scalar branch of the Feature Tree.
There are two classifications of cutting surfaces--planar and non-planar. Planar surfaces show a two-dimensional cross-section through the model. They are often (but
not always) aligned to a Cartesian axis. Non-planar cutting surfaces are three
dimensional, and take their shape from one or more surface in the model.
11-13
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
The top image is an example of a planar cutting surface, and on the lower image is
a non-planar cutting surface:
11-14
Viewing Results
11.8.1
Expanding Menu Structure
The Cutting Planes Controls dialog uses a top-down work-flow approach, and the
menus expand and contract as needed:
Click on title bar to

expand or contract
menu
Viewing Results
11-15
Viewing Results
11.8.2
Planar Cut Surfaces
The work-flow and tools for Planar Cut Surfaces are shown below. Note that for
illustrative purposes, all of the menus are expanded:
1. Add and Remove Cut Surfaces with the
Add and Remove buttons. Activate a cut surface by selecting it from the list. (Controls
apply to the active surface.)
2. Select the result quantity from the Result

pull-down menu. Be sure to select Planar.
3. Position the cut surface normal to a Carte-
sian direction by pressing the X, Y, or Z buttons.
3
4
4. Move and Rotate the cut surface as needed
with the mouse controls.
5. Align the cut surface to the model by first

clicking the Surface Align button, and then
click on the desired surface.
6. Change the Appearance of the cut surface

with the controls to show it shaded, with vectors, etc.
7. Adjust the Vector Density to show more or

fewer vectors.
8. Optional: Move or Rotate the cut surface

with the Move and Rotate tools. These tools
are useful for precisely locating the cut surface.
Results on a planar cut surface are saved to a csv file by clicking the Save Table
button. The resolution of the grid is determined by the Vector Density slider. To
11-16
Viewing Results
adjust the resolution without viewing vectors, check the Show Grid box, and move
the Vector Density slider to the desired resolution.
Additional details about Positioning, Appearance, Vector Density, Move, and Rotate
sections are provided:
11.8.2.1
Position
Orient the cut surface normal to the Cartesian directions with the X, Y, or Z buttons. To align the cut surface to a surface in the model, click the Surface Align button, and then select the surface. The cut surface will snap to that selected surface.
The active cut surface can be moved and rotated using the Mouse Navigation tools:
Move
Keyboard Control and Shift keys + drag with the left mouse button.
Rotate
Keyboard Control and Shift keys + drag with the right mouse button.
11.8.2.2
Appearance
Toggles visibility of the cutting surface. (Uncheck to make
cutting surface disappear.)
Clip
Cuts the model with the planar cut surface.
Vectors
Toggles display of vectors on the active cutting surface.
Show Mesh
Toggles the display of the mesh on the cutting surface.

The interpolated mesh at the current location of the surface is shown.
Show Grid
Toggles the display of the vector display grid. This is only

available for planar cutting surfaces.
11.8.2.3
Vector Density
This slider adjusts the density (in the length units of the analysis) of the ordered
grid of vectors. If a finer or coarser grid spacing is needed than the defaults provide, they can be keyed into the Max. or Min. fields, respectively.
Note that this control is only available for planar cutting surfaces. The vector density on non-planar cutting surfaces is based on the mesh density of the source surface(s).
11-17
Viewing Results
Shade by Result
Viewing Results
Results on a planar cut surface are saved to a csv file by clicking the Save Table
button. The resolution of the grid is determined by the Vector Density slider. To
adjust the resolution without viewing vectors, check the Show Grid box, and move
the Vector Density slider to the desired resolution.
11.8.2.4
Move
The cut surface can be oriented with a unit vector specified in the Normal field. Use
the slider to move it normal to this unit vector.
11.8.2.5
Rotate
Use the slider to rotate the cutting plane about the axis of rotation, specified as a
vector in the Axis field. Open the pop-out dialog to select a Cartesian-direction
vector or key-in a vector that is in a non-Cartesian direction. The increment of rotation is controlled with the adjustment to the right of the indicated angle.
11-18
Viewing Results
11.8.3
Non-Planar Cut Surfaces
Non-Planar cut surfaces use a similar work-flow, with a few modifications:

Add and Remove Cut Surfaces with the
Add and Remove buttons. Activate a cut surface by selecting it from the list. (Controls
apply to the active surface.)
1.
2. Select the result quantity from the Result

pull-down menu. Be sure to select Surface.
3. Set the Movement type (Specified Direction, Morph, Offset).
4. To select the Surface Shape, pick a Source
Surface(s) by opening the pop-out dialog (circled).
5
6
5. Select the Target Surface(s) if the cut surface will be morphed, again using the pop-out
dialog.
Viewing Results
6. Set the direction of movement in one of
the Cartesian directions with the X, Y, and Z

buttons. (Only if Movement Type is Specified
Direction.)
7. Change the Appearance of the cut surface
with the controls to show it shaded, show the

vectors, etc. (Clip and Show Grid are not available.)
8. Move or Rotate the cut surface with the
Move and Rotate tools. These are useful for

precisely locating the cut surface.
Note: Non-planar cutting surfaces cannot be stored as part of a View Settings file or
in a Dynamic Image.
11-19
Viewing Results
Additional details about Positioning, Appearance, Vector Density, Move, and Rotate
sections are provided:
11.8.3.1
Surface Shape--Source and Target Surface
The shape of a non-planar cut surface is set by selecting one or more surfaces in
the model. To do this, open the pop-out dialog (with the button marked ...). The
Select Source Surface(s) dialog will appear. While this is open, select the surface(s)
from the model that are to be the source surface.
A Target surface is only needed if the cut surface is to be morphed.
11.8.3.2
Movement Types
There are three ways to move non-planar cutting surfaces: in a Specified Direction,
by Morphing between a source and a target, or by Offsetting from the source.
Specified Direction
When moving a cutting surface along a specified direction, the surface maintains
the shape of the source surface(s).
To move the cut surface in a Cartesian direction, select one of the direction buttons,
X, Y, or Z. This will not change the shape of the surface, but simply sets the direction of translation. This is only applicable for the Specified Direction Movement
type.
11-20
Viewing Results
Morphing
Morphing a cutting surface means that its shape will change as it is moved between
the source and the target. A Target surface is needed in addition to a source surface. Select a Target using the pop-out dialog on the Target Surface field.
Move the cutting surface between the source and target surfaces using either the
mouse navigation (described below) or with the Move Slider.
Distortion may occur when morphing surfaces if the angle between the source and
target is greater than approximately 110 degrees. The reason is that the transformation rays between the source and target can be multi-valued. Below is an example of this. The source was the roof of the car; the target was the planar surface
cutting through the car.
Viewing Results
11-21
Viewing Results
In the following graphics, the source was the roof of the car, but the target was the
surface of the wind tunnel opposite the car. The surface is shown at four positions
of its morph:
As mentioned, the choice of source and target surfaces plays a significant role in
the level of distortion that will occur during the morph. Reasonable morphing can
really only be obtained in the following two scenarios:
If the surfaces to be morphed completely surround a volume, then source and target surfaces must completely enclose their respective volumes without any gaps.
The best types of volumes are shaped such that a direct line of sight exists between
every face and the centroid of the volume.
If the morphing surfaces do not completely enclose a volume, then the source and
target surfaces must be shaped such that they can be mapped (or projected) onto a
11-22
Viewing Results
flat plane. The key is that there must be a one-to-one correspondence to get a useful mapping. An example of a surface that does not meet this criteria is shown:
cylinder
plane
Points A and B both map to point C. This produces a non-unique mapping which will
result in a lot of distortion.
Offset Surface
This mode scales a non-planar cutting surface while preserving its original shape.
Move the cutting surface with either the mouse navigation or with the Move slider.
A non-planar cutting surface that has been offset is shown: Both the expanded
(left) and shrunk surfaces (right) are shown:
Viewing Results
11-23
Viewing Results
11.8.3.3
Appearance
Shade by Result
Toggles visibility of the cutting surface. (Uncheck to make

cutting surface disappear.)
Clip
Not available for non-planar cutting surfaces.
Vectors
Toggles display of vectors on the active cutting surface.

The vector density cannot be changed.
Show Mesh
Toggles the display of the mesh on the cutting surface.

For non-planar cutting surfaces, this is the mesh from the
source surface(s).
Show Grid
Not available for non-planar cutting surfaces.
11.8.3.4
Move
The Move section contains a slider for moving the cut surface with more precision
than the mouse mode. The direction of movement (for the Specified Movement
method) can be specified with a unit vector normal to the direction of travel.
For the Morphing method, the Move slider morphs the surface between the source
and the target surfaces. For the Offset Direction method, Move slider offsets the
surface from its source.
11.8.3.5
Rotate
The Rotate section allows precise rotation, and is intended for the Specified Direction movement type. Rotate the cut surface with the slider. Change its Axis of
Rotation by either keying-in an axis or opening the pop-out dialog to select a Cartesian axis.
The Axis Point is the point through which the axis passes. Select the Axis Point by
keying in a value, or opening the pop-out dialog to select either the Centroid (of
the surface) or the Origin (of the model).
11-24
Viewing Results
11.9
Cutting Plane - Particle Trace
Particle Traces are similar to an injected dye in the flow. They are a very useful
method of visualizing the flow distribution. Begin by clicking the Trace tab on the
Cutting Plane dialog. The basic process is described:
1. Starting with a planar cut surface, select

the seed points. There are four methods:
Pick on Plane, Key In, Rectangular grid, and
Circular grid.
1
2
2. Click the Add Trace Set button.

3. Select
the Appearance:
Cylinders
Spheres
Lines
Points
Hidden
as needed.
5. Set the Animation Speed.

6. Click the Start button to animate the traces.
(A useful effect is to draw the trace as the animation occurs by checking the Animate Incrementally box.)
Optional: Click the Mass button to open the

Mass dialog.
11-25
Viewing Results
4. Change the Width to emphasize the traces
Viewing Results
11.9.1
Seed Point Selection Methods
There are four options for selecting trace seed points: Pick o Plane, Rectangular
Grid, Circular Grid, and Key-in. After selecting the seed points, click the Add Trace
Set button to display the traces.
Pick on Plane
Graphically select seed point locations directly on the cutting plane. The coordinate
locations will appear in the Seed Point field.
Rectangular Grid
A rectangle drawn anywhere on the cutting surface encloses a matrix of points.
Three locations are selected: the two top corners and a lower corner. Enter the
number of points in the length and width grid directions on the plane.
Circular Grid
Specify a distribution of particle trace seed points using a circular grid. The first
value is the number of points in the circumferential direction. The second value is
the number of points in the radial direction. On the active cutting surface, define
the extent of the grid by first clicking on the center of the circular grid, and then
dragging the circle to the desired radius.
Key-In
Key in the exact X,Y, and Z coordinates. Separate each coordinate with a comma.
These coordinates do not have to lie on the cutting plane.
11.9.2
Residence Time
The time that each trace takes to traverse through the model is its residence time.
This value is listed for each trace. Residence time can vary based on the flow, the
geometry, and if the trace is massed.
When a trace is selected from the list, it will change color in the Graphics window to
provide a graphical indication of its location. This is useful for identifying a trace
that has a substantially longer residence time than the others. A trace with a considerably longer residence time than the rest in the set will affect animation of the
11-26
Viewing Results
entire set. It will appear to animate very slowly followed by a very rapid animation
of the others. Deleting this longer trace will make the animation appear much better.
11.9.3
Deletion of Particle Traces
Delete individual particle traces by selecting the trace from the list, and click the
Delete button. Delete a group of traces by selecting the group name and clicking
the Delete button. Delete all traces by clicking the Delete All button.
11.9.4
Appearance
There are five ways to show traces:
Cylinders
Viewing Results
11-27
Viewing Results
Spheres
Lines
Points
Not Shown
This setting hides the traces from view.
11-28
Viewing Results
11.9.5
Other Attributes
Width controls the size of the trace. For cylinders, spheres, and points, it controls
the diameter. Increasing the width for lines makes them appear as ribbons.
Max Steps controls the length of the trace; the default of 5000 is good for most
traces, but very finely meshed models may need a larger value if the traces fail to
pass all the way through the model.
Show Result simply toggles the display of the result quantity on the trace.
11.9.6
Animation
Click the Start button to start the animation. During animation of traces, this button changes to a Pause button. Check the Animate Incrementally box to draw
the trace as the animation occurs. Click the Reset button to restore the traces to
their original (un-animated) state. Vary the speed of the animation with the Animation Speed control.
11.9.7
Massed Particles
By default, particle traces are the traces a particle without mass would take if it
were released in the flow. A more physically real visualization technique is to
include the effects of mass on the particle. The resulting trace will behave more like
a physical substance within a flow system.
Massed particle traces are only drawn forward, not backward, so it is best to position the seed points near the inlet of the geometry.
Inertial and drag effects are taken into account, and if a particle has too much inertia to turn a corner, it will hit the wall. Massed particles will bounce when they strike
a wall. They will also bounce when they strike a symmetry surface. The coefficient
of restitution can be specified to control the amount of bounce in a collision.
11-29
Viewing Results
The animation method for Spheres is slightly different from the other trace types.
Instead of simply incrementing through the length of the trace, spheres emit from
the source. This produces a very informative effect that illustrates the flow path
throughout the entire analysis model. Note that sphere traces are only drawn forward, so no spheres will appear upstream of the originating surface.
Viewing Results
There are several capabilities that allow a great deal of flexibility to the visualization
of massed particles. The most basic is the ability to select units required quantities:
particle density and particle radius. Other functionality include a user-prescribed
initial path, the inclusion of gravity, and the ability to customize the drag correlation by modifying the coefficients.
These features are located in the Mass dialog. Open this dialog from the Mass button on the Trace task dialog. Begin by checking the Enable Mass box:
11.9.7.1
Required Quantities and Units
Enter the Particle Density and Particle Radius, and select the desired units for
both quantities. The default density is the fluid density, and the default radius is
based on the bounding box of the model.
11.9.7.2
Coefficient of Restitution
This coefficient of restitution is a measure of the amount of bounce between two

objects. Specifically, it is the ratio of the velocities of the objects before and after
an impact, and can be described mathematically as:
V 2f V 1f
C = -------------------V 2i V 1i
11-30
Viewing Results
where V1 is the velocity of the first object, V2 is the velocity of the second object,
and the i and f subscripts indicate initial and final velocity, respectively. In the case
of massed particles, the other object is a static wall, so the equation reduces to:
V 2f
C = -----V 2i
The range of values of the coefficient of restitution is between 0.01 and 1. A value
of 0.01 is an inelastic collision, and the particles stick when they hit the wall.
A value of 1 is a perfectly elastic collision, and particles have the same velocity (and
kinetic energy) after the collision. The default value is 0.5.
Massed particles with a Coefficient of Restitution value of 0 are shown on the left.
The traces on the right have a value of 1:
Viewing Results
11.9.7.3
Initial Path
Check the Set Initial Velocity box to

input an initial velocity and direction for
the trace.
This allows the visualization of the interaction between the flow and a particle injection with a known velocity and trajectory.
An example is an aerosol injection of particles into a flow stream.
11.9.7.4
Gravity
Check the Enable Gravity for Massed Particles to include the effects of body
forces on particle traces. Enter the components of the force in the X, Y, and Z
boxes.
11-31
Viewing Results
For Earths gravity, check the Earth box, and enter a unit vector to indicate the
direction in which gravity acts.
11.9.7.5
Modifiable Drag Correlation
The drag correlation used for massed particles is given as:
24
c
C d = ------ ( a + bRe )
Re
The coefficients a, b, and c can be modified to effect the drag as appropriate.
11-32
Viewing Results
11.10
Cutting Plane - Bulk Data
This feature quickly calculates and shows bulk-weighted results on a planar cutting
surface. Bulk (mass-weighted) results are automatically updated as the active cutting surface is moved:
Start by positioning the planar cut surface in the
desired location.
1. Select the desired quantities for bulk calculation.
2. Adjacent to each quantity is a menu containing choices for units; change the unit if necessary.
3. Click the Calculate button.

4. The bulk results are written to the lower dis-
play window.
Viewing Results
When animating transient analyses, click the

Save button to save bulk data from the active
time steps to a text file. (This will be a .cvs format.)
To obtain bulk data for multiple results sets while animating, hit the Save button. A
text file will be saved with data for each result set or time step that is in the active
animation set. (See the Review chapter for more details about animation.)
Notes:
Volume Flow Rate is the product of velocity and area.
11-33
Viewing Results
Pressure Force is the pressure integrated over an area (This is an areaweighted pressure. The pressure value produces a mass-weighted pressure
value).
Velocity components are displayed by selecting Velocities.
Bulk output files are saved in Excel comma separated variable (csv)
format. This allows bulk output files to be readily opened into Excel for further results processing.
The Design Review Center (DRC) is an easy, powerful tool for assessing results
from multiple analyses in a project. To save bulk data from multiple analyses to a
single output file, activate the DRC, and click the Save button on the Bulk dialog.
An Excel CSV file will be written that contains the bulk data from the active cutting
plane for every active analysis in the project.
11.11
Cutting Surface - XY Plot
XY Plots are another way of leveraging the power of cutting surfaces. Available only
for planar cutting surfaces, they provide another convenient way of extracting data
from an analysis.
11.11.1
Creating a Plot
An XY plot can be created through points selected graphically on a cutting surface,

through keyed-in points, or through points saved from a previous plot.
11-34
Viewing Results
Begin by selecting the method of point selection: Choose from Add by Picking,
Add by Key-in, or Read from File.
To create an XY plot through points selected
graphically on the cutting surface, select Add
by Picking.
Click on locations on the cutting plane through
which the xy plot will pass. Points are shown in
the Point List Region. (A minimum of two
points is required.)
To Add (points) by Keying In, enter X, Y,

and Z coordinates (separated by a comma) in
the field and hit the Add button. Points coordinates are listed.
Viewing Results
The locations of points used in an xy plot can

be saved to a file by clicking the Save Points
button on the XY Plot dialog
Subsequent XY plotS can then be constructed
using the point locations by clicking the Read
from File option on the XY Plot dialog and
clicking the Browse button.
A file selection dialog will appear prompting for
an xyp file.
A plot through saved point locations can be
constructed on an analysis different from the
original model.
11-35
Viewing Results
To complete the plot:
1. A title can be given to the plot using the Title field.

2. The number of divisions in each data segment (a segment is between two
entered points) is set to 20 by default, but can be changed if necessary.
3. To create the plot, hit the Plot button.
11.11.2
The XY Plot
The resulting plot of the data will appear in a separate window:
The plot can be customized in several ways:
Show a different result quantity

Change the units of the dependent axis quantity
Change the axis label text
Change the plot background color
11.11.2.1
Changing the Plot Quantity
The plot quantity is selected from the pull-down menu.

This is the quantity plotted on the Y axis. The X axis quantity is the parametric distance along the path between selected points.
11-36
Viewing Results
11.11.2.2
Changing the Units on Axis Labels
The Y axis label of XY plots now shows the units of the dependent variable.
This adds clarity to the plot, and improves communication of CFdesign results with
others.
The units can be changed by right clicking anywhere on the XY plot, and selecting
Units from the menu. Choose the desired units for the dependent variable from the
list.
The Y-axis label will be modified to show the new label, and the Y-axis values will
be converted to the selected units.
11.11.2.3
Changing the Axis Label Text
The labels for both axes can be changed by right clicking on the plot, and selecting
either Change X-Axis Label or Change Y-Axis Label.
A dialog will appear that allows new text to be entered.
Pressing the Set Default button will return the axis label to its default value.
11.11.2.4
Changing the XY Plot Background Color
The plot background color can be changed from the default blue by right clicking on
the plot, and selecting Background Color.
This brings up the standard color selection tool.
Customize the color to make the plot easier on the eyes or easier to print.
11-37
Viewing Results
The Display Min/Max Values box controls the appearance of the axis extremes.
Unchecked, the min and max values will be removed from the label.
Viewing Results
11.12
Iso Surface
An iso surface is a surface of constant value of a quantity. Shown is an example of

a velocity magnitude iso surface:
Iso surfaces are a three dimensional visualization tool that show a value as well as
the physical shape of the flow characteristics. They are very useful for visualizing
velocity distributions in complicated flow paths in addition to temperature distributions in thermal analyses. Iso surfaces can be used to determine the locations of
the maximum and minimum values in a model.
11-38
Viewing Results
The Iso Surface process is shown below:
1. Create an iso surface by clicking the Add
button. (Note that if multiple iso-surfaces are

created, the highlighted one in the list is
active.)
2. Change the result by selecting from the
Iso Quantity menu. This variable controls

the shape of the iso surface.
3. Color the iso surface by selecting from the
Color by Result menu.
3
4
4. Change the value (and shape) of the iso

surface by moving the Value slider bar.
5. Control the visibility and vectors with the

Show Surface and Show Vectors boxes,
respectively.
Wall
The Wall tab of the Results dialog task provides a way to calculate flow-induced wall
forces on wall surfaces of the model. Such forces are useful in many situations.
Examples include assessing the hydrodynamic force on internal valve components
for determining spring rate as well as calculating the lift and drag on aerodynamic
bodies.
In addition, this utility calculates wall temperatures, pressures, heat flux, and film
coefficients on walls. The torque about an axis as well as the center of force are
also calculated.
The Wall Results tab is broken into two sub-tabbed dialogs: Selection-and-Result
and Output. The former is used for selecting surfaces and the desired calculation
value. The latter displays the results.
11-39
Viewing Results
11.13
Viewing Results
11.13.1
Wall - Selection and Result Quantities
When this dialog is invoked, surfaces on the model will highlight when the mouse is
hovered near them.
1. Select desired surfaces. Pickable surfaces
are any wall surface as well as openings (inlets

and outlets). The IDs of selected surfaces are
shown in the List Region.
When the Selection Mode is Volume, volumes
will highlight when hovered over, and can be
selected. Note that the surfaces belonging to
the picked volume are actually be added to the
selection list.
Groups of surfaces are selected from the
Selection Basis menu.Note that the group
must exist prior to running the last set of iterations. If not, simply run 0 iterations to force
the model to re-process.
2. Select the quantities and desired units to
output. Choices include Forces, Temperature,

Heat Flux, Pressure, Film Coefficient, and
Torque. (Description of each follows.)
3. Click the Calculate button.

Wall results are shown on the Output tab.
Forces are the overall stress tensor--both pressure and shear are integrated over the surface. Force components and magnitude are output for
each surface. Total force for all selected surfaces is also given. To remove
very low wall pressures from the force calculation (which may indicate the
on-set of cavitation), check the Cutoff Pressure box, and enter a minimum pressure value. All pressure values that fall below the Cutoff (on the
selected surfaces) will be re-assigned to the cutoff pressure value for the
wall calculation. (This cutoff does not affect the displayed results fringes or
any other output quantity.)
11-40
Viewing Results
For moving solids, the computed force and torque are the hydraulic values, and do not include the effect of specified driving and resistance forces
or torque as part of the Motion definition.
Pressure is the average pressure exerted by the fluid on the wall surface.
Temperature is the average temperature on the wall surface. Note
that temperatures values from intermediate saved iterations or time steps
are not accessible on the Wall dialog.
Calculated Heat Flux is based on the thermal residual from the heat
transfer solution. Note that heat flux values from intermediate saved iterations or time steps are not accessible on the Wall dialog. Also, heat flux values from moving objects are not available.
Film coefficient can be calculated in two ways: Enter a value for the
reference temperature or use the near wall temperature at every wall node
as the local reference temperature. The latter is done by checking the Use
near-wall temperatures box.
To calculate the Torque about an axis, enter the coordinates of one

point on the axis of revolution in the Point on Axis group, and enter a unit
vector that defines the orientation of the axis (in the Direction group).
When Forces is selected, the wall forces, the center of force about each global axis, and the torque about the selected axis will be displayed.
11.13.2
Wall - Output
To view calculated wall results, click the Output tab. The requested values from the
Selection and Result tab are displayed on this dialog for every selected surface.
A Summary section lists the total quantities for all of the selected surfaces.
This data can be saved to an Excel csv file by hitting the Write to File button. The
default extension of the file will be csv.
Hitting the View File button will prompt to select a previously saved wall results
file. When selected, the contents of the file will be shown in the Output region.
11-41
Viewing Results
If a reference temperature is entered, the film coefficient will be calculated

based on the heat flux and the temperature difference between the specified reference temperature and the wall temperature. If near wall temperatures are used, then the film coefficient will be based on the difference
between the wall temperature and temperature at the closest non-wall
(flow) node for every node on the wall.
Viewing Results
11.14
Dynamic Images: Design Communication
Traditionally, communicating analysis results was accomplished by creating numerous images in an attempt to convey the whole story to an audience (or a manager!). The creator of such images often has to create additional images once the
intended viewer decides they want to see the results from a different orientation or
they want to zoom in on a particular detail.
CFdesign takes Design Communication to a new level. With the introduction of the
Design Communication Center and the Dynamic Image, CFdesign users not only
share images, they can share the whole story. Unlike traditional bitmap, tif, and
jpeg formats, a Dynamic Image can be navigated--panned, zoomed, and rotated.
Dynamic Images can contain animation of transient results as well as animated
particle traces.
Dynamic Images can be created, shared, and viewed very easily.
11.14.1
Creation of Dynamic Images (VTF Files)
After setting up a view that you want to share, click the Dynamic Image icon from
the File Save menu:
You will be prompted to enter a name and location of the file. The extension is
.vtf.
11.14.2
Viewing Dynamic Images
Dynamic Images can be viewed in the Design Communication Center, in a CFdesign

HTML Report, and MicroSoft PowerPoint presentations.
To view a Dynamic Image on a machine that does not contain a CFdesign installation, it is first necessary to run the Design Communication Center installation. This
11-42
Viewing Results
file is called CFdesign-Communication-setup.exe, and is part of the CFdesign

installation (located in the Design-Communication-Center subfolder of your
CFdesign installation). It can be shared with anyone that wants to view Dynamic
Images. It can also be downloaded from the CFdesign web site. This will install the
Design Communication Center (the free viewer) and a few other files necessary for
viewing Dynamic Images.
If CFdesign is installed on your computer, then all of these files can be found in the
Design-Communication-Center sub-folder in your CFdesign installation folder,
and it is not necessary to run the CFdesign-Communication-setup.exe file.
Design Communication Center

Included in the CFdesign installation (Design-Communication-Center sub-folder) is
a file called Design-Comm-Center.exe. Dynamic images can be viewed with this
tool. This three megabyte file is a free viewer that can be given to anyone with
whom you wish to share your results. Additionally, it can be downloaded from the
CFdesign web site at www.cfdesign.com by following the links on the web site.
11-43
Viewing Results
Images in the Design Communication Center can be navigated using the mouse
(Left mouse button = pan, Middle mouse button = zoom, and Right mouse button
= rotate). The integrity of the Dynamic Image is preserved in that display objects
such as cutting planes cannot be moved or deleted.
Viewing Results
CFdesign Report
The Review_Report dialog contains a template for the CFdesign Report. The layout
of the report can be changed by using the right mouse-button menu for each item
to change its visibility, with the Up and Down buttons to change the order of items
and sections, and by adding additional text files and images.
Dynamic Images that are named according to this naming convention will automatically be included in the report:
analysis name_g_image name
where analysis name is the name of the analysis (car, for example), and image
name is whatever descriptive name you want to use. Be sure to separate the two
names with the _g_.
11-44
Viewing Results
Dynamic Images are automatically added to the Graphics section of the report.
When the report is generated, an HTML document is created that includes the
Dynamic Images:
CFdesign reports can only be viewed with Microsoft Internet Explorer. Care should
be taken to ensure that your browser security settings will allow the ActiveX plug-in
to display the Dynamic Images. If your images cannot be viewed from a CFdesign
report, check the security settings of your browser. If Dynamic Images do not
11-45
Viewing Results
To view a CFdesign report, you should have the Design Communication Center
installed. (This is done automatically when CFdesign is installed). Use the CFdesignCommunication-setup.exe file to install it on other computers. This file is included
in the CFdesign installation (Design-Communication-Center folder), and can be sent
to anyone; additionally the file can be downloaded from the CFdesign web site.
Viewing Results
appear in your report, and you see the warning message shown in the following
graphic, then click on the warning message, and select the option to allow content:
PowerPoint
Prior to adding an image into PowerPoint, add the CFdesign dynamic image macro.
This adds a button into the PowerPoint menu, and makes adding images much easier:
1. Start PowerPoint, and hit Tools-Add Ins.

2. Click the Add New button.
3. Browse to the Design-Communication-Center subfolder of the CFdesign
installation, and select the add-in called DCCPPAddin.ppa. This add-in uses a
macro, so a warning will come up about macros.
4. If the button does not appear, then you should reduce the security settings of
PowerPoint.
To add an image to a PowerPoint presentation:
1. Click the Insert CFdesign Image button on the DCC toolbar:
2. A frame will be drawn in the presentation. Left click on the frame, and click the
Add VTF button on the toolbar:
3. Browse for the desired dynamic image file (vtf). The path and name will be displayed in the frame, and the image will display when the Slide Show is presented.
11-46
Viewing Results
11.15
Design Review Center (DRC)
When the Results dialog task is invoked when a Project is open (instead of an analysis), an additional dialog will appear below the Graphics Window:
This is the Design Review Center, and is used to view results from all the analyses
in a project.
By setting up a view on one analysis and hitting the DRC-Compare button, all of
the analyses in a project will be presented with the exact same view attributes.
Using this dialog, one can flip from one analysis to the next manually, or hit the
Play button on the VCR controls to automatically flip through all of the analyses.
The beauty of this is that each analysis is presented with the same color legend
scale and in the same manner--with the same cutting planes, iso surfaces, etc.
More information about the Design Review Center is presented in the Projects chapter of this Guide.
11-47
Viewing Results
This is a great way to visualize results data from multiple design concepts, without
having to create dozens (or even hundreds) of static images. Also, because each
analysis is presented in the same manner, it eliminates having to set up multiple
viewing panes on the screen and trying to make each one look the same.
Viewing Results
11-48
CHAPTE R 10
10.1
Review
Introduction
The Review dialog contains tools to help assess convergence throughout the entire
calculation domain as well as at individual monitor points. Additionally it provides
access to several files that contain summary, status, and results information. Use
the Review dialog to animate multiply saved results sets or time steps as well as
produce Reports that summarize the analysis setup and results.
The Report Generator is a direct extension of the Design Communication Center,
and provides a very easy to use way to create and customize reports for sharing
CFdesign results.
Operation of the Review Dialog is not as sequential as some of the other functions.
Alternatively, there are several useful tools available to help assess and understand
analysis results.
10-1
Review
10.2
Convergence Monitor
After the analysis is finished, the Convergence Monitor is displayed by clicking the
View Conv. Monitor button on the Review task dialog:
The primary criteria for determining convergence is that the change of each degree
of freedom is minimized over a large range of iterations. The curves shown in the
Convergence Monitor are plots of the average value of each degree of freedom
throughout the entire calculation domain. More details about convergence assessment and the Automatic Convergence assessment function are included in the Analyze chapter of this manual.
10.2.1
Degrees of Freedom
A very helpful way to look at this data is to examine each degree of freedom
individually. Select a degree of freedom from the Quantity drop menu (the default
10-2
Review
entry is All). The maximum and minimum values of the quantity will be shown on
the Y-axis of the plot:
Iteration Range
Adjust the displayed range of iterations by changing the Start and/or End iteration values. After changing a value, hit the keyboard Enter to implement the
change. This is especially helpful for removing the first 50 or so iterations from the
convergence plot. Before iteration 50, the quantities are typically changing too
much to be considered when assessing convergence.
By default the average value of each degree of freedom is plotted. To view the
maximum and minimum values, select Min. or Max. from the menu at the right side
of the dialog.
The Table tab (shown just above the Start and End fields) shows a table of the plotted data. When an individual degree of freedom is selected, the table shows only
values for that quantity.
10-3
Review
10.2.2
Review
10.2.3
Plot Quantities and Error Estimation
Several different parameters can be plotted with the Convergence Monitor to aid in
understanding the progress of an analysis.
Available in a pull-down menu on the Convergence Monitor, the following quantities

are available: Avg., Min., Max, Resid In, Resid Out, Solv Iter, Relax Parm, and
DPhi/Phi.
These quantities are used by the Intelligent Solution Control and Automatic Convergence Assessment algorithms, which are described in the Analyze chapter. A brief
description of each is given:
Avg: The average value of the plotted quantities.
Min: The minimum value of each quantity over the displayed range of
iterations.
Max: The maximum value of each quantity over the displayed range of
iterations.
Resid In: This is the residual value of each degree of freedom, and is
the measure of how much the quantity is changing. This is the residual
quantity that was plotted in previous versions of CFdesign.
Resid Out: This value should be quite small, and is the value of the
residual over the entire field after the last iteration.
Solv Iter: The number of sweeps per iteration required by the solver for
each degree of freedom.
Relax Parm: The under-relaxation value invoked by the Intelligent
Solution Control for each quantity. If Intelligent Solution Control is not
enabled, then these are the values specified on the Convergence Controls
dialog.
10-4
Review
DPhi/Phi: The fluctuation value of each field variable. This is used by

Intelligent Solution Control and Auto Stop to assess the analysis rate of
change.
10.3
Monitor Points
Monitor points are available in two forms: Runtime and Post. Runtime points track
convergence (of the basic degrees of freedom) at a user-specified point for every
iteration of the analysis. For this reason, Run-Time points must be selected
prior to running iterations. Note that there is a limit of 100 run-time monitor
points in an analysis.
10-5
Review
Post Monitor points are used to create XY plots of any output quantity at any location in the model for the saved time steps or iterations. These locations can be chosen after the analysis, but only results data for saved iterations or time steps can
be plotted. (Recall that the Results Output Interval on the Analyze dialog can be
used to save results sets during the analysis.)
Review
10.3.1
Runtime Monitor Points.
Open the Review task, and select the Monitor

Points tab.
1. Ensure that the Runtime Monitor tab is
showing.
2. Use the X, Y, and Z sliders to navigate to
the desired location. Specific coordinates can
be entered in the fields adjacent to the sliders.
3. Click the Add button to finish the point
definition.
4. Points and their locations will be displayed
in the List Region.
Plot the point graphically by clicking on the
point listing
1
2
Monitor points can not be chosen while the solver is running, and must be created
prior to running iterations. Convergence data at monitor points created after iterations have been run will be of subsequent iterations as the analysis is continued-not from previous iterations.
Likewise, if a point is removed and the analysis is continued, then no subsequent
data will be available for the removed point.
When a completed analysis is started over from the beginning, all monitor point
data for the previous analysis will be removed.
10-6
Review
Convergence data for each monitor point is plotted in the Convergence Monitor in
the same manner as the global convergence data. Select a specific monitor point
from the drop menu on the right side of the Convergence Monitor:
10.3.2
Post Monitor Points
Go to the Review dialog task, and select the Monitor Points tab.
1. Ensure that the Post Monitor tab is showing.

2. Use the X, Y, and Z sliders to navigate to the desired location. Specific coordinates can be entered in the fields adjacent to the sliders.
3. Hit the Add button to finish the point definition.
4. Points and their locations will be displayed in the List Region.
Plot the saved results at a point by first selecting it from the list and then hitting the
View Plot button.
When the View Plot button is hit, an XY plot of the data is created. A drop menu on
the plot window lists all the saved output quantities for the analysis, and any of
these can be plotted against iteration number.
10-7
Review
Post monitor points can be created after the analysis is finished, but are only plotted for saved results sets or time steps (recall that the Results Save interval is set
on the Analyze task dialog).
Review
10.4
Notes
The Notes tab provides access to several informational files created during and
after the analysis. Additionally, user-defined annotations can be created and
assigned from the Notes dialog:
Files for viewing:
10.4.1
Status
Summary
Summary History
Component Thermal Summary
Setup Parameters
Rotating Region Results
Motion Results
Annotations
Status File
The status file contains descriptions of any errors that occurred during the analysis.
If a message saying Errors occurred, Review Status File appears in the Analyze
Dialog Information field, this is where you should go to view the error.
Additionally, this file contains the messages displayed during startup (the initial calculations) as well as the residuals for each degree of freedom for each iteration.
By default, the status and summary files are written out to the working directory as
separate text files. However, if they are deleted or if the cfd file is moved without
either file, the status and summary data are still accessible through the Review dialog. To create a separate text file for either file, click the Save button on the bottom of the dialog frame.
10-8
Review
10.4.2
Summary File
This file contains tabulated minimum, maximum, and average nodal values for
selected variables. It also contains global summary calculations such as mass flow
through inlet and outlet passages, bulk pressures and temperatures, Reynolds
number, wall heat transfer, a global energy balance and the fluid forces. Additionally, analysis times and the amount of RAM used in the analysis are shown.
<jobname>.sum is a simple text file that can be viewed in any text editor.
The calculation units as well as the units for every variable are included in the file.
When working in the inch-lb-s and inch-Watt-K units systems, the mass flow rate
will be given in both the consistent units as well as in lbm/s.
Line
Review
Energy Balance
Fluid Energy Balance Information:
Energy Out - Energy In
Heat Transfer from Wall to Fluid
Heat Transfer Due to Sources in Fluid
Sum Radiant Heat Transfer to Fluid

Walls
Solid Energy Balance Information:
Heat Transfer from Exterior to Solid
Heat Transfer Due to Sources in

Solid
Heat Transfer From Fluid to Solid
Line 1: The difference in energy in the fluid from the outlet to the inlet. This is the
sum of the residuals over the entire fluid domain. It represents the total energy
needed to sustain all of the fluid boundary conditions. This should match up with
the quantity: m c p T .
10-9
Review
Line 2: This is how much energy the fluid picked up from heat transfer boundary
conditions on the wall, and is the sum of the residuals at all of the wall nodes,
including those nodes on the interface of the solid materials. In the case where all
of the external fluid walls (not touching any other volume or surface) are adiabatic,
this represents the amount of energy the fluid gets from the solid materials. If
there are thermal boundary conditions on these external fluid walls, Line 2 will
include those conditions as well as the energy being transferred from the solid
materials.
Line 3: This is the summed energy from heat sources in only the fluid elements/
volumes.
Line 4: The residuals calculated in Lines 1-3 and Lines 5-7 do not include the radiative fluxes. This line sums the radiative fluxes from every wall surface.
Line 5: This is how much energy is transferred to (or from) the solids to (or from)
an exterior boundary. This is the sum of the residuals on the external faces of the
solid materials. These are faces that do not touch any other material. In certain
cases, where the solid material has say a heat generation applied to it and some
external faces, this Line may contain a finite number which is the sum of the residuals on these external nodes. In this case, this number can be interpreted as the
energy that would seep into the environment from that material. In the case where
the external faces have a thermal flux-type condition or a specified temperature,
this Line represents the amount of energy needed to sustain those boundary conditions.
Line 6: This is the summed energy from the heat sources in only the solid material
elements/volumes.
Line 7: This is the energy that crosses the interface of the solid materials into the
fluid elements. For adiabatic fluid external walls, this Line should be matched up
with Line 2.
For the Fluid Energy Balance, the following values should match:
Energy Out - Energy In = Heat Transfer from Wall to Fluid + Heat Transfer Due to
Source in Fluid + Radiant Heat Transfer to Fluid Walls
or
Line 1 = Line 2 + Line 3 + Line 4
10-10
Review
For the Solid Energy Balance, the following values should match:
Heat Transfer Due to Sources in the Solid = Heat Transfer from Exterior to Solid +
Heat Transfer From Fluid to Solid + (some radiation)
or
Line 6 = Line 5 + Line 7 + (some radiation)
For radiation calculations, Line 7 will be larger than Line 6 because the radiative
energy leaving the solids is not included.
Inlets/Outlets
Recall that for book-keeping purposes, any specified velocity boundary condition is
labeled an inlet, and any specified pressure boundary condition is labeled an outlet.
For a pressure-driven flow, with a pressure at the inlet and a pressure at the outlet,
the summary file will report that there are zero inlets, and two outlets. The physical inlet will have a positive mass flow rate however, and the physical outlet will have a negative mass flow rate. Also note that the Total Mass Flow In
and the Total Mass Flow Out will be 0. This is because there are no specified
velocity conditions (no labeled inlets), and the total mass flow from the labeled outlets cancels (one is positive, and the other is negative).
Temperature Statistics
For analyses with heat transfer, statistics for temperature distribution are included
in the summary file. These statistics show how much (as a volume percentage) of
the model has a temperature within a given range.
10-11
Review
Why dont they exactly match? Remember, we are summing the residuals of the
energy equation at every node in the model. If the energy equation is not converged, there will not be a balance. Even at convergence, the energy balance may
still contain some errors due to numerical roundoff and mesh inaccuracies.
Review
Summary of Fluid Forces on Walls

The cumulative force components are reported in the Summary file as Shear and
Pressure results. These values are the summed force values from all walls in the
model. Use the Wall Calculator in the Results task dialog to compute forces at individual surfaces.
Shell Forces
If an analysis contains shells (solid surface obstructions), then force, temperature,
and heat transfer information for each surface is listed in the summary file.
10.4.3
Summary History File
This is a collection of all the summary files created for this analysis. Each time the
analysis is continued, a new summary file is appended.
10.4.4
Component Thermal Summary
The component thermal summary file automatically saved at the conclusion of

every analysis. This file contains the mean, max, and minimum temperature data
for each solid part in the analysis model. This information is provided for each time
step in a transient analysis.
Additionally, temperature and heat flux information for two-resistor components
are also listed.
10-12
Review
This information is also saved to an external file, and is named after the analysis
with a .cts extension.
10.4.5
Setup Parameters File
The Setup Parameters File is automatically saved at the conclusion of every analysis. This file contains a listing of all applied analysis conditions such as mesh sizes,
materials, and boundary conditions.
This file is named after the analysis with a .set extension.
10.4.6
Rotating Region Results
This data is also written to a .csv file named after the analysis name with the
word torque appended to it. For example, an analysis named Centrif-Pump would
produce a torque file called:
CENTRIF-PUMP_torque.csv.
10.4.7
Motion Results
This is a time history of the behavior for every moving object in a Motion analysis.
The linear and angular velocities, the linear and angular displacements, the force,
and the torque for each time step are listed. This information is very useful for
understanding the dynamic state of each part throughout the analysis. Each part is
listed on a separate tab.
Note that the linear and angular displacements are relative to the initial position of
the object as specified using the Initial Position slider on the Motion task dialog. Pay
particular attention to this if the initial position differs from the as-built location in
the CAD model.
This file is also saved to the working directory, and is named using the analysis
name and the part name and the word motion. For example, the motion file for
10-13
Review
This is a time history of the behavior of rotating regions in a Rotating analysis. The
hydraulic torque, rotating speed, and hydraulic force components for each rotating
object are listed.
Review
an analysis called Heating-Process that contains a moving solid called Product

would be called:
HEATING-PROCESS_PRODUCT_1_motion.csv.
Note that the force and torque values are the net values, and include driving,
resistance, collision, contact forces as calculated in the Motion module. The hydraulic force and torque are just the force and torque imparted on the object by the
fluid, and do not include any forces specified in the motion definition. The hydraulic
values are reported in the Wall dialog.
10.4.8
Annotations
This feature allows text notes to be added to the results display of an analysis.
There are two forms of graphics: static notes and model notes. Static notes are
used primarily as titles and general information text on a model, and do not change
position on the Graphics window. Model notes are attached to geometry and display
objects (such as cutting planes), and navigate with the model.
10.4.8.1
Creation and Placement of Notes
On the Review task dialog, click the Notes tab.

To create a note:
1. Type the text in the field in the Annotations

section.
2. Click the Place Text button.
1
2
10-14
Review
To place a note:
1. Click on the desired location on the

Graphics window or the model.
2. Text placed on the model (or on
results entities such as cutting planes)
will be a model note.
3. Text placed off of the model will be
a static note.
model note
Modification of Notes
All notes are listed under the Annotations branch of the feature tree (which is
shown in the Results Feature Tree mode). A right mouse button menu is available
for each note that allows the note to be moved, changed, deleted, or displayed with
a frame:
To move a note, right click on the note in
the feature tree, and select Move. Click on
the new location.
To show a frame around a static note,
select Frame from the menu.
To edit a note, click Change. The note
will be editable on the feature tree. Modify
the note as necessary, and then hit Enter
on the keyboard. The modified note will
appear in the Graphics window.
To delete a note, click Delete. It will be
removed from the feature tree and from
the Graphics window.
10-15
Review
10.4.8.2
static note
Review
A note cannot change form after it is created. If a note is first placed on the model,
it will remain a model note. If moved, it must be placed on a model entity. The
same is true of static notes--if a model entity is selected as a new location, it will
remain a static note.
10.4.8.3
Saving and Retrieving Notes
The View Settings File

The text and locations of all notes in a model are saved in the View Settings
File. Save a View Settings File by clicking this tool button:
When a View Settings File is opened into a results display using the tool
button at the right, all stored notes will be placed on the Graphics window
in the locations where they were saved.
The Graphics Text File

Only the text from notes is saved in the Graphics Text file (.gtx).
Click the Save All button to store the text
from all notes in a model.
Text locations are not stored in this file, but
when opened into a model, each note can be
placed individually.
Click the Retrieve button to open a Graphics
Text file to add text to a Results display.
A dialog will appear listing each note. Select a
note, and press OK. Its text will be placed in
the Annotations field of the Notes task dialog.
Click the Place Text button and then a location in the Graphics window or the model to
place the note.
10-16
Review
(Text retrieved from a Graphics Text File can be applied as either a static note or a
model note. The original type of the note is not saved.)
10.4.8.4
Static notes displayed on a model will be shown for all models when the Design
Review Center is active. Model notes, however, are only shown on the model on
which they were created.
Review
10-17
Review
10.5
Results
The Results dialog lists saved results sets and/

or time steps in the Available group.
1. Move sets from the Available group to the
Active group to make them part of the animation.There are three ways to select sets:
Directly from the list (Windowsstandard control-left click to select certain sets) and hit the Down button to
move.
Enter the range and increment in
the Parametric Selection section and
hit the Move button.
Hit the All Down button.
2. After selections are made, hit the Apply
button.
3. After an animation occurs, hit the Reset
button to regain control in the dialog.
To clear the Active list, hit the All Up button.

To remove certain steps, select them and hit
the Up button.
Result sets that are added to the Active group can be animated. This is very useful
for visualizing time dependent data. The next section describes animation of time
steps.
10-18
Review
10.6
Animate
Once result sets are made Active on the Results tab, hit the Animate tab to view the
animation:
Review
Play Forward
Play In Reverse
Single Frame
Reverse
Stop
Single Frame
Advance
Pause
Use the VCR controls to control the animation. Animated files can be played forward or in reverse as well as stopped, paused, and advanced by frame forward or
reverse. Click the Cycle box to alternate between playing the animation forward
and then in reverse.
The speed of the animation is controlled with the Frame Interval value (in milliseconds).
Use the controls on the Results task dialog to set up the view. Results objects can
be added, removed, and manipulated during the animation. Additionally, cutting
plane bulk data can be output for all active sets during an animation.
10-19
Review
10.7
10.7.1
Report Generation
Introduction
This is an important evolution in the Design Communication Center first introduced

in CFdesign v6. A report template consisting of sections for the introduction, model
description, analysis summary, results, and conclusions is included by default. The
order and content of the sections is fully modifiable, and text files, graphics, and
additional sections can be added as well. Items can be removed from the template
or suppressed from the report. There are several placeholders for text files which
can be used to describe the model, annotate graphics, and summarize conclusions.
A summary of the model parameters (jobname.set file) is created automatically for
the analysis, and is a part of the report. The summary and status files as well as
images of the model and the convergence graph are also automatically created and
included in the report. User-created VTF files will automatically appear in the
Graphics section of the report, and each has a placeholder for an associated text
file for description. Modifications to the report layout can be stored for future use,
and can be designated as the default template through a setting in
File_Preferences.
To create the report in HTML format, simply click the Generate Report button. The
document is created and saved in a sub-folder of the working directory. This HTML
document contains the VTF files, which allow image navigation and animation of
time steps and multiple results frames.
A report can be created at the project level as well. This report contains setup,
analysis summary information, and the graphics for each analysis in the project.
Report formatting for each analysis is also imported into the project report.
10-20
Review
10.7.2
Entity Types and Basic Usage
A default report template is automatically created for every analysis after the analysis is processed (run for 0 iterations or more). Located under Review_Report, the
template lists the items that will be placed into a report when it is generated:
Review
Items can be modified, suppressed, and moved within the template. New items can
be added as well. This section describes the basic process of manipulating the contents of a report and a description of the entities in the report template.
10-21
Review
10.7.2.1
Template Columns
The template layout is divided into two columns: the Template Items on the left
and the Values on the right. The names of the Template Items and the Value of
default items cannot be changed. Values of user-created Items can be changed,
however.
10.7.2.2
Entity Types
There are two primary types of entities in the report template: Text Lines and
Referenced Files.
Text Lines
Text Lines are single lines of text, and include the Report Title, Report Date,
Author name, Analysis Name, and Section names. The contents of each text
line is shown in the Value column in the report template.
Note that the Report Date, Analysis Name, and Section names of default sections
cannot be changed. (The names of user-created sections are modifiable, however.)
These items can be suppressed from the report by right clicking on the item, and
unchecking Include.
Referenced Files
File References are references to external files that are to be included in the report.
They are typically descriptive text files, vtf files, graphics files, and output files such
as the Summary file.
The Referenced Files that are included by default are:
Corporate Logo
Summary File
Setup Parameters
Model Image
Convergence
Plot
Conclusion User Text

Entry
Model User Text Entry
Thermal Summary
The two User Text Entries do not contain any text, and are not part of the report
until the user adds text and saves them. A ? beside the entry indicates that the
10-22
Review
file does not exist. After text is added and the file saved, the ? will disappear from
the report template.
10.7.2.3
Basic Usage
Right click on file name, and uncheck Include.
To include a suppressed file, right click and check
Include.
Exclude a Section
Right click on the section name, and uncheck

Include. To include a suppressed section, right
click and check Include.
Change the order of entities
Click on an entity, and click the Up or Down buttons near the bottom of the task dialog. Move an
entire section by first clicking on the section
header, and then hitting the Up or Down buttons.
Create a new Text File
Click the Create Text button near the bottom of

the task dialog. Enter text in the text editor that
appears. Save the text file when finished.
Add an existing Referenced

File (text or graphic)
Click the Add Existing button near the bottom of

the task dialog. A browse window will prompt for
a file name and location. Files added will be
placed below the currently selected item in the
template.
Delete a Referenced File

(text or graphic)
Only files that are added to the report can be

deleted from the report. Right click, and hit
Delete.
Modify or view a User Text

Entry or a user-created Referenced (text) File
Right click on the text line, select Edit/View. A

text editor will come up allowing text to be
entered or changed.
View a Referenced File
Right click on the entity, and select View. Text

files will appear in a Text Editor (input deactivated). Graphics files (bmp, tif, etc.) appear in a
graphics viewer. VTF files are viewed in the CFdesign Communication Center.
(default text file or graphic)
10-23
Review
Exclude a Referenced File or

Text Line
Review
Edit a Text Line (such as

Author name)
Right click on the line, and select Change Value.

Modify the text directly on the value line.
Create a Section
Click the Add Section button near the bottom of

the task dialog. The new section will be placed
below the currently highlighted section. If no section is highlighted, then a new section will not be
created. A U will appear adjacent to the Section
header indicating that it is user-created.
Delete a Section
Only user-created sections can be deleted. Right

click on the section name, and select Delete.
Default sections can be suppressed from the
report, if desired.
Refresh the template
If the Report task dialog is showing when a properly named vtf file is created, click the Refresh
button to automatically add it to the Graphics
section.
Create a Report
Click the Generate Report button. This is

described in more detail in the Generating the
Report section of this chapter.
10.7.3
Default Report Sections
By default, analysis reports consist of five sections: Creation Info, Model Description, Analysis Summary, Graphics Files, and Conclusions. All sections are included
by default in the report except Graphics. The Graphics section is enabled automatically, however, if there are vtf files named according to the convention described in
the Graphics section description.
This section describes the default contents of each section.
10-24
Review
10.7.3.1
Introduction
This section contains basic information about the origin of the report.
Corporate Logo: The file and location of
this graphical file are set in the User-Preferences dialog, found under the File main
menu item.
Report Title: The analysis name is used
by default, but can be changed.
Report Date: The current time and date
when the report is generated.
10.7.3.2
Review
Author name: The account login name is

used by default, but a different name can
be set in File_Preferences. This value can
also be changed as described in the Text
Line section.
Model Description
This section contains information about the analysis model.

Analysis Name: The name assigned to
the analysis when it was created.
Model Image: A vtf file showing the analysis model. This is automatically created.
Model Description User Text Entry: A
blank text file that can be used to enter a
description of the analysis model. (The ?
adjacent to the entry means that no text
has been saved to the file.)
Setup Parameters: An output file that is
automatically saved when the analysis is
run. This file contains a list of all of the
user-applied settings such as boundary
conditions and mesh sizes.
10-25
Review
10.7.3.3
Analysis Summary
The files containing the text files describing the analysis results are included in this
section.
Summary File: An output file that is
automatically saved. It contains a summary of the analysis results, results at
openings, and energy balance.
Convergence Plot: A bitmap of the Convergence Monitor.
Thermal Summary: An output file that is
automatically saved. It contains the temperature data for every solid in the analysis model.
10-26
Review
10.7.3.4
Graphics Files
Images showing the results are typically contained in this section.

Graphics Files: This section is populated
automatically by vtf files found in the
working directory.
VTF files must be named in the following
manner to automatically be included in the
report:
analysis-name_g_graphic-name.vtf
analysis-name = the name of the analysis.
Review
graphic-name = descriptive filename.

The _g_ must come between the analysis name and the graphic name.
A corresponding text file is automatically
created for each graphic, allowing text to
be entered that describes the graphic. This
file doesnt actually exist until text is saved
to it.
Other graphics files types (bmp, jpg, gif)
and vtf files named differently can be
imported by hitting the Add Existing button. The accompanying text file will not be
added automatically, but can be created
by clicking the Create Text button.
10.7.3.5
Conclusions
This section provides a place to summarize the pertinent findings of the analysis.
Conclusions User Text Entry: A blank
text file that can be used to enter conclusions. The ? adjacent to the entry means
that no text has been saved to the file.
10-27
Review
10.7.4
Generating the Report
To view the report that is defined by the template, click the Generate Report button near the bottom of the task dialog. An HTML-based report will then be created
and will open in Internet Explorer, if available. All of the items contained in the
template (but not suppressed) will be included in the report. A table of contents
with linked entries is included on the left side of the window for easier navigation.
Part of a sample report is shown:
All vtf files will be navigable, and will contain any animation present at the time of
file creation. Because the vtf files use an ActiveX plug-in to be viewed within the
HTML document, the CFdesign Communication Center must be installed on a computer to view the vtf files. This is automatically installed as a part of the CFdesign
installation. To view a report on a computer without a CFdesign installation, download the CFdesign Communication Center from the CFdesign web site (www.cfdesign.com).
Note that Internet Explorer (by Microsoft) is required to view the report. This is due
to the fact that the vtf files require an ActiveX plug-in (described above) for viewing
in applications other than the CFdesign Viewer. When a report is opened in IE, a
security message may appear prompting for approval to show the images. This is a
10-28
Review
Windows security measure, but you should select the choice allowing the images to
show.
All included and generated files in the report are placed into a sub-folder of the
working directory created when the report is generated. This sub-folder is named:
Analysis_Report_analysis name_0001
where analysis name is the name of the CFdesign analysis model. The number
appended to the folder name is incremented each time the report is generated. This
means that each time a report is generated, it is a new report, and does not overwrite a previous version.
10.7.5
Saving and Opening Templates
A default template (or report layout) is included with the CFdesign installation.
However, to save a modified template for use with other reports, click the Save
button from the Template group in the task dialog:
This will prompt for a template name, which will have the extension .dcctmp.
(This stands for Design Communication Center Template.) This file will contain
every item in the customized report in the same order.
User-created and added Referenced files (graphics and text files) will not be explicitly saved in a template, but blank entries for them will. A U will appear adjacent
to each user-added or created entity.
User-created sections are included in the template as well. When a saved template
is applied to a new report layout (by clicking the Open button) user-created section
names appear in the template.
10-29
Review
This folder contains all of the files needed to view the report. To send the report to
another person, simply send all of the contents of the report folder.
Review
To make a customized template the default template for all subsequent reports,
enter the location and name in the File_Preferences dialog:
The template that is created or used for a report is saved as part of the analysis to
a separate file called analysis-name.dccrt. This file is read when the analysis file is
opened, and all template settings applied automatically. The reason for this is to
allow easy modification of a report. Because it is not possible to edit an HTML document, modification of a report is performed within the CFdesign analysis file by
manipulating the report template. Modification, relocation, addition, or removal of
referenced files is performed directly on the template. When completed, simply
generate a new report.
10.7.6
Project Reports
A report format for projects is available by clicking the Project Report box at the
bottom of the task dialog. Note that this option is only available while a project is
open.
When unchecked, the report template will be for the current analysis. It behaves as
described above.
10-30
Review
However, when checked, the report format changes so that project-specific information can be added. The Creation Info section is still positioned at the beginning
of the report, but it is followed by a Project Description section. This consists of the
project name and a User-Text Entry line for description.
A single graphics section automatically includes all of the graphics from the Graphics section of each analysis in the project. This is the ideal place to include vtf files
that show animation of Design Review Center results. They can be created in any
analysis file, and should be named with the appropriate naming convention to
ensure inclusion in the report.
Additionally, the Model Description and Analysis Summary sections from each analysis report are automatically added to the Project report.
Project Name
Review
Creation Info section

describing the Project
Project Description section
Single Graphics section
consisting of all graphics
from included analyses
Model Description and

Analysis Summary for each
analysis in the project
10-31
Review
This is a powerful way to compare results from many analyses in a design study.
The Model Description and Analysis Summary sections are read directly from the
respective analysis report templates. Customizations made to either of these sections will be included in the Project report. Likewise, any modifications made to one
of the sections while in the Project report mode will be migrated back to the Analysis report template.
As in an analysis report, text files can be created or added to the report. If placed in
an analysis-specific section, they will be included in that analysis report. If a vtf file
is created using the naming convention described in the Graphics section above,
then it will be included in the appropriate analysis report as well.
Project templates can be customized as well. Sections can be moved, items can be
added and removed. Project templates can be saved using the Save button in the
Template group. A project template can be applied to subsequent projects by clicking the Open button in the Template group or by setting the default Project Template in File_Preferences.
10-32
CHAPTE R 12
12.1
Results to FEA Loads
Introduction
CFdesign results can be applied as boundary conditions for FEA analyses using several popular FEA tools: Nastran, Abaqus, Ansys, Pro/Mechanica, I-DEAS, and Cosmos, as well as FEMAP. This capability showcases one of the strengths of the finite
element approach, in that results can be shared across analysis platforms and used
for subsequent calculations quickly and easily. The ability to transfer results to
loads in this manner greatly strengthens the bond between flow and structural
analysis, making for a more comprehensive and useful analysis suite. As a critical
element in this suite, CFdesign allows flow analysis to be an integral part of the
product design process.
Pressure and temperature results are interpolated onto the FEA model, meaning
that the FEA mesh does not have to coincide with the CFdesign mesh. Most of the
time, these two meshes will be very different, as required by the particular analysis
tool. Additionally, the element types used in the FEA analysis do not have to be the
same as in the CFdesign analysis.
This chapter discusses the procedure for converting CFdesign results to FEA boundary conditions. Specific details for each supported FEA tool are presented.
12.2
Procedure
Steps 1 through 4 need to be completed in the FEA tool. Steps 5 through 9 are performed in CFdesign. Step 10 is performed in the FEA tool.
1. Prepare the FEA geometry. The model geometry must be in the same position
and orientation as the CFdesign analysis model.
2. Build the appropriate finite element mesh for your structural analysis. The
mesh does not have to have the same density or use the same element types as
the CFdesign mesh. Only those regions critical to the FEA analysis have to be
meshed.
12-1
Results to FEA Loads Transfer
3. Apply pressures or temperatures to the appropriate locations in the FEA model.

The specified value does not matter-they will be overwritten with values calculated
by CFdesign.
4. Export an analysis deck. The type of file for each FEA tool is shown:
FEA Tool
Analysis Deck
Nastran
.nas (or.dat)
Abaqus
.inp
Ansys
.ans (or cdb)
Pro/Mechanica
No input file needed
FEMAP
.neu
Cosmos
.gfm
I-DEAS
.unv
5. In the completed CFdesign analysis, open
the FEA Mapping dialog from File_FEA Mapping

6. Select the FEA deck using the Browse button.
7. Select the Results type to Map (pressure or
temperature).
8. Indicate if the direction of pressure should
be reversed. (This is specific to FEA tools--some
direct positive pressure inward, some outward.)
9. Click the Map Results to BC button.
8
7
10. A new deck will be written with results interpolated to the appropriate boundaries. This deck will have the words _new BC appended to the original name.
Return to the FEA tool, and import the new deck. The boundary condition values
will be the result values from CFdesign, and they will be interpolated to the new
nodal and/or elemental locations.
12-2
12.3
12.3.1
FEA Details
Nastran
Nodal temperatures and elemental pressures are supported.

The output deck is the .nas or .dat file.
The converted deck from CFdesign has the words _newBC appended
to its name.
Supported element types are:
CTRIA (3 and 6 node triangles)
CQUAD (4 and 8 node quadrilaterals)
CTETRA (4 node and 10 node tetrahedra)
CHEXA (8 node hexahedra)
CPENTA (6 node prisms)
When the converted deck is read back into Nastran, the new loads are
added to the current load set.
12.3.2
Abaqus

The output deck is the .inp file.
to its name.
Abaqus files generated in Patran, Pro/E, FEMAP, I-DEAS, and Abaqus
CAE are supported.
Supported element types include most of the 2D and 3D solid, continuum elements including:
3D Solid Elements: C3D4*, C3D6*, C3D8*, C3D10*
Axisymmetric Elements: CAX3*, CAX4*, CAX6*, CAX8*
2D Plane Strain Elements: CP3E*, CPE4*, CPE6*, CPE8*
2D Plane Stress Elements: CPS3*, CPS4*, CPS6*, CPS8*
When the converted deck is read back into Abaqus, the new loads are
12-3
Loads Transfer
12.3.3
Ansys
Ansys versions higher than 6.0 are supported.

The output deck is the .ans or .cdb file. Use the command cdwrite
in Ansys to create an .ans file. This command is entered in the command
line. The arguments are:
CDWRITE option, Fname, Ext

Use All for Option. Enter the filename with directory (if not the working directory) for Fname. The default extension is cdb. Alternatively, enter ans as the
extension.
Supported Ansys element types:
PLANE2, 13, 25, 35, 42, 55, 67, 75, 77, 78, 82, 83, 141,
145, 146, 162, 182, 183
SHELL28, 41, 43, 57, 63, 93, 131, 132, 143, 150, 157,
163, 181
SOLID5, 45, 46, 62, 64, 65, 69, 70, 72, 87, 90, 92, 95, 96,
97, 98, 117, 122, 123, 127, 128, 142, 147, 148, 164, 168,
185, 186, 187
Linear varieties of these elements are supported; additionally, 10-node
tetrahedrals are supported. No other non-linear Ansys elements are support.
to its name.
When the converted deck is read back into Ansys, the new loads are
12.3.4
Pro/Mechanica
No input deck is required. An .fnf file with the same name as the analysis is output automatically for every analysis based on a Pro/E geometry.
Import the .fnf file into your Pro/Mechanica model.
Temperatures and pressure are included in this file.
CFdesign will output two versions of the fnf file format: one that is compatible with Pro/E 2001 and one that is compatible with Wildfire.
12-4
12.3.5
FEMAP
FEMAP neutral file version 7.1 is supported

2 (3 node triangles)
4 (4 node quadrilaterals)
6 (4 node tetrahedra)
7 (6 node prisms)
8 (8 node hexahedra)
10 (10 node tetrahedra)
The output deck is the .neu file.
to its name.
When the converted deck is read back into FEMAP, the new loads are
12.3.6
Cosmos/M

3 node triangles
4 node quadrilaterals
4 node tetrahedrals
5 node pyramids
6 node prisms
8 node hexahedrals
10 node tetrahedrals
The output deck is the .gfm file.
to its name.
When the converted deck is read back into COSMOS, the new loads are
I-deas
I-deas versions 9 and higher are supported.
12-5
Loads Transfer
12.3.7

40 (plane stress elements)
50 (plane strain elements)
80 (axisymmetric solids)
90 (thin shell elements)
110 (3D solid elements) The output deck is the .unv file.
to its name.
When the converted deck is read back into I-deas, the new loads are
12.4
Transfer of Multiple Time Steps
The primary application of this is for transient (time-dependent) analyses in which

results from many analyses are saved. This function provides a convenient way to
export and convert each result set (or time step) to a separate FEA load set for a
series of structural analyses.
By default, only the results from the last saved result set or time step are converted
to an FEA load set. To convert all saved result sets to FEA load sets, add the following entry to your cfdesign_flags.txt file located in your CFdesign installation directory:
load_xfer_all_res 1
With this flag entry set, follow the procedure described above to create an FEA deck
containing a mesh and applied (dummy) loads and to map the results using the
Load Transfer dialog in the CFdesign interface. A separate file containing the interpolated results as loads for each time step will then be exported. Each file will follow this naming convention:
deckname_newbcs_t#.filetype
deckname = the name assigned to the deck when it was saved from the
FEA tool
filetype = the appropriate extension of the deck (could be .inp,
.ans, .nas, .unv, .neu, .gfm)
12-6
The conversion of results to Pro/Mechanica loads is not performed through this dialog--a Mechanica .fnf file is saved automatically at the conclusion of every Pro/Ebased analysis that contains solid materials. If the flag mentioned above is enabled,
then a Mechanica file for each time step is automatically saved to the disk.
Loads Transfer
12-7
12-8
CHAPTE R 13
13.1
Projects
Introduction
Most of the discussions in this Guide have been about setting up, running, and visualizing results of an individual analysis. CFdesign has made this process very easy.
In fact, if product design was accomplished with just one or two analyses, our work
would be done. The reality of the situation however, is that design engineering
requires many analyses and a great deal of information to attain that much soughtafter final design.
Most traditional CFD tools are aimed at the dedicated analyst whose goal is often
to complete one large-scale, complicated analysis at a time. CFdesign is different.
CFdesign is a CFD package whose mission is to accelerate product development. It
is a design tool, and is developed for the product design engineer that isnt satisfied
with completing just one analysis--the product design engineer might require one
hundred analyses! The information learned from a single analysis is often not
enough to design a product--information from a multitude of analyses is required.
This is why the concept of the project was introduced into CFdesign 6. A project is a
collection of analyses--much like a CAD assembly is a collection of parts. The link
between analyses in a project is a strong one, and one that makes setting up, running, and post-processing a multitude of analyses a practical part of the product
design process.
13.2
13.2.1
Definitions and Requirements

Definitions
An analysis is an individual simulation performed on a single geometric model. The

preceding chapters in this Guide discuss the components of a single analysis:
geometry, boundary conditions, mesh, materials, options, iterations, and results.
13-1
Projects
When the flow and/or heat transfer through or around an object is calculated, an
analysis has been performed.
A project is a collection of analyses. The components that make up a single analysis can be shared with other analyses in a project. Projects provide a convenient
means of staging a large number of analyses for simultaneous execution using the
Fast Track Option (see the Analyze and Review chapter, Chapter 8). Projects furthermore simplify post-processing multiple analyses.
13.2.2
Requirements
All analyses in a project must reside in the same folder or directory.

Analyses are always created outside of a project, but are often set-up inside a
project. The first component of an analysis is geometry, of course. It does not matter if geometry comes from a CAD system or is a file in the working directory, it is
the foundation of the analysis, and is always first read into a CFdesign analysis.
Once an analysis is created, it can be set up and run as an individual analysis OR it
can be brought into a project to be set-up and run.
13.3
13.3.1
Assembling a Project
Project Creation
There are two primary ways to create a project:

The first is to click the New icon, select Project from the Browse window, and
type in a name. An empty project is then created.
The second method is to create a project from within an analysis. To do this, from
the menu bar, click Project_Place Current Analysis into Project.
13-2
Projects
A browse window will appear prompting for the name of the project. After entering
it and hitting the Save button, the project will be created. The analysis will be in the
project. The Feature Tree will look something like:
Project Name
Projects
Analysis Name
Analysis Settings
When a project is open, the project name is shown in the top branch of the Feature
Tree. Each analysis is a sub-branch. The settings for each analysis (mesh sizes,
boundary conditions, etc.) are listed as sub-branches under each analysis.
13.3.2
Adding Analyses to a Project
There are two ways to add an analysis to a project.

The first is to put an analysis into a project.
With an analysis open, click Project_Place Analysis in Project from the menu
bar. This was described in the previous section as a way to create a new project
from an existing analysis, but it is also a method to launch an analysis (containing
nothing more than geometry) into an existing project.
A common scenario for this command is something like this:
1. An analysis is run to completion.

2. While viewing results, a problem is identified, and a change to the design is
contemplated.
3. Before returning to the CAD system, create a new project from this completed
analysis using Project_Place Analysis in Project, and save the project (using
the Save icon or File_Save).
4. Shut down CFdesign, and return to the CAD system. Make the geometric
change, and launch back into CFdesign.
5. Create a new analysis.
13-3
Projects
6. Click Project_Place Analysis in Project, and select the project that was just
created.
7. Now the project has two analyses, and the new analysis can be set up by reading settings from the first analysis (see the next section).
The second way is to bring an analysis into a project.
Starting from a project, click the Project_Bring Analysis into Current Project,
and select an existing analysis from the browse window. The analysis can be completely set-up, or just contain geometry. This method is less convenient for bringing
in and setting up analyses because it requires the user to leave the analysis, open
the project and then bring in the analysis. (The method described in the preceding
section is easier for assembling new analyses for set-up and running.) This method
is most useful for bringing in completed analyses, and assembling them for results
comparison. A typical use scenario looks like:
1. Several analyses are run to completion outside of a project.

2. Create a project by starting CFdesign from the Desktop icon or Start
Menu, and hit the New icon. Select Project on the Browse window, and
give the project a name.
3. Click Project_Bring Analysis into Current Project, and select an
analysis from the browse window.
4. Once in the project, the analyses can be opened using the Feature Tree (see
the next section). Results from all of the analyses can be viewed using the Design
Review Center (discussed in a later section in the chapter).
Note: Clicking the Save icon (or File_Save) will save the project and all analyses
within the project.
13-4
Projects
13.4
Opening an Analysis
All analyses in a project are listed in the Feature Tree. The analysis with the +
beside its name is the open analysis. To open a different analysis, right click on its
name, and select Open.
The open analysis
The open analysis is the active one, and it can be interacted with as if it were open
as a single analysis outside of a project. Controls to set up, run, and view results
can be applied to the analysis. When a different analysis is opened, the previous
one is closed, and all settings and results shown are for the open one only.
Note: if an analysis is created from Wildfire using the Mechanca method or CATIA,
and added to a project, only the analysis corresponding to the active CAD session
can be meshed. If a different analysis is opened, it cannot be meshed. We recommend that on such models, the mesh be generated (run 0 iterations) prior to opening any other analyses in the project.
13.4.2
Sharing Settings Between Analyses
One of the key advantages to using projects is the ability to share settings between
them. All of the settings (analysis units, loads, mesh sizes, materials, and options)
can be imported from a completed analysis to a new one simply by using the Feature Tree.
13-5
Projects
13.4.1
Managing Analyses in a Project
Projects
To do this, make sure the new analysis (well call it the target) is open. Right click
on its branch in the Feature Tree, and hit Import Settings From. This will show a list
of all the other analyses in the project. Simply select the analysis that has the settings that are to be applied to the new one, and they will be applied automatically.
This settings transfer works best if the two analyses are topologically similar. Parametric changes can exist between the two, but if the change was topological in
nature (added or deleted geometric features), then some settings may not be
applied automatically, and will have to be applied manually. An example is if a part
with an assigned heat generation load was removed from the model. The heat generation boundary condition would be lost from the model.
In this case and for the case in which an analysis is re-opened after geometric
changes, any settings that are lost are now listed in a dialog called the Lost List.
These settings can be reassociated to the model by selecting the surface or part
and the setting from the list.
If settings are lost (either because a topological change eliminated some geometry
or because of because the topology was changed too much), a Show Lost button
will appear on the appropriate dialog (based on the type of settings that were lost):
The Show Lost button only appears on the task for which settings are lost. (If a
boundary condition is lost, it will appear on the Boundary Conditions task.)
13-6
Projects
After clicking the Show Lost button, the Lost Settings dialog will open:
Projects
To reassign a lost setting, select the geometric entity (or entities) from the model.
Select the setting from the Lost Settings dialog, and click Apply on the task dialog.
All lost lists will be cleared when the analysis is saved.
13.4.3
Changing the Order of Analyses in a Project
The position of an analysis within a project is changed by moving it up or down in

the project. Do this by right clicking on an analysis, and selecting the appropriate
action:
This affects the order of the analyses when the Design Review Center is invoked.
13-7
Projects
13.4.4
Removing an Analysis
An analysis can be removed from a project by right clicking on the analysis name in
the Feature Tree, and selecting Remove from the menu. This will not delete the
analysis from the disk, but will only remove it from the project.
13.4.5
Running Analyses in a Project
If an analysis is running, another analysis can be opened, and will appear in its current state. The running analysis will continue to run, although results and convergence information are not available for viewing until the analysis is opened again.
When it is opened, the results and convergence information from the current iteration will be displayed.
In conjunction with the Fast Track option (described in the Analyze chapter, Chapter 8), projects can serve as a central hub for running multiple analyses. Each analysis can be run on a selected analysis computer, and can be monitored from the
project. To inspect the progress of an analysis, simply open it from the Feature
Tree. That analysis will open in its current state, and can be interacted with while
running. It will continue to run even when a different analysis is opened for inspection.
When finished, results from all the analyses can be viewed in a truly novel manner...
13.5
Viewing Results
In traditional CFD tools, examining results from a large number of analyses

(assuming that a large number of analyses could be run) is a daunting chore. Often
it requires setting up two, three, or four viewing panes on the computer screen and
setting up the results view for each analysis in the same way. A great deal of time
is often spent trying to show each model in the same orientation and with the same
display entities and the same color legend range.
The alternative is not much better: Paper. Images are created and printed out, but
again, a great deal of care has to be put into making sure that each analysis is
shown in the same manner. The result is a great deal of time lost and a whole lot of
13-8
Projects
paper. Now the design team has to lay all these images out on a large table and
peruse them in search of the best design. This alone can be pretty time consuming.
CFdesign introduces a better way. The Design Review Center.
The Design Review Center (DRC)
When the Results task dialog is invoked in an analysis in a project, the third tab of
the Output bar, the Design Review Center, becomes active:
This simple dialog provides the ability to automatically apply a view from a single
analysis to all the analyses in the project.
Instead of toiling over multiple results panes to create the same view or printing
out a forest of paper, the Design Review Center makes it possible to view results
from a multitude of analyses quickly and easily. It is called the Design Review Center because it acts like an engineering design review meeting. By presenting
results from each analysis in exactly the same manner, everyone involved in the
design process gets a good apples-to-apples comparison of the performance of
every design alternative.
Set up the view with any of the results tools available--cutting planes, vectors, particle traces, iso surfaces, etc. Click the DRC-Compare button. The project will
enter the DRC mode. Use the slider bar on the DRC controls to manually flip
between analyses. Use the VCR controls to automatically flip between analyses.
13-9
Projects
13.5.1
Projects
While in the DRC mode, the model can be navigated (panned, zoomed, and
rotated). To change a display object (move a cutting plane, for example), hit the
Reset button (Reset replaces DRC-Compare while in DRC mode) to leave DRC
mode, and return to a regular interactive state with the analysis. The analysis that
is shown when the DRC is turned off (by hitting the Reset button) will automatically
be opened.
When the DRC is activated, the scalar fringe range on the current model will be
applied to all analyses in the Project. This is done so that all analyses can be viewed
with the same scale. When the DRC is reset, the scalar fringe range will not be
reset to the extrema of the current analysis. To reset the scalar fringe range, hit
the Settings_Scalar tab, and hit the Reset button in the Fringe Range group.
It is not necessary for geometric models to be the same for the DRC to work. It is
not necessary for geometry to be in the same location, or to be the same size, or
have the same orientation. The DRC applies to all analyses in a project that have
results, and does not discriminate based on size, location, or orientation.
There are two things that should be the consistent across all analyses to be compared in the DRC:
Each analysis should be run with the same length unit.

Each analysis should have the same result output quantities.
13.5.2
XY Plotting
An XY plot over a path can be created for all analyses in a project. Create the plot
on the active analysis, and start the DRC. Curves will be added to the plot showing
13-10
Projects
results along the same path for each analysis in the project. A legend on the plot
indicates the analysis for each curve.
Projects
13.5.3
Multiple Views
When multiple views are used with the Design Review Center, each view pane will
show the same model in the desired manner. When the next analysis is shown, all
views will update to the next model. In this way, it is possible to compare multiple
views of analyses in a project. This provides a way to compare several views and
perspectives of each model.
13.5.4
Bulk Results
Bulk Results on a cutting plane are shown for each analysis in the DRC. To view the
results, create and position a cutting plane, and switch to the Bulk tab (under Cutplanes). Start the DRC. The Bulk results text information will update as the DRC
scroll bar is manually dragged between analyses. The text information will not
update if the frames are animated using the VCR play button.
13.5.5
Removing Analyses from the DRC
By default all analyses in a project will be shown when the DRC is invoked. To prevent an analysis from being part of the DRC, right click the Analysis name, and
13-11
Projects
select Remove from DRC from the menu. To include it again in the DRC, select
Add to DRC from the right mouse button menu.
13.6
Design Review Server
The Design Review Server is an innovative union of Fast Track and the Design
Review Center. Fast Track is a system that distributes analyses to remote computers for running multiple analyses concurrently; as discussed, the Design Review
Center allows direct results comparison of multiple analyses in a consistent, easyto-use environment.
The Design Review Server distributes the results processing of analyses in a project
across available networked computers. Instead of opening and computing the
results visualization for every analysis on a single machine, the Design Review
Server transfers completed analyses to networked computers for computation of
the data model. This spreads out the computational burden of opening the analyses and computing the results visualization. The end result is a convenient way to
compare analysis results from numerous large analyses.
13.6.1
Set Up
The Design Review Server relies on computers on the same network, and is configured in the same manner as Fast Track. For a computer to be accessed by the
13-12
Projects
Design Review Server, it must satisfy all of the requirements to be a Fast Track
Analysis computer:
Projects
The software must be installed and licensed.

The CFdesign Server Manager (cfdserv10.exe) must be running.
Each remote computer must be listed in the server.cfg file of Users
Interface computer.
The Interface and remote computers must be on the same subnet, and
on a Windows network. Novell networks, etc. are not supported.
If the conditions listed above are met, the Design Review Server will be enabled by
default. To disable the Design Review Server, add the following entry to your
cfdesign_flags.txt file:
CFDESIGN USE_VIZSERVER 0
13.6.2
Distribution of Analyses
Most of the functions performed by the Design Review Server are transparent to
the user. The only user interaction is to assign analyses to available Design Review
Server computers on the network.
When a project containing completed analyses is either opened or an analysis is
added, a dialog will open that lists the available Design Review Server computers as
well as the analyses in the project. Existing analysis computer assignments are
listed (either from previous assignments or from their last Fast Track run). The
13-13
Projects
amount of memory on each computer is shown to assist in making new assignments or modifying existing ones.
The dialog and usage are shown:
To assign an analysis to a different computer, drag its name and drop it
onto the desired computer.
To assign all analyses to the local machine, click the Reset to Local
button.
When all assignments are made, click the Open Project button. This
will automatically distribute the display model for each analysis to the
assigned computer.
Check the Save Server Assignments box to store the assigned computers.
The Cancel button will assign all analyses to the local machine and
close the dialog.
13.6.3
Launching the Design Review Server
The specific scenarios that cause this dialog to open are described. Note that the
term finished analysis refers to an analysis with results.
Open a project with two or more finished analyses. The Configuration dialog
will open, and default assignments are shown. (These are either saved assignments
or the original Analysis computer of the analysis.) Change assignments as necessary based on required memory and available memory on each machine.
From a project with one or more finished analyses, add a finished analysis.
The Configuration dialog will open, and the existing assignments will be shown. The
new analysis will be assigned to its analysis computer, but can be reassigned as
appropriate.
From a project with two or more finished analyses, add a a new analysis.
The Configuration dialog will open to allow assignment of the finished analyses. The
new analysis will not be listed on the Configuration dialog, but is assigned by
selecting the desired Analysis Computer on the Analyze dialog.
From a finished analysis, place into a project with one or more finished
analyses. The default assignment will be the analysis computer, but can be reas-
13-14
Projects
signed to a different available computer. Other assignments can be changed if necessary.
13.6.4
Fast Tracked Analyses
When an analysis is run on a Fast Track machine, the results visualization is computed on that machine as well. In previous versions of CFdesign, the display view
was computed on the local machine based on data sent back from the Solver
machine. This change is a by-product of the architecture of the Design Review
Server, and is more efficient, and better leverages the resources of the Solver
machine.
When an analysis is run on a Fast Track machine, the machine assignment (set on
the Analyze dialog) is stored, and is the default Design Review Server assignment if
that analysis is opened within a project.
13-15
Projects
From a new analysis, place into a project with one or more finished analyses. The saved assignments for the completed analyses will be listed on the Configuration dialog, and can be modified. The new analysis will not be listed in the
Configuration dialog, but is assigned by selecting the desired Analysis Computer on
the Analyze dialog.
Projects
13-16
CHAPTE R 14
14.1
Analysis Guidelines
Introduction
This chapter presents guidelines for various types of flow analyses. While the previous chapters in this Guide discussed the general operation of the software, this
chapter discusses some of the specific physical details of various flow conditions.
The suggestions offered should be used in conjunction with the Examples Manual.
The following analysis types are discussed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Internal and External Incompressible Flows

Basic Heat transfer (conduction and convection)
Porous Media (Distributed Resistance)
Multiple Fluids
Boundary Layer Flows
Periodic Boundary Conditions
Transient Flows
Height of Fluid
Mixing with Scalar
Moist/Humid Flows
Steam/Water Flows
Cavitation
Radiation Heat Transfer
Solar Heating
Internal and External Compressible Flow
Joule Heating
Motion Analyses
Note that the first six items make up the Basic configuration. The Advanced
configuration is made up of items 7 through 16. The Motion Module is required for
Motion analyses. (The Advanced configuration is a pre-requisite for the Motion Module.)
14-1
Guidelines
14.2
14.2.1
Incompressible Flows
Internal Flow
Internal flow is a very general category which describes the flow of a fluid that is
contained by and passes through a solid structure. There may be one or several
openings through which fluid enters and leaves the device. The solutions to internal
flow problems are among the most difficult to achieve in typical CFD (CFdesign is
hardly typical!), particularly for turbulent and compressible flows with complex
geometry. The reason is that there are often several flow regimes throughout different regions of the device, and hence the mathematical characteristics vary
widely through the calculation domain.
CFdesign has several tools to aid convergence for a wide range of internal flow
problems. These tools include the Automatic Turbulent Start-Up algorithm, AutoConvergence Control, and Auto-Stop. These algorithms work to prevent solution
instability or divergence, particularly in the early iterations.
Notes regarding incompressible internal flow:
Mesh Density in Gaps: When using any turbulence model there should be at least
five elements across inlet and outlet passages so that gradients can be properly
resolved. Mesh Enhancement automatically ensures that this criteria is met.
Mesh Refinement: It is good practice to refine the mesh near openings so that the
boundary conditions correctly influence the flow in the interior. Generally Automatic
Mesh Sizing ensures this requirement is satisfied, but if not, the mesh should be
adjusted.
Outlet Configuration: At the outlet, where a uniform pressure is commonly
applied, there must not be any flow features which will conflict with this uniform
pressure boundary. Additionally, the flow should be approximately normal to the
14-2
Guidelines
plane of the outlet. Sometimes the boundary must be extended to achieve this
result. The following figure illustrates these concepts.
High Speed Jet: For flow situations in which a small, high speed jet of fluid is
blowing into a relatively large region filled with fluid, it has been found to be helpful
to change the Turb/Lam Ratio to 1000 or greater (the default is 100). This control
is accessed with the Turbulence button on the Analyze dialog task. An alternative
approach is to change the turbulence model to the Low Reynolds Number model
and the Advection scheme to ADV 2 (from the Advection button on the Solution
Control dialog). This will resolve both the high and low levels of turbulence throughout the domain.
Pressure drop prediction of flow in a long straight pipe: When the pressure
drop is caused by shear losses along the pipe walls instead of form drag due to
obstructions, the following technique should be used to calculate an accurate pressure drop:
Use an entry length of approximately 25 pipe diameters upstream of
the test section. This is to ensure fully developed flow at the entry of the
test section. (This is only necessary if a velocity or flow rate boundary condition is used. If a pressure drop is specified across the pipe, then the
entrance length is not necessary.)
Use symmetry to reduce overall model size, if possible.
14-3
Guidelines
Outlets at Corners: Pressure boundary conditions should not be specified on surfaces that meet at a corner. This often causes flow recirculation zones that can lead
to analysis instability. It is not physically possible to maintain the specified pressure
uniformly over all surfaces of a corner. The work-around is to extend the opening
and to apply the boundary condition to only one surface of the extension.
Guidelines
There are two meshing strategies. One uses an extruded mesh, and the
other uses an unstructured (tetrahedral) mesh:
Extruded Mesh: Use Automatic Sizing to prescribe the best default
distribution. Click the Extrude button on the Mesh dialog, and assign an
extruded mesh to the pipe. Use the default advection scheme and turbulence model. Run the analysis 100-200 iterations.
Tetrahedral Mesh: Apply a surface mesh size to the pipe wall such
that there are eight nodes for every 90 degrees of arc. Apply a volume
mesh size to the pipe that is two times the surface mesh size. On the Mesh
Enhancement dialog, select Automatic Layer Adaptation. On the Analysis
task dialog, click the Solution Control button, click the Advection button,
and select ADV3. Run the analysis at least 600 iterations. Also on the Solution Control dialog, click the Advanced button in the Intelligent Solution
Control group. Move the slider to Tight. These allows more iterations to
occur for reaching convergence.
Internal Fans with fan curves: When a fan curve is used to describe an internal
fan material object, it is recommended to apply convergence control to pressure if
Auto-Convergence is not enabled. This will allow the solver to match the correct
flow rate from the curve to the system pressure drop in a stable manner. When this
occurs too quickly, the flow rate produced by the fan may oscillate which in turn
causes the system pressure to change too quickly. Additionally, if the internal fan is
causing instability, refine the inlet and outlet surfaces of the fan part.
Flow in a Vacuum (Low Pressure Limit): CFdesign provides a numerical solution of the Navier-Stokes (N-S) equations. The N-S equations assume that the fluid
can be treated as a continuum, and this assumption becomes inaccurate as the
characteristic dimension of the flow path drops below 10 times the mean free path
of the fluid.
We can characterize the mean free path using, X, a non-dimensional value defined
as:
2
X = ------- RT
PL
Where = viscosity at STP, P is the pressure, L is a characteristic length (hydraulic
diameter, for example), R is the gas constant, and T is the temperature.
X < 0.014: The N-S equations are accurate without any special treatment.
14-4
Guidelines
0.014 < X < 1.0: The N-S equations can be used in conjunction with
slip-wall boundary conditions.
X > 1.0: The N-S equations no longer apply because the fluid cannot be
considered a continuum. This regime is often called molecular flow or rarefied gas flow, and other equations and techniques are required. Physically,
the regime occurs primarily with high-altitude flight, strong vacuum applications, and flow through very small passages (such as in MEMs applications).
Note that there are very few true vacuums in industrial applications. The physical
requirements (in terms of the compressor pump and seals) needed to create such a
flow environment are extremely demanding, and are simply not practical for most
industrial applications. This is why we recommend carefully
ln( )=A1 + A2ln( ) + A3T + A4[ln( )]2 + A5[ln( )]T + A6T2

When curve fitting data, ensure that the resulting surface is well defined
beyond the extremes of the data set. This is typically difficult with natural
logs in the equation without the addition of artificial (non physical) data
points added to the original data set.
With the data set in metric units, a linear regression can be performed
using each multiplier of the equation to determine the coefficients for input
into CFdesign. For example in Excel, create columns for the natural log of
the viscosity in Pa-s, the natural log of the shear rate in inverse seconds,
the temperature in C, the natural log of the shear rate in inverse seconds
squared, the natural log of the shear rate in inverse seconds multiplied by
the temperature in C, and the temperature in C squared. Use the add-in for
data analysis and select Linear Regression with the y value as the first column, and the x values as the remaining columns. The six coefficients will be
output.
14.2.2
External Flow
External flows are characterized by a solid body immersed in fluid that is moving
relative to the body. Nearly all engineering aerodynamic problems are external
flows. Examples include noise generated by a car mirror at highway speeds, the
14-5
Guidelines
Bivarient non-Newtonian setup: To properly set up a bivarient non-Newtonian

Fluid, you first need to curve fit your data to fit the following model:
Guidelines
drag on a motorcycle fairing, and the lift on a missile. Additionally, wind tunnel
models are usually considered external flows.
These problems generally require the greatest number of nodes of any CFD calculation since the velocity and pressure boundary conditions applied at the exterior of
the flow domain must not affect flow features around the immersed body.
Calculation Domain Size: Generally, the exterior or far-field boundary must be
at least 5 to 10 chords upstream and 10 to 20 chords downstream of the body.
Higher Reynolds number flows will require far-field distances in the upper portion of
this range.
Meshing Strategy: It is important to transition the element sizes in the mesh
quite substantially to conserve nodes. It is common for elements on the body surface to be several thousand times smaller than elements at the far-field. Lift and
drag forces calculated by CFdesign will be dependent upon the mesh size near the
body. Transitioning must be smooth for solution stability and accuracy, as described
in the Meshing chapter and care must be taken to avoid creating tetrahedral elements with very high aspect ratios. Sometimes embedding fluid volumes around
the object of interest is very useful for concentrating many elements around it. This
Russian Doll approach helps transition the mesh from very small elements around
the object to larger elements further away from the object.
Boundary Condition Placement: For incompressible and subsonic compressible
flow problems with subsonic inlets, velocity and pressure boundary conditions are
applied on the far-field boundary as shown in the following figure. To aid convergence, it is useful to specify the velocity boundary condition around a greater portion of the flow domain than for pressure, as shown in the following figure:
Wall or Slip
Velocity
Pressure
14-6
Guidelines
Apply slip conditions to any surfaces that are not openings unless the boundary
layer or ground effects are of interest against the wall.
Angle of Attack: If the object has an angle of attack relative to the flow, it is better to re-orient the calculation domain instead of the object. The domain orientation
should be that the free-stream velocity and the domain sides are parallel:
Pressure
Velocity
Accuracy of Drag Calculation: CFdesign has been used to calculate the drag on
aerodynamic bodies with a very high degree of accuracy. Such drag is due almost
entirely to form drag. Such calculations can be very sensitive to the applied conditions in the model, and care must be taken to represent the physics as carefully as
possible. This sensitivity is not unique to CFdesign, but is inherent to all CFD tools.
Some suggestions to improve accuracy of the drag calculation include:
The region around the object must be meshed with a very fine mesh.
More streamlined bodies require the mesh near the stagnation point of the
body to be highly refined to capture the rapidly changing coefficient of pressure.
Change the turbulence intensity to 0.01 (from the default of 0.05) for
wind tunnel analyses. This will more accurately represent the conditions in
an actual wind tunnel.
Reduce the turb/lam ratio to 10 (from the default of 100).
Use the ADV 3 advection scheme.
14-7
Guidelines
Convergence: Note that convergence will often be slow, and the monitor will show
relatively flat lines well before the flow field is fully developed around the body.
Subtle differences in the pressure distribution may not be visible by only reviewing
the convergence monitor. This is why it is recommended to adjust the Automatic
Convergence Assessment to Tight when running external incompressible analyses.
Guidelines
Enable Automatic Layer Adaptation.

Use the K-epsilon turbulence model for the first 1000 iterations, and
then switch to the RNG model for an additional 1000 iterations.
Altitude Effects: To simulate the effect of altitude, we recommend that you consult tables of atmospheric data to identify the static pressure and temperature
based on a geometric and/or geopotential altitude. From the pressure and temperature, the density of the air can be computed and specified as a constant property.
If properties are held constant (hence you are not solving for compressible or thermal effects) the density is the only parameter that needs to be modified on the
Material Editor. Keep in mind that the actual effect that is simulated at different altitudes is that of the Reynolds number.
14.3
Basic Heat Transfer
This section discusses conduction and the different types of convection. Radiation is
discussed in a subsequent section in the Advanced part of this chapter.
There are several variations of heat transfer analyses that can be performed using
CFdesign. They include: conduction, natural convection, forced convection and
mixed convection. Some of these can occur together in the same analysis. For
example, conjugate heat transfer includes both convection through a fluid and conduction through a solid. The following discussions present information about performing each of these types of heat transfer analysis.
14.3.1
Conduction
A conduction heat transfer analysis can be performed on fluid materials, solid materials, or a combination of both. For all cases, the correct properties (particularly
thermal conductivity) are necessary. Be sure to define the material properties on
the Material dialog task. Also, select Laminar from the Analyze_Turbulence dialog.
This will ensure that the correct conductivity is used in the fluid.
On the Analyze dialog, you should turn Flow to Off and Heat Transfer to On.
Click the Turbulence button, and turn turbulence Off (on the Analyze dialog). This
will use the laminar conductivities of the materials in the model. Additionally, the
temperature convergence should be set to 1.0 on the Solution Control dialog
launched from the Analyze task (it is by default). If the material properties are not
14-8
Guidelines
varying with temperature, the analysis should only require 10 iterations to converge.
14.3.2
Natural Convection
Natural and free convection flows are largely dominated by buoyancy forces. The
buoyancy forces are generated by density gradients which vary primarily with temperature since pressure gradients are relatively small in these flows. Natural convection flows may be laminar or turbulent depending on the Grashof number
associated with the flow. The Grashof number is defined as
3
gL T
Gr = -------------------
The Grashof number is a measure of the ratio of net buoyancy forces to viscous
8
forces. Transition to turbulence occurs at around Gr 4 10 .
Some prefer to use the Rayleigh number to characterize the flow. The Rayleigh
number is the product of the Grashof and Prandtl numbers. The Prandtl number is
defined as
C
Pr = ---------pk
For most gas flows, Pr 1 .
14.3.2.1
Basic Solution Strategies
Need for a Specified Temperature: It is very important that a temperature be

specified somewhere in the model (in addition to the known heat loadings). This
can be an applied temperature boundary condition, but can also be the reference
temperature for a film coefficient or radiation boundary condition. Without a specified temperature somewhere in the model, the temperature solution will not converge.
Need for a Specified Pressure: It is very important that a pressure be specified
somewhere in the model. (A static, gage pressure = 0 is acceptable.) If the model
14-9
Guidelines
where g is the local acceleration of gravity, is the thermal coefficient of volume

expansion, L is a characteristic length of the surface in the direction of gravitational
acceleration, T is the temperature difference between the heated surface and the
undisturbed fluid and is the kinematic viscosity.
Guidelines
has an opening, then specify pressure at the opening. If it is fully enclosed, then if
possible, specify pressure on the wetted surface of a solid, or on some location that
fluid cannot pass through. If no such convenient location exists in the model, apply
a pressure AND a zero value velocity condition to some external surface.
Meshing: When defining the mesh for buoyancy-driven analyses, more elements
will be required in the interior of the domain (away from the solid boundaries) than
for a pressure driven flow. The reason is that accurate representation of the small
density gradients is critical to computing the driving buoyancy forces correctly.
Use Mesh Refinement Regions to focus the mesh around critical areas. This is a
very convenient way of transitioning the mesh from finer density to a more coarse
density toward the flow region.
It is always good practice to ensure that a midpoint node exists on all objects with
heat generation boundary conditions. This is most critical on thin objects such as
heat sink fins and chips:
Make sure there is a node between the two ends of the edge.
Analysis Setup: Some basic guidelines for setting up a natural convection analysis
include:
Be sure to select a property with Buoyancy on the Material task or
select Equation of State as the density variation in the Material Editor.
On the Analyze dialog, be sure to set Heat Transfer to On and to set
a Gravity vector.
Quick Natural Convection: An alternative solution method is to enable Quick

Natural Convection. Quick Natural/Free Convection addresses the problem of slow
convergence by automatically running a coupled flow and thermal simulation (in
the same manner as a traditional natural convection analysis) followed by mapping
the film coefficients to all solids in the model, and then running a conduction-only
thermal solution in the solids.
The result is a much faster temperature distribution throughout the solids within
the analysis. The intent of Quick Natural/Free Convection is a faster, more accurate
method of solving natural convection analyses. The increased accuracy will be most
apparent in the temperature distribution of the solids.
14-10
Guidelines
Quick Natural/Free uses the full Navier-Stokes solver to arrive at a coupled flow and
thermal solution within the model. The time savings occurs after this step is complete (after 200 iterations) in that the thermal solution throughout the solid parts is
accelerated. This method will deliver a time savings over a fully coupled natural
convection solution of potentially several hundred iterations.
Convection with Liquids: Because a larger temperature gradient is required to
cause buoyancy-driven movement in liquids, overall solution times can be reduced
by first inducing a temperature gradient through the fluid prior to running the flow
and thermal analysis. Do this by running 10 iterations thermal only (without flow).
After a thermal gradient is achieved, flow and thermal should be run simultaneously.
A flat-line convergence may not always be reached in natural convection analyses

due to their inherently transient nature. Chaotic perturbations in the system will
sometimes prevent perfect numerical convergence, but the trends should settle
to within 5% change of the parameters of interest (velocity, pressure, temperature)
over the last 20% of the analysis iterations.
Some techniques to follow if the solution slows or diverges include:
Review the .sol file found in your analysis directory to locate the problem.
Did the solver max out on nitration count? If the Pressure Solver maxes
out, check and refine the mesh in areas that are inadequately meshed. A
mesh that is too coarse at the interface of two different materials can lead
to solution instabilities. Refine the mesh where materials meet.
If the Temperature Solver maxes, adjust the time step size (if transient) or reduce the Temperature relaxation control (on the Solution Control
dialog) from 1 to 0.99 or 0.98.
Check for not a number entries. These appear as QNAN in the Convergence Monitor. Contact Technical Support for assistance.
14-11
Guidelines
Convergence: While an external natural convection analysis is running, the temperatures will often initially climb quite high (because the air is still moving very
slowly) and then will settle back down as the flow field develops. Natural convection
analyses usually require more iterations than internal flow problems to reach a
steady-state solution. The number of iterations required, and hence the total solution time, will be longer for a natural convection than for a pressure-driven flow
analysis. Solution progression is slowed by the fact that buoyancy forces are generally significantly larger than pressure forces.
Guidelines
Did the Solver fail? If something in the numerical matrix is beyond the
scope of the default solver, then a failure will occur, and CFdesign will
switch solvers. If a PAP = 0 error occurs, then please contact Technical
Support for assistance.
14.3.2.2
External Flow Natural Convection Strategies
A device subject to external natural convection is immersed in the air or liquid. It

heats up due to energy dissipation of its components, and convects heat to the surrounding air. As the air heats, the density varies, which leads to flow movement.
This serves to convect more heat from the device.
Examples of external natural convection situations include a telecommunications
device mounted to a wall, an electronics module sitting on a platform, or a light fixture suspended from a ceiling. Each of these scenarios requires a slightly different
set-up.
The strategies presented cover most external flow natural convection situations.
There may be variations based on the location of the device or obstructions, but
these should provide guidance for such variations.
If these guidelines are followed, accuracy issues will largely be attributable to
improper material property definitions, mesh, or a significant radiative contribution.
In case of the latter, enabling radiation (on the Analyze dialog) will often address
the problem.
14-12
Guidelines
Device is Suspended in Free Air or in a Large Room Chimney:

Construct a box (the calculation domain)
around the device. This is where the air
flows around the device.
The box should be wide enough so that the
flow is not artificially accelerated. (If the
side walls are too close to the heated
object, the flow may accelerate as in a
nozzle). The top of the box should be farther away than the base to allow for eddie
currents downstream of the object as the
hot air rises.
Note that this can be constructed either in

the CAD system or with the External Volume Geometry tool.
Pressure
h
10v
v
Guidelines
An approximate guideline for the size of

this box is a height 10 times the vertical
dimension of the device, and a width and
depth that are 5 times the respective
width and depth of the device.
5h
Pressure
Temperature
Bottom Surface of box: Pressure = 0, ambient Temperature

Top Surface of box: Pressure = 0
Sides of box: leave as walls; or optionally, specify a film coefficient
(convection) boundary condition with ambient reference temperature.
Note: if circulation near the outlet causes some flow to be drawn back
into the calculation domain, specify a low film coefficient boundary condition. The Reference Temperature should be the temperature outside of the
domain. This technique will simulate the effect of ambient temperature air
being drawn back into the device. A suggested value of film coefficient is
approximately 5 W/m2K, the value corresponding to natural convection.
14-13
Guidelines
Device is Resting on a Platform or Table Bucket

Construct a box (the calculation domain)
around the device. This is where the air
flows around the device.
5h
Pressure,
Temperature

this box is a height 10 times the vertical
dimension of the device, and a width and
depth that are 5 times the respective
width and depth of the device.
Note that this can be constructed either in
the CAD system or with the External Volume Geometry tool.
10v
This approach will produce correct flow

and temperature patterns near the object
if the domain is large enough, even though
in reality air may come from all directions,
not just the top.
Top Surface of box: Pressure = 0 gage, ambient Temperature

Sides of box: leave as walls; or optionally, specify a film coefficient
(convection) boundary condition with ambient reference temperature.
Bottom Surface of box: leave as a wall (no specified boundary conditions)
14-14
Guidelines
Device is Suspended Near Ceiling Hanging

Construct a cylindrically shaped calculation
domain surrounding around the device.
the cylinder is a height 10 times the vertical dimension of the device, and a diameter that is 5 times the respective width
and depth of the device.
The cylindrical surface should be divided
vertically at approximately the same location of the device.
diameter = 5d
Pressure
v
10v
Guidelines
Temperature
Pressure
(to bottom surface)
Top Surface of cylinder (flat): wall--leave unspecified
Lower cylindrical surface: leave unspecified; or optionally specify a film
coefficient (convection) boundary condition with ambient reference temperature.
Upper cylindrical surface: specify gage pressure = 0
Bottom Surface of cylinder (flat surface): Specify ambient temperature
and gage pressure = 0
14-15
Guidelines
14.3.2.3
Internal Flow Natural Convection Strategies
A device subject to internal natural convection has a cavity in which air (or some
other fluid) can move around internal components that give off heat. As the components heat up, the air within the device heats and moves due to buoyancy.
Examples of internal natural convection situations include an electronics device that
has vents which allow flow in an out of the device and a module that is fully sealed.
Each of these scenarios requires a slightly different set-up.
Device with Openings

Either construct the flow volume in the
CAD model or construct caps that fully
enclose the flow volume. (This can be
done using the Void Fill Geometry tool.)
Cap at opening
Pressure
Pressure,
Temperature
(if inlet)
Cap at opening
Openings: specify gage pressure (P = 0).
If an inlet is known, specify ambient Temperature. If not, then specify a
temperature or film coefficient (convection) boundary condition to exterior
sides of box.
14-16
Guidelines
Device is Sealed (no Openings)

Because the device is sealed, the internal
flow volume should be created automatically when opened into CFdesign. If not,
ensure that there are no leaks or construct
the flow volume in the CAD model.
Pressure and Velocity = 0
Specify a pressure somewhere on the model. This can be set on a wetted surface of a solid part to prevent it from being considered an opening. If
it is not possible to specify a pressure on a solid surface, then apply it to an
exterior surface with a velocity boundary condition (all components = 0).
If this pressure condition is omitted from the model, the analysis may not run in a
stable manner.
Specify a temperature or film coefficient (convection) on the exterior
surface of the housing.
If the device is subject to external flow as well, then construct a surrounding air
domain as described in the previous section.
14.3.2.4
Combined Internal and External Flow Strategies
If a device has internal buoyancy flow as well as external buoyancy flow, the rules
described above apply for configuring the external flow domain.
If the device is vented such that the flow passes between the device and the environment, then simply set up the model as described above.
14-17
Guidelines
Temperature
(on exterior surfaces)
Guidelines
If the device contains flow, but is completely sealed off making it separate from the
external flow region, then a pressure condition is required somewhere within the
internal fluid region. This is illustrated below for the Chimney approach:
Assign the pressure condition to an wetted
(internal) surface on a solid part (must be
a solid material). This will ensure that the
flow cannot pass through this surface, but
will satisfy the requirement that the internal region is adequately defined numerically.
Pressure BC
Pressure applied to
an internal surface
Pressure, Temperature BC
The requirement of a pressure condition on every completely disjoint fluid region
applies to all of the configurations shown above (Chimney, Bucket and Hanging).
14.3.3
Forced Convection
If the heated or cooled air is being blown (by a fan, for example) through the solution domain, this is usually forced convection. In forced convection heat transfer,
the temperature does not influence the fluid material properties.
For this reason, the energy equation can and should be solved alone after the flow
solution (velocity, pressure) has converged. This sequence is automated by checking Auto Forced Convection on the Analyze window.
If the flow and thermal solutions are run together, the thermal solution will evolve
very slowly due to the very small time scale required for the flow solution. When
14-18
Guidelines
run separately, a larger time scale is used, and the thermal solution will typically
converge very rapidly.
As with the conduction heat transfer analyses, ten thermal-only iterations are typically sufficient for thermal convergence.
Note that it is not necessary to specify a gravity vector for forced convection analyses (leave the gravity components set to 0).
14.3.4
Mixed Convection
1. Get a converged flow solution with Thermal set to Off on the Analyze dialog
and constant fluid properties on the Materials dialog.
2. Turn Flow to Off, and turn Heat Transfer to On on the Analyze dialog, and run 5
iterations. If the temperatures are unrealistically high, continue to the next step,
but on the Analyze dialog, continue from the iteration after Step 1 (select from the
Continue From field on the Analyze dialog).
3. Set Flow to On, keep Heat Transfer On, and set the Gravity vector on the Analyze dialog. Select a fluid material that lets density vary with Equation of State
(air_bouyancy)
4. Run 100 more iterations and examine the results for changes.
14.3.5
Conjugate Heat Transfer
For conjugate heat transfer analyses, the solid material conduction and the fluid
convection are analyzed simultaneously. For this type of analysis, the type of fluid
convection (natural, forced or mixed) determines the analysis parameters. For
forced convection, you should again get a converged flow solution and then run the
forced convection analysis with the flow turned off for a few more iterations. If the
fluid convection is natural convection, you need to run the thermal equation analysis with the flow turned on for all iterations. For mixed fluid convection, follow the
steps outlined above.
14-19
Guidelines
In many electronic cooling applications, the heated or cooled air is blown but may
contain local temperature gradients that will cause some appreciable buoyancy
effects. This type of heat transfer is known as mixed convection, since it has features of both natural and forced convection. There is not a good way to tell prior to
the analysis if the heat transfer is mixed or forced. To check, you should run a
mixed convection analysis after the forced convection analysis is finished:
Guidelines
14.4
Porous Media (Distributed Resistance)
Multiple obstructions in a geometry (holes in a baffle plate, for example) can conveniently be modeled using distributed resistance (porous media) materials. This
eliminates the need to mesh around every finite obstruction, thereby resulting in a
more efficient simulation model.
Assign a distributed resistance material to a part by selecting the part and indicating the through-flow and cross directions. If such a material does not exist, create
one using the Material Editor. In the Material Editor, the through-flow and crossdirection resistances are required.
If the object modeled with a distributed resistance has a different thermal conductivity than the surrounding fluid, specify that value in the Material Editor as well. An
example of is air passing through a porous ceramic filter. The ceramic material has
a different conductivity from that of the surrounding fluid, which should be specified
as a material property of the resistance. Note that such a region is considered a
fluid by the Thermal Solver, and as such will not participate in any radiation effects,
if radiation is enabled.
There are five distributed resistance methods of simulating porous media:
14.4.1
Constant K-factor
A good reference for calculating or estimating K-factors is: Handbook of Hydraulic

Resistance, 3rd edition by I.E. Idelchik, published by CRC Press, 1994 (ISBN 08493-9908-4). To use this data, enter the value of the loss coefficient as K.
If measured data for pressure drop versus flow rate is available, this can be used to
calculate the K-factor. This is done using the following equation:
2
u
P = i ----i2
If you know the pressure drop, the velocity, and the density, you can back out the
value of . Enter this value for K.
In many situations, the loss in one direction will be significantly less than the loss in
the other two directions. To represent this, enter the calculated or estimated loss
coefficient for the through flow direction and some value four or five orders of mag-
14-20
Guidelines
nitude higher in the cross directions. This will allow the flow to go in the desired
direction, and impede it in the other directions.
The Permeability value can be specified in conjunction with the Constant resistance
method as well as the Friction Factor method. This allows a resistance to be specified in the form:
2
V
P 1 P 2 = VL + -----------2
Where is the viscous resistance term, which is the reciprocal of permeability.
The value of permeability is required in the resistance Material Editor, and is used in
the pressure drop equation in the following manner:
where is the value of permeability. The unit of permeability is the Darcy, and is
expressed in terms of length squared.
The term (in the above equation) is the standard loss coefficient.
The combined pressure drop equation is then:
2
1
V
P 1 P 2 = --- VL + -----------2
Where:
is the permeability, in units of length squared.

V is the velocity
L is the length over which the resistance acts
is the viscosity
is the loss coefficient
is the fluid density
The value of permeability specified for one component is automatically applied to

the other components.
14.4.2
Friction Factor
In this method, the pressure drop is expressed as:

14-21
Guidelines
1
= --
Guidelines
u
p
f
------- = ------- L ----i2
x i
DH
where f is the friction factor and DH is the hydraulic diameter of the obstructions.
Both of these values must be entered as material properties.
The friction factor can be calculated in one of two ways:
In the first method, the friction factor is calculated with the Moody formula. The
obstruction roughness height must be entered in the correct length units.
In the second method, the friction factor is determined from:
f = aRe
where Re is the Reynolds number based on the hydraulic diameter of the obstruction. If this method is chosen, the values for a and b are required. For this case,
note that the friction factor is dimensionless but the hydraulic diameter should be
entered in the correct length units.
Note that for both methods, the hydraulic diameter and the simulated pipe length
are required properties of the material.
14.4.3
Free Area Ratio
To represent a thin perforated plate or a baffle that has a known open (free) area,
use a free area ratio. The free area ratio is the ratio of the open area to the total
area of a perforated plate:
A open
f = -----------A total
A value of 0 represents a completely closed direction; a value of 1 is completely
open. Enter a free area ratio for each component direction.
The relationship between loss coefficient, K, and free area ratio, FAR, is given as:
0.375
[ 0.707 ( 1 FAR )
+ 1 FAR ]
K = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2
FAR
Note that this equation is valid for flow with Reynolds number greater than 105. The
ratio of hole length to hydraulic diameter is between 0 to 0.015.
14-22
Guidelines
14.4.4
Pressure-Flow Rate Curve
A head capacity table controls the flow rate based on the calculated pressure drop.
14.4.5
Darcy Equation Approach
A permeability can be input using the Darcy equation. Unlike loss coefficients which
have different resistance values in the three directions, a permeability provides a
constant resistance in all directions. An example is a packed bed of stones.
p
------- = Cu i
x i
To represent a porous media, select Permeability from the Variation pull-down

menu, and enter just the value of the permeability, , as shown in the following
equation:
1
P 1 P 2 = --- VL
The units of permeability are length squared.

Note that the length over which a permeability acts must be represented accurately
in the geometry. The reason is that the Length term in the above equation is determined from the meshed geometry. Unlike the loss coefficient (K) variation method,
the length over which a permeability acts is not divided out of the equation.
14.5
Multiple Fluids
CFdesign has the ability to handle multiple fluids in one model. Note that fluids with
different materials cannot come in physical contact with each other unless one or
more is a distributed resistance. Non-distributed resistance fluids can be connected
thermally (separated by a solid material).
To implement multiple fluids into an analysis, assign the fluids as appropriate,
ensuring that no fluids come in contact.
14-23
Guidelines
where C is the viscosity coefficient, is the viscosity (of the surrounding fluid) and
ui is the velocity in the global i coordinate direction.
Guidelines
Examples where this is useful include an air-water heat exchanger or flow blown
over a sealed electronics component box. In the latter example, natural convection
might be important inside the sealed box, and forced convection may play a role
outside the box.
Note that a pressure boundary condition must be set in all fluid regions. For a
totally enclosed area with no inlets or outlets, it is a good idea to specify the pressure on at least one surface somewhere in the enclosure. If necessary, specify a 0value velocity to the same surface to prevent it from being treated as an opening.
This will decrease the analysis time significantly.
14.6
Boundary Layer Flows
Boundary layer flows are performed in a fashion similar to external flows with one
important exception. Since the pressure field is generally uniform throughout the
domain in these types of flows, the nodal pressures must be initialized to the same
value (usually zero) and not updated during the calculation. The solution relaxation
for pressure must be set to zero to maintain the initial pressure field.
P P
Note that there will be finite ------ , ------ and ------ terms in the governing flow equations
xareyused inz
since intermediate pressures
their computation. Intermediate refers
to a point in the middle of a sequential solver iteration when pressure gradients are
established to conserve mass. At the end of each sequential solver iteration, these
pressure gradients will not be present since pressure relaxation is set to zero.
14.7
Periodic Boundary Conditions
Periodic boundary conditions (cyclic symmetry) allow modelling of a single passage

of an axial or centrifugal turbomachine. It is not a sliding mesh implementation
(like the full rotating device), but will capture the flow within the blade passage.
Periodic boundary conditions can also be used to simulate non-rotating devices
such as a single blade passage through a stator cascade.
For such an analysis, only a single blade passage is modeled. Additional volumes
are added to the inlet and the outlet of the model. These should be distinct volumes
from the blade passage as they do not rotate. Periodic boundary conditions are
14-24
Guidelines
always applied in pairs, typically to surfaces on the inlet and outlet extensions that
are not walls or openings.
Note that models containing periodic boundary conditions cannot be remeshed and
continued from a saved iteration. If the mesh is changed, the model must be
started from the beginning (iteration 0). This is due to the nodal reorganization that
occurs at the onset of analyses containing periodic boundary conditions.
14.7.1
Boundary Conditions
At least one set of periodic surfaces in the model must be planar. As long as one set
is planar, the other surfaces can be curvilinear.
In 2D models, edges in a periodic pair must be within three degrees of each other,
and must be the same length. Additionally, all normals from one surface must
pierce the other, and vice versa.
When applying a periodic condition, a pair ID is required. Use an integer value for
the pair ID, and use the same value on the periodic surfaces of each extension.
Additionally, a unique side ID is required for each member of a pair. For example,
one surface of a periodic pair might have pair ID =1 and side ID =1. The corresponding surface in the pair would have pair ID =1, and side ID = 2.
14-25
Guidelines
The sides of the extensions must be translated or offset from each other in the
same manner. For example, if the sides of the inlet extension are rotated 30
degrees from each other, then the sides of the outlet extension must be rotated 30
degrees from each other as well. Alternatively, if the periodic sides of the inlet
extension are translated in the Y direction 3 inches, then the periodic sides of the
outlet must be translated 3 inches in the Y direction as well.
Guidelines
The side ID should be consistent from one region to the next. This is shown:
side 1
side 2
Being consistent with the sides from one region to the next will greatly speed-up
startup processing. If side IDs are not marked consistently, the start-up processing
of the analysis will take considerably longer.
14-26
Guidelines
14.7.2
Geometry Configuration
There are two ways to configure the rotating region based on the blade passage.
One approach is for the passage to be exactly between the blades (extending from
the suction side of one blade to the pressure side of the other):
Outlet Periodic
Extension
Periodic Pair 1
Side 1
Side 2
Guidelines
Side 1 Side 2
Periodic Pair 2
Inlet Periodic
Extension
Rotating Region
(Blade passage,
pressure and suction sides of blades)
This approach is better for most centrifugal devices and axial devices that have a
large number of blades or high degree of blade curvature.
Alternatively, the rotating region can extend from the mid-point of one passage to
the mid-point of the neighboring passage. In this case, a single blade will run
14-27
Guidelines
through the middle of the rotating region. The blade should either be a cutout or
should be a solid:
pair 2, side 1
pair 3, side 1
pair 1, side 1
pair 3, side 2
pair 1, side 2
pair 2, side 2
Turbomachinery analyses using periodic conditions are only useful for blade passages. Such analyses are not appropriate for geometries in which a non-moving
solid is included, such as a centrifugal pump surrounded by a volute.
The blade passage will be set up as a rotating region, and the rotational speed and
direction of rotation must be defined. Periodic boundary conditions are required on
the sides of the rotating region as well, if the blade is centered within the region. If
the sides of the rotating region are the pressure and suction sides of the blade,
then it is not necessary to assign periodic conditions to the sides of the rotating
region.
Periodic boundary conditions can also be used for non-rotating devices, such as a
stator cascade. Periodic pairs are required at the inlet and outlet extensions:
Outlet
Pair ID 1
Pair ID 2
Inlet
Blades
14-28
Guidelines
Analyses with periodic boundary conditions that include a rotating region must be
run transient. For analyses of non-rotating devices, it is not required to run as a
transient analysis.
Note that periodic boundary conditions are included in the Basic configuration, but
the Motion Module is required to analyze rotating machinery passages with periodic
boundaries.
Advanced Functionality:
The following functionality items are the additional items in the Advanced configuration.
Transient Flows
In fluid flow analyses, transient refers to both periodic in time (albeit steady) and
the usual time-varying flow solution. For transient flows, initial conditions must be
set. The default initial condition will be zero for all variables except temperature.
Assign initial conditions using the Initial tab of the Loads dialog task.
Transient Boundary Conditions: Time-varying boundary conditions are often
necessary. The steps for setting a time-varying boundary condition are outlined in
the Loads chapter of this guide.
Unit of Time: Note that the time unit is always seconds for transient analyses. This
unit of time is consistent with that used for the properties. Even for transients
which take days or longer, the time step size should still be entered in seconds.
Inner Iterations: Because CFdesign uses an implicit method to discretize the
transient flow equations, iterations must be run for every time step. This inner iteration is similar to the amount of work required for a single steady state iteration.
However, the inner iterations in a transient analysis are almost always better-conditioned mathematically than a steady state iteration. For this reason, far fewer inner
iterations per time step (typically 10) are required than iterations for a steady state
solution.
14-29
Guidelines
14.8
Guidelines
For Motion analyses, the recommended number of inner iterations per time
step is one. Little benefit has been found from using more iterations per
time step.
Divergence: If the transient calculation is diverging, the time step size will likely
need to be decreased. For most situations, reducing the time step size is a better
approach than adjusting the convergence controls because doing so will affect the
time-accuracy of the solution. The convergence controls will artificially slow down
the time history of the calculation.
Intelligent Solution Control: If invoked, it adjusts only the time step size, and
does not modify any convergence settings. This is done to prevent artificially affecting the time accuracy of the solution. (Convergence settings slow down solution
progression so it is always a good idea to use the default settings for non-Motion
transient analyses.) We have found that in some cases the time step size that Intelligent Solution Control selects can be smaller than truly necessary for convergence,
which may result in significantly longer solution times. For this reason, Intelligent
Solution Control is disabled by default, and it is recommended to assign a time step
size for transient analyses that do not involve the Advanced functionality physics.
Time Step Size: For transient flow solutions, it is important to select an appropriate time step size. A time step that is too large will result in lost detail because it
exceeds the time scale of the flow. A time step that is too small will capture the flow
detail, but will not be efficient because it requires more time steps than necessary
to characterize the time scale of the flow.
A good guideline for the time step size is approximately 1/20th the time required
for a particle of fluid to traverse the length of the device. For example, liquid travels
6 m/s through a 2 meter pipe. It takes 0.33 s for a particle to traverse the length of
the pipe. Following our guideline above of 1/20th the time, use a time step of
0.0167 seconds:
L = 2 meter
V = 6 m/s
Total Travel time = L/V = 2m / 6m/s = 0.33 s

Time step = 0.33 s (1/20) = 0.0167 s
14-30
Guidelines
Pressure Waves: When running a transient analysis with time-varying pressure

boundary conditions, the analysis should be set to compressible. The transient
terms in the pressure equations can only be accurately determined if the density is
allowed to vary. Namely, pressure waves always have to be modeled as a compressible flow phenomenon.
Compressible Liquids: In water hammer analyses, the density does not vary.
Compressible and Transient must still be invoked however to solve a water hammer
analysis.
Animation: Transient results sets can quickly be animated in the Results dialog.
This is described in the Review chapter of this Guide.
Height of Fluid
Designed to track the fluid level for a tank filling or emptying operation, the Height
of Fluid (HOF) function is a transient-based formulation that works for two and
three dimensional geometries as well as axisymmetric.
To implement HOF into an analysis, simply apply the Height of Fluid initial condition
to those regions of the model that contain fluid at Time 0. Regions that do not have
this condition are considered empty at the onset of the analysis. The geometry
should be oriented such that the filling or emptying direction is the Y coordinate
direction.
Additionally, be sure to select Transient on the Analyze dialog, and set an appropriate time step.
The filling or emptying process must be driven by an applied velocity boundary condition. The hydrostatic head of the water column will not cause the water to spontaneously empty from a tank.
Note: the Residence Time scalar quantity can be selected for results viewing, and is
often useful for HOF analyses. This is selected from the Results Quantities dialog
available on the Analyze dialog. Note also that an HOF analysis can have a scalar
quantity as part of the calculation. This is useful for modeling the concentration of
additives to the water.
14-31
Guidelines
14.9
Guidelines
14.10
Mixing using the Scalar Equation
Mixing of two similar fluids can be simulated by using a Scalar boundary condition
and by defining scalar-dependent fluid properties.
14.10.1
Scalar Boundary and Property Variation
To simulate the mixing of two fluids, use the Scalar boundary to track the relative
concentrations of the two fluids. For example, assign a Scalar boundary condition of
0 to represent the first fluid, and a Scalar boundary condition of 1 to represent the
other. This is in addition to the typical velocity or flow rate boundary conditions
needed to drive the flow
A single material is defined within the flow region, and is defined so that its properties depend on the scalar condition. For example, a piece-wise linear variation for
density as a function of scalar will cause the density to vary based on the relative
concentration of the two fluids. The other properties, viscosity, conductivity, etc.,
can be varied in the same way.
14.10.2
Diffusion Coefficient
To properly simulate the mixing, a diffusion coefficient is a required input. On the

Analyze dialog, enable the General Scalar from the Advanced dialog, and input a
value of diffusion coefficient.
The diffusion coefficient controls the mass diffusivity of the scalar quantity into the
surrounding fluid. A value of 0 will prevent any diffusion of the scalar quantity. This
quantity is D AB in Ficks Law:
j A = D AB m A
where jA is the mass flux of species A. This is how much of A is transferred (per
time and per unit area normal to the transfer direction). It is proportional to the
mixture mass density, and to the gradient of the species mass fraction, mA. The
units of the Diffusivity coefficient are length squared per time.
14-32
Guidelines
Some sample values of diffusion coefficients are given:

Fluid 1
Fluid 2
Diffusion Coefficient
Air (STP)
Propane
0.1 cm2/s
Air (STP)
LNG
0.16 cm2/s
Air (STP)
Gasoline
0.05 cm2/s
Air (STP)
Hydrogen
0.61 cm2/s
Air (STP)
Carbon Dioxide
0.16 cm2/s
Air (STP)
Oxygen
0.20 cm2/s
Air (STP)
Water vapor
0.25 cm2/s
14.10.3
Example: Mixing Air and CO2
To mix air and carbon dioxide in a vessel, we first decide (arbitrarily) that air will be
represented by a scalar value of 0, and carbon dioxide with a scalar value of 1.
The two streams will come in through separate inlets, mix, and then exit through
the outlet.
The boundary conditions for the air inlet are the velocity (or flow rate) and a scalar
condition = 0. The boundary conditions for the carbon dioxide inlet are the velocity
(or flow rate) and a scalar condition = 1:
Air:
Velocity
Scalar = 0
CO2:
Velocity
Scalar = 1
Outlet
Pressure = 0
Assign a single material to the vessel, but modify the density is a function of scalar.
The piecewise linear variation method is the most convenient variation method. The
14-33
Guidelines
The diffusion coefficient of a fluid is typically 10,000x greater in air than in water.
Guidelines
density of air is 1.2047 e-6 g/mm3, and the density of carbon dioxide is 1.773e6 g/mm3. The table would look like this:
The other properties can be varied in the same manner. Density will typically have
the greatest influence on the solution, but viscosity can be varied as well.
On the Analyze dialog, click the Advanced button, and enable General Scalar.
Because we are mixing air and carbon dioxide, we need to specify a diffusivity coefficient of 16 mm2/s.
When the analysis is run, the scalar quantity will propagate throughout the vessel
based on the flow, and the material will adjust in response to the scalar. The Flow
and Scalar solutions should be run together because the properties vary with the
flow solution.
14.11
Moist/Humid Flows
CFdesign can simulate the condensation of liquid from a moist gas. Evaporation,
however, is not supported.
Boundary Conditions: To model the effect of moisture on a gas flow, specify a
Humidity and a Temperature boundary condition at every inlet of the model.
14-34
Guidelines
Initial Condition: It is often helpful to initialize the temperature and humidity

throughout the model. A good value is often one of the inlet boundary condition
values.
Materials: Apply the Air_Moist material or define a new material with a density
that varies using the Moist Gas variation. The values that can be changed are the
Reference Pressure and Gas Constant. The reference pressure is the sum of the
partial pressures of the gas and the water vapor. You should also specify the carrier
gas viscosity, conductivity and specific heat.
Analyze: Enable Heat Transfer to On. From the Advanced dialog, select the
Humidity option. On the Result Quantities dialog, select Scalar. This allows humidity to be viewed as a result quantity
Analysis Continuation: When continuing an analysis from existing results, there

may be a blip in the convergence monitor for temperature and scalar due to some
internal conversion variables.
Results Visualization: The amount of liquid condensed and the calculated field
values of relative humidity can be viewed as results. The condensed liquid is calculated as a mixture fraction, i.e., the mass of the condensed liquid divided by the
total mass of the liquid, vapor and carrier gas.
14.12
Steam/Water Flows
In the case of steam/water flows, CFdesign assumes a homogeneous two-phase

mixture. The energy equation that is used is written in terms of enthalpy. Temperature is determined using the steam tables. Both temperature and enthalpy results
can be viewed in the Results dialog task (make sure both quantities are enabled on
the Output Quantity dialog on the Analyze dialog).
Boundary Conditions: Specify the Steam Quality and static Temperature (as
well as the appropriate velocity, flow-rate, or pressure) at all inlets. The steam
quality is 0 for 100% liquid water.
14-35
Guidelines
For incompressible flows, only the temperature affects the fluid properties (including relative humidity). If pressure effects are to be considered, select Subsonic
Compressible on the Analyze dialog.
Guidelines
Materials: Select the H2O_Steam/Liquid material from the Fluid list on the
Material dialog. If the operating state differs from STP, create a new steam/water
material, and change the Reference Pressure to the correct value. The properties of
the steam are determined during the analysis using the steam tables and the specified reference pressure.
Analyze: On the Analyze dialog, enable Heat Transfer, and select Steam Quality
from the Advanced dialog. For incompressible flows, only the temperature and reference pressure affect the fluid properties (including the steam quality). If local
pressure effects are to be considered, select Subsonic Compressible.
14.13
Cavitation
Cavitation is a physical phenomenon that occurs in many high-velocity liquid flows

when the liquid pressure falls below the vapor pressure, resulting in the formation
of vapor bubbles. It is commonly found in high speed liquid valves as well as
pumps, and can greatly reduce the efficiency of these devices. Prolonged cavitation
can lead to pitting and erosion of the device, resulting in costly downtime and
repairs.
The cavitation model in CFdesign tracks the vapor bubble volume fraction, and predicts the onset and location of bubble formation within the flow. It is best suited for
predicting small regions of cavitation, and will not run well when large regions of
the flow flash to vapor. This cavitation model is based on modelling a collection of
bubbles, not a total vapor region.
When cavitation is enabled, the fluid pressure will not fall below the vapor pressure.
(If cavitation is disabled, the pressure is allowed to fall below the physical limit.)
The result of this pressure clipping is that the forces computed with the Wall Calculator will more accurately reflect the effect of cavitation on the hydrodynamic loading.
14.13.1
Usage
To analyze cavitation of a liquid other than water, the liquid material must be
assigned to the flow parts, and a material containing the vapor properties must also
exist in the material database. Note that this vapor material must physically be
saved to your active material database. It is not explicitly assigned to a part, so
14-36
Guidelines
unless the material is saved in the material database, it will not be associated with
the analysis model.
The naming convection is thus:
Liquid material: liquid_name

Vapor material: liquid_name_vapor
Where liquid_name is the name of material. The vapor material must have the
words _vapor appended to its name.
When defining the vapor state of the fluid, it is necessary to specify the vapor pressure. Note that this vapor pressure should be consistent for the conditions of the
analysis, as it is held constant throughout the analysis.
Guidelines
If the flow is subjected to temperature variations, note that the liquid material can
vary with temperature (buoyancy), but the vapor pressure of the vapor state is held
constant.
For water, there is an H2O_Constant material included in the material database as
well as a material named H2O_Vapor. For water, it is only necessary to assign the
H2O_Constant material to your flow parts because the H2O_Vapor material (containing the vapor properties of water) already exists in the material database.
14-37
Guidelines
When defining the mesh distribution for a device that is subject to cavitation, it is a
good idea to attempt to focus higher mesh density in regions where cavitation is
suspected to occur. The Mesh Refinement Regions (on the Meshing task) can be
very useful for doing this.
Cavitation is not enabled automatically for liquid flows. To enable it, open the
Advanced dialog on the Analyze task, and select Cavitation.
When the analysis is started, if this setting is made, the materials will be evaluated
to ensure that both the liquid material is assigned to the flow regions and the vapor
material exists in the database. If the vapor material does not exist, cavitation is
disabled from the analysis.
14.13.2
Visualization
After the analysis is completed, visualize regions that are cavitating by plotting the
Cavitation Vapor Volume Fraction. This quantity is a fraction, and varies from 0 to
1, with a value of 1 indicating 100% vapor bubbles. The most convenient way to
visualize the location of cavitation is with an iso-surface. Setting the value to 1 (or
close) will plot a three-dimensional view of the cavitating region:
The Summary File also lists the percent of the total analysis volume that is occupied
by bubbles.
14-38
Guidelines
14.14
Radiation Heat Transfer
The radiation model uses a true view factor calculation which provides as accurate
energy balance because it enforces reciprocity between solids. Temperature and
energy balance accuracy are ensured for geometries with widely varying feature
sizes.
Radiation works with all of the supported geometry types: two and three dimensional Cartesian and axisymmetric about the X and Y axes.
14.14.1
True View Factor Calculation
The radiation model computes true view factors for every part. This is more accurate than the flux-based method used in the radiation model in previous versions.
The view factors between every part are written to the .sol file, and should sum to
1 for each part. Tables of view factors are produced for opaque as well as transparent materials.
A sample view factor list for one part in an assembly is shown:
Opaque Part-To-Part View Factors
Part 1 viewing Part 1, VF = 0
Part 1 viewing Part 2, VF = 0.00870629
Part 1 sum of all view factors = 1
14-39
Guidelines
Radiative heat transfer through transparent media is supported, as well as geometric symmetry. The radiation model computes radiative heat transfer to moving solids and moving surfaces, and is the basis of the solar heating model. The radiation
model has very rigorous bookkeeping to keep track of the radiative energy balance, and reports the amount of heat transfer due to radiation and the radiative
energy balance for each part in a model. The result is that reciprocity is enforced,
to ensure that the radiative heat transfer between parts with large size differences
is computed accurately.
Guidelines
Because this model uses a true view factor calculation, it can more accurately solve
the radiative heat transfer for models with parts that have large size differences.
Surface to surface reciprocity is enforced to ensure a more accurate energy balance.
14.14.2
Modeling Guidelines
To use radiation, specify an emissivity for every solid material type in the model. If
there are no solids present, specify an emissivity for the surrounding walls by setting an emissivity on the fluid material. (You will have to create a new material, but
it can be based on a database material.) Because the radiation algorithm does not
allow the fluid medium to participate, emissivity specified on a fluid material is
automatically applied to the walls touching the fluid.
Note that the default value of 0 as the emissivity is not generally recommended
because it indicates a perfectly reflective surface. Such a case may cause analysis
instabilities and convergence difficulties.
Enable Heat Transfer and Radiation on the Analyze dialog.
Radiation can be run with or without flow, but should be run with Heat Transfer set
to On.
An important modeling consideration is that fluid and parts that contact each other
should not be extrusion meshed. The reason is that if either (or both) use extruded
elements, the interface between the extrusion faces and the tetrahedral faces, also
known as a non-conformal interface, is not supported by the radiation model. The
14-40
Guidelines
radiation model must have a matching mesh at all fluid-solid interfaces. This guideline applies to solid-solid interfaces as well if one or both of the solids is a transparent medium.
When an assembly is enclosed by an air volume, it is very important that a nonzero value of emissivity be assigned to the air (which then gets applied to the
walls). If a value of 0 is used, the wetted surfaces (that do not touch solids) will
behave as perfect mirrors, and no energy will be lost to the environment--a nonphysical situation. Apply a temperature boundary condition to the external air surface that represents the correct environmental temperature, and specify a realistic
emissivity for the air.
14.14.3
Transmissivity
Note that transmissivity cannot be assigned to surface parts.

In the radiation model, radiative energy that passes through a transparent solid
does not experience an attenuation effect--there is no absorption of radiative
energy into the media. There is no accounting for spectral effects within a transparent object, and energy leaves the object in a diffuse manner. Energy may, however,
be absorbed through the surface and then emitted (emissivity = absorptivity). The
energy balance for radiative heat transfer looks like:
r = 1
where r = reflectivity, = emissivity, and = transmissivity. Note that transmissivity can only be applied to solids. Fluids are non-participating media for all radiation simulations.
14-41
Guidelines
The radiation model supports radiative heat transfer through transparent solid
media. The transmissivity material property defines the level of transparency of a
solid object. Radiative heat transfer through a transparent solid object that is completely surrounded by fluid can be simulated by assigning a non-zero transmissivity
property to the material. Opaque solids that are enclosed by transparent solids can
be modeled as well. This even allows nesting of multiple layers of opaque and
transparent solids.
Guidelines
14.14.3.1
Internal Transparent Parts
To include radiative heat transfer through a transparent solid that is completely surrounded by the fluid, assign a transmissivity value to the material using the Material Editor on the Material task dialog.
Note that the sum of transmissivity and emissivity must be less than or equal to 1.
Air cavity
Emissivity of walls set
as property of air
Object with
heat source
emissivity <= 1
if opaque, transmissivity = 0
14-42
Object heated
by radiative
heat transfer
Transparent part
transmissivity > 0
Guidelines
14.14.3.2
External Transparent Parts
To include radiative heat transfer through a transparent surface on the external

wall, such as a window:
1. Model the transparent region as a solid part.

2. Assign a transmissivity value to the material using the Material Editor on the
Material task dialog. (Note that the part must have a non-zero transmissivity property to be considered transparent.)
3. Assign a Transparent boundary condition to the external surface:
Transparent part
on exterior of model.
Transmissivity > 0
Transparent BC with
Background Temperature
applied to external surface(s)
Air cavity
The temperature specified with this boundary condition is used to define the incoming radiation flux according to this equation:
q = ( T background )
Transparent BCs should only be applied to external boundaries so that the incoming
flux is external to the analysis domain. They must be assigned to a solid material;
assignment to a fluid material will result in an error.
Solar heating problems should not use transparent BCs because the set up of the
solar heating problem requires a sky dome and ground structure that define the
entire external boundaries. If windows are modeled in these cases, these transparent materials would be internal to the analysis domain which would make transparent boundary conditions inappropriate.
If a transparent material with surfaces on an external boundary are not assigned a
transparent boundary condition, the emissivity and transmissivity will automatically
14-43
Guidelines
Internal solid part
Guidelines
be set to 0. Because reflection is the difference between 1 and the sum of emissivity and transmissivity, the external boundary will be perfectly reflective (like a silver
backing on a mirror) with the exterior of the model. This is done to conserve
energy. Because no background temperature is defined, the heat loss/gain cannot
be computed.
14.14.4
Symmetry
The radiation model supports geometric symmetry. Symmetric divisions must be

such that the model is a true fraction of the complete model. For example, a half
symmetric model is valid if the other half makes up the complete device. Likewise,
a quarter symmetry is valid if it encompasses 90 degrees of the actual device, and
if the other three quarters would make up the complete device.
A slip condition that does not divide a model along a geometry symmetry would not
produce accurate radiative heat transfer results. Examples of valid symmetry/slip
divisions are shown:
Half Symmetry
Quarter Symmetry
Model
Symmetry Plane
Model
Cut-away half
Symmetry Plane
Cut-away Quarters
These two examples show valid half and quarter symmetry geometries, but much
smaller symmetry can be used, if it is valid. As an example, an 18 degree wedge
could be analyzed from a disk. This corresponds to a 1/20th symmetry! The key is
to apply the symmetry (slip) boundary conditions so that they properly define the
symmetry.
When working with a symmetric model, care should be taken to ensure that the
model uses pure rotational symmetry. A combination of rotational and mirrored
14-44
Guidelines
symmetry is not supported. For example, if the complete geometry looks like the
image on the left, then a valid quarter symmetry would be as shown on the right:
Quarter
Symmetry
NOT VALID
Half Symmetry
VALID
To properly model symmetry, it must be possible to rotate the symmetric model

through 360 degrees and arrive at the original geometry. This is to ensure that the
effects of shadowing and reflection are accurately accounted for by the radiation
model.
The radiation model also supports 2D axisymmetric models. Such models must be
axisymmetric about either the x or y axis.
14-45
Guidelines
But, if the actual geometry did not contain pure rotational symmetry, and looked
like the image on the left (below), then the symmetry shown in the middle image
would be wrong. The image on the right is the correct way to invoke symmetry on
such a model:
Guidelines
Rotational Periodic symmetry is also supported by the radiation model. The wedge
angle must be at least three degrees, and periodic faces are marked using the periodic boundary conditions on the Loads dialog. Translational periodic symmetry,
however, is not supported.
14.14.5
Motion
Radiation is now supported for moving solids. When radiation is enabled for a
motion analysis, the view factors will automatically recompute when the moving
part has traveled 2% of the maximum diagonal of the domain bounding box. This
value can be changed with a flags file entry:
ViewFactorUpdate VALUE
where VALUE is the percent of the diagonal. To recompute view factors every 5%,
for example, place this entry in your flags file:
ViewFactorUpdate 5
NOTES:
Moving objects that experience radiation heat transfer must not touch
any stationary object or wall at any point in the analysis. This includes the
as-built location as well as anywhere in the motion path.
Moving objects must not leave the enclosure.
Radiation cannot be used for rotating regions--it is only for moving solids.
Moving parts must be opaque. They cannot have a non-zero value of
transmissivity in their material definition.
14.14.6
Radiation in a Vacuum
While perfect vacuums are extremely rare in most industrial applications, there are
some applications in which the solution of radiation within such an environment is
useful. A fluid has to be included in the environment, but Flow can be turned off (on
the Analyze dialog) to remove any convection effects. A general procedure for radiation analysis in a quasi-vacuum is to:
1. Enable Transient on the Analyze dialog.

2. Use a time step of approximately 30 seconds
14-46
Guidelines
3. Use one inner iteration per time step.

4. Run the analysis an appropriate number of time steps to simulate the
elapsed time.
14.14.7
Invoking
The radiation model is enabled by default. To use an older, less resource-intensive

radiation model, add this setting to your cfdesign_flags.txt file:
rad_model_1 1
Note that this model is not as accurate as the default radiation model.
Resource Usage
The fact that the radiation model computes view factors and reciprocity between
every face of every part leads to a high level of accuracy and a good energy balance
for radiation calculations. The model is, however, resource intensive. During initial
startup, a view factor is calculated between all element faces of every part with a
line of sight. Additionally, the radiation matrix must be built that tracks all of this
data.
The required amount of RAM increases with the square of the number of surface
element faces. Depending on the number of surfaces in a geometry, the amount of
RAM required to compute the view factors may be in excess of 1 Gigabyte. The
amount of time required to compute the view factors at startup can be quite significant as well. A progress bar indicates the relative progress of this calculation during initial startup.
The radiation model automatically adjusts the accuracy of the computation as a
function of the available RAM. The algorithm probes the system to determine how
much RAM is available, and then it will adjust the optical sampling rate so that the
final radiosity matrix will fit into the available RAM. It will also determine whether it
should use in-memory or out-of-core storage of view factors, radiosity matrix
terms, and even the type of solver employed. So even with only 256 Mbytes of
memory, it is possible to run radiation calculations. It will take longer and be less
accurate than results generated on a machine with 4 Gbytes of RAM, however.
14-47
Guidelines
14.14.8
Guidelines
If, however, the analysis model simply cannot be run with the available RAM, an
error will be given advising that the radiation model cannot be run due to the lack
of system resources.
Fortunately, this calculation is only performed at the beginning of an analysis. It
does not occur for subsequent restarts of the analysis if the mesh does not change.
Because the radiation model employs a surface integral method, it has been shown
to not require a high mesh density to provide accurate results. Please be sure to
balance the meshing requirements of the other physical phenomena in an analysis
model as appropriate.
14.14.9
Spectral Radiation
The radiation model can include the effects of temperature-dependent emissivity.

This allows the simulation of the effects of spectral radiation. This variation is in the
form of a piece-wise linear table, and is entered on the Material Editor by hitting the
Emissivity button, and selecting Piecewise Linear on the Variation Method drop
menu.
To account for the spectral characteristics of a surface, use the radiation functions
in the following table to construct a second table of total emissivity as a function of
temperature to be used in CFdesign:
m R
m K
E b0 T
---------------4
T
m R
m K
E b0 T
---------------4
T
0.0
10,200
5666.7
0.70754
1000
555.6
1.70e-8
10,400
5777.8
0.71806
1200
666.7
7.56e-7
10,600
5888.9
0.72813
1400
777.8
1.06e-5
10,800
6000
0.73777
14-48
Guidelines
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
888.9
7.38e-5
11,000
6111.1
0.74700
1800
1000
3.21e-4
11,200
6222.2
0.75583
2000
1111.1
0.00101
11,400
6333.3
0.76429
2200
1222.2
0.00252
11,600
6444.4
0.77238
2400
1333.3
0.00531
11,800
6555.6
0.78014
2600
1444.4
0.00983
12,000
6666.7
0.78757
2800
1555.6
0.01643
12,200
6777.8
0.79469
3000
1666.7
0.02537
12,400
6888.9
0.80152
3200
1777.8
0.03677
12,600
7000
0.80806
3400
1888.9
0.05059
12,800
7111.1
0.81433
3600
2000
0.06672
13,000
7222.2
0.82035
3800
2111.1
0.08496
13,200
7333.3
0.82612
4000
2222.2
0.10503
13,400
7444.4
0.83166
4200
2333.3
0.12665
13,600
7555.6
0.83698
4400
2444.4
0.14953
13,800
7666.7
0.84209
4600
2555.6
0.17337
14,000
7777.8
0.84699
4800
2666.7
0.19789
14,200
7888.9
0.85171
5000
2777.8
0.22285
14,400
8000
0.85624
14-49
Guidelines
1600
Guidelines
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
5200
2888.9
0.24803
14,600
8111.1
0.86059
5400
3000
0.27322
14,800
8222.2
0.86477
5600
3111.1
0.29825
15,000
8333.3
0.86880
5800
3222.2
0.32300
16,000
8888.9
0.88677
6000
3333.3
0.34734
17,000
9444.4
0.90168
6200
3444.4
0.37118
18,000
10,000
0.91414
6400
3555.6
0.39445
19,000
10,555.6
0.92462
6600
3666.7
0.41708
20,000
11,111.1
0.93349
6800
3777.8
0.43905
21,000
11,666.7
0.94104
7000
3888.9
0.46031
22,000
12,222.2
0.94751
7200
4000
0.48085
23,000
12,777.8
0.95307
7400
4111.1
0.50066
24,000
13,333.3
0.95788
7600
4222.2
0.51974
25,000
13,888.9
0.96207
7800
4333.3
0.53809
26,000
14,444.4
0.96572
8000
4444.4
0.55573
27,000
15,000
0.96892
8200
4555.6
0.57267
28,000
15,555.6
0.97174
8400
4666.7
0.58891
29,000
16,111.1
0.97423
8600
4777.8
0.60449
30,000
16,666.7
0.97644
14-50
Guidelines
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
4888.9
0.61941
40,000
22,222.2
0.98915
9000
5000
0.63371
50,000
27,777.8
0.99414
9200
5111.1
0.64740
60,000
33,333.3
0.99649
9400
5222.2
0.66051
70,000
38,888.9
0.99773
9600
5333.3
0.67305
80,000
44,444.4
0.99845
9800
5444.4
0.68506
90,000
50,000
0.99889
10,000
5555.6
0.69655
100,000
55,555.6
0.99918
Radiation functions from R.V. Dunkle, Trans. ASME, 76, p549, 1954
For example, if you know the range of temperatures for your model is 100F
to 1200F and the emittance of the surface is 0.3 ( 1 ) below 3 and is 0.8
( 2 ) at the longer wavelengths, you would create the following table, and
enter this data in the Piecewise Linear property table in CFdesign:
E b0 T
----------------4
T
Emissivity
Temperature (F)
1680
9.888e-5
0.8
100
4980
0.220354
0.69
1200
14-51
Guidelines
8800
Guidelines
The emissivity in the above table is determined using the equation:
E b0 T
E b0 T
- + 1.0 ---------------- 2
= ---------------4
T 4 1
T
Substituting the numbers above and interpolating values from the table:
E b0 T
- = 9.888e 5
( T = 100 ( F ) ( T = 3 560 = 1680 ) ) --------------- T 4
So, the emissivity at 100 F is:
= ( 9.888e 5 ) ( 0.3 ) + ( 1.0 9.888e 5 ) ( 0.8 ) = 0.80

For the emissivity at 1200F:
E b0 T
- = 0.220354
( T = 1200 ( F ) ( ( T = 3 1660 ) = 4980 ) ) --------------- T 4
So, the emissivity at this temperature is:
= 0.220354 ( 0.3 ) + ( 1.0 0.220354 ) ( 0.8 ) = 0.69
14.14.10
Energy Balance
For every iteration, a radiosity matrix is form and solved. A complete record of the
energy balance is provided for every part in the model. This data is written to the
.sol file for every iteration during the analysis, and to the summary file after the
last iteration. This section describes the information that is provided, and discusses
the differences for models using transparent boundary conditions and solar heating.
14.14.10.1
Radiation with no Transparent BC or Solar
The following is a sample energy balance from a radiation analysis containing five
parts. There are four parts immersed in an air cavity (part 5). None of the parts has
14-52
Guidelines
transmissivity. Comments about the meaning of certain items are written below the
line and are preceded by a >>>> symbol.
Radiosity Solution has converged
Iter=12 ResNorm = 5.85774E-013
CPU time to solve radiosity matrix = 0.719
Radiation heat balance = 2.3363e-008/ 20.437 = 1.1431e-007%
Radiation Heat Loads by Part ID

ID
Radiation
Area
Surface
Heat Load
(mm^2)
Temperature
(Watts)
Emissivity
Transmissivity
(K)
1
-2.583
5959.3
365.23
0.94
-2.5318
5959.2
363.07
0.94
-2.5806
5959.3
365.56
0.94
-2.5148
5959.3
364.2
0.94
10.21
1.2296e+0
05
298.25
0.7
Totals
2.3363e008
1.4679e+0
05
309.01
>>>>Parts 1-4 are each losing about 2.5 Watts through radiation, and part 5, the
enclosure, is receiving that radiant energy. The totals indicate that the total heat
lost equals the sum of the heat gain, indicated by the total heat load summing to 0.
The temperature for each part is an area-weighted temperature, and the total temperature is average temperature for all of the parts.
14-53
Guidelines
>>>> The 2.3363e-008 is the sum of the radiative energy. This value should be 0
or very close. The 20.437 is the sum of the absolute values of the radiative energy.
The 1.1431e-007% is the total radiative energy divided by the sum of the absolute
values. This is an indicator of the error in the radiative energy balance.
Guidelines
14.14.10.2
Radiation with Transparent Boundary Conditions
When transparent boundary conditions are included in a radiation analysis, the

energy balance information is presented slightly differently as shown in the radiative energy balance from such an analysis. Comments about the meaning of certain
items are written below the line and are preceded by a >>>> symbol.
Radiation heat balance = -4.5792e-008/ 226.96 = -2.0176e-008%
>>>>As in the previous example, the -4.5792e-008 value is the net radiative heat
exchange within the model. A very small value means that a good energy balance
has been attained.
ID
Radiation
Area
Heat Load
(mm^2)
(Watts)
2
3
Surface
Temp
Emissivity
Transmissivity
(K)
-36.289
1268.5
0.94
/ 0 transparentBC
6.917e+00
5
-32.062
1599.3
1015.7
0.94
1767.8
980.85
0.05
0.8
2.029e+00
5
1270.7
0.94
8.980e+00
5
1268
/ 0 transparentBC
4
0.18324
/ -76.557 transparentBC
-8.3889
/ 0 transparentBC
Tot
als
-76.557/ -76.557
>>>> Parts 2 and 3 are losing about 36 and 32 Watts, respectively. Part 6, the
enclosure, is losing about 8 Watts. The sum of the energy lost from these three
parts equals the energy lost through the transparent boundary condition. The
transparent part, part 4, is only picking up a small amount of energy because it is
losing most of its energy through the transparent boundary condition. Note that the
total transparent BC heat load = total radiation heat load. This indicates a good
energy balance.
14-54
Guidelines
14.15
Solar Heating
The Solar model only works in conjunction with the radiation model, and as such
supports radiative heat transfer through transparent media. With solar heating, the
effect of shadowing on other objects is supported as well. The Solar user interface
dialog allows for specification of specific geographical locations as well as input of
latitude and longitude. The date, time, compass direction, and object orientation
relative to the sky are also specified. A full report of the radiative energy balance
similar to the reports shown in the previous section is provided during and after the
analysis.
14.15.1
Geometry
The ground volume should be approximately a meter thick. The thickness is significant only if diurnal heating over several days is studied, in which case it is necessary to compute the thermal inertia of the ground. The ground part should be
approximately 20 times wider than the studied object.
The shape of the environment volume is not critical, and a hemisphere or cube are
the most convenient choices. The environment volume should extend at least 10
times the height of the objects in the analysis model. A smaller environment can be
used, but if natural convection is analyzed, a small volume will influence and potentially complicate the buoyancy-induced flow. Also, if diurnal heating is analyzed, a
14-55
Guidelines
To properly compute the solar heating of an object, it must be fully enclosed by a

larger volume that represents the environment. A volume representing the ground
can also be included in the model, but is not required. The purpose of both regions
(environment and ground) is to properly simulate the effects of reflected and emitted radiative heat transfer between the object and its surroundings. These two elements in a solar model allow for proper simulation of the indirect solar flux to and
from the ground and the radiative energy loss and/or gain to the sky.
Guidelines
cold sky temperature that is too close to the object will artificially cool the object
through conduction.
Environment Volume
20 meters
Object
2 meters
Ground
1 meter
Volume
40 meters
Note that only three dimensional geometry is supported for solar analyses because
the motion of the sun is a function of its altitude and its East-West (azimuth angle)
orientation. Since the solar energy flux is a function of three dimensional space,
CFdesign does not convert this energy into an equivalent energy load in two dimensional models. For example, for a model that is axisymmetric in the Y axis, solar
input only exists on one side of this object. This conflicts with the condition of symmetry about the Y axis because the solar heating is non-symmetric by its very
nature.
The relative locations of objects in an analysis model are important because shadowing is computed by the Solar Heating model. When an object blocks solar flux
(either partially or completely) from hitting another object, that blocked object is
14-56
Guidelines
shadowed. Such an object is still subject to receiving indirect radiant heat flux from
the sky, the ground, and surrounding objects.
This object is in
If solar flux
the shadow of
comes from
the bigger object
here...
Analysis Settings
Temperature boundary conditions and emissivity values should be specified for both
the ground and sky.
Sky temperature
Sky emissivity
Ground emissivity
Ground temperature
The ground temperature depends on the location on the Earth, and should be specified on the external surface of the ground volume. The emissivity of the ground
should be specified as a property of the ground material. This value depends on the
type of material. Grass surfaces, for example, may have an emissivity of about 0.3,
while asphalt may have an emissivity of about 0.8. White surfaces such as an air-
14-57
Guidelines
14.15.2
Guidelines
port tarmac, are highly reflective, and would tend to have very low emissivity values.
During the day, the sky temperature is nearly the ambient temperature. At night,
however, the sky temperature falls to about 0 C. On very cloudy nights in warm climates, the sky temperature may be warmer than this. On clear nights in cold climates, the sky temperature can be as cold as -15 C.
The amount of cloud cover and the amount of ambient light affect the amount of
radiant energy that is reflected off the sky and back to earth (the albedo). Use the
value of emissivity specified on air to control the emissivity of the sky (and hence
the reflectivity). The emissivity controls the amount of reflected energy: (reflection
= 1-emissivity).
A clear sky with little or no cloud cover has a higher emissivity value
(and hence lower reflectivity) than a cloudy sky.
At night, a clear sky might have an emissivity as high as 1, but because
of the low night-time sky temperature, it acts as an emitter that is cold, so
little heat is emitted back to the object and ground.
A cloudy night sky will have a lower emissivity (higher reflection), so
the clouds reflect the radiation emission from the ground, and will limit the
heat loss of the ground.
To study diurnal heating, specify the sky temperature as a transient boundary condition, and assign the emissivity of the air (which is automatically assigned to the
exterior surface of the environment volume) as a function of temperature. During
the day, high sky temperature corresponds to lower emissivity. During the night,
low sky temperature corresponds to higher emissivity values.
Transparent objects such as windows can be incorporated into solar heating analyses. Assign a transmissivity property value to such parts in the Material Editor.
Because all parts are internal to a solar heating analysis, the transparent boundary
condition should not be used in a solar heating model. This boundary condition is
used for setting an external temperature on objects that are on the exterior of a
model, so it is not appropriate for objects in the interior of a solar analysis.
Please see the Solar Heating section of the Analyze chapter of this manual for information about the Solar Heating dialog.
14-58
Guidelines
14.15.3
Running a Solar Heating Analysis
There are two ways to run a solar heating analysis: as steady-state or as transient.
When run as steady state, the time specified on the Solar Heating dialog does not
change throughout the calculation. This is ideal for computing the worst case
solar heat loading on an object during the heat of the day. Also, this regime is useful for determining seasonal variations in the peak solar loading.
When running a diurnal solar analysis, it will likely be important to vary the sky
temperature with time so that the appropriate value is used during day and night.
Likewise, define the sky emissivity to be temperature-dependent to properly represent the reflective effects of ambient light and cloud cover.
The two result quantities that provide the most insight into the effects of solar loading are Temperature and Solar Heat Flux. Solar heat flux is enabled automatically for Solar applications, and is included in the Global Scalar Result list.
14.15.4
Radiation Energy Balance with Solar Heating
A complete reporting of the radiation energy balance is also provided in the Summary file when running Solar Heating. Below is a sample of such a report. Comments about the meaning of certain items are written below the line and are
preceded by a >>>> symbol.
Simulation Time 1.728000e+003 seconds, year = 2006, month = 2, day = 1 hour
= 12 minute = 25 second = 5
L2 Norm of residual before solve = 1.06209e-003
Radiosity Solution has converged
14-59
Guidelines
To study the variation of solar loading over a longer period of time (either within a
single day or over multiple days and nights), a solar heating model can be run transient. The time and date specified on the Solar Heating dialog are that at the beginning of the simulation. If analyzing diurnal heating over a long period of time
(several days, for example), we have found that it is convenient to divide a day into
100 time steps. This is a time step size of 864 seconds. Such a large time step
should be very effective if Flow is disabled on the Analyze dialog. If buoyancy effects are to be studied, then a significantly smaller time step will be necessary.
Guidelines
Iter=10 ResNorm = 6.36236E-014

CPU time to solve radiosity matrix = 4
Radiation heat balance = 4.1933e-010/ 86.259 = 4.8613e-010%
ID
Radiation
Area
Surface
Heat Load
(mm^2)
Temperature
(Watts)
Emissivity
Transmissivity
(K)
1
0.1875/ 0 solar
5959.3
298.43
0.7
0.19787/ 0
solar
5959.3
298.83
0.7
12.858/ 14.379
solar
1.56e+0
05
303.46
0.2
0.6
0.57946/
0.51806 solar
5959.3
300.24
0.7
0.78074/
0.69285 solar
5959.3
301.29
0.7
71.656/ 70.67
solar
1.21e+0
05
303.73
0.94
Total
86.259/ 86.259
3.01e+0
05
303.27
>>>> Part 3 is picking up 14.379 Watts through incoming solar flux, but its net
increase is only 12.858. This means that this part lost about 1.5 Watts to its surroundings. Part 6, conversely, has a slightly higher net influx than it received from
solar. This means that it picked up additional radiant energy from its surroundings.
Note that the total solar heat load = total radiation heat load, indicating a good
radiation energy balance.
14-60
Guidelines
14.16
Compressible Flows
When a fluid flow is compressible, the fluid density varies with its pressure. Compressible flows are usually high speed flows with Mach numbers greater than about
0.3. Examples include aerodynamic applications such as flow over a wing or aircraft
nacelle as well as industrial applications such as flow through high-performance
valves.
In CFdesign, the distinction between subsonic compressible and full compressible is

based on the Mach number.
Subsonic compressible flows have a Mach number between 0.3 and 0.8. The relationship between pressure and density is weak, and no shocks will be computed
within the flow.
Compressible flows have a Mach number greater than 0.8. The pressure strongly
affects the density, and shocks are possible. Compressible flows can be either transonic (0.8 < M < 1.2) or supersonic (1.2 < M < 3.0). In supersonic flows, pressure
effects are only transported downstream. The upstream flow is not affected by conditions and obstructions downstream.
The speed of sound is given as a:
a =
RT
Where =1.4 for air, R = gas constant, and T = reference static temperature (in absolute units).
The velocity, V, is then the product of the sound speed, a, and the Mach
number, M:
V = aM
14-61
Guidelines
Incompressible flows do not have such a variation of density. The key differentiation
between compressible and incompressible is the velocity of the flow. A fluid such as
air that is moving slower than Mach 0.3 is considered incompressible, even though
it is a gas. A gas that is run through a compressor is not truly considered compressible (in the thermodynamic sense) unless its velocity exceeds Mach 0.3. This is
important to note because analyses run as compressible can carry be harder to run,
and require more longer analysis times than incompressible flows.
Guidelines
The total temperature, Tt, is a key parameter as well, and is the sum of the static
temperature and the dynamic temperature. There are two way to calculate total
temperature:
1 2
Vi
-M
- or T t = T 1 + ---------T t = T + -------
2
2C p
2
V is the velocity, and Cp is the gas specific heat. For air, Cp = 1005 m2/(s2 K)
Note that the total temperature must be specified as a constant value for analyses
that do not have heat transfer and as a boundary condition for those that do.
The total pressure, Pt, is another useful quantity for running compressible analyses.
It is the sum of the static pressure and the dynamic pressure.
If the flow accelerates through a geometrically converging section to sonic speed,
the flow is considered to be choked. When choked, no additional mass can pass
through the constriction region, even as the pressure drop is increased (by lowering
the outlet back pressure). The flow downstream of the throat can then expand and
become supersonic.
14.16.1
Basic Solution Strategy
Compressible flow analyses are much more sensitive to the applied boundary conditions and material properties than incompressible analyses. If the applied settings
do not define a physically real flow situation, then the analysis can be very unstable
and may fail to reach a converged solution.
For this reason, we recommend that you understand the flow situation that you are
trying to analyze. Proper specification of the boundary conditions and material
properties will greatly improve the chances of a successful analysis.
Test-Runs: A technique that can be very helpful when starting a new analysis is to
mock up a two dimensional representation of the model to ensure that all conditions are correct. Inconsistent settings will be revealed very quickly as a 2D model
is run, allowing for much faster debugging of the analysis. When the settings properly define the analysis, they can be applied to the (usually) much bigger 3D (or
more detailed 2D) model with confidence that any additional adjustments to the
model have to be made to the mesh and not the fundamental set-up.
14-62
Guidelines
Meshing: To capture physical elements such as shocks, the mesh size will have to
be quite fine in critical areas. The mesh can be less fine in non-critical areas. A good
guideline governing mesh transition is that the mesh size should not transition by
more than a factor of four between neighboring fluid volumes. In general, a coarse
mesh will be more stable but less accurate. For this reason, as part of the test procedure described above, in some cases it is recommended to verify the analysis
set-up with a coarse mesh, and then when you are confident in your settings, refine
the mesh to improve accuracy.
Heat Transfer: To include heat transfer in a compressible analysis, apply Total

(stagnation) temperature boundary conditions instead of static temperatures at the
14-63
Guidelines
Materials: Use a material with a density that varies with Equation Of State. It is
very important to use the correct fluid reference quantities. The reference static
pressure and static temperature are used to initialize the density. Because of this,
the reference temperature needs to be reasonable and the reference pressure
needs to be exact for the gage reference point to be correct. Set these values on
the Material Editor by creating a new material, and entering them in the Reference
Values section:
Guidelines
inlets. Total temperature should also be applied to any solids or walls with known
temperature conditions. (Do not use a Static Temperature boundary condition to
define a known temperature in a compressible analysis. At a wall the value of static
and total temperature is the same, and should be applied as a total temperature.)
The Set Heat Transfer to On in the Analyze dialog. The value of Total Temperature
on the Analyze dialog will be ignored if heat transfer is enabled.
Note that when heat transfer is present in a compressible analysis, viscous dissipation, pressure work, and kinetic energy terms are calculated. It is only necessary to
enable heat transfer if you are solving for heat transfer or for flow velocities higher
than M = 3.0 if viscous dissipation is important or to capture a very crisp shock.
It is very important that the total temperature is specified correctly. A good test is
to run zero iterations and check that the Mach number at the inlet is the expected
value. If not, adjust the total temperature and inlet boundary conditions accordingly.
If heat transfer is not solved for, it is necessary to specify a Total temperature in the
Analyze dialog. The equation for total temperature is given above.
14.16.2
Internal Flow
Internal compressible flow is often found in industrial valves and nozzles. Such flow
is often fed by either a blow-down tank or a known flow rate. The mechanism used
to feed such a device is important as it determines the settings used for the analysis.
The first issue is to decide if the flow is truly compressible. A good test is to set up
the analysis as an incompressible flow (following standard best practices for incompressible flows), and run it. If the Mach number in a region of the device
approaches or exceeds 0.8, then the flow is likely compressible. In such a case, follow the steps given below to run the analysis as compressible.
If the device is fed from a pressurized holding tank, and the outlet pressure is known:
Inlet: Specify total pressure (Pt). (The total pressure will be the static
pressure of the non-moving air within the tank.)
Inlet: If running heat transfer, specify total temperature (Tt).
Outlet: Specify static pressure (P = 0)
14-64
Guidelines
Set the reference pressure equal to the ambient pressure on the Material Editor.
If the device is fed from a pressurized holding tank, and the outlet pressure is not known:
pressure of the non-moving air within the tank.)
Inlet: If running heat transfer, specify total temperature (Tt).
Set the reference pressure = ambient pressure.
Add an outlet extension to the device so that the specified static pressure does not influence or interfere with the flow as it leaves the physical
device. This will allow for the calculation of the true outlet pressure, and for
any shocks or expansion fans to form.
Inlet: Specify velocity (or volume flow rate) and total pressure (Pt).
(The total pressure will be the static pressure of the non-moving air within
the tank.)
Outlet: Specify Unknown condition
Set the reference pressure equal to the ambient pressure.
This set up will not allow for shocks or expansion fans at the device outlet.
Note that application of the mass flow rate boundary condition is generally not recommended. This is because a total pressure or a velocity condition would also be
necessary to define the model. The problem is that when either of these conditions
is applied in addition to a mass flow condition, the problem becomes over-constrained, and will not run well. The better approach is to not set the mass flow
boundary condition, and define the inlet with the total pressure or velocity and
static pressure, as described above.
14.16.3
External Flow
External compressible flow can be classified into two categories: aerodynamic

applications that are in open air (either at altitude or sea-level) and aerodynamic
applications in a wind-tunnel. Unlike internal flows, both feature flow that passes
14-65
Guidelines
If the model cannot be extended at the outlet, and the inlet velocity (or
volume flow rate) is known:
Guidelines
over and around a device (as opposed to through it). Examples include flow over a
wing, missile, or aircraft nacelle. The strategies for solving open-air and wind tunnel
analyses differ slightly in the domain size and typical inlet condition.
For open air applications, the solution domain is not defined as part of the model
(unlike a wind-tunnel). There are some basic guidelines that drive the size of the
domain based on the dimensions of the device. These are only guidelines, and are
subject to some variability depending on the circumstances
10y to 20y
y
x
10 x
10 x
For compressible open-air flows:
V, P
Unknown
Inlet: Apply the Velocity (of the object) and static pressure (P = 0)
(Total temperature if solving for heat transfer).
Outlet: Specify the Unknown condition
If the domain height is less than 20y (see above), then specify a slip
condition on the far-field boundary. If the boundary is 20y or more, then
either leave the far-field boundaries unspecified, making them walls, or
assign the free-stream velocity. The latter will help develop the flow
quicker, but will cause convergence problems if a shock hits it.
Modify the Reference Pressure (on the Material Editor) for the altitude.
If heat transfer is of interest, the altitude-correct Reference Temperature
should be specified as part of the material properties as well. The formula
14-66
Guidelines
below shows how to calculate reference pressure and temperature at altitude:

6
-1000 ft < hp < 36,000 ft
P alt = P sl ( 1 6.88 10 h p )
hp = altitude in feet;
P alt 0.1904
T alt = T sl ------- P sl
Palt = static pressure at altitude
5.2521
Talt = static temperature at altitude

Psl = pressure at sea level
Tsl = temperature at sea level
h p 36000
P alt
T = T sl ( 0.75187 )
If not solving for heat transfer, be sure to specify the total temperature
on the Analyze task dialog. Total Temperature is computed using this equation:
1 2
T t = T 1 + ----------- M
2
For compressible wind-tunnel flows, the inlet is typically fed from a blow-down
tank.
pressure of the non-moving air within the tank.) If the velocity is known,
specify it as well.
Set the reference pressure equal to the ambient pressure on the Material Editor.
For heat transfer, specify the total temperature at the inlet.
14-67
Guidelines
36,000 ft < hp < 65,000 ft
------------------------------
20, 806
= P sl 0.22432e
Guidelines
Angle of Attack: If the object has an angle of attack relative to the flow, it is better to re-orient the calculation domain instead of the object. The domain orientation
should be that the free-stream velocity and the domain sides are parallel:
Pressure
Velocity
14.17
Joule Heating
Joule heating is the generation of heat by passing an electric current through a

metal. Also known as resistance heating, this feature allows the simulation of
stove-top burner elements as well as electrical resistance heaters. User-supplied
inputs include current, voltage, and the resistivity of the metal.
Two boundary conditions are available to help define a Joule heating condition:
Current and Voltage. The typical way to define the loading is to assign a current
on one end of the solid through which electricity is passing and a voltage of 0 on
the other end:
Current
Voltage = 0
Electrically Heated Object
14-68
Flow Volume
Guidelines
Alternatively, a potential (voltage) difference can be applied across the device by

specifying a non-zero voltage on one end and a zero-value voltage on the other. In
this case, the current boundary condition is omitted.
Voltage = 0
Voltage (non-zero)
Length
Cross-Sectional
Area
Flow Volume
RA
L
The relationship between resistivity and resistance is: r = -------------
r = resistivity (ohms-length unit)

R = resistance (ohms)
L = length of the device
A = cross sectional area
A non-zero value for resistivity should always be specified for solids undergoing
Joule heating.
For non-conductive and insulative materials or materials in which Joule heating
does not occur, specify a resistivity value of 0.
As with any heat transfer analysis, a temperature needs to be specified somewhere
in the model (either as a temperature boundary condition or as a surrounding temperature for a film coefficient boundary condition).
Mesh objects heated by the Joule effect with at least two layers of elements across
the cross-section. This will ensure that there are enough nodes to resolve the temperature gradients across the device.
14-69
Guidelines
The Resistivity material property is the product of the resistance and the cross-sectional area divided by the length of the part. A value for resistivity is required for
any solid that is heated by the Joule effect.
Guidelines
Joule heating is invoked automatically if the Current and Voltage Boundary Conditions and the Resistivity Material Property are set. Additionally, heat transfer must
be enabled on the Analyze task dialog. There is not a separate button to invoke
Joule Heating.
A useful technique is to hand-calculate the temperature differential based on the
resistivity, applied current, and dimensions of the object. To do this:
1. Begin by computing the resistance, R, of the object using the length, L,

Area, A, and the resistivity, r:
rL
R = ----------A
2. Next use the Voltage, V, and the Resistance to compute the current, I:
I = VR
3. Calculate the dissipated power, P:
2
P = I R
4. The temperature differential is then computed using the power, length,
area, and thermal conductivity, K:
PL
T = ----------------------2KA
This will provide an estimate of the temperature change that will occur as a result
of Joule heating. It is recommended to compute the temperature change as a reality check to ensure that the specified values are physical and reasonable.
14.18
14.18.1
Motion Module
Introduction
The mission of the Motion Module is to analyze the effects of solids moving through
or within a fluid.
The interaction between a solid body in motion and the surrounding fluid is a key
aspect to the design of many mechanical devices. The CFdesign Motion Module
brings this capability to the world of product design as a key element of Upfront
14-70
Guidelines
CFD. Through simulation, this Module allows understanding the interaction between
fluids and moving solids to be integral to the product design process.
There are two principal ways of simulating the motion of solid objects with the
Motion Module: with Rotating Regions and as Moving Solids.
14.18.2
Rotating Regions
Rotating Regions are used to simulate turbomachinery devices such as pumps,

turbines, compressors, and fans. They are best suited for simulating rotating
objects that do not contact any other solid objects. Such devices are typically
impellers or fan blade/hub assemblies that induce flow by transferring energy to
the fluid through a momentum transfer.
Rotating Regions should be used to simulate turbomachinery devices that induce

flow through energy transfer. Such devices rely on the Corollas effect and centripetal acceleration. For turbomachinery devices, rotating regions will produce a more
accurate answer, and typically require less computational resources.
14.18.3
Moving Solids
Unlike Rotating Regions in which a special region surrounds the object in motion,
Moving Solids are solid objects that have motion assigned directly to them. Moving
Solids are more versatile than Rotating Regions, and there are several different
types of motion available:
Linear motion is the motion of a solid in a straight line. Examples
include a piston moving in a cylinder, a hydraulic ram in a chamber, and
objects on a conveyor belt moving through a curing process. The linear
motion of solids can be fully prescribed, or it can be driven by the flow. If
flow-driven, additional parameters are required including the bounds of
motion and relevant resistive or driving forces. Examples of flow-driven linear motion include the above items, as well as the simulation of valves
opening and closing.
14-71
Guidelines
A Rotating Region is actually a fluid material region that completely envelopes a

solid impeller. The motion parameters (rotational speed, inertia, etc.) are assigned
to the rotating region instead of to the impeller. During the analysis, the entire
rotating region (and the impeller that it surrounds) rotate relative to the surrounding analysis domain. The mesh within the region rotates as well.
Guidelines
Angular motion is the rotation of an object about a centerline. Examples of applications that use angular motion are positive displacement
pumps (such as gear pumps and trichodal pumps), check or reed valves,
and other devices with an angular movement. Unlike rotating regions
(described above), objects with an angular motion can have paths that
interfere--such as gear teeth in a gear pump or multiple mixing blades in an
egg-beater. The Motion chapter of this guide contains more information
about the use of rotating regions and angular motion for different applications.
Combined Linear and Angular motion allows objects to translate as
well as rotate about a user-specified axis. Examples of applications include
certain flow meters that rely on both components of motion.
Combined Orbital and Angular: A typical application for Combined
Orbital/Rotational motion is a pump shaft with an eccentric orbit (or whirl)
component. The shaft rotates about its centerline, but also has an eccentric
rotation about an additional axis. By specifying an orbit on an object, it is
possible to understand the force imbalance imparted on bearings and other
fixtures as a result of a shaft orbit.
Nutation is a type of motion used in several types of liquid flow
meters. A nutating object is inclined at an angle to a reference axis. As the
normal vector of the object rotates about the reference axis, the angle
between the normal vector and the reference axis remains constant. The
result is that the object actually wobbles about the reference axis, but does
not change angular position relative to it. A coin wobbling along its edge as
it slows from a spin is a good example of nutating motion.
Sliding Vane: The most common application of this type of motion is
found in sliding-vane positive displacement pumps. Vanes or pistons rotate
about the center-line of the impeller, but translate radially. The direction of
linear travel changes at every angular position. The axis of rotation, however, remains constant.
14.19
Rotating Regions: Turbomachinery
CFdesign includes the ability to analyze rotating devices surrounded by a static

(non-rotating) frame of reference. By physically rotating the device and the region
immediately surrounding it, this capability offers greater flexibility for analyzing
rotating machinery. Examples include pumps, fans, blowers, and turbines. Centrifugal, axial, and mixed configurations are supported. Multiple rotating components in
14-72
Guidelines
a device (such as the pump and turbine in an automotive torque converter) can be
analyzed.
This functionality gives the user the ability to analyze the flow within the blade passages of a rotating device. It also allows study of the interaction between rotating
and non-rotating geometry. A classic example is the interaction between the rotor
and the stator in an axial compressor or turbine. Another example is the influence
of a volute cutwater (tongue) on the exit flow from a centrifugal pump impeller.
14.19.1
Geometric Considerations
Areas in the model that are not rotating are analyzed in a static (absolute) frame of
reference. These regions are called static regions. (Obviously fluid in a static
region can move, but the volume itself does not rotate in space.)
The following points summarize the geometric considerations for setting up rotating
analyses:
All rotating objects must be completely immersed in a rotating region.
Such a region will rotate using its own relative rotating frame of reference.
The mesh that is generated in a rotating region will physically rotate
along with the parts that are immersed.
Immersed parts can be modeled as voids in the rotating region, or they
can be included as solids. (Solid objects in a rotating region will rotate at
the same speed as the rotating region.)
The interface between a rotating and a static region is called the
periphery zone. Within a periphery zone, the outer element faces of the
rotating region will slide along the neighboring element faces of the static
region.
The shape of a rotating region needs to correspond (loosely) to the
shape of the rotating device. Rotating regions are usually fairly simple
cylindrical shapes. This allows the element faces on both sides of the
periphery zone to fit together easily.
The rotating region should extend to roughly the mid-point between the
outer blade tips and the closest point of the surrounding non-rotating wall.
14-73
Guidelines
The CFdesign rotating machinery capability analyzes rotating devices using a locally
rotating frame of reference. This region completely surrounds a rotating object, and
is called the rotating region.
Guidelines
Do not apply any boundary conditions to nodes on the periphery zone.

Care should be exercised when constructing fluid geometry to avoid such a
condition.
Rotating regions from multiple rotating components must not overlap.
Devices such as gear pumps or the beaters of a kitchen mixer cannot be
modeled with the rotating machinery capability because their rotating
regions overlap.
All rotating devices must have a rotating region and a static region that
interact via the periphery zone. In other words, a rotating region cannot
directly contact a non-rotating solid region, even if the solid is not inside of
the rotating region. An example is a solid annulus surrounding the outside
of rotating region. The result will be that the solid annulus (which is supposed to be static) will rotate. The resultant images will be very unexpected.
Objects within a rotating region that have a uniform cross-section that
satisfy the requirements for mesh extrusion can be extruded. The mesh
inside of the rotating region, however, cannot be extruded.
The following graphics illustrate these principals:

Rotating Region
Axial Fan
(solid or cut-out)
Static Regions
14-74
Guidelines
Static Region
Pump Impeller
Periphery Zone
If the blade tip clearance is extremely small (often because of tight

seals), the surrounding static region can be eliminated. An example is
shown:
Rotating Region
Impeller
Outlet
Inlet
Static Regions
A rotating region must not be in direct contact with a solid region. The
outer edge of the rotating region must either be a fluid or an exterior
boundary.
14-75
Guidelines
Discharge
Volute
Rotating Region
Guidelines
14.19.2
Boundary Conditions
If the rotational speed of the rotor is known, then pressures will often be specified.
In many cases, the purpose of the analysis is to determine the flow rate generated
by the device for a given pressure. Apply a pressure rise across the device. This will
impose the resistance faced by the rotor. Note that it is recommended to start such
an analysis with equal pressures assigned to both the inlet and outlet. As the impeller starts rotating and moving flow, the pressure rise can be gradually imposed.
This can be done either manually or with a time-varying boundary condition.
Another situation involving a known rotational speed is that the flow rate is known,
and the pressure drop is the desired output quantity. For such a model, specify a
pressure of 0 gage at the inlet and the flow rate at the outlet. This method will
often solve faster than specifying a pressure on both the inlet and outlet.
If the rotational speed of the rotor is unknown (as in the case of the torque-driven
or the free-spinning scenarios), then a specified velocity or flow rate is most often
appropriate. Recall that a pressure MUST be assigned to at least one opening in the
model unless the model is fully enclosed.
Heat transfer boundary conditions can be applied as appropriate to conduct a heat
transfer analysis.
14.19.3
Running Rotational Motion Analyses
Rotating device analyses are always run transient (varying with time). This is
because the mesh of the rotating region physically rotates relative to the static
regions in the model. Transient will be set automatically on the Analyze dialog when
a part is designated as a rotating region.
A Time Step Calculator computes the ideal time step size for a known rotational
speed. The time step size is computed to be the amount of time per blade passage.
For cases in which the rotational speed is not known (for known torque and free
spinning analyses), use Intelligent Solution Control to automatically determine and
vary the time step size throughout the analysis. The time step size will be modified
to ensure that no more than three degrees of rotation pass for each time step. This
criteria has been found to be quite stable for rotating analyses.
14-76
Guidelines
In addition to the time step size, CFdesign automatically invokes several other settings for rotating devices: The number of iterations per time step is set to 1. The
Automatic Turbulence Startup is set to the Extend mode.
Be sure to set a Results Output frequency. This controls how frequently the time
steps are saved to the disk. Saved time steps can be used to animate the results
after the analysis is completed. Care should be exercised when setting the output
frequency to avoid saving so many results sets that your hard drive fills up.
As the analysis runs, the rotation of the rotating region (and any solids within the
region) will appear both computationally and visually in the run-time results viewer.
Note that it is not possible to change the mesh and continue a rotating region analysis from a saved iteration. If the mesh is changed, the analysis must be started
from iteration 0 (the beginning). This is a consequence of the nodal organization
and book-keeping that occurs during the initialization of a rotating region analysis.
14.19.4
Analysis Notes
The purpose of many rotating analyses is to obtain the flow rate for a known head
or pressure rise. The most basic approach to such a problem is to apply the pressure rise across the device as inlet and outlet boundary conditions, and then spin
the rotor or impeller at its known rotational speed. The problem with this approach
is that solution accuracy may be compromised because of the unrealistically fast
start-up of the device. Rotating analyses can be quite sensitive to instantaneous
changes in the rotational speed or to the back pressure.
14.19.4.1
Time Step Size for Known Rotational Speed
For many rotating devices, we have found that using a time step size equal to the
blade pass time allows a practical way to run enough revolutions to achieve accurate flow rate and/or pressure head prediction.
An example is a pump impeller with six blades. Using the blade pass time as the
time step size, a complete revolution is completed in just six time steps. Some
14-77
Guidelines
At the conclusion of an analysis, a comma separated variable file

(jobname_torque.csv) containing a time history of velocity and torque is written to
the working directory. This information is also accessible on the Review_Notes task
dialog.
Guidelines
devices require as many as 100 revolutions before reaching a steady-state condition. This time step strategy allows this requirement to be satisfied in a practical
manner.
To facilitate this, a time step calculator has been added to the Analyze task dialog
that computes the time step size based on either a prescribed number of degrees
per time step or the number of blades. Open the dialog by clicking the Estimate
button on the Analyze dialog when a rotating region is present:
Specify either the Degrees per Time Step or the Number of Blades, and the
time step will be computed based on the rotational speed specified as part of the
Rotating Region. If the number of blades is specified, the time step size will be computed using a single time step per blade passage.
If the model contains multiple rotating objects, he fastest rotational speed is used
as the basis for the time step size computed in this dialog.
The Time Step Calculator is performing the following calculation to determine the
time step size:
D
t = ----------N6
where t = time step (in seconds)
360
NumberofBlades
D = number of degrees per time step: D = -------------------------------------------(for a time step size = to a blade passage)
N = rotational speed (in RPM)
14-78
Guidelines
When using this approach, the impeller will not appear to move because with each
time step it rotates a complete blade passage. Additionally, this approach will not
produce a time-accurate solution for the interaction between the rotor and a stator
or a static volute. (It will produce accurate results for steady-state quantities such
as resultant flow rate.) To save results with a finer resolution or to obtain a time
accurate solution for the rotor-stator interaction, reduce the time step size to three
degrees per time step and run an additional revolution after completing the set of
multiple revolutions.
14.19.4.2
Non-Impulsive Startup
These separation areas prevent the blades from pumping as much fluid as they
would in reality. The forces and vortex generation is quite large when this happens.
In some cases, these vortices will be carried out of the impeller and a normal flow
field will evolve over time. However, in some instances the vortices and the separation remain and the flow rate through the device is greatly under predicted.
To prevent an impulsive start up, prescribe the impeller speed as a function of time
using a table. A good guideline is to set the rotation speed at 0 RPM at time 0, and
allow it to increase over the next 30 time steps to its full rated speed. If using a
time step size that allows the rotation of one passage per time step (as described in
the previous section), then multiply the time step size by 30 to determine the time
at which the impeller should be rotating at its full speed.
For example, if a six bladed fan is to rotate at 1000 RPM, the time step size would
be such that 60 degrees of rotation occurs per time step. At 1000 RPM, this works
out to a time step of 0.01 seconds. If the impeller is to ramp up over the first 30
time steps, then our ramp up time is 30 x 0.01 = 0.3 seconds. The rotational speed
table would then look like:
Impeller Speed
(RPM)
Time, sec
1000
0.3
1000
100
14-79
Guidelines
When a constant rotation speed is prescribed, an impulsive start means that the
impeller accelerates from a stop to its rated speed in just one time step.This is
hardly a realistic condition! In some devices, an impulsive start has been found to
create large separation zones on the pressure side of the blade passage.
Guidelines
(The last line is to hold the rotational speed constant through the duration of the
analysis.)
14.19.4.3
Flow Initialization Approach
The approach described in the previous two sections works well for most applications, but if flow reversal throughout the device is a problem and is not washed out,
then an additional approach is to first run two revolutions with a known flow rate
running through the device. The boundary conditions would include a velocity or
flow rate on one opening and a pressure on the other. (The placement of the flow
rate and pressure should be based on numerical stability. Place the specified pressure where it makes sense to do so--not too close to the impeller if possible.) After
two revolutions, replace the flow rate boundary condition with a pressure condition
(to impart the specified head rise), and continue the analysis for another two or
three revolutions. The flow rate will then adjust slightly, resulting in a better overall
solution.
The challenge with this approach is knowing the appropriate flow rate with which to
start the analysis with. This can usually be calculated using velocity triangles based
on the known rotating speed and the blade angle, and the assumption of ideal flow.
This initial flow just needs to loosely approximate the operating condition, and will
provide a much better starting condition for the device than an impulsive no-flow
start.
14.19.5
Visualization Notes
Results from a rotating analysis are viewed using the visualization tools described
in the Results Visualization chapter of this guide. It is often useful to animate
results to more fully understand the rotational effects and the interaction between
the rotating and static geometry.
Velocity can be presented in the relative frame with the Feature Tree sub menus:
On the Results_Scalar_Velocity Magnitude branch, right click on Velocity Magnitude,
and select Reference Frame. The choices are Absolute and Relative. Absolute is the
default. Relative is the velocity flow field with the rotational component (r omega)
subtracted out. This is very useful for visualizing the flow within the impeller blade
passages. Note that particle traces will show the relative velocity if this selection is
made.
14-80
Guidelines
Wall results data on the surfaces of rotating regions can be obtained for any time
step. Prior to going into the Wall Results dialog however, it is necessary to first go to
Review_Results, and activate those times steps on which wall results are required.
After doing this, select the desired time step by right-clicking on the Results branch
of the Feature Tree, and then selecting the time step from the Iterations/Time Step
menu.
14.20
Moving Solids
To define motion, the basic movement parameters are specified in the Motion Editor. Such quantities include the speed or displacement/position with time as well as
driving and resistive forces for flow-induced motion. All geometry-dependent
parameters are specified on the main Motion task dialog. These items include the
direction of travel, the center of rotation, as well as the initial position and the
bounds of movement for flow-induced motion.
14.20.1
Geometric Considerations
Unlike Rotating Objects, a special envelope is not necessary around the moving
object.
Because the initial position of moving objects can be set in the Motion task dialog,
objects can be constructed in the CAD model where it is convenient. When preparing the analysis model in CFdesign, the object can then be moved to its correct
starting location. Note that all bounds information (for flow-driven analyses) will be
relative to the selected starting position.
Moving objects can start completely inside the flow volume, partially inside, or
completely outside. Moving objects can pass through the flow volume, and exit
completely. If the moving solid starts outside of the flow volume but overlaps or
14-81
Guidelines
The support motion types are described in the introduction to the Motion section.
For all but sliding vane, the option to prescribe the motion manually or to let the
flow drive the motion is available. (Sliding vane only allows user-prescribed
motion.)
Guidelines
even touches it, then the volume outside of the flow volume will be maintained as
part of the flow volume, even after the solid leaves that region. This is illustrated:
When an object moves through the fluid volume, the mesh of the object will appear
to overlap the flow mesh. The solid elements will block out the fluid elements, and
the velocity of the moving solid will be transferred to the nodes of the underlying
fluid.
If heat transfer is of interest, then the energy equation is solved between the fluid
and the solid nodes. Obviously the heat transfer between the moving solid and the
fluid will be a function of the respective materials as well as the velocity of the solid
and of the fluids.
The motion of a moving solid can be described such that the solid will collide with
static solids. The solver will allow this type of motion, and care should be taken to
ensure that physically real solid motion is defined. A Preview function is provided
that allows the motion to be practiced prior to running the analysis. This is
described in the Motion chapter of this guide.
14.20.2
Meshing Guidelines
CFdesign uses a masking technique to model the interaction between moving solids and the fluid through which the solids move. As a moving solid passes through
fluid, its elements mask the fluid nodes, meaning that the velocity on those nodes
is governed by the motion of the solid. The mesh density of a moving solid and the
14-82
Guidelines
fluid in its path must be fine enough to adequately represent the interaction
between the solid and the fluid.
The graphic on the right is an example of a
fluid mesh that is much too coarse. As the
solid moves through the fluid, there are
times when the solid elements do not
mask any fluid nodes. The result is that
the solid has no effect on the fluid.
Guidelines
14-83
Guidelines
If the fluid mesh is refined so that there is

one row of masked nodes within the solid,
the mesh is still too coarse.
Because of the motion of the solid, a pressure gradient will exist through it. With
only one row of masked fluid nodes, only
one pressure value can be transferred to
the fluid at any given location. The gradient will be lost.
The velocity results are shown for this

mesh. The velocity field along the solid
object is very irregular, and should appear
all blue. The red areas are the fluid results
bleeding through because of an inadequate fluid mesh.
The pressure field with this mesh is highly

irregular as well.
14-84
Guidelines
To adequately mesh the moving solid and fluid path in this example, a minimum of
two rows of masked nodes throughout the fluid path are required.
A more universal guideline is that the
moving solid must be meshed finely
enough to resolve gradients through it,
and the fluid path must be meshed with a
similar element size.
Such a strategy will allow proper masking
of fluid nodes, and will support gradients
within the pressure field.
Guidelines
The velocity field for this finer mesh is

shown. No bleed-through occurred, and
the results appear quite plausible.
The multiple layers of masked nodes allow

the pressure gradient to be resolved well,
as shown on the right. As the object
moves upward, high pressures on the top
surface and lower pressure on the bottom
surface are apparent.
14-85
Guidelines
14.20.3
Moving Surface Parts
When thin volumes are set into motion, the mesh requirements in the part itself
and in the motion path in the flow can be quite severe. The moving volume must
have a mesh that is fine enough to resolve the gradients through its thickness, and
the flow path must have a correspondingly fine mesh.
To provide a more convenient method of analyzing the motion of thin objects, the
Motion Module support moving surface parts. This reduces the meshing requirements on both the moving part (because it is a surface part) and the motion path in
the surrounding fluid:
On the Materials task dialog, create a surface part by assigning a solid material to
the intended surface. The properties of the material and the shell thickness are
used to compute the mass of the part, and influence the movement for flow-driven
motion. For user-prescribed motion, the physical properties do not influence the
motion. On the Motion dialog, change the selection mode to Surface, and select the
surface or surfaces that are to move.
Guidelines
Any of the motion types can be applied to moving surfaces. The motion
can be user-prescribed or flow-induced.
Surface parts cannot be coupled with moving solids using Motion
Groups. Surface parts can, however, be grouped with other surface parts in
Motion groups.
Moving surface parts cannot contact moving solids at their starting
location.
Moving surface parts can fully enclose a region.
Moving surface parts do not have to be planar--they can be arbitrarily
shaped.
14-86
Guidelines
Moving surface parts must not come into contact with parts that are
extrusion meshed. The interaction between surface parts and extrusion
meshed parts is not supported.
While moving surface parts can initially touch non-moving solid parts,
they should not be in complete contact with a solid at their starting point.
The reason is that after a small amount of movement, fluid will be trapped
between the surface and the solid, and the pressure in the fluid may be
very high.
To add clarity when visualizing the results of a motion analysis with a
moving surface part, the moving surface is shown with a virtual thickness.
This thickness is purely graphical, and does not influence the motion or the
flow around the part.
The meshing requirements in the path of a moving surface are significantly reduced compared to the path of a moving volume. Unlike moving
volumes, the solid elements do not mask the underlying fluid elements, and
the fluid mesh does not have to be fine enough to resolve the solid.
In the image on the left, the 3D mesh surrounding the moving shell is quite coarse.
As the valve opens due to the force of the fluid, very little fluid can pass around it
until it has opened about half way. In reality, fluid would leak past such a valve at
the onset of motion, and is shown in the model with a finer mesh on the right:
14-87
Guidelines
The mesh should, however, be fine enough to resolve the pressure gradients on the
surface. Likewise, the mesh within the fluid surrounding the moving shell should be
fine enough to allow flow to pass around the surface as it moves.
Guidelines
Keep in mind that the amount of bookkeeping necessary to track the motion of a
moving surface is similar to that of a moving solid. Because of this, moving surface
motion analyses are as resource intensive as moving solid analyses, for a given
mesh density. The advantage of moving surfaces is that the mesh in the motion
path does not have to be as dense as for a moving solid analysis.
14.20.4
Radiation for Moving Parts
Radiation is now supported for moving solids. The view factors on a moving object
are automatically recomputed when the part has traveled 2% of the maximum
bounding box diagonal of the computation domain. This value can be changed by
modifying the following parameter in the CFdesign Flags file:
ViewFactorUpdate A
where A = the percentage of the maximum diagonal. To increase the distance
between each view factor update to 5%, for example, add this line to your flags
file:
ViewFactorUpdate 5
This would change the tolerance to 5% of the max diagonal.
Increasing the distance between view factor updates will reduce computation time,
but may reduce the accuracy of the heat transfer solution if the surrounding static
geometry changes shape abruptly. Conversely, if the static geometry is uniform,
then view factors between the walls and the moving solid will probably not change
quickly, and a larger distance between updates will not adversely affect solution
accuracy.
Guidelines
Moving objects that experience radiation heat transfer must not touch
any stationary object or wall at any point in the analysis. This includes the
as-built location as well as anywhere in the motion path.
Radiation cannot be used for rotating regions--it is only for moving solids.
Moving parts must be opaque. They cannot have a non-zero value of
transmissivity in their material definition.
14-88
Guidelines
14.20.5
Automatic Time Step Determination
CFdesign will determine and adjust the time step size (shown on the Analyze dialog) if Intelligent Solution Control is enabled (which it is by default). Click the Estimate button on the Analyze dialog to compute an initial time step size. To manually
set the time step size, disable Intelligent Solution Control on the Solution Control
dialog.
When Intelligent Solution Control is enabled, the time step for user-prescribed
motion is calculated and set automatically based on the specified distance and/or
velocity.
Intelligent Solution Control will automatically adjust under-relaxation parameters to

remove instabilities from the calculation. We have found that doing this does not
affect the time accuracy of the solution appreciably, and that solution stability can
be greatly improved.
More information about Intelligent Solution Control is provided in the Analyze/Solve
chapter of this book.
14.20.6
Solid Motion Solution Strategy
Solid body motion analyses are always run transient. When a moving solid material
is assigned, certain Solution settings are automatically set. Such settings include
switching the analysis to transient, setting the time step, and setting the number of
internal iterations to one per time step. Additionally, Mesh Enhancement is turned
Off. Weve found that for some Solid Motion analyses, the presence of Mesh
Enhancement can cause stability problems during the analysis. Because it is disabled, additional care should be taken when defining the mesh size to ensure that
the mesh density is adequate for the flow.
14-89
Guidelines
The time step for flow-driven motion is calculated automatically by initially using a
value based on the surrounding flow velocity and/or the initial velocity of the
object. As the object accelerates, the time step will automatically decrease to satisfy the basic criterion that an object in motion should not move through more than
one element per time step. Adjusting the time step in this way has been shown to
balance calculation efficiency with solution accuracy.
Guidelines
Setting the time step save interval and the number of times steps are left to the
user. Be careful not to set a save interval that fills the hard disk with time step
results sets.
As an object moves through a fluid, the space that was once occupied by the object
is converted to a fluid. With this in mind, it is recommended that when applying slip
conditions to a symmetry wall that cuts through a moving solid, that they be
applied to the surface of the object that will become a fluid boundary after the solid
has moved away. Not applying a slip condition to the surface of the solid (at its
starting location) will result in a wall surface within the slip plane.
In most devices with a moving solid, there will be regions of fluid that are isolated
from other regions during some point in the movement. An incompressible fluid will
not allow pressure waves to travel throughout the medium, and may cause solution
instabilities. Additionally, objects that are to move due to flow-induced forces may
not move at all. For this reason, the use of compressibility is recommended for
flow-induced motion analyses. Enable Compressible in the Analyze dialog. For liquids and gases, this will cause pressure waves to move throughout the device, and
will produce a much more realistic solution for flow-induced motion.
If Intelligent Solution Control is not used, then it is recommended to apply convergence controls to pressure on the Solution Controls dialog. Use of a value of 0.25
for pressure helps stability, and will damp out noise from the calculation.
14.20.7
Continuing after Making Changes
Due to the organization of motion data, it is not generally possible to continue a

motion analysis from existing results if changes have been made to the mesh,
boundary conditions, or motion parameters. If settings of a motion analysis are
modified and the analysis continued from a saved time step, a warning will be
given, and the analysis will be prevented from continuing. In particular, Motion
changes that cannot be made mid-run include:
14-90
Type of motion (linear, angular, etc.)

Direction of motion (user-prescribed)
Velocity or displacement with time (for user-prescribed)
Whether the motion is Flow-Induced or not
Removing a motion assignment from a solid
Guidelines
To stop a part with a user-prescribed motion from moving part-way through an

analysis, either construct a motion table so that after a certain time its displacement does not change (or its velocity is 0). For a flow-driven part, a part can be
stopped mid-run by modifying its bounds so that it cannot move from its current
location. Alternatively, modify its material density so that it is so heavy that the
flow cannot continue to move it.
Obviously, if none of the changes described above are made to the Motion analysis,
the solution can be stopped and continued.
There are some parameters, however, that can be changed mid-run, and the analysis made to continue:
Note that it is possible to run an analysis without motion assignments, stop it,
assign motion, and then continue without losing field results. The saved results
files, however, will be deleted from the analysis directory after the field results are
interpolated onto the analysis mesh.
14.20.8
Output Tables
A .csv file is written for every moving solid in a motion analysis that contains a
time history of the linear and angular velocity, linear and angular displacement,
force and torque. This file is named with the analysis name and the part name and
the word motion. For example, the motion file for an analysis called Heating-Process that contains a moving solid called Product would be called:
HEATING-PROCESS_PRODUCT_1_motion.csv.
(In general, this will be the same name as assigned in the CAD model. However, for
some models, the name will be a combination of the name of the CAD part and the
name of the surrounding part.)
This file lists the linear and angular velocity, the linear and angular displacement,
the force, and the torque for each time step of the analysis. This data is very useful
for understanding the dynamic state of each part throughout the analysis.
14-91
Guidelines
Max and Min Bounds (for flow-driven)

Forces (driving and resistance, including spring parameters, for flowdriven)
Material properties (particularly the solid density)
Guidelines
The linear and angular displacement values are relative to the initial position of the
object as specified using the Initial Position slider on the Motion task dialog. Pay
particular attention to this if the initial position differs from the as-built location in
the CAD model.
Note that the force and torque values are the net values, and include driving,
resistance, collision, contact forces as calculated in the Motion module. The hydraulic force and torque are just the force and torque imparted on the object by the
fluid, and do not include any forces specified in the motion definition. The hydraulic
values are reported in the Wall dialog.
These files are also accessible directly from the User Interface, and are found in the
Notes tab of the Review task. Click the Motion Results button to open the Motion
file.
If a motion analysis contains multiple moving parts, the data for each part is displayed on a separate tab, and is selectable from the lower-left side of the dialog.
14-92
CHAPTE R 15
15.1
Computing
Introduction
CFdesign has several innovative methods for leveraging computing power to ensure
maximum performance and efficiency. The basic CFdesign architecture is built upon
a client-server model, which serves as the foundation for the Fast Track and Queuing operations. By separating the User Interface from the Solver, it is possible to
shut down the interface after the analyses is started. This foundation also provides
the basis for Fast Track--a way to run analyses on a networked machine different
from the machine that contains the original model.
CFdesign v10 for High Performance Computing is the first version of CFdesign to be
fully parallelized. It is configured to utilitze shared and distributed memory computing technologies. This is an extremely important milestone in the development of
Up Front CFD as it leverages distributed computing technology to run more design
iterations with greater complexity.
15.2
15.2.1
CFdesign Client-Server
Introduction
CFdesign is built upon a client-server model. The user interacts with CFdesign
through the Interface Client (CFdesign.exe). When the command to start the analysis is given, a signal is sent to the Server (CFdserv10.exe) indicating that the analysis needs to begin. The Server in turn sends a signal to the Solver (cfdcalc.exe).
This last step initiates the transfer of the model data from the Interface to the
Solver and then instructs the Solver to commence with the calculation. While the
analysis is running, the visual results are transferred from the Solver back to the
Interface to provide for the Run-Time Results Display. When the analysis is complete, the Server directs the Solver to send the final results back to the Interface.
15-1
Computing
On a stand-alone installation, this entire process is transparent to the user. After

hitting Go, the analysis runs, the analysis data files are kept in the users working
directory as the communication between the Server and the Interface and Solver
clients is managed automatically.
15.2.2
Fast Track
This client-server model allows CFdesign users to run analyses on a remote (networked) computer. This kind of implementation is called Fast Track. The analysis
model is constructed and meshed on the local computer (using the CFdesign Interface), but the actual calculation occurs on a remote computer. In this situation, the
Server directs the Interface to put the analysis model files physically on the remote
Solver computer for the calculation. When completed, the Server moves the files
back to the Interface (Users) computer.
15.2.3
Server Manager
For most installations, the Server is configured automatically during the installation
process. However, there is a dialog that controls the operation of the Server.
Located in the installation directory, this dialog is launched by clicking on servman.exe, and is shown:
The Installation Directory is the CFdesign load point. The Analyze Directory, by
default, is a sub-directory within the CFdesign installation but can be any writable
15-2
Computing
directory on the local machine. This is where temporary files are written during the
analysis. The Install button registers the Server as a Windows service. This causes
the Server to start automatically every time the machine is started. The Installation
and Analyze Directory fields are set during the installation. They can be changed
manually, if necessary. Additionally, the Server is started for the first time during
the Installation.
If the Server must be stopped (such as when installing an update to the Server),
open this dialog, and click the Stop button. Be sure to start the service again after
the new file is in place.
15.2.4
15.2.4.1
Installing on a File Server Computer

Introduction
As part of every analysis, temporary files are written to an analyze directory

located on the users machine. Additionally, a small program (the Server Manager)
that configures and manages the server process must also be installed on each
users computer. A separate installation program (ClientofFileServer.exe) is
included on the installation CD that installs these items, and must be run on each
users machine. This is very quick, and installs the Server Manager, creates a local
Analyze directory, and creates the necessary environment variables.
15.2.4.2
Installation
As part of the software installation on the file server, be sure to check the Centralized File Server Install box in the Select Features dialog.
After installing the software on the file server, create a domain user account for the
service. (This may require assistance from your Information Technology or Techni-
15-3
Computing
CFdesign can be installed such that the installation files reside on a file server
machine, and the User Interface and Solver run on users local machines. The
server process called CFD Server 10 runs locally and manages the communication
between the User Interface and the Solver (this is true for a single node installation
as well). In this type of configuration, however, the service (running on the local
machine) must run under an account that has read-only access on the file server
machine. Otherwise, the service will not have the necessary privileges to send commands to the executable residing on the file server.
Computing
cal Support Group.) This can also be done between two machines within the same
workgroup by creating the same account on both machines. This account should
have read-write privileges in general, but can have read-only access on the file
server. Additionally, this account needs the Log On As A Service privilege.
On each users machine, as administrator, run the ClientofFileServer.exe found
on the Installation CD. This will prompt for:
A directory on the local machine where the analyze directory and the
Server Manager are to be installed.
The UNC path of the CFdesign network installation.
The account name and password of the service account.
If the service account is not automatically granted the Log On as a Service right,
then it may be necessary to manually perform the following steps on the client
machine:
Starting the Control Panel,

Go to Administrative Tools,
Select Services.
Click on the Cfd Server 10 service.
On the Properties dialog, click the Log On tab.
Click the This Account bullet, and enter the account login name and
password.
Click Apply.
15.3
Fast Track
The Fast Track Option is a way to run analyses on remote computers (on your network). It is a way to temporarily ramp up analysis capability by using (often underutilized) in-house computer resources. This is not an ASP model nor is it distributed
computing. Alternatively, it is an innovative way to run multiple analyses on multiple computers. Temporary Solver licenses can be leased for a few weeks or a few
months at a time. (Consult your Account Manager for details.) With these licenses,
you can perform numerous analyses simultaneously, offering a great way to
explore all those what if scenarios that are critical to a successful design effort.
The analyses are set up locally (on the Interface Computer), but assigned to run on
the machine chosen in the Analysis Computer drop menu. Every machine on the
15-4
Computing
network that is set up as an Analysis Computer will be listed here. The Server
Monitor, accessible by hitting the Server Monitor tab, lists all available Analysis
computers and their status:
Detailed set-up instructions are provided in Fast-Track.pdf, found in your CFdesign

installation folder. To summarize the set up of an analysis computer: install the
CFdesign software (select the Solver-only option) and configure the licensing.
Ensure that the process called cfdserv10.exe is running (if not, click on the file
called servman.exe to start it).
To run an analysis on an eligible Analysis Computer, select its name from the Analysis Computer drop menu (on the Interface machine), and hit GO. The model data
will transmit to the waiting Analysis Computer, and the analysis will proceed. As the
analysis runs, results will be sent back to the interface machine (where the model
was built), for viewing with the Results tools. During the analysis, the model can be
closed and CFdesign shut down on the local (Interface) machine.
Care should be taken to NOT shut down CFdesign on the Interface machine
until after the first iteration is completed.
Later, when the analysis is opened on the Interface machine, the current progress
or the finished results will automatically be sent from the Analysis machine.
15-5
Computing
On the Interface computer, the host-name of each available Analysis Computer

must be added to the server.cfg file found in the CFdesign installation folder. This
will cause each Analysis Computer to be listed in the Server Monitor on the Interface Computer.
Computing
15.4
Analysis Queue (Batch Mode)
The Analysis Queue in CFdesign allows multiple analyses to be run in series, in

much the same way as a batch process can be made to automate a succession of
events. Instead of relying on a DOS batch file, however, the analysis queue
requires no special steps, and is managed through the user interface.
To add analyses to the queue, simply hit the Go button on the Analyze dialog. The
first analysis will start to run immediately. Close the CFdesign interface (the analysis will continue to run). Open a subsequent analysis, and hit Analyze_Go to add it
to the Queue. When Go is hit, the analysis will not run immediately. Instead, it will
be added to the queue, and the word Queued will appear in the Status bar in the
lower left corner of the Interface. Queued analyses will be run in the order that they
were submitted.
Analyses in the queue will be listed in the Server Monitor tab of the Analyze task
dialog. When an analysis is completed, it is removed from the list.
At any time while an analysis is running, it can be opened in the CFdesign interface
and the current state of the solution will be loaded for display.
To remove an analysis from the Queue, open it in the CFdesign interface. A message in the Status bar will indicate that the analysis is in the Queue. To remove it,
simply hit the Stop button on the Analyze dialog. That analysis will then be
removed from the queue and will be removed from the list in the Server Monitor.
If an analysis diverges or stops because of errors, the next analysis in the queue
will start.
When an analysis is completed, open it in the CFdesign interface. Is the analysis
was run on a remote machine (via Fast Track), open the analysis on the machine
from which it was launched. This step is very important to ensure that the all of the
analysis data is written to the cfd file. Do not attempt to manually copy over files
from the solver machine back to the interface machine. This will corrupt the analysis (cfd) file, and will likely cause your results to be lost.
When you exit the interface, it is necessary to save the analysis when prompted.
15-6
Computing
15.5
High Performance Computing
As concept-to-delivery time frames continue to shrink, simulation is increasingly

becoming more of an integral part of the design process. Ever-increasing computing speed is needed to ensure that simulation times do not impede the product
development cycle.
In v10, the Solver has been parallelized to utilize shared and distributed memory
computing technologies. Graphic visualization processes have also been improved
to utilize multiple core hardware.
For more information about CFdesign for High Performance Computing, please consult Blue Ridge Numerics.
Computing
15-7
Computing
15-8
Index
Index
Abaqus 12-3
absolute pressure BC 5-5
absolute velocity 14-80
Accuracy in Wildfire 3-14
Acis 1-8, 3-26, 9-31
Acis part names 3-30
activation energy 7-12
add analysis to a
project 13-3
adiabatic compressible
flow 7-11, 7-18
Advanced functions 1-6,
14-1
Advanced mesh
controls 6-39
Advanced Solution
Control 9-35
advanced turbulence
quantities 9-15
advection schemes 9-38
albedo 14-58
altitude effects 14-8
analysis 13-1
analysis computer 9-29,
15-4
Analysis Intelligence 9-
31
analysis name 10-25

analysis notes 2-23
analysis queue 15-6
analysis report 10-21
analysis server 9-29
analysisname.res.s# 9-
33
72
angular velocity 14-91

animation of results 10-
19
animation speed 10-19

annotations 10-14, 11-8
annulus surfaces 6-4
34
attenuation 14-41
author of a report 10-25
Auto Turb (ATSU) 9-14
Auto-Close 4-11
Automatic Convergence
Assessment 9-35, 14-
Automatic Layer
Adaptation 6-49
Automatic Mesh
Sizing 6-13
Automatic Size button 6-
14
automatic wall
specification 5-20
AutoPrep 1-15, 3-12
axial velocity 7-57
axis of nutation 8-57
axis of rotation 8-21, 8-37
axisymmetric 14-45
background color 2-17, 3-
background
temperature 5-11
baffles 7-40
Basic functions 1-6, 14-1
batch mode 15-6
bias factor 6-46
bivarient nonNewtonian 14-5
blade passage 14-78
blanking 2-35
blanking undo 2-36, 11-8
board 7-74
Boundary Conditions
dialog 2-47, 5-2
boundary layer flows 14-
24
Boundary Mesh
Adaptation 6-50
bounds 8-8, 8-23, 8-37, 839, 8-59
bulk data from
project 11-34
bulk flow rate 11-33
bulk modulus 7-8
bulk output files 11-34
bulk results 13-11
bulk velocity
components 11-34
buoyancy 14-9
buttons 2-53
CAD Dependent 2-31, 3-4

CAD Integration 1-2
CAD-KEY 3-26
Carreau 7-15
case 7-74
CATIA v5 1-7, 3-31, 4-3, 7-
34
cavitation 9-17, 11-40, 14-
36
Celestial Orientation 9-
20
center of nutation 8-58

center of rotation 8-22, 839, 11-40
centrifugal pump
material 7-62
centrifugal pump/blower
material 7-59
cfdserv10.exe 15-1, 15-5
change analysis
model 9-29
changing entity
names 2-38
check box 2-55
check valves 7-65
city (solar) 9-19
clamping 11-13
clash detection 3-32
client/server 9-29
cloud cover 14-58
coefficient of
performance 7-87
collapsing menus 2-55
collision detection 8-79
collisions 8-74
I-1
Index
Analyze dialog 2-50

analyze directory 15-2
angular
displacement 14-91
angular motion 8-18, 14-
Ansys 12-4
Applied Force 8-76
archive file 2-14
Arrhenius 7-12
Arrows 6-12
arrows check box 6-7
asphalt emissivity 14-57
associative selection 2-
Index
colored stripes for

loads 5-21
combined linear/
angular 8-34, 14-72
combined orbital and
angular 14-72
Compact thermal
model 7-73
Compass Direction 9-20
component
temperatures 10-12
component thermal
summary 7-79
compressibility 7-8
compressible flow 9-3, 9-
38
external 14-65
internal 14-64
compressible liquid 7-8,
14-31
compression angle 8-31

compression
displacement 8-15
compression force 8-15
compression torque 8-31
compressors 14-71
conclusions in a
report 10-27
condensation 14-35
condensed water 9-16
conduction 14-8
conduction-only 9-2
conductivity 7-7, 7-22, 7-
91
configurations 1-6
conjugate heat
transfer 14-19
constant eddy
viscosity 9-14
Constant in Time 8-77
constant internal fan
flow rate 7-56
constant loss
coefficient 7-46
constant property
type 7-10
contact information 1-16
contact resistance 7-27
Continue From 9-29
control method 7-90
I-2
convection boundary
condition 5-8
convection
coefficient 11-41
convergence controls 9-
37
Convergence Monitor 210, 9-41, 10-2

convergence plot 10-26
coordinate systems 2-37
copper content 7-84
copper thickness 7-84
corners 14-3
corporate logo in a
report 10-25
Cosmos 12-5
country (solar) 9-19
Cp/Cv 7-8
create analysis 1-8
Current boundary
condition 5-10
current boundary
condition 14-68
curvature 6-16
cusp surfaces 6-4
customization 2-10
cut surface 11-13
cutoff pressure 11-40
cutoff strain rate 7-14
cutoff viscosity 7-14
cyclic symmetry 14-24
cyclical motion 8-10, 826, 8-61
cylindrically-shaped
resistance 7-39
27
deleting a note 10-15

deleting a report
section 10-24
density 7-7, 7-22
Design Communication
Center 1-5, 11-43
Design Review 1-4
Design Review Center 14, 2-10, 10-17, 11-34,
11-47, 13-9, 13-12
Design Review
Server 13-12
die (junction) 7-74
dielectric 7-85
diffuse energy
transfer 14-41
direction vector 8-7, 8-35,
8-67
displacement 14-91
Display menu 2-25
distributed
computing 15-7
distributed resistance 621, 6-44, 7-35, 7-40, 14-
20
23
diurnal 14-59
diurnal heating 9-18
documentation 1-5
domain shape 3-10
drag accuracy 14-7
drag correlation 11-32
DRC 11-47, 13-9
driving force 8-12
driving nutation
torque 8-63
driving torque 8-28
Dynamic Image 1-5, 2-13,
10-20, 11-42
7-19
Darcy Equation 7-51, 14database materials 7-4,

date in a report 10-25
default analysis
options 9-2
degrees of freedom 8-73,
8-75
Degrees per time step 923, 14-78

delete from report 10-23
delete particle traces 11-
Earth 8-78, 9-6, 11-32

edge bias factor 6-46
edge curvature 6-16
edge diagnostics 6-8
Edge Merge 2-46, 4-3
edge mesh size 6-45
editting a note 10-15
effective PCB
properties 7-80
Index
electrical resistivity 7-91

element 6-1
element size criteria 6-46
embedded surfaces 7-28
emissivity 5-12, 7-8, 7-22,
14-41, 14-57
empirical film
coefficient 9-40
end layering 6-30
energy balance 10-9, 1439, 14-52
engagement angle 8-31
engagement
displacement 8-15
engagement force 8-15
engagement torque 8-31
entry field 2-54
equation of state 7-11, 9-
error estimation 10-4

error messages 2-9
Estimate button 9-22
Euler or invisid flow 5-6
existing analysis 1-10
exiting CFdesign 2-25
expanding menus 2-55
export options 2-14
extended ATSU 9-15
external fan boundary
condition 5-9
external fan rotational
speed 5-9
external flow 14-5
External Volume 2-46, 4-
15
Extrude Mesh button 6-
28
extruded fan blades 6-26

extrusion 6-26
extrusion direction 6-29
extrusion guidelines 6-34
extrusion layers 6-30
fan blades 6-26
fan curves 14-4
fans 14-71
Fast Track 1-4, 3-19, 9-29,
13-15, 15-2, 15-4
FEA deck 12-2
loads 5-22
materials 7-96
part names 3-30
results 11-6
FEMAP 12-5
Fieldview 2-14
file export options 2-14

File menu 2-12
file types 1-12
fill voids in CATIA 3-34
film coefficient 11-41
film coefficient boundary
condition 5-8
film coefficient result 11-
40
filtering 11-13
first order polynomial
property variation 7-
15
flags file 2-56

flow core in Pro/E 3-9
flow driven motion 8-42
flow geometry 3-9
flow initialization 14-80
flow off 9-2
flow on 9-2
flow types
boundary layer 14-24

moist gas 14-34
radiation 14-39
steam/water 14-35
supersonic flow 14-61
transonic 14-61
flow volume in acis/

parasolid 3-26
flow volumes in CATIA 3-
32
flow-driven angular 8-26

flow-driven linear 8-10
flow-driven nutation 8-61
flow-driven orbital 8-51
fluctuation value 10-5
fluid property types 7-7
force 14-91
force location 8-78
Force Magnitude 8-77
forced convection 14-18
forces on surface
parts 10-12
FR4 7-80
frame around a note 10-
15
free area ratio 7-48, 14-
22
free motion 8-73

friction factor 7-47, 7-48,
14-21
gage pressure boundary

condition 5-5
gas constant 7-11
general scalar
variable 9-16
Generate Report 10-28
geometry factor (G) 7-88
geometry inversion 3-10
geometry modification 338, 13-3
Geometry Task 4-2
global scalar 11-10
global vector 11-12
GMT 9-19
gotolink fanthermostat 7-60
gotolink options_solar
heating 14-58
gotolink
transmissivity 7-22
Granite 3-17, 4-3
graphics files 10-27
graphics region 2-2
graphics text file 10-16
Grashof number 14-9
grass emissivity 14-57
gravity 8-73, 8-78, 11-31,
14-10
gravity for moving

solids 9-7
gravity vector 9-6
grayed out Anayze
dialog 9-30
grayed out mesh
dialog 9-30
Greenwich Mean Time 9-
19
ground volume 14-55

groups 2-39, 8-3, 11-8
I-3
Index
feature tree 2-36
Index
harmonic time curve 5-
17
heat flux 11-40

heat flux boundary
condition 5-7
heat transfer 14-8, 14-64
conduction 14-8
forced convection 14-18
gravity 9-6
mixed convection 14-19
natural convection 9-6,
14-9
off 9-4
on 9-4
radiation 9-6
Height of Fluid 5-24, 1431
help 2-27
Herschel-Buckley 7-14
high speed jets 14-3
Highlight Edges Slider 612
Highlight Surfaces
slider 6-7
HTML report 10-20
humidity 9-16, 14-34, 14-
35
humidity boundary
condition 5-7
I-DEAS 3-40, 12-5

Ideas universal 4-3
IGES 1-2, 3-1
implicit method 9-24
import material
database 2-24
include in report 10-23
included fluid
materials 7-4
included solid
materials 7-19
incompressible flow 9-2
external 14-5
internal 14-2
industrial fans 7-57

infinite strain viscosity 7-
I-4
15
Information 9-31
initial angular velocity 8-
28
initial conditions 5-23, 14-
29
Initial Conditions
dialog 2-47
initial nutation
velocity 8-63
initial position 8-8, 8-23,
8-36, 8-39, 8-58, 8-68
initial velocity 8-12, 8-78
inlet boundary
conditions 5-19
external fan 5-19

mass flow rate 5-19
pressure 5-19
scalar 5-19
temperature 5-19
total pressure 5-19
total temperature 5-19
velocity 5-19
volumetric flow rate 5-19
inlets/outlets 6-44, 10-11
inner iterations 9-24, 1429
Intelligent Solution
Control 9-32, 14-30
Intelligent Solver
Selection 9-37
interface computer 9-29
interferences in CATIA 3-
32
interferences in
Wildfire 3-15
internal fan creation 7-55
internal fan curve
constant flow rate 7-56

pressure-head curve 756, 7-57
internal fan rotational

speed 7-59, 7-64
internal fans 6-21, 7-51,
14-4
internal flow 14-2

interval save table 9-27
Inventor 1-7, 2-31, 3-2, 326, 7-34
inverse polynomial property variation 7-17

inverse polynomial time
curve 5-18
iso surface 11-38
Iterations to Run 9-30
Iterations/Time
Steps 11-10
Joule heating 14-68

junction 7-74
k-epsilon turbulence
model 9-13
known rotational
speed 7-71
Knudsen number 14-4
laminar 9-13
latitude 9-19
Launcher
Configuration 1-15,
3-17
launching 1-7
layers 6-30, 6-49
layers of surface parts 7-
31
legend levels 11-11

license status 2-29
linear displacement 14-
91
linear motion 8-6, 14-71

linear springs 8-15
linear velocity 14-91
linked motion 8-3
Location 8-78
Lock on 9-15
longitude 9-19
Loose convergence 9-36
lost settings 13-7
low pressure limit 14-4
Low Reynolds
turbulence 9-13, 14-3
Index
mass flow rate boundary condition 5-5

massed particle
traces 11-29
material appearance 11-
material assignment 7-4

material colors 7-96
material creation 7-4, 7-
19
material database 2-16,
2-24
Material Rules 2-20, 3-5

materials database 7-2
Materials dialog 2-48, 7-4
materials from CAD 2-21,
3-4
materials task dialog
centrifugal pump 7-59

check valves 7-65
internal fan/pump 7-52
resistance 7-36
rotating regions 7-67
Max Size 6-12
Mechanica 3-21, 12-4
menus 2-53
mesh density 14-2
Mesh Enhancement 6-47
boundary mesh
adaptation 6-50
mesh generation 1-3, 650, 9-30
mesh import 3-40
mesh inspection 9-31
mesh refinement 6-21, 643, 14-2
mesh seeds 6-16, 6-46
Mesh Size dialog 2-48
mesh size estimate 6-45
Minimum Refinement
Length 4-7, 6-8
mirror icon 11-5
mirrored symmetry 14-
44
mixed convection 14-19

mixing length 9-14
mixture fraction 14-35
model change 13-5
model image 10-25
model notes 10-15
model orientation 3-7
moist gas 9-16, 14-34
moment 11-40
monitor points 10-5
Monotone streamline
upwind 9-39
Moody formula 14-22
morphing 11-21
morphing limitations 11-
22
Motion 9-34, 14-1

Motion dialog 2-49
motion groups 8-3
Motion Module 1-3, 1-6, 644, 6-45, 7-67, 8-1, 14-
70
motion output file 14-91

motion output table 14-
91
motion path 6-21

motion with extrusion 6-
26
motion with radiation 14-
46
mouse modes 2-31

mouse navigation 3-3
moving a note 10-15
moving solids 6-45, 1471, 14-81
multiple fluids 14-23
multiple views 2-6, 11-6
Nastran 3-40, 4-3, 12-3

natural convection 14-9
navigation 2-31
near wall
temperatures 11-41
new analysis 1-8
New icon 13-2, 13-4
nodal field data 2-14
node 6-1
non-conformal
meshing 6-26, 14-40
non-impulsive
startup 14-79
non-Newtonian property
variation 7-13
non-planar cut
surfaces 11-19
notes file 2-23
number of blades 9-23,
14-78
nutation 8-53, 14-72

nutation tilt axis 8-55
opaque 14-41
open analysis 1-10
Open Project 13-14
optional parameters 2-56
orange surfaces 6-5
orbital 8-46
order of analyses 13-7
order of appearance 8-4
oscillating motion 8-25
outlet boundary
conditions 5-20
external fan 5-20

pressure 5-20
unknown 5-20
velocity 5-20
I-5
Index
mesh size
fundamentals 6-41
mesh size reduction 7-25
mesh-independent
solution 6-42
meshing errors 6-51
meshing moving
objects 14-82
meshing refinement
inlets/outlets 6-44
moving solds 6-45
porous media 6-44
rotating regions 6-44
solid boundaries 6-43
sudden discontinuity 644
thermal boundaries 6-44
meshing strategy 6-42
Message window 2-8
MicroSoft PowerPoint 1146
migration 1-14
min and max 8-8, 8-23, 837, 8-39, 8-59
Index
volumetric flow rate 5-20
outlet configuration 14-2

outlet location 5-20
outlets 3-11
outlets at corners 14-3
Outline image icon 11-2
output bar 2-8
parallel computing 15-7

parameter limits 7-92
parametric changes 3-1
Parasolid 1-8, 3-26, 9-31
Parasolid part names 3-
30
part appearance 2-38

part blanking 11-8
part colors 3-7
part suppression 6-3
particle trace 11-25
particle traces with
mass 11-29
Patankar 1-3
PCB material 7-76
PCB thickness 7-83
Peel Surface icon 11-3
percent metal 7-84
perforated plates 7-40
periodic boundary
condition 5-10, 14-24
periodic symmetry 14-46
periodic time curve 5-16
permeability 7-47, 7-51,
14-21
Petrov-Galerkin 9-39
piece-wise linear property variation 7-18
piecewise linear time
curve 5-18
planar cut surfaces 11-16
planes 7-84
planetary motion 8-46
Play Macro button 6-19
PLM/PDM 3-1
polynomial property
variation 7-17
polynomial time curve 5-
18
pop-outs 2-53
I-6
porous media 6-44, 7-35,
14-20
power law exponent 7-13

power law index 7-15
power law property
variation 7-10
power law time curve 5-
17
PowerPoint 11-46
Prandtl number 14-9
preferences 2-15
pressure control 9-38
pressure direction 12-2
pressure drop in a
pipe 14-3
pressure flow-rate
curve 7-49
pressure result 11-40, 12-
pressure waves 14-31

pressure-flow rate
curve 14-23
pressure-head curve 756, 7-57
preview motion 8-3
printed circuit board 7-79
Pro/Engineer 1-7
Pro/Mechanica 12-4
probe
cut surface 11-13

surfaces 11-9
problematic surfaces 6-4

project 1-10, 13-2
settings 3-39
project bulk data 11-34

Project menu 2-26
project report 10-30
project results 13-8
projects 4-19
property table 2-52
property variations
Arrhenius 7-12
Carreau 7-15
constant 7-10
equation of state 7-11
first order polynomial 715
Herschel-Buckley 7-14
inverse polynomial 7-17
non-Newtonian 7-13
piece-wise linear 7-18
polynomial 7-17
power law 7-10
second order
polynomial 7-16
Sutherland 7-12
pumps 14-71
queue 3-19, 15-6

Quick Forced 9-7
Quick Natural/Free 9-10
radial velocity 7-57

radiation 9-6, 14-39
radiation boundary
condition 5-8
radiation matrix 14-47
ramp step time curve 5-
16
Rayleigh number 14-9

recent analyses 2-15
recent projects 2-15
reciprocating motion 810, 8-26, 8-61
reciprocity 14-40
reference frame 14-80
reference pressure 7-18
reference properties 7-
18
reference
temperature 7-18
referenced files 10-22
refinement regions 6-21
reflection 5-12, 14-45
reflectivity 14-41
re-initialize 5-24
relative velocity 14-80
relaxation values 9-32
remove analysis from
DRC 13-11
renaming entities 2-38
repeating (piecewise
linear) 5-18
report generation 11-44
report settings 2-16
Index
report template 10-21

reports 10-20
Reset to Local 13-14
Residence Time scalar
quantity 14-31
residuals 10-4
resistance 7-24
resistance directions 7-
36
resistance heating 5-10

resistance material
creation 7-45
resistance methods
constant loss
coefficient 7-46, 1420
Darcy Equation 7-51, 1423
free area ratio 7-48, 1422
friction factor 7-48, 1421
pressure-flow rate
curve 7-49, 14-23
resistive force 8-13
resistive nutation
torque 8-64
resistive torque 8-29
resistivity 7-23
Restore Default Max
button 6-12
result quantities 9-40
result scale 11-9
Results dialog 2-51
results display on
groups 11-8
results interpolation 12-1
results output interval 9-
25
14
44
rotational velocity
boundary
condition 5-3
runtime monitor
points 10-6, 10-7
Simulation Speed 1-4

size adjustment 6-16
sky temperature 14-56,
14-58
sliding vane 8-65, 14-72

slip boundary
condition 5-6
slip factor 7-59
sliver surfaces 6-4
Small Object
(Removal) 2-46, 4-6
solar heat flux 14-55, 14-
59
save intervals 9-25

Save Server
Assignments 13-14
saving a note 10-16
scalar boundary
condition 5-7
scalar legend 11-9
scalar quantities 9-12
second order polynomial
property variation 7-
16
Seebeck Coefficient 7-91

selection 2-33
Selection Basis 2-34
sensing location 7-54
server 15-1
server manager 15-2, 15-
Server Monitor 15-5

server.cfg file 13-13, 15-5
servman.exe 15-2
Setting Rules 3-5
settings file 10-13, 10-20
Settings Rules 2-19
settings transfer 13-5
setup parameters 10-25
Shaded image icon 11-2
shadowing 9-18, 14-45,
14-55
shell forces 10-12

shell thickness 7-32
shells 7-24
show lost 3-39, 13-6
Show Mesh icon 11-3
Show Mesh Seeds 2-27
Simulation Scope 1-3
solar heating 5-12, 9-18

solid boundaries 6-43
Solid Edge 1-7, 3-26, 7-34
solid materials 7-19
solid property types 7-22
Solid Works 1-7, 2-31, 3-3,
3-26, 7-34
specific heat 7-7, 7-22
specified direction
movement 11-20
specified pressure
requirement 14-9
specified temperature
requirement 14-9
spectral radiation 7-8, 722, 14-48
Spread Changes
button 6-17, 6-18
springs 8-15, 8-31
Staged Forced
Convection 9-5
stagnation
temperature 9-3
Start/End iteration 10-3
starting and stopping 9-
30
static temperature 9-3

status file 10-8
steady state 9-21, 9-33
steam quality 9-17
steam quality boundary
condition 5-7
steam/water 9-17, 14-35
Step 1-2, 3-1
step save interval 9-26
STL 1-2
stop time 9-23
I-7
Index
results probing 11-9

results save table 9-27
results share file 2-14
Review dialog 2-51
Review_Animation 10-19
Review_Notes 14-91
Review_Results
dialog 10-18
RNG turbulence model 9-
rotating machinery 14-72

rotating regions 6-21, 644, 7-28, 7-67, 8-20, 935, 14-71, 14-88
rotational speed 7-71
rotational symmetry 14-
Index
structured mesh 6-26

submerged objects in
acis/parasolid 3-29
subsonic compressible 9-
subsonic inlet 5-19

sudden discontinuity 6-
44
summary file 10-9, 10-26
energy balance 10-9

inlets/outlets 10-11
summary history file 10-
12
summary output 9-25

supersonic flow 14-61
supersonic inlet 5-19
support 1-16
support file 2-13
suppressed parts 6-3
suppression 4-6
surface blanking 11-3,
11-8
surface diagnostics 6-4

surface features 7-28
surface mesh size 6-45
surface part forces 10-12
surface parts 7-24
Sutherland property
variation 7-12
swirl boundary
condition 5-19
swirl velocity 7-57
symmetry 6-42, 11-5
symmetry with
radiation 14-44
Synchronous
Navigation 2-27
tangencies 6-4
Task Manager 9-29
TEC Device 7-86
TEC Parameter Limits 7-
92
TEC Surface 7-93

technical support 1-16
Tecplot 2-14
temperature
stagnation 9-3
I-8
static 9-3
total 9-3
temperature boundary
condition 5-6
temperature control 9-38
temperature dependent
heat generation 5-14
temperature results 12-2
temperature
statistics 10-11
template for report 1021, 10-29
tetrahedral element 6-1
text lines 10-22
thermal boundaries 6-44
thermal summary 10-26
thermal-only
iterations 9-5
thermoelectric cooler 7-
86
thermostat fans 7-53

theta jb 7-74, 7-77
theta jc 7-74, 7-77
thin resistance 7-40
Tight convergence 9-36
tilt axis 8-55
time save interval 9-26
time step size 9-22, 1477, 14-89
time step size for
solar 14-59
title of a report 10-25
tool buttons 2-2
toolbar 2-2
toolbar visibility 2-12
torque 11-40, 14-91
torsion spring 8-31
total heat flux boundary
condition 5-8
total heat generation
boundary
condition 5-13
Total PCB Thickness 7-83
total temperature 9-3
traces 7-84
transient 9-21, 9-34, 14-29
inner iterations 9-24

time step size 9-22
transient boundary
conditions 5-15, 14-
29
transient loads
harmonic 5-17
inverse polynomial 5-18
periodic 5-16
piecewise linear 5-18
polynomial 5-18
power law 5-17
ramp step 5-16
transient results
transfer 12-6
transmissivity 5-12, 7-22,
14-41
transonic flow 14-61

transparency 14-41
transparent boundary
condition 7-24, 14-43
Transparent icon 11-2
transparent media 5-11,
14-58
triangle element 6-1

trigger temperature 7-54
turb/lam ratio 9-15, 14-3
turbines 14-71
turbomachinery 7-28, 8-
19
turbulence 9-12
auto startup 9-14

extend 9-15
lock on 9-15
intensity 9-15
turb/lam ratio 9-15
turbulence inlet
quantities 5-19
Turbulence models
constant eddy
viscosity 9-14
k-epsilon model 9-13
Low Reynolds model 913
mixing length 9-14
RNG model 9-14
two dimensional geometry
acis/parasolid 3-30
two dimensional
models 7-30
Index
unconstrained motion 8-
73
under-relaxation 9-37
Undo 4-19
Unigraphics 3-26
unit of time 14-29
units 2-6, 2-16, 3-8
universal file 2-14
unknown boundary
condition 5-6
Upfront CFD 1-2
Use Uniform button 6-17,
6-19
user defined nutation 8-
59
user defined orbital 8-49

user defined sliding
vane 8-70
user text entry 10-25
user-created files 10-29
user-defined combo 8-40
user-prescribed
angular 8-24
user-prescribed linear 8-
XY plots 11-34, 13-10
y+ 6-43, 6-50
Z-Clip 11-4
zero strain viscosity 7-15
wake regions 6-18, 6-21

wall output 11-41
wall results 11-39
wall roughness 7-8, 7-9,
7-23
wall turbulence
conditions 5-21
walls 5-20
walls (groups) 2-45
water hammer 9-3, 14-31
water vapor 14-37
Wildfire 2-31, 3-2, 4-3
Window menu 2-26
XY
XY
XY
XY
XY
plot
plot
plot
plot
plot
Index
vapor bubbles 14-38

vapor material 14-36
vapor volume
fraction 14-38
Varying in Time 8-77
vector 11-12
vector clamping 11-13
vector filtering 11-13
vector length 11-13
vector settings 11-12
vector spacing 11-17
velocity 14-91
velocity boundary
condition 5-3
velocity components in
bulk 11-34
velocity profile 7-57
version 2-29
Version 8 radiation
model 14-47
version migration 1-14
view factor 14-39, 14-47

view factor for
motion 14-88
View Lines icon 11-2
view settings file 10-16
viscosity 7-7
viscosity coefficient 7-13
viscous resistance 7-47
visual dominance 8-4
visualization of surface
parts 7-33
Void Fill 2-46, 3-20, 4-9
Voltage boundary
condition 5-10
voltage boundary
condition 14-68
volume blanking 11-8
volume diagnostics 6-3
volume flow rate 11-33
volume flow rate boundary condition 5-4
volume mesh size 6-45
volumetric heat generation boundary
condition 5-13
vorticity 9-41
vtf files 10-20, 11-42
axis label 11-37

color 11-37
points 11-35
quantity 11-36
units 11-37
I-9
Index
I-10

Tutorial of CF Design

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Tutorial of CF Design

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

users guide

Copyright (C) Blue Ridge Numerics, Inc. 1992-2009

Overview of Upfront CFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Basic Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CFdesign File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Migrating from v9 to v10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Basic Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.10 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.11 Mouse Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.12 Entity Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.13 Entity Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.14 Feature Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.16 Task Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.17 Property Table Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.18 Additional Parameters (Flags File) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CFdesign Users Guide

CAD Environment Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

CAD Model Data Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Flow Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Parasolid and Acis Based CAD Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Lost List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

3.10 Third Party Mesh Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Geometry Tools Within the Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

CAD and Model Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Edge Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Small Object Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Void Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

External Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

The Undo Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Portability of Geometry Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4.10 Geometry Tools in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Boundary Conditions Task Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Surface Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Volumetric Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Transient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Physical Boundary Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Graphical Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

CFdesign Users Guide

Fully Automatic Mesh Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic/Interactive Mesh Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.10 Manual Application of Mesh Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.11 Graphical Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12 Mesh Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.13 Generating the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.14 Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Materials and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Materials Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Surface Parts (Shells). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10 Rotating Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.11 Compact Thermal Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.12 Printed Circuit Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CFdesign Users Guide

7.13 Thermoelectric Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86

Linear Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Angular Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Combined Linear/Angular Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

Combined Orbital/Rotational Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

Nutating Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

Sliding Vane Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65

Free Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73

Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20